Re Cso A031.0

YASKAWA
NX100
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
FOR ARC WELDING
Upon receipt of the product and prior to initial operation, read these instructions thoroughly, and retain
for future reference.
MOTOMAN INSTRUCTIONS
MOTOMAN- INSTRUCTIONS
NX100 INSTRUCTIONS
NX100 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
NX100 MAINTENANCE MANUAL
The NX100 operator’s manuals above correspond to specific usage.
Be sure to use the appropriate manual.
YASKAWA MANUAL NO. RE-CSO-A031

MANDATORY
• This manual explains the various components of the NX100 system and
general operations. Read this manual carefully and be sure to under-
stand its contents before handling the NX100.
• General items related to safety are listed in Section 1: Safety of the

NX100 Instructions. To ensure correct and safe operation, carefully
read the NX100 Instruction before reading this manual.
CAUTION
• Some drawings in this manual are shown with the protective covers or
shields removed for clarity. Be sure all covers and shields are replaced
before operating this product.
• The drawings and photos in this manual are representative examples

and differences may exist between them and the delivered product.
• YASKAWA may modify this model without notice when necessary due to
product improvements, modifications, or changes in specifications. If
such modification is made, the manual number will also be revised.
• If your copy of the manual is damaged or lost, contact a YASKAWA rep-

resentative to order a new copy. The representatives are listed on the
back cover. Be sure to tell the representative the manual number listed
on the front cover.
• YASKAWA is not responsible for incidents arising from unauthorized

modification of its products. Unauthorized modification voids your prod-
uct’s warranty.
ii
Notes for Safe Operation
Read this manual carefully before installation, operation, maintenance, or inspection of the
NX100.
In this manual, the Notes for Safe Operation are classified as “WARNING,” “CAUTION,”
“MANDATORY,” or “PROHIBITED.”
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

WARNING avoided, could result in death or serious injury to personnel.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

CAUTION avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury to personnel
and damage to equipment. It may also be used to alert
against unsafe practices.
Always be sure to follow explicitly the items listed under this

MANDATORY heading.
PROHIBITED Must never be performed.
Even items described as “CAUTION” may result in a serious accident in some situations. At
any rate, be sure to follow these important items.
NOTE To ensure safe and efficient operation at all times, be sure to follow all instructions, even if
not designated as “CAUTION” and “WARNING.”
iii
WARNING
• Before operating the manipulator, check that servo power is turned OFF
when the emergency stop buttons on the front door of the NX100 and
programming pendant are pressed.
When the servo power is turned OFF, the SERVO ON LED on the program-
ming pendant is turned OFF.
Injury or damage to machinery may result if the emergency stop circuit cannot stop the
manipulator during an emergency. The manipulator should not be used if the emergency
stop buttons do not function.
Emergency Stop Button
• Once the emergency stop button is released, clear the cell of all items
which could interfere with the operation of the manipulator. Then turn
the servo power ON.
Injury may result from unintentional or unexpected manipulator motion.
TURN
Release of Emergency Stop
• Observe the following precautions when performing teaching operations

within the P-point maximum envelope of the manipulator :
- View the manipulator from the front whenever possible.
- Always follow the predetermined operating procedure.
- Ensure that you have a safe place to retreat in case of emergency.
Improper or unintended manipulator operation may result in injury.
• Confirm that no persons are present in the P-point maximum envelope of

the manipulator and that you are in a safe location before:
- Turning ON the NX100 power
- Moving the manipulator with the programming pendant
- Running the system in the check mode
- Performing automatic operations
Injury may result if anyone enters the P-point maximum envelope of the manipulator dur-
ing operation. Always press an emergency stop button immediately if there are prob-
lems.The emergency stop buttons are located on the right of the front door of the NX100
and the programming pendant.
iv
CAUTION
• Perform the following inspection procedures prior to conducting manip-
ulator teaching. If problems are found, repair them immediately, and be
sure that all other necessary processing has been performed.
-Check for problems in manipulator movement.
-Check for damage to insulation and sheathing of external wires.
• Always return the programming pendant to the hook on the NX100 cabi-
net after use.
The programming pendant can be damaged if it is left in the P-point maximum envelope
of the manipulator, on the floor, or near fixtures.
• Read and understand the Explanation of Warning Labels in the NX100

Instructions before operating the manipulator.
Definition of Terms Used Often in This Manual

The MOTOMAN manipulator is the YASKAWA industrial robot product.
The manipulator usually consists of the controller, the programming pendant, and supply
cables.
In this manual, the equipment is designated as follows.
Equipment Manual Designation
NX100 Controller NX100
NX100 Programming Pendant Programming Pendant
Cable between the manipulator and the controller Manipulator cable
v
Descriptions of the programming pendant keys, buttons, and displays are shown as follows:
Equipment Manual Designation
Programming Character Keys The keys which have characters printed on them are
Pendant denoted with [ ].
ex. [ENTER]
Symbol Keys The keys which have a symbol printed on them are
not denoted with [ ] but depicted with a small picture.
GO BACK
ex. page key PAGE
The cursor key is an exception, and a picture is not

shown.
Axis Keys “Axis Keys” and “Numeric Keys” are generic names
Numeric Keys for the keys for axis operation and number input.
Keys pressed When two keys are to be pressed simultaneously,

simultaneously the keys are shown with a “+” sign between them,
ex. [SHIFT]+[COORD]
Displays The menu displayed in the programming pendant is

denoted with { }.
ex. {JOB}
Description of the Operation Procedure

In the explanation of the operation procedure, the expression "Select • • • " means that the
cursor is moved to the object item and the SELECT key is pressed, or that the item is directly
selected by touching the screen.
vi
1 Introduction
1.1 NX100 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2 Programming Pendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2.1 Programming Pendant Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
1.2.2 Key Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
Character Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
Axis Keys and Numeric Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
Keys Pressed Simultaneously . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
1.2.3 Programming Pendant Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
1.2.4 Programming Pendant Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10
The Five Display Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10
General-purpose Display Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11
Main Menu Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
Status Display Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
Human Interface Display Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
Menu Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
1.2.5 Screen Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
Denotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
1.2.6 Guidance Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
1.2.7 Character Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17
Alphanumeric Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
Symbol Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
1.3 Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
1.3.1 Teach Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
1.3.2 Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
1.3.3 Remote Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
1.3.4 Teach Mode Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20
1.3.5 Edit Jobs and Active Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20
1.4 About the Security Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
1.4.1 Types of Security Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21
1.4.2 Switching Security Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26
2 Manipulator Coordinate Systems

2.1 Robot Axes and Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.1 Types of Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
2.2 General Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.2.1 Selecting a Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
2.2.2 Selecting Manual Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Selecting with Manual Speed Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Using the High Speed Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
2.2.3 Axis Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Switching the Group Axis to be Operated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
vii
2.3 Joint Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.4 Cartesian Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.5 Cylindrical Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.6 Tool Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.6.1 Axis Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.6.2 Selecting the Tool Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.7 User Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.7.1 User Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.7.2 Examples of User Coordinate Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2.7.3 Selecting a User Coordinate Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.8 Tool Tip Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2.8.1 Motion about TCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2.8.2 TCP Change Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
3 Simplified Teaching and Playback

3.1 Teaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1.1 Preparation for Teaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1.2 Teaching Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Teaching a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Step 1 -- Start Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Step 2 -- Near the Work Start Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Step 3 -- Work Start Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Step 4 -- Work End Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Step 5 -- Position Away from Workpiece and Fixture . . . . . 3-10
Step 6 -- Near the Start Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Ensuring the First and Last Step are Identical . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3.1.3 Path Confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3.1.4 Correcting a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Before Correcting a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Changing the Position Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Adding a Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Deleting a Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Changing the Speed between Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3.2 Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3.2.1 Preparation Before Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3.2.2 Playback Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3.3 Example for Arc Welding Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3.3.1 Example Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3.3.2 Teaching Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Step 2 -- Near Welding Start Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Step 3 -- Welding Start Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Step 4 -- Welding End Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3.3.3 Setting Welding Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Shielding Gas Flow Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
viii
3.3.4 Welding Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25
Welding Execution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25
Adjustments for Welding Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26
3.4 Example for Handling Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
3.4.1 Example Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
3.4.2 Usage of HAND Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
SP (single-solenoid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
2P (double-solenoid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
3P (triple-solenoid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
Instruction and Additional Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
3.4.3 Teaching Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31
Step 2 -- Near Gripping Position (before gripping) . . . . . . .3-31
Step 3 -- Gripping Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31
Step 4 -- Near Gripping Position (after gripping) . . . . . . . . .3-33
Step 6 -- Near Release Position (before releasing). . . . . . .3-34
Step 7 -- Release Assistance Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35
Step 8 -- Release Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
Step 9 -- Near Release Position (after release). . . . . . . . . .3-38
3.4.4 Handling Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39
Handling Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39
3.5 Example for General Purpose Application. . . . . . . . . 3-40
3.5.1 Example Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40
Step 2 -- Near cutting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41
Step 3 -- Cutting Start Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-42
Step 4 -- Cutting End Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43
3.5.3 Cutting Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44
Cutting Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44
3.6 Example for Spot Welding Application . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
3.6.1 Example Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-45
3.6.2 Setting Welding Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-46
Setting Spot Welding Gun Condition Files . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-46
Setting Welding Condition for the Power Source . . . . . . . .3-47
Step 2 -- Near Welding Start Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-47
Step 3 -- Welding Start Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-48
3.6.4 Welding Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-49
Welding Execution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-49
3.7 Example for Painting Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
3.7.1 Example Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-50
3.7.2 Setting Painting Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-51
Step 2 -- Near Painting Start Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-51
Step 3 -- Painting Start Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-52
Step 10 -- Painting End Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-53
3.7.4 Painting Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-54
Painting Execution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-54
ix
4 Teaching
4.1 Preparation for Teaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1.1 Checking Emergency Stop Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1.2 Setting the Teach Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1.3 Registering a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Registering Job Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Registering Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Registering Control Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Switching to the Teaching Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.2 Teaching Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.2.1 The Teaching Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.2.2 Interpolation Type and Play Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Joint Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Linear Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Circular Interpolation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Spline Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.2.3 Teaching Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Registering Move Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Registering Reference Point Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Registering Timer Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
4.2.4 Overlapping the First and Last Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4.3 Checking Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4.3.1 FWD/BWD Key Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Precautions When Using FWD / BWD Operations . . . . . . . 4-20
Selecting Manual Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Moving to Reference Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Test Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4.4 Modifying Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4.4.1 Displaying the JOB CONTENT Window for Editing . . . . . . . . 4-28
Currently Called Up Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Calling Up Other Jobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
4.4.2 Inserting Move Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4.4.3 Deleting Move Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
4.4.4 Modifying Move Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Modifying Position Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Modifying Interpolation Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4.4.5 Undo Operation after Editing a Move Instruction . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
4.4.6 Modifying Reference Point Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Deleting Reference Point Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Modifying Reference Point Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
4.4.7 Modifying Timer Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Deleting Timer Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Modifying Timer Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
4.5 Modifying Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
4.5.1 Calling Up a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
4.5.2 Windows Related to Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
JOB HEADER Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
x
JOB CONTENT Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37
COMMAND POSITION Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38
JOB CAPACITY Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39
4.6 Editing Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
4.6.1 Instruction Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40
4.6.2 Inserting Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-42
4.6.3 Deleting Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-45
4.6.4 Modifying Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-45
4.6.5 Undo Operation after Modifying Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47
4.6.6 Viewing Description for an Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48
4.6.7 Modifying Additional Numeric Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49
4.6.8 Modifying Additional Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-50
4.6.9 Inserting Additional Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-51
4.6.10 Deleting Additional Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-52
4.6.11 Undo Operation after Modifying Additional Items . . . . . . . . .4-53
4.7 Editing Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
4.7.1 Selecting the Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-56
4.7.2 Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-57
4.7.3 Cutting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-57
4.7.4 Pasting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-58
4.7.5 Reverse Pasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-59
4.8 Test Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
4.9 Other Job-editing Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
4.9.1 Editing Play Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-61
Modification of Speed Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-61
Relative Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-61
Modification by TRT (Traverse Time) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-63
4.9.2 Editing Interpolation Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-65
4.9.3 Editing Condition Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-66
4.9.4 Editing User Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-67
Displaying Byte, Integer, Double Precision Integer, and
Real Type Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-69
Setting Byte, Integer, Double Precision Integer, and
Real Type Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-70
Displaying Character Type Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-71
Setting Character Type Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-72
Registering Variable Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-73
Displaying Position Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-74
Setting Position Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-75
Setting Position Variables Using the Numeric Keys . . . . . .4-76
Setting Position Variables Using the Axis Keys . . . . . . . . .4-78
Deleting Data Set of Position Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-79
Checking Positions by Position Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-80
Manipulator Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-81
4.9.5 Editing Local Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-85
Setting the Number of Local Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-87
4.9.6 Searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-88
Line Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-89
Step Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-89
xi
Label Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
Instruction Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
Tag Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
5 Playback
5.1 Preparation for Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Calling a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Registering the Master Job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Calling the Master Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.2 Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.2.1 The PLAYBACK Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Setting Display or Non-display of Cycle Time. . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.2.2 Playback Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Selecting the Start Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Start Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
About the Operation Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.2.3 Special Playback Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Low Speed Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Limited Speed Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Dry-run Speed Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Machine Lock Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Check Mode Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Weaving Prohibit Setting during Check Mode Operation . . 5-12
Cancel All Special Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.3 Stop and Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5.3.1 Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Using the Programming Pendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Using an External Input Signal (System Input) . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5.3.2 Emergency Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5.3.3 Restart After Emergency Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5.3.4 Stop by Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5.3.5 Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Temporary Stop by Mode Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Temporary Stop by the PAUSE Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5.4 Modifying Play Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.4.1 Modifying with Speed Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Setting Speed Overrides. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Modifying Play Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Modifying Speed Override Ratio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Releasing Speed Override Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5.5 Playback with Reserved Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
5.5.1 Preparation for Reserved Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Enabling Reserved Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Registering Reserved Start I/O Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Registering Jobs to Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Deleting Registered Jobs from Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
xii
5.5.2 Playback from Reserved Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Start Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Checking Job Reservation Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Resetting Job Reservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
5.5.3 Hold Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
[HOLD] on the Programming Pendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Hold by External Input Signal (System Input) . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Hold at the Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
5.6 Displaying Job Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
6 Editing Jobs
6.1 Copying Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.1.1 Copying Jobs on the JOB CONTENT Window . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
6.1.2 Copying Jobs on the JOB LIST Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
6.2 Deleting Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6.2.1 Deleting Jobs on the JOB CONTENT Window . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
6.2.2 Deleting Jobs on the JOB LIST Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7
6.3 Modifying Job Names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
6.3.1 Modifying Job Names on the JOB CONTENT Window. . . . . . .6-8
6.3.2 Modifying Job Names on the JOB LIST Window. . . . . . . . . . .6-10
6.4 Editing Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6.5 Setting Edit Lock on Individual Job Units . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6.6 Enabling the Modification of Position Data Only . . . 6-13
7 Convenient Functions
7.1 One-touch Operation “Direct Open” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.2 Parallel Shift Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.2.1 Function Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
7.2.2 Setting the Shift Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5
Registering Position Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5
Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5
Setting the Shift Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6
7.2.3 Registering Shift Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7
SFTON Instruction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-8
SFTOF Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10
MSHIFT Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10
7.2.4 Continuation of the Parallel Shift Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
7.2.5 Examples of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
Example of Use of Shift Addition/Subtraction . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
Example of Use of MSHIFT Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15
xiii
7.3 Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
7.3.1 Function Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Coordinate Systems for Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
7.3.2 Operating Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Specifying the Conversion Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Specifying the Shift Value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Executing Conversion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
7.4 PAM Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Input Ranges for Adjustment Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
7.4.2 Operating Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Setting Adjustment Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Executing the Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Editing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
7.5 Mirror Shift Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
7.5.2 Pulse Mirror-shift Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Parameter Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Object Job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Group Axes Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Position Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
7.5.3 Robot-coordinates Mirror-shift Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Object Job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
7.5.4 User-coordinates Mirror-shift Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Object Job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
7.5.5 Notes on the Mirror Shift Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
7.5.6 Operation Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Calling Up the JOB CONTENT Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Executing the Mirror Shift Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
8 Controlling Peripheral Devices

8.1 External Memory Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1.1 Compact Flash Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Inserting a Compact Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.1.2 File Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Data that can be Saved and Save Destination File Names . 8-4
Saving Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Loading Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Verifying Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Deleting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Job Selection Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
xiv
9 Parameter
9.1 Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.2 Motion Speed Setting Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
S1CxG000: IN-GUARD SAFE OPERATION MAX. SPEED .9-2
S1CxG001: DRY-RUN SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
S1CxG002 to S1CxG009: JOINT SPEED FOR
REGISTRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
S1CxG010 to S1CxG017: LINEAR SPEED FOR
REGISTRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
S1CxG018 to S1CxG025: POSITION ANGLE SPEED. . . . .9-3
S1CxG026 to S1CxG029: JOG OPERATION ABSOLUTE
VALUE SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3
S1CxG030 to S1CxG032: INCHING MOVE AMOUNT . . . . .9-3
S1CxG033 to S1CxG040: POSITIONING ZONE . . . . . . . . .9-3
S1CxG044: LOW-SPEED START . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4
S1CxG045 to S1CxG048: JOG OPERATION LINK SPEED.9-5
S1CxG056: WORK HOME POSITION RETURN SPEED. . .9-5
S1CxG057: SEARCH MAX. SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5
S2C153: POSTURE CONTROL AT CARTESIAN OPERATION
OF JOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5
S2C154: OPERATION IN USER COORDINATE SYSTEM
(WHEN EXTERNAL REFERENCE POINT CONTROL
FUNCTION USED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5
S2C238: CONTROLLED GROUP JOB TEACHING POSITION
CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6
S2C324, S2C325: OPERATION AFTER RESET FROM PATH
DEVIATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6
S2C326: DEVIATED POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
S2C515: EMERGENCY STOP CURSOR ADVANCE
CONTROL FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
S2C516: EMERGENCY STOP CURSOR ADVANCE
CONTROL FUNCTION CONT PROCESS COMPLETION
POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
S2C517: EMERGENCY STOP ADVANCE CONTROL
FUNCTION WORK START INSTRUCTION STEP MOTION
COMPLETION DELAY TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9
S2C560: BASE AXIS OPERATION KEY ALLOCATION
SETTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9
S3C806 to S3C808: POSITION CORRECTING FUNCTION
DURING PLAYBACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9
9.3 Mode Operation Setting Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
S2C147: SECURITY MODE WHEN CONTROL POWER
SUPPLY IS TURNED ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
S2C148: SELECTION OF CARTESIAN/CYLINDRICAL. . .9-10
S2C149: COORDINATE SWITCHING PROHIBITED . . . . .9-10
S2C150: EXECUTION UNITS AT “FORWARD”
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11
S2C151: INSTRUCTION (EXCEPT FOR MOVE) EXECUTION
AT “FORWARD” OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11
xv
S2C155: CHANGING STEP ONLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
S2C156: MANUAL SPEED STORING FOR EACH
COORDINATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
S2C158: ADDITIONAL STEP POSITION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
S2C159: MASTER JOB CHANGING OPERATION . . . . . . 9-12
S2C160: CHECK AND MACHINE-LOCK KEY OPERATION IN
PLAY MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
S2C161: RESERVED WORK JOB CHANGING
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
S2C162: MASTER OR SUBMASTER CALL OPERATION IN
PLAY MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
S2C163: LANGUAGE LEVEL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
S2C166: INSTRUCTION INPUT LEARNING FUNCTION . 9-14
S2C167: ADDRESS SETTING WHEN CONTROL POWER IS
TURNED ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
S2C168: JOB LIST DISPLAY METHOD AT JOB
SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
S2C169: INITIAL OPERATION OF MANIPULATOR . . . . . 9-14
S2C170: PLAYBACK EXECUTION AT CYCLE MODE
“1- STEP”. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
S2C171: EXTERNAL START . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
S2C172: PROGRAMMING PENDANT START . . . . . . . . . 9-15
S2C173: SPEED DATA INPUT FORM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
S2C174: RESERVED START . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
S2C176: JOB SELECTION AT REMOTE FUNCTION (PLAY
MODE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
S2C177: EXTERNAL MODE SWITCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
S2C178: MODE SWITCHING FROM PROGRAMMING
PENDANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
S2C179: EXTERNAL CYCLE SWITCHING . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
S2C180: PROGRAMMING PENDANT CYCLE
SWITCHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
S2C181: SERVO ON FROM EXTERNAL DEVICE
PROHIBITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
S2C182: PROGRAMMING PENDANT OPERATION WHEN
“IO” IS SELECTED FOR REMOTE MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
S2C186: STEP REGISTRATION AT TOOL NO. CHANGE 9-17
S2C211: REMOTE FIRST CYCLE MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
S2C212: LOCAL FIRST CYCLE MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
S2C230: POWER ON FIRST CYCLE MODE. . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
S2C231: TEACH MODE FIRST CYCLE MODE. . . . . . . . . 9-18
S2C232: PLAY MODE FIRST CYCLE MODE . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
S2C234: START CONDITION AFTER ABSOLUTE DATA
ALLOWABLE RANGE ERROR OCCURS. . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
S2C317 to S2C321: TIME RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
S2C333: TOOL NO. SWITCHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
S2C335: POSITION TEACHING BUZZER. . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
S2C336: JOB LINKING DESIGNATION (When Twin
Synchronous Function Used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
9.4 Parameters according to Interference Area . . . . . . . . 9-20
S1CxG200 to S1CxG215: PULSE SOFT LIMIT . . . . . . . . . 9-20
xvi
S2C001: CUBE SOFT LIMIT CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
S2C002: S-AXIS INTERFERENCE CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
S2C003 to S2C050: CUBE/AXIS INTERFERENCE
CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
S2C051 to S2C114: CUBE USING METHOD. . . . . . . . . . .9-24
S2C188 to S2C193: ROBOT INTERFERENCE CHECK . .9-26
S3C000 to S3C023: CUBE SOFT LIMIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
S3C024 to S3C031: S-AXIS INTERFERENCE AREA . . . .9-27
S3C032 to S3C543: CUBIC INTERFERENCE AREA. . . . .9-27
S3C801 to S3C804: ROBOT INTERFERENCE AREA . . . .9-27
S3C805: A SIDE LENGTH OF WORK-HOME-POSITION
CUBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
9.5 Parameters according to Status I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
S2C187: USER OUTPUT RELAY WHEN CONTROL POWER
IS ON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
S4C000 to S4C007: PARITY OF USER INPUT GROUPS .9-28
S4C008 to S4C015: PARITY OF USER OUPUT
GROUPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29
S4C016 to S4C023: DATA OF USER INPUT GROUPS. . .9-30
S4C024 to S4C031: DATA OF USER OUTPUT GROUPS.9-31
S4C032 to S4C039: USER OUTPUT GROUP TO BE
INITIALIZED AT SWITCHING MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32
S4C126: USER OUTPUT NO. WHEN MANIPULATOR DROP
ALLOWABLE RANGE ERROR OCCURS . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32
9.6 Parameters according to Coordinated or Synchronized
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
S2C164: +MOV or +SMOV INSTRUCTION SPEED INPUT. .9-
33
S2C165: +MOV INSTRUCTION INTERPOLATION INPUT 9-33
S2C183: OPERATION METHOD AT FWD/BWD OPERATION
OR TEST RUN BY INDEPENDENT CONTROL. . . . . . . . .9-33
S2C184: JOB AT CALLING MASTER OF SUBTASK 1, 2, 3, 4,
5 BY INDEPENDENT CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34
S2C194: STATION AXIS CURRENT VALUE DISPLAY
FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34
S2C195 to S2C206: STATION AXIS DISPLAYED UNIT . .9-34
S2C322: POSTURE CONTROL OF SYNCHRONIZED
MANIPULATOR (When Twin Synchronous Function
Used). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35
S2C323: POSTURE CONTROL OF MANIPULATOR IN MULTI-
JOB (When Twin Synchronous Function Used) . . . . . . . . .9-35
S2C549: OPERATION OF JOB WITHOUT CONTROL GROUP
SPECIFICATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35
S2C550: EXECUTION OF “BWD” OPERATION. . . . . . . . .9-36
S3C809: MAXIMUM DEVIATION ANGLE OF CURRENT
STATION POSITION (When Twin Synchronous Function
Used). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36
xvii
9.7 Parameters for Other Functions or Applications . . . 9-37
S1CxG049 to S1CxG051: YAG LASER SMALL CIRCLE
CUTTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
CUTTING DIRECTION LIMIT VALUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
CUTTING OVERLAP VALUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
S1CxG063, S1CxG064: PATTERN CUTTING
DIMENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
S1CxG065: MIRROR SHIFT SIGN INVERSION . . . . . . . . 9-37
S2C332: RELATIVE JOB OPERATION METHOD. . . . . . . 9-38
S3C819 to S3C898: ANALOG OUTPUT FILTER CONSTANT
(When analog output corresponding to speed function
is used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
S3C899: CUT WIDTH CORRECTION VALUE (When form
cutting function is used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
9.8 Hardware Control Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
S2C646: COOLING FAN ALARM DETECTION. . . . . . . . . 9-38
S4C181 to S4C212: SETTING OF OPERATING RELAY
NO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
S4C213 to S4C244: OPERATING METHOD OF RELAYS 9-39
S2C647 to S2C649: COOLING FAN ALARM
1 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
2 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
3 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
9.9 TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
RS000: COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
9.9.1 Basic Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
RS030: NUMBER OF DATA BITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
RS031: NUMBER OF STOP BITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
RS032: PARITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
RS033: TRANSMISSION SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
RS034: RESPONSE WAITING TIMER (TIMER A) . . . . . . 9-40
RS035: TEXT TERMINATION MONITORING TIMER
(TIMER B). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
RS036: NUMBER OF ENQ RE-TRANSMISSION
RETRIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
RS037: NUMBER OF DATA RE-TRANSMISSION
RETRIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
RS038: BLOCK CHECK METHOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
9.9.2 FC1 Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
RS050: NUMBER OF DATA BITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
RS051: NUMBER OF STOP BITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
RS052: PARITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
RS053: TRANSMISSION SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
RS054: RESPONSE WAITING TIMER (TIMER A) . . . . . . 9-41
RS055: TEXT TERMINATION MONITORING TIMER
(TIMER B). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
xviii
RS056: NUMBER OF ENQ RE-TRANSMISSION
RETRIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41
RS057: NUMBER OF DATA RE-TRANSMISSION
RETRIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41
RS058: FC2 FORMAT SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42
RS059: EXTERNAL MEMORY FILE OVERWRITE
SPECIFICATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42
9.10 Application Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
9.10.1 Arc Welding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42
AxP000: APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42
AxP003: WELDING ASSIGNMENT OF WELDING START
CONDITION FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42
AxP004: WELDING ASSIGNMENT OF WELDING END
CONDITION FILES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42
AxP005: WELDING SPEED PRIORITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43
AxP009: WORK CONTINUING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43
AxP010: WELDING INSTRUCTION OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . .9-43
AxP011, AxP012: MANUAL WIRE OPERATION SPEED. .9-43
AxP013, AxP014: WELDING CONTROL TIME . . . . . . . . .9-43
AxP015 to AxP017: NUMBER OF WELDING CONTROL .9-43
AxP026 to AxP029: TOOL ON/OFF USER OUTPUT NO.
(Jigless system). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43
9.10.2 Handling Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43
AxP002, AxP004: f1 KEY FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43
AxP003, AxP005: f2 KEY FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43
9.10.3 Spot Welding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44
AxP003: MAXIMUM NUMBERS OF CONNECTED POWER
SOURCES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44
AxP004: GUN FULL OPEN STROKE ON/OFF SIGNAL . .9-44
AxP005: STROKE CHANGE ANSWER TIME LIMIT . . . . .9-44
AxP006: PARITY SPECIFICATION FOR WELDING
CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44
AxP007: ANTICIPATE TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44
AxP015: WELDING ERROR RESET OUTPUT TIME. . . . .9-44
AxP016, AxP017: ELECTRODE WEAR AMOUNT ALARM
VALUE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-45
9.10.4 General-purpose Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-45
AxP009: WORK CONTINUE PROHIBIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-45
10 System Setup
10.1 Home Position Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10.1.1 Home Position Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
10.1.2 Calibrating Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Registering All Axes at One Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Registering Individual Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-4
Changing the Absolute Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-5
Clearing Absolute Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6
10.1.3 Home Position of the Robot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
xix
10.2 Second Home Position (Check Point) . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
10.2.1 Purpose of Position Check Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
10.2.2 Setting the Second Home Position (Check Point) . . . . . . . 10-12
10.2.3 Procedure After an Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
10.3 Setting the Controller Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
10.4 Setting Play Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
10.5 All Limits Releasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
10.6 Overrun / Tool Shock Sensor Releasing . . . . . . . . 10-18
10.7 Interference Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
10.7.1 Interference Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
10.7.2 Cubic Interference Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Cubic Interference Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Cube Setting Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Setting Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
10.7.3 Axis Interference Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Axis Interference Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Setting Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
10.7.4 Clearing Interference Area Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
10.8 Work Home Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
10.8.1 What is the Work Home Position? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
10.8.2 Setting Work Home Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Work Home Position Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Registering/Changing the Work Home Position . . . . . . . . 10-32
Returning to the Work Home Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Output of the Work Home Position Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
10.9 Tool Data Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
10.9.1 Registering Tool Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Number of Tool Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Registering Coordinate Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Registering Tool Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Setting the Tool Load Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
10.9.2 Tool Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Tool Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Teaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Clearing Calibration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Checking the TCP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
10.9.3 Automatic Measurement of the Tool Load and the Center of
Gravity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
What is the Automatic Measurement of the Tool Load and the
Center of Gravity? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Measurement of the Tool Load and the Center of Gravity 10-44
10.10 User Coordinates Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
10.10.1 User Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Definition of User Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
User Coordinates File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
10.10.2 User Coordinates Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Selecting User Coordinates File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
xx
Teaching User Coordinates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-50
Clearing User Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-52
10.11 ARM Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
10.11.1 ARM Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-53
10.11.2 ARM CONTROL Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-53
Robot Setup Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-54
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-57
10.11.3 Tool Load Information Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-58
Tool Load Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-58
How to Calculate Tool Load Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-58
Tool load Information registering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-65
10.12 Shock Detection Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67
10.12.1 Shock Detection Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-67
10.12.2 Shock Detection Function Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-67
Shock Detection Level Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-67
Tool load Information Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-70
Instruction of Shock Detection Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-72
Reset Shock detected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-77
10.13 Instruction Level Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
10.13.1 Setting Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-78
Instruction Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-78
Learning Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-79
10.13.2 Setting Instruction Set Level Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-80
10.14 Numeric Key Customize Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81
10.14.1 What is the Numeric Key Customize Function? . . . . . . . .10-81
10.14.2 Allocatable Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-81
Key Allocation (EACH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-81
Key Allocation (SIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-82
10.14.3 Allocating an Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-83
Allocation Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-83
Instruction Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-84
Job Call Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-86
Window Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-87
Alternate Output Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-88
Momentary Output Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-89
Pulse Output Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-89
Group (4-bit/8-bit) Output Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-90
Analog Output Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-91
Analog Incremental Output Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-92
10.14.4 Allocation of I/O Control Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-93
10.14.5 Execution of Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-95
Executing the Instruction/Output Control Allocation . . . . .10-95
Executing the Job Call Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-95
Executing the Window Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-95
Executing the I/O Control Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-95
10.15 Changing the Output Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96
10.16 Temporary Release of Soft Limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-98
xxi
10.17 Changing the Parameter Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-99
10.18 File Initialize. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-101
10.18.1 Initialize Job File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-101
10.18.2 Initialize Data File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-102
10.18.3 Initialize Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-103
10.18.4 Initializing I/O Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-104
10.18.5 Initializing System Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-105
11 Arc Welding Application

11.1 Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
11.2 General Descriptions of Instructions and Functions . .
11-2
11.2.1 Welding Teaching Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
11.2.2 Functions Used During Teaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
11.2.3 Functions Used During Automatic Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
11.2.4 Other Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
11.3 Function Outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
11.3.1 Wire Inching Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
11.3.2 Gas Flow Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
11.3.3 Arc Retry Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
11.3.4 Arc Restart Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
11.3.5 Anti-Stick Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
11.3.6 Automatic Wire-stick Release Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
11.3.7 Slope Up/Down Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
11.3.8 Enhanced Welding Condition File Function . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
11.4 Registering Arc Welding Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
11.4.1 ARCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Registering the ARCON Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Setting Welding Start Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
11.4.2 ARCOF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20
Registering the ARCOF Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20
Setting Welding End Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21
11.4.3 ARCSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-29
Registering the ARCSET Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-29
11.4.4 ARCCTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-32
Registering the ARCCTS Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-33
11.4.5 ARCCTE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-36
Registering the ARCCTE Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-37
11.5 Welding Condition Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-40
11.5.1 Welding Condition Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-40
11.5.2 Selecting Welding Condition Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-41
11.5.3 Arc Start Condition File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-43
11.5.4 Arc End Condition File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-44
11.5.5 Arc Auxiliary Condition File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-45
Arc Retry Function Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-45
xxii
Arc Restart Function Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-46
Automatic Wire Anti-stick Function Setting . . . . . . . . . . . .11-47
11.5.6 Enhanced Arc Start Condition File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-48
11.5.7 Enhanced Arc End Condition File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-49
11.5.8 Editing Welding Condition File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-51
Displaying the Welding Condition File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-51
Editing the Arc Start Condition File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-53
Editing the Arc End Condition File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-54
11.5.9 Welding Speed Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-54
11.6 Changing Welding Conditions During Playback. 11-55
11.6.1 Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-55
11.6.2 Changing Welding Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-56
11.6.3 Notes on Modification of Welding Conditions . . . . . . . . . . .11-57
When Condition Data cannot be Modified . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-57
ARCON Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-58
ARCOF Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-58
ARCCTS and ARCCTE Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-59
11.7 Arc Welding Management and Maintenance . . . 11-60
11.7.1 ARC WELD DIAGNOSIS Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-60
11.7.2 Editing the ARC WELD DIAGNOSIS Window . . . . . . . . . .11-61
11.8 Displaying Welding Alarm History. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-62
Alarm History Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-62
11.9 Notes on Arc Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-64
Notes on Restarting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-64
11.10 Weaving Condition File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-65
11.10.1 Weaving Basic Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-65
11.10.2 WEAVING CONDITION Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-66
11.10.3 Editing the Weaving Condition Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-70
Displaying a Weaving File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-70
Editing the Condition Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-71
Cases that Require the Registration of Reference Points .11-72
Prohibiting Weaving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-73
11.10.4 Registering Weaving Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-75
WVON Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-75
WVOF Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-76
11.11 Power Source Condition File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-78
11.11.1 About Power Source Condition File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-78
11.11.2 Specifying Welding Voltage when Synergic Power Supply
is Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-79
11.11.3 POWER SOURCE CONDITION Window. . . . . . . . . . . . .11-81
POWER SOURCE CONDITION Window . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-81
POWER SOURCE CONDITION Window for Current/Voltage
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-82
11.11.4 Editing the Power Source Condition Files . . . . . . . . . . . .11-83
Displaying a Power Source Condition File . . . . . . . . . . . .11-83
Reading a Power Source Condition File . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-83
Editing a Power Source Condition File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-85
xxiii
Editing a Power Source Condition File for Current/Voltage
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-85
Registering the Power Source Condition File Data . . . . . 11-86
11.12 Power Source Condition File Initial Value . . . . . . 11-88
Contents of 24 Welder Condition Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-89
11.13 Table of Work Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-101
12 Table of Basic Instructions

12.1 Move Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
12.2 I/O Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
12.3 Control Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
12.4 Shift Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
12.5 Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
13 Error
13.1 Error Message List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
13.1.1 System and General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
13.1.2 Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
13.1.3 Job Defined Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
13.1.4 External Memory Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
13.1.5 Concurrent I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
13.1.6 Maintenance Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
xxiv
xxv
1.1 NX100 Overview
1 Introduction
1.1 NX100 Overview
The main power switch and the door lock are located on the front of the NX100 controller. The
emergency stop button is installed in the upper right corner of the cabinet door and the pro-
gramming pendant hangs from a hook below the button.
For information on setup, installation, and connection of the NX100 system, refer to the
“NX100 INSTRUCTIONS.”
Main power switch
Door lock
Door lock
NX100 Front View
1-1
1.2 Programming Pendant
1.2.1 Programming Pendant Overview

The programming pendant is equipped with the keys and buttons used to conduct manipulator
teaching operations and to edit jobs.
Start button
Hold button
Mode switch Emergency
stop button
REMOTE TEACH
PLAY START HOLD
Menu area JOB EDIT DISPLAY UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: TEST01 STEP NO: 0003
CONTROL GROUP: R1 TOOL: 00
General-purpose 0000 NOP Insertion slot for
display area 0001 SET B000 0
0002 SET B001 1 Compact Flash
0003 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0004 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0005 DOUT OGH#(13) B002
0006 DOUT OT#(41) ON
0007 MOVL C00002 V=880.0 CV#(1) CTP=0.662
0009 TIMER T=3.0
0010 MOVL V=880.0
0011 MOVL V=880.0
0012 MOVL V=880.0
0013 MOVL V=880.0
Page key
Main Menu ShortCut !Turn on servo power
Cursor key
LAYOUT GO BACK
DIRECT
OPEN
COORD
Multi PAGE AREA
MAIN SHORT
SERVO SELECT Select key
ON !? CANCEL
MENU CUT
READY ASSIST
SERVO ON
X- X+
S- S+ X- X+
HIGH R- R+
SPEED
Y-. Y+
L- L+ Y- Y+
.
FAST
B- B+
Manual speed keys
Z- Z+ MANUAL SPEED
Z- Z+
U- U+ SLOW T- T+
Axis keys
INTER 7 8 9 TEST
SHIFT LOCK START SHIFT
Enable switch
Located on the back of ROBOT INFORM 4 5. 6 BWD FWD
Enable switch (option)
LIST
the programming pendant.
When you lightly squeeze it, EX.AXIS 1 2 3 DELETE INSERT
the power turns ON.
When you firmly squeeze it, BACK MOTION 0 . - MODIFY ENTER
the power turns OFF. SPACE
TYPE Enter key
MOTOMAN
Motion Numeric keys / Function keys
Type key Press to input numbers.
These keys are also used as function keys
to input instructions, etc. Key's function is
automatically switched when function keys
are available.
1-2
1.2.2 Key Description

Character Keys
The keys which have characters printed on them are denoted with [ ]. For example, ENTER
is
shown as [ENTER].
The Numeric keys have additional functions along with their number values. Dual function
keys are used in the context of the operation being performed. For example: 1
TIM ER may be
described in the text as [1] or [TIMER].
Symbol Keys
The keys which have a symbol printed on them are not denoted with [ ] but depicted with a
small picture, with the exception of the cursor key, which is not shown with a picture.
Cursor
Emergency Stop button
DIRECT
OPEN
Direct Open key
GO BACK
PAGE
Page key
Axis Keys and Numeric Keys

The keys pictured in the following are refered to as the axis keys and Numeric keys when
described.
7 8 9
Ｘ- Ｘ+ Ｘ- Ｘ+
Ｓ+ Ｓ+ R- R+
4 5 6
Y- Y+
･
L- L+
Y-
B- ･
Y+
B+
1 2 3
Z- Z+ Z- Z+
U- U+ T- T+
0 ･ -
Axis Keys Numeric Keys
Keys Pressed Simultaneously

When two keys are to be pressed simultaneously, the keys are shown with a “+” sign between
them, such as [SHIFT]+[COORD].
1-3
1.2.3 Programming Pendant Keys
E.STOP Button Turns OFF the servo power.

When the servo power is turned OFF, the SERVO ON LED on the pro-
graming pendant will extinguish.
An emergency stop message is displayed on the screen.
Enable Switch Turns ON the servo power.

The Enable switch is active only when the SERVO ON LED is blinking, the
safety plug is ON, and the Mode Switch is set to “TEACH.”
When this switch is lightly squeezed, the power turns ON. When firmly
squeezed, the power turns OFF.
Moves the cursor in the direction of the arrow.

The size of the cursor and the range/place where the cursor can move will
vary depending on the window.
If the UP cursor button is pressed when the cursor is on the first line, the
cursor will move to the last line of the job. Conversely, if the cursor is on
the last line of the job and the DOWN cursor button is pressed, the cursor
will jump to the first line of the job.
Cursor • [SHIFT] + UP
Goes back to the previous page.
• [SHIFT] + DOWN
Goes to the next page.
• [SHIFT] + RIGHT
Scrolls the instruction area of the job content or play back display to the
right.
• [SHIFT] + LEFT
Scrolls the instruction area of the job content or playback display to the
left.
[SELECT] Selects menu items such as main menu, pull-down menu,

etc.
SELECT
[MAIN MENU] Displays the main menu.

When pressed while the main menu is displayed, the main menu disap-
MAIN pears.
MENU
1-4
Moves the cursor between “Menu Area” and "General Pur-

pose Display Area."
When [SHIFT] is pressed simultaneously:
• [SHIFT] + [AREA]
[AREA]
The language can be switched when the bilingual function is valid. (Bilin-
gual function is optional.)
AREA • DOWN cursor button + [AREA]
Moves the cursor to the operation button on the screen if displayed.
• UP cursor button + [AREA]
Moves the cursor to the general-purpose display area when the cursor is
on the operation button.
Displays the next page.

[PAGE]
GO BACK
[SHIFT] + [PAGE]
The previous page is displayed.
PAGE
The page can be changed when appears in the status area on the
screen.
Displays the content related to the current line.
To display the content of a CALL job or condition file, move the cursor to
[DIRECT OPEN] the next line and press [DIRECT OPEN]. The file will be displayed for the
selected line. Display content will vary depending on the type of instruc-
DIRECT tion used in the job.
OPEN
Example:
For a CALL instruction, the content of the called job will be displayed.
For a work instruction, the content of the condition file will be displayed.
For Input/output instructions, the input/output condition will be displayed.
Select the operation coordinate system when the manipula-

tor is operated manually.
Five coordinate systems (joint, cartesian, cylindrical, tool and user) can be
[COORD] used. Each time this key is pressed, the coordinate system is switched in
TOOL SEL the following order: "JOINT" "WLD/CYL" "TOOL" "USER"
COORD
The selected coordinate system is displayed on the status display area.
[SHIFT] + [COORD]
The coordinate number can be changed when the "TOOL" or "USER"
coordinate system is selected.
Sets the speed for manual operation.

MANUAL SPEED This speed is also valid for operations with [FWD] and [BWD].
keys There are four speed levels (slow, medium, fast, and inching).
Each time [FAST] is pressed, manual speed changes in the following
FAST
MANUAL SPEED
order: "INCH" " SLOW" "MED" "FST"
SLOW
Each time [SLOW] is pressed, manual speed changes in the following
order: "FST" " MED" "SLOW" "INCH"
The selected speed is displayed on the status area.
Changes the speed of axis operation when the axis button

[HIGH SPEED] is pressed.
HIGH The speed of the manipulator will change to high regardless of the pro-
SPEED
grammed speed while this key is pressed.
The speed for [HIGH SPEED] is specified in advance.
1-5
Selects the interpolation type for playback operation.

The selected interpolation type is shown in the status display area on the
screen.
Each time this key is pressed, the interpolation type changes in the follow-
[MOTION TYPE] ing order:
"MOVJ" " MOVL" "MOVC" "MOVS"
MOTION
TYPE [SHIFT] + [MOTION TYPE]
The interpolation mode changes in the following order:
"STANDARD" " EXTERNAL REFERENCE POINT"* " CONVEYOR"*
Interpolation type can be changed in any mode.
*: These modes are purchased options.
[ROBOT] Enables the robot axis operation.
[ROBOT] is active for the system where multiple manipulators are con-
ROBOT trolled by one NX100 or the system with external axes.
[EX.AXIS] Enables the external axis (base axis or station axis) opera-
tion.
EX.AXIS [EX.AXIS] is active for the system with external axes.
Moves specified axes on manipulator.

The manipulator axes only move while the key is held down.
Axis Key Multiple axes can be operated simultaneously by pressing two or more
keys at the same time.
The manipulator operates in the selected coordinate system at the

selected manual speed. Make sure that the selected coordinate system
and the manual speed are the desired ones before starting the axis opera-
tion.
Moves the manipulator through taught steps in a continuous

motion when [TEST START] and [INTERLOCK] are simulta-
neously pressed.
[TEST START] The manipulator can be moved to check the path of taught steps.
The manipulator operates according to the currently selected operation
TEST
START cycle: "AUTO," "1CYCLE," or "STEP."
The manipulator operates at the taught speed. However, if the taught
speed exceeds the maximum teaching speed, the operation proceeds at
the maximum teaching speed.
Operation stops immediately when this key is released.
1-6
Moves the manipulator through the taught steps while this

key is pressed.
Only move instructions are executed (one instruction at a time, no welding
instructions).
[FWD] [INTERLOCK] + [FWD]

All instructions except move instructions are executed.
FWD [SHIFT] + [FWD]

Move instructions are executed in succession.
As for the operation of pressing [REFP] simultaneously, see the descrip-

tion of “ Moving to Reference Point” (page 4-22).
The manipulator operates at the selected manual speed. Make sure that
the selected manual speed is the desired one before starting operation.
[BWD] Moves the manipulator through the taught steps in the

reverse direction while this key is pressed.
Only move instructions are executed (no weld commands).
BWD
[INFORM LIST] Displays instruction lists of commands available for job

editing.
INFORM
LIST
[CANCEL] Cancels data input and resets errors.
CANCEL
[DELETE] Deletes registered instructions and data.

Deletion completes when [ENTER] is pressed while this key lamp is lit.
DELETE
[INSERT] Inserts new instructions or data.

Insertion completes when [ENTER] is pressed while this key lamp is lit.
INSERT
[MODIFY] Modifies taught position data, instructions, and data.

Modification completes when [ENTER] is pressed while this key lamp is lit.
MODIFY
[ENTER] Registers instructions, data, current position of the manipu-

lator, etc.
When [ENTER] is pressed, the instruction or data displayed in the input
ENTER
buffer line moves to the cursor position to complete a registration, inser-
tion, or modification.
1-7
[SHIFT] Changes the functions of other keys by pressing together.

Can be used with [MAIN MENU], [COORD], [MOTION TYPE], cursor key,
GO BACK
SHIFT Numeric key, page key PAGE to access alternate functions.

Refer to the description of each key for the alternate [SHIFT] functions.
[INTERLOCK] Changes the functions of other keys by pressing together.

Can be used with [TEST START], [FWD], Numeric key (Numeric key cus-
INTER tomize function).
LOCK Refer to the description of each key for the alternate [INTERLOCK] func-
tions.
Numeric Key Enters the number or symbol when the ">" prompt appears
on the input line.
7 8 9
4 5 6
“.” is the decimal point. “-” is a minus sign or hyphen.
1 2 3 The Numeric keys are also used as function keys. Refer to the explana-
0 ･ - tion of each function for details.
[START] Starts the manipulator motion in playback operation.

The lamp on this button is lit during the playback operation.
The lamp also lights when the playback operation is started by the system
input START signal.
START The lamp turns OFF when the playback operation is stopped by alarm
occurrence, HOLD signal, or mode change.
Holds the manipulator motion.

This button is enabled in any mode.
The lamp on this button is lit only while the button is being pressed.
Although the lamp turns OFF when the button is released, the manipulator
[HOLD] stays stopped until a START command is input.
The HOLD lamp automatically lights in the following cases to indicate that
the system is in HOLD status. The start and axis operations are disabled
while the lamp is lit.
HOLD • The HOLD signal of system input is ON.
• The HOLD request is being sent from an external device in remote mode.
• In HOLD status caused by an error occurred in working process such as
wire sticking at arc welding
Selects the Play mode, Teach mode, or Remote mode.

PLAY: Play Mode
The playback of taught job is enabled.
Mode Switch The START signal from an external device is disabled.
TEACH: Teach Mode

The axis operation and edition from the programming pendant are
REMOTE
PLAY
TEACH
enabled.
The START signal from an external device is disabled.
REMOTE: Remote Mode

The operation by external signals is enabled.
[START] is invalid during the remote mode.
1-8
Displays the main menu.

[MAIN MENU] If this button is pressed while the main menu is displayed, the main menu
disappears.
MAIN
MENU [SHIFT] + [MAIN MENU]
While a window opens, the window is switched in the following order:
Whindow → Sub-menu → Main menu
Displays multiple windows.

This function is for future use. (Cannot be used with the NX100 of the
[Multi] current version.)
LAYOUT
Up to four windows can be displayed at the same time.
Multi
[SHIFT] + [Multi]
The dialog box to select the display form for Multi-windows Display
appears.
Displays the shortcut selection dialog box.

[SHORTCUT] This function is for future use. (Cannot be used with the NX100 of the
current version.)
SHORT
CUT Those windows opened frequently can be registered. Once the window is
registered in the shortcut selection dialog box, it can be displayed by one-
touch operation.
Enables the servo power supply to be turned ON.

Press this button to enable the servo power supply to be turned ON if the
servo power supply is shut OFF by the emergency stop or overrun signal.
[SERVO ON READY]
When this button is pressed:
SERVO • In the play mode, the servo power supply is turned ON if the safeguard-
ON
READY ing is securely closed.
• In the teach mode, the SERVO ON lamp flashes and the servo power
supply is turned ON when the Enable switch is ON.
• The SERVO ON lamp is lit while the servo power is ON.
Displays the menu to assist the operation for the cur-

rently displayed window.
This function is for future use. (Cannot be used with the NX100 of the
current version.)
Pressing this button when the cursor is on the job editing window displays
[ASSIST] the job editing menu commands such as COPY, CUT, PASTE, UNDO, and
ADD.
!? Pressing this button when the file-editing window is displayed displays the
ASSIST help guidance for the operation.
• [SHIFT] +[ASSIST]
The function list of key combinations with [SHIFT] appears.
• [INTERLOCK] + [ASSIST]
The function list of key combinations with [INTERLOCK] appears.
[BACK SPACE] Deletes the last character while typing characters.
BACK
SPACE
1-9
1.2.4 Programming Pendant Display

The Five Display Areas
The programming pendant display is a 6.5 inch color display. Alphanumeric characters can
be used.
The general display area, menu area, human interface display area, and main menu area
among the following five areas can be moved by pressing [AREA], or can be selected by
directly touching the screen.
Menu area Status display area
JOB EDIT DISPLAY UTILITY
JOB
DOUT
FD/PC CARD POSITION DIAGNOSIS 3 Main menu area
MOVE
END CF CURR POS (PLS) CURR POS (XYZ) SEG. PULSE
S 0 X 0.000 S 0
SPOT WELDING PARAMETER
L 0 Y 0.000 L 0
U 0 Z 0.000 U 0
VARIABLE SETUP R 0 Rx 0.00 R 0 General-purpose
B001 B 0 Ry 0.00 B 0 display area
T 0 Rz 0.00 T 0
IN/OUT
7 0 7 0
In Out 8 0 8 0
ROBOT
AXIS 0000_0000 TYPE 0000_0000 TOOL 0
F/B PULSE MOTOR POS REST
S 0 S 0 1 0 Operation buttons
SYSTEM INFO
Human interface
display area
Main Menu ShortCut ! Turn on servo power
Each window displayed during operations is provided with its name on the upper left of the
general display area.
JOB CONTENT
0000 NOP
0001 SET B000 0
0002 SET B001 1
0003 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0004 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0005 DOUT OGH#(13) B002
0007 MOVL C00002 V=880.0 CV#(1) CTP=0.662
0009 TIMER T=3.0
0010 MOVL V=880.0
0011 MOVL V=880.0
0012 MOVL V=880.0
0013 MOVL V=880.0
1-10
General-purpose Display Area

On the general-purpose display area, various settings and contents such as jobs and charac-
teristics files can be displayed and edited.
The operation buttons are also displayed at the bottom of the window according to the window
contents.
• To move the cursor to the operation button, press [AREA] + DOWN cursor key.
• To move the cursor to the general-purpose display area, press [AREA] + UP cursor key or
press [CANCEL].
• To move the cursor between the operation buttons, use the RIGHT or LEFT cursor key.
• To execute the operation button, move the cursor to the button and press [SELECT].
EXECUTE: Continues operation with the displayed contents.
CANCEL: Cancels the displayed contents and returns to the previous window.
COMPLETE: Completes the setting operation displayed on the general-purpose display

area.
STOP: Stops operation when loading, saving, or verifying with an external mem-
ory device.
RELEASE: Releases the overrun and shock sensor function.
RESET: Resets an alarm. (Cannot reset major alarms.)
DIRECT PAGE: Jumps to the desired page.
• When the page can be switched by specifying the page number, the fol-
lowing input box appears when “DIRECT PAGE” is selected. Directly
type the desired page number and press [ENTER].
JUMP TO:
DIRECT PAGE
• When the page can be switched by selecting an item, the following selec-
tion list appears when “DIRECT PAGE” is selected. Select a desired item
using the UP and DOWN cursor key and press [ENTER].
DIRECT PAGE
1-11
Main Menu Area

Each menu and submenu are displayed in the main menu area. Press [MAIN MENU] or touch
{Main Menu} on the right bottom of the window to display the main menu.
JOB FD/PC CARD
DOUT
MOVE
END CF
SPOT WELDING PARAMETER
VARIABLE SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In Out
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFO
Main Menu ShortCut
Status Display Area

The Status Display area shows controller status. The displayed information will vary depend-
ing on the controller mode (Play/Teach).
cGroup operation axis iPage
dOperation coordinate system hState under execution
eManual speed gOperation cycle
fSecurity mode
Group Operation Axis

Displays the active group axis for systems equipped with station axes or several robot axes.
to : Robot Axes
to : Base Axes
to : Station Axes
Operation Coordinate System

Displays the selected coordinate system. Switched by pressing [COORD].
: Joint Coordinates
: Cartesian Coordinates
: Cylindrical Coordinates
: Tool Coordinates
: User Coordinates
1-12
Manual Speed
Displays the selected speed. For details, refer to " 2.2.2 Selecting Manual Speed. "
: Inching
: Low Speed
: Medium Speed
: High Speed
Security Mode
: Operation Mode
: Edit Mode
: Management Mode
Operation Cycle
Displays the present operation cycle.
: Step
: Cycle
: Continuous
State Under Execution
Displays the present system status (STOP, HOLD, ESTOP, ALARM, or RUN).
: Stop Status
: Hold Status
: Emergency Stop Status
: Alarm Status
: Operating Status
Page
: Displayed when the page can be switched.
1-13
Human Interface Display Area

When two or more error messages are displayed, appears in the human interface display
area.
! Turn on servo power.
To view the list of current errors, activate the human interface display area and press
[SELECT]. To close the error list, press [CANCEL].
Menu Area
The menu area is used to edit a job, manage jobs, and execute various utilities.
DATA EDIT DISPLAY UTILITY
1.2.5 Screen Descriptions

Denotation
The menu displayed in the programming pendant is denoted with { }.
The above menu items are denoted with {DATA}, {EDIT}, {DISPLAY}, AND {UTILITY}.
JOB DOUT
DOUT
MOVE
END
JOB CONTENT
MOVE
END
ARC WELDING SELECT JOB
VARIABLE CREATE NEW JOB
B001
MASTER JOB
IN/OUT
In Out
JOB CAPACITY
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFO
The pull-down menu commands are denoted in the same manner.
1-14
Screen
The window can be displayed according to the view desired.
Full Window View
Upper Window View
Middle Window View
Lower Window View
1-15
1.2.6 Guidance Display

This function is for future use. (Cannot be used with the NX100 of the current version.)
Information to assist the operation can be displayed by the following key operation.
• Press [SHIFT] + [ASSIST] to display the function list of key combinations with [SHIFT].
• Press [INTERLOCK] + [ASSIST] to display the function list of key combinations with
[INTERLOCK].
1.2.7 Character Input

To input characters, display the software keypad on the programming pendant display.
Move the cursor to the data for which characters are to be input, and press [SELECT] to dis-
play the software keypad.
There are three types of software keypads: the alphanumeric keypads each for upper-case
and lower-case characters and the symbol keypad. To switch between the alphanumeric key-
pads and the symbol keypad, touch the button tab on the screen or press [PAGE]. To switch
the alphanumeric keypads between upper-case and lower-case characters, touch “CapsLock
OFF” or “CapsLock ON.”
1-16
Operation
Button on the
Keypad Programming Explanation
Pendant
Moves the cursor (focus).
*1
Selects a character.
*1 SELECT
Clears all the characters being typed.

Pressing this second time cancels the IME (Input
“Cancel” CANCEL
Method Editor).
Deletes the last one character.

“BackSpace” BACK
SPACE
Enters the input characters.

“Enter” ENTER
GO BACK
Switches the keypads displayed on the programming
pendant.
Button Tab
PAGE
Closes the IME window.

MAIN
MENU
“Cancel” or
SHORT
CUT
Enters numbers.
0
“1” to “0” to
*1 Directly touch the desired item on the screen.
1-17
Alphanumeric Input
Number input is performed with the Numeric keys or on the following alphanumeric input win-
dow. Numbers include 0 to 9, the decimal point (.), and the minus sign/hyphen (-).
Note however, that the decimal point cannot be used in job names.
GO BACK
Press the page key PAGE to display the alphanumeric input window. Move the cursor to the desired
letter and press [SELECT] to enter the letter.
For Numbers and Upper-case Characters For Numbers and Lower-case Characters
JOB EDIT DISPLAY UTILITY JOB EDIT DISPLAY UTILITY
[RESULT] [RESULT]
KEYBOARD SYMBOL KEYBOARD SYMBOL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Back 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Back
Space Space
Q W E R T Y U I O P Cancel q w e r t y u i o p Cancel
CapsLock CapsLock
A S D F G H J K L a s d f g h j k l ON
OFF
Z X C V B N M Space Enter z x c v b n m Space Enter
Main Menu ShortCut ! Turn on servo power Main Menu ShortCut ! Turn on servo power
Symbol Input
GO BACK
Press the page key to display the symbol input window.

PAGE
Move the cursor to the desired symbol and press [SELECT] to enter the symbol.
Note that the symbol input window is not available for naming jobs since job names can only
have alphanumeric characters.
[RESULT]
KEYBOARD SYMBOL
− ! % & ' ( ) _ + = Back

Space
" , . / ; < > ? Cancel
$ SP Caps
@ Lock
Enter
SP: Space
1-18
1.3 Modes
1.3 Modes
The following three modes are available for NX100.

• Teach Mode
• Play Mode
• Remote Mode
1.3.1 Teach Mode

In the teach mode, the following can be done.
• Preparation and teaching of a job
• Modification of a registered job
• Setting of various characteristic files and parameters
1.3.2 Play Mode

In the play mode, the following can be done.
• Playback of a taught job
• Setting, modification, or deletion of various condition files
1.3.3 Remote Mode

In the remote mode, the operations such as Servo ON Ready, Start, Cycle Change, Call Mas-
ter Job can be commanded by external input signals.
The operations by external input signals become enabled in the remote mode, while [START]
on the programming pendant becomes disabled.
The data transmission function (optional function) is also available in the remote mode.
The following table shows how each operation is input in each mode.
Teach Mode Play Mode Remote Mode
Servo ON Ready PP PP External input signal
Start Invalid PP External input signal
Cycle Change PP PP External input signal
Call Master Job PP PP External input signal
Note: “PP” indicates the programming pendant.
1-19
1.3 Modes
1.3.4 Teach Mode Priority

For safety reasons, the teach mode always takes priority in mode switching operations. In the
teach mode, operations from external input signals and playback operation using [START] are
disabled.
1.3.5 Edit Jobs and Active Jobs

The NX100 can call a job stored in the memory at any time in order to edit or execute the job.
Jobs to be edited are called “edit jobs.” The name of the edit job is displayed in the status dis-
play area in teach mode. Jobs to be executed are called “active jobs.” The name of the active
job is displayed in the status display area in play mode.
Teach Mode Play Mode
Edit jobs Active jobs
Memory Memory
Switching the modes on the programming pendant does not switch between edit jobs and
active jobs. To execute an edit job in the play mode, switch the mode to the play mode first
and read out the job.
1-20
1.4 About the Security Mode
1.4.1 Types of Security Modes

The following three types of security modes are available.
Any operations in the edit mode and the management mode require a user ID. The user ID
must contain betwen 4 and 8 letters, numbers, or symbols.
• Operation Mode
During the operation mode, the operator can monitor the line operation and start and stop
the manipulator. Repairs, etc. can be performed if any abnormalities are detected.
• Edit Mode
During the edit mode, teaching, robot jog operations, and editing of jobs and various oper-
ation files can be performed in addition to the operations enabled in the operation mode.
• Management Mode
During the management mode, the operator who performs setup and maintenance for the
system can set the machine control parameter, set the time, change the user ID, etc. in
addition to the operations enabled in the edit mode.
1-21
Menu & Security Mode
Security Mode
Main Menu Sub Menu
DISPLAY EDIT
JOB JOB Operation Edit
SELECT JOB Operation Operation
CREATE NEW JOB*1 Edit Edit
MASTER JOB Operation Edit
JOB CAPACITY Operation -
RES. START(JOB)*1 Edit Edit
RES. STATUS*2 Operation -

VARIABLE BYTE Operation Edit
INTEGER Operation Edit
DOUBLE Operation Edit
REAL Operation Edit
STRING Operation Edit
POSITION(ROBOT) Operation Edit
POSITION(BASE) Operation Edit
POSITION(ST) Operation Edit
IN/OUT EXTERNAL INPUT Operation -
EXTERNAL OUTPUT Operation -
USER INPUT Operation -
USER OUTPUT Operation Edit
SYSTEM INPUT Operation -
SYSTEM OUTPUT Operation -
RIN Operation -
CPRIN Operation -
REGISTER Operation -
AUXILIARY RELAY Operation -
CONTROL INPUT Operation -
PSEUDO INPUT SIG Operation Management
NETWORK INPUT Operation -
ANALOG OUTPUT Operation -
SERVO POWER ON STATUS Operation -
LADDER PROGRAM Management Management
I/O ALARM Management Management
I/O MESSAGE Management Management
*1 Displayed in the teach mode only.

*2 Displayed in the play mode only.
1-22
Security Mode
Main Menu Sub Menu
DISPLAY EDIT
ROBOT CURRENT POSITION Operation -
COMMAND POSITION Operation -
SERVO MONITOR Management -
OPE ORIGIN POS Operation Edit
SECOND HOME POS Operation Edit
DROP AMOUNT Management Management
POWER ON/OFF POS Operation -
TOOL Edit Edit
INTERFERENCE Management Management
SHOCK SENS LEVEL Operation Management
USER COORDINATE Edit Edit
HOME POSITION Management Management
MANIPULATOR TYPE Management -
ROBOT CALIB Edit Edit
ANALOG MONITOR Management Management
OVERRUN&S-SENSOR*1 Edit Edit
LIMIT RELEASE*1 Edit Management
ARM CONTROL*1 Management Management

SHIFT VALUE Operation -
SYSTEM INFO MONITORING TIME Operation Management
ALARM HISTORY Operation Management
I/O MSG HISTORY Operation Management
VERSION Operation -
FD/PC CARD LOAD Edit -
SAVE Operation -
VERIFY Operation -
DELETE Operation -
DEVICE Operation Operation
1-23
Security Mode
Main Menu Sub Menu
DISPLAY EDIT
PARAMETER S1CxG Management Management
S2C Management Management
A1P Management Management
RS Management Management
S1E Management Management
SETUP TEACHING COND Edit Edit
OPERATE COND Management Management
DATE/TIME Management Management
GRP COMBINATION Management Management
SET WORD Edit Edit
RESERVE JOB NAME Edit Edit
USER ID Edit Edit
SET SPEED Management Management
KEY ALLOCATION*1 Management Management
RES. START(CNCT) Management Management
ARC WELDING ARC START CONDITION Operation Edit
ARC END CONDITION Operation Edit
ARC AUXILIARY CONDITION Operation Edit
POWER SOURCE CONDITION Operation Edit
ARC WELD DIAGNOSIS Operation Edit
WEAVING Operation Edit
HANDLING HANDLING DIAGNOSIS Operation Edit
SPOT WELDING WELD DIAGNOSIS Operation Edit
I/O ALLOCATION Management Management
GUN CONDITION Management Management
POWER SOURCE CONDITION Management Management
1-24
Security Mode
Main Menu Sub Menu
DISPLAY EDIT
SPOT WELDING WELD DIAGNOSIS Operation Edit
(MOTOR GUN) GUN PRESSURE Edit Edit
PRESSURE Edit Edit
I/O ALLOCATION Management Management
GUN CONDITION Management Management
POWER SOURCE CONDITION Management Management
CLEARANCE SETTING Operation Edit
GENERAL GENERAL DIAGNOSIS Operation Edit
WEAVING Operation Edit
1-25
1.4.2 Switching Security Modes
Operation Explanation
1 Select {SYSTEM INFO} The sub menu appears.

under the main menu.
JOB FD/PC CARD FD/PC CARD

DOUT
MOVE
END CF
ARC WELDING PARAMETER DEVICE FC1

FC2
Compact Flash
SETUP
VARIABLE
B001
MANAGEMENT TIME
IN/OUT
In Out
ALARM HISTORY
ROBOT
I/O MESSAGE HISTORY
SYSTEM INFO
VERSION
Main Menu SECURITY !Turn on servo power
2 Select {SECURITY}. The selection dialog box appears. The security mode can be
selected from operation mode, edit mode or management mode.
JOB FD/PC CARD SECURITY MODE

DOUT
MOVE
END CF
ARC WELDING PARAMETER

SECURITY MODE OPERATION MODE
EDIT MODE
MANAGEMENT MODE
SETUP
VARIABLE
B001
IN/OUT MULTI WINDOW
In Out
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFO
3 Select the desired security When the selected security mode is higher than the currently set
mode. mode, the user ID input status window appears.
4 Input user ID as required. At the factory, the user ID number is preset as follows:
• Edit Mode: [00000000]
• Management Mode: [99999999]
5 Press [ENTER]. The selected security mode’s input ID is checked. If the correct
user ID is input, the security mode is changed.
1-26
2.1 Robot Axes and Coordinate Systems
2 Manipulator Coordinate Systems
Names for Robot System Axes

The external axes of the NX100 are divided into base and station axes. The relative individual
axes of the robot system are divided by their function into robot, base, and station axes.
Robot axis
This is the axis for the
manipulator itself.
Station axis
This is any axis other than the ro-
bot and base axes. It indicates the
Base axis
tilt or rotating axis of the fixture.
This is the axis that moves the entire manipulator.
It corresponds to the servo track.
It controls the path of traveling manipulators.
2-1
2.1.1 Types of Coordinate Systems

The following coordinate systems can be used to operate the manipulator:
• Joint Coordinates
Each axis of the manipulator moves independently.
• Cartesian Coordinates
The manipulator, regardless of its position, moves parallel to any of the X-, Y-, and Z-
axes.
• Cylindrical Coordinates
The θ axis moves around the S-axis. The R-axis moves parallel to the L-axis arm. For
vertical motion, the manipulator moves parallel to the Z-axis.
• Tool Coordinates
The effective direction of the tool mounted in the wrist flange of the manipulator is defined
as the Z-axis. This axis controls the coordinates of the end point of the tool.
• User Coordinates
The manipulator moves parallel to the axes of the user coordinates.
In coordinate systems other than the joint coordinates, it is possible to change only the
wrist orientation at a fixed TCP position. This is called the motion about TCP.
Z-axis Z-axis
Y- a x i s r-axis
θ-axis
X-axis r-axis
Cartesian Coordinates Cylindrical Coordinates
Z- a x i s Y-axis
X- a x i s
X-axis
Y- a x i s
Z- a x i s
Tool Coordinates User Coordinates
2-2
2.2 General Operations
2.2.1 Selecting a Coordinate System

Select a coordinate system using the following procedure:
Press [COORD]. Each time this key is pressed, the coordinate system is switched in the fol-
lowing order:
Check the selection in the status area of the display.
Joint Cartesian(Cylindrical) Tool User
2.2.2 Selecting Manual Speed

Manual speed can be set to fast, medium, slow, or inching. In addition, high speed is also
possible using the [HIGH SPEED]. The manual speed set is also effective for [FWD] / [BWD]
operations in addition to the axis operations.
NOTE When the manipulator is operated with the programming pendant, the highest speed of the
TCP is limited to 250mm/s.
Selecting with Manual Speed Keys

Press [FAST] or [SLOW]. Each time [FAST] or [SLOW] is pressed, manual speed is changed
in the following order. Confirm the speed in the status display area.
• Each time [FAST] is pressed, the manual speed changes in the following order: INCH,
SLOW, MED, and FST.
FAST INCH SLW MED FST

MANUAL SPEED
• Each time [SLOW] is pressed, the manual speed changes in the following order: FST,
MED, SLOW, and INCH.
MANUAL SPEED
SLOW
FST MED SLW INCH
2-3
Using the High Speed Key

Pressing [HIGH SPEED] while the axis keys are being held down makes the manipulator
operate at high speed.
NOTE [HIGH SPEED] has no effect if the manual speed is set to INCH.
2.2.3 Axis Operations

Pressing an axis key in the teach mode makes it possible to move the respective axis of the
manipulator and station to a desired position. The motion of each axis depends on the speci-
fied coordinate system.
The axes move only while the axis key is being pressed.
Switching the Group Axis to be Operated

The coordination robot system (optional function) with two or more axes, switches the group
axis by the following procedure:
When the Job Content is Displayed

When the job content is displayed, the group axes which are registered in the displayed job
will be operated.
<Example>
Case that the group axes registered in the displayed job is R1 + S1
Press [EX. AXIS]. The station number is shown in the status display area and station axis
operation becomes possible.
The station axis operation is shown below:
X + / X − : the first axis
Y + / Y − : the second axis
Z+ / Z − : the third axis
To return to the robot axes from the station axes, press [ROBOT].
When the Job Content is not Displayed

If the edit job does not exist, operate the manipulator or station by the following procedure:
1. Select the group axis as follows:
For manipulators:
Switch the manipulator by pressing [SHIFT] + [ROBOT].
The lamp on [ROBOT] is lit.
For stations:
Switch the station by pressing [SHIFT] + [EX. AXIS].
The lamp on [EX. AXIS] is lit.
2. Perform the axis operation.
When [ROBOT] or [EX. AXIS] is pressed, the selection state of the group axis returns to the
state that no group axis is selected.
2-4
2.3 Joint Coordinates
2.3 Joint Coordinates
When operating in joint coordinates mode, the S, L, U, R, B, and T-axes of the manipulator
move independently. The motion of each axis is described in the table below.
Axis Motion in Joint Coordinates
Axis Name Axis Operation Key Motion

Major S-axis Main unit rotates right and left.
Axes X- X+
S- S+
L-axis Lower arm moves forward and backward.

Y- Y+
L- L+
U-axis Upper arm moves up and down.

Z- Z+
U- U+
Wrist R-axis Wrist rolls right and left.

Axes X- X+
R- R+
B-axis Wrist moves up and down.

Y- Y+
B- B+
T-axis Wrist turns right and left.

Z- Z+
T- T+
• When two or more axis keys are pressed at the same time, the manipulator will perform a
SUPPLE-
MENT
compound movement. However, if two different directional keys for the same axis are
pressed at the same time (such as [S-] + [S+]), none of the axes operate.
• When using a manipulator of 7 axes or 8 axes, the C-axis (7th axis) is moved by pressing
[SHIFT] + [S-] or [SHIFT] + [S+]; the W-axis (8th axis) by pressing [SHIFT] + [L-] or
[SHIFT] + [L+].
U-axis
Z+
U+
R-axis
X+
R+ B-axis
Y+
B+
T-axis
Z- Z+
U- X- T+
L-axis R- Y-
B-
Y-
L- Z-
T-
Y+
L+
S-axis
X- X+
S-
S+
2-5
2.4 Cartesian Coordinates
2.4 Cartesian Coordinates
In the cartesian coordinates, the manipulator moves parallel to the X-, Y-, or Z-axes. The
motion of each axis is described in the following table:
Axis Motion in Cartesian Coordinates

Basic X-axis Moves parallel to X-axis.
Axes X- X+
S- S+
Y-axis Moves parallel to Y-axis.

Y- Y+
L- L+
Z-axis Moves parallel to Z-axis.

Z- Z+
U- U+
Wrist Axes Motion about TCP is executed. See Section " 2.8 Tool Tip Operations. "
When two or more axis keys are pressed at the same time, the manipulator will perform
SUPPLE-
MENT
pressed at the same time (such as [X-] + [X+]), none of the axes operate.
Z-axis
Y- a x i s
X-axis
Z - a xi s
Y-axis
Z+
U+
X- X+
S- S+
Y+
L+
Z-
X-axis U-
Y-
L-
Moves parallel to X- or Y-axis Moves parallel to Z-axis
2-6
2.5 Cylindrical Coordinates
2.5 Cylindrical Coordinates
In the cylindrical coordinates, the manipulator moves as follows. The motion of each axis is
described in the following table.
Axis Motion in Cylindrical Coordinates

Basic θ-axis Main unit rolls around S-axis.
Axes X- X+
S- S+
r-axis Moves perpendicular to Z-axis.

Y- Y+
L- L+
Z-axis Moves parallel to Z-axis.

Z- Z+
U- U+
Wrist Axes Motion about TCP is executed. See " 2.8 Tool Tip Operations. "
SUPPLE-
MENT
pressed at the same time (such as [Z-] + [Z+]), none of the axes operate.
Z-axis
r-axis
θ-axis
r-axis
X+ r-axis
S+
Y+
L+
Y-
L-
r-axis
X- Y- Y+
S- L- L+
Rolls around θ-axis Moves perpendicular to r-axis
2-7
2.6 Tool Coordinates
2.6.1 Axis Motion

In the tool coordinates, the manipulator moves parallel to the X-, Y-, and Z-axes, which are
defined at the tip of the tool. The motion of each axis is shown in the following table:
Axis Motion in Tool Coordinates
Basic X- axis Moves parallel to X-axis.

Axes X- X+
S- S+
Y- axis Moves parallel to Y-axis.

Y- Y+
L- L+
Z- axis Moves parallel to Z-axis.

Z- Z+
U- U+
SUPPLE-
MENT
X-axis
X-axis
Z-axis
Y- a x i s Y- a x i s
Y- a x i s
Z-axis X-axis
Z-axis
The tool coordinates are defined at the tip of the tool, assuming that the effective direction of
the tool mounted on the manipulator wrist flange is the Z-axis. Therefore, the tool coordinates
axis direction moves with the wrist.
In tool coordinates motion, the manipulator can be moved using the effective tool direction as
a reference regardless of the manipulator position or orientation. These motions are best
suited when the manipulator is required to move parallel while maintaining the tool orientation
with the workpieces.
2-8
Z-
U-
Z+
U+
X+
S+
X-
S-
SUPPLE-
For tool coordinates, the tool file should be registered in advance. For further details, refer
MENT to the “NX100 INSTRUCTIONS.”
2-9
2.6.2 Selecting the Tool Number

Tool numbers are used to specify a tool when more than one tool is used on the system.
You may select from registered tool files when you switch tools on the manipulator.
This operation can be performed only when numbers of the tool is more than one.
SUPPLE-
MENT
To use several tool files with one manipulator, set the following parameter.
S2C333: Tool number switch specifying parameter
1: Can be switched
0: Cannot be switched
See “Concurrent I/O” for details.
1 Press [COORD] and set to When [COORD] is pressed, the status area displays JOINT
“TOOL.” XYZ TOOL USER.
JOB CONTENT
2 Press [SHIFT] + [COORD]. The TOOL NO SELECT window appears.
TOOL NO SELECT
NO. NAME
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
3 Select the desired tool num-

ber.
2-10
2.7 User Coordinates

2.7.1 User Coordinates
In the user coordinates, the manipulator moves parallel to each axis of the coordinates which
are set by the user. Up to 24 coordinate types can be registered. Each coordinate has a user
number and is called a user coordinate file. The motion of each axis is described in the follow-
ing table:
The figure and the table below describe the motion of each axis when the axis key is pressed.
Axis Motion in User Coordinates
Axis Name Axis Key Motion

Basic X- axis Moves parallel to X-axis.
Axes X- X+
S- S+
Y- axis Moves parallel to Y-axis.

Y- Y+
L- L+
Z- axis Moves parallel to Z-axis.

Z- Z+
U- U+
SUPPLE-
MENT
Y-axis
X- X+
S- S+
Y+
L+
X-axis
Y- Z-axis
L- Z-axis
Y-axis
Moves parallel to X or Y-axis
Z-axis X-axis
Z+
U+
X-axis Y-axis
Z-
U- Y-axis
Station
Moves parallel to Z-axis
2-11
2.7.2 Examples of User Coordinate Utilization

The user coordinate settings allow easy teaching in various situations. For exapmle:
• When multiple positioners are used,
manual operation can be simplified by setting the user coordinates for each fixture.
User coordinates Fixture
Fixture Fixture
User coordinates
• When performing arranging or stacking operations,

the incremental value for shift can be easily programmed by setting user coordinates on a
pallet.
• When performing conveyor tracking operations,

the moving direction of the conveyor is specified.
Conveyor
2-12
2.7.3 Selecting a User Coordinate Number

Follow these procedures to select the desired coordinate system from among the registered
user coordinates.
1 Press [COORD] and set to When [COORD] is pressed, the status area displays JOINT
“USER.” XYZ TOOL USER.
JOB CONTENT
2 Press [SHIFT] + [COORD]. The USER COORD SELECT window appears.
USER COORD SELECT
NO. NAME
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
SUPPLE-
For more information on registration of the user
MENT coordinates, refer to “NX100 INSTRUCTIONS.”
3 Select the desired user num-

ber.
2-13
2.8 Tool Tip Operations
2.8.1 Motion about TCP

Motion about TCP can only change the wrist orientaion at a fixed TCP position in all coordi-
nate systems except the joint coordinates. The motion of each axis is described in the follow-
ing table.
Axis Motion in Motion about TCP
Axis
Axis Key Motion
Name
Basic TCP moves. These movements differ

Axes X- X+ depending on cartesian, cylindrical,
S- S+
tool and user coordinates.
Y- Y+
L- L+
Z- Z+
U- U+
Wrist Wrist axes move with the TCP fixed.

Axes X- X+ These movements differ depending
R- R+
on cartesian, cylindrical, tool and user
coordinates.
Y- Y+
B- B+
Z- Z+
T- T+
SUPPLE-
MENT
TCP
Torch Welding Gun Spot Welding
2-14
Turning of each wrist axis differs in each coordinate system.
• In cartesian or cylindrical coordinates, wrist axis rotations are based on the X-, Y-, or Z-
axis.
Z-axis
− +
Y- a x i s
−
+
−
+ X-axis
Z-axis
Y- a x i s
X-axis
• In tool coordinates, wrist axis rotations are based on X-, Y-, or Z-axis of the tool coordi-
nates.
X-axis
+
−
−
Z-axis
+
−
+
Y- a x i s
• In user coordinates, wrist axis rotations are based on X-, Y-, or Z-axis of the user coordi-
nates.
Z-axis
− + Y- a x i s
−
−
+ X-axis
+
Z-axis
Y- a x i s
X-axis
2-15
2.8.2 TCP Change Operations

The tool tip position (TCP) is registered in a tool file. The TCP is the target point of axis oper-
ations and it is set as the distance from the flange face. The TCP change operation is an axis
operation that involves selecting the desired tool file from a list of registered files (Refer to "
2.6.2 Selecting the Tool Number "), and then manipulating the axes while changing the TCP.
This can be performed with all coordinates except the joint coordinates. The axis operation is
the same as that of the motion about TCP.
<Example 1>TCP Change Operation with Multiple Tools

The TCPs for Tool 1 and Tool 2 are taken as P1 and P2, respectively. When Tool 1 is selected
to perform axis operation, P1 (Tool 1’s TCP) is the target point of the operation. Tool 2 follows
Tool 1 and is not controlled by axis operation. On the other hand, Tool 2 is selected to perform
axis operation, P2 (Tool 2’s TCP) is the target point of axis operation. In this case, Tool 1 fol-
lows Tool 2.
Tool 1 Tool 2
P1 P2 P1 P2
Workpiece Workpiece
Selection of Tool 1 and axis operations with con- Selection of Tool 2 and axis operations with con-
trolling P1 trolling P2
<Example 2>TCP Change Operation with a Single Tool

The two corners of the workpiece that the tool is holding are taken as TCPs P1 and P2
respectively. By selecting two TCPs alternately, the workpieces can be moved as shown
below:
Workpiece Workpiece
P1
P1 P2
P2
Motion about TCP with P1 selected Motion about TCP with P2 selected
SUPPLE-
MENT
For registration of the tool file, refer to “NX100 INSTRUCTIONS.”
2-16
3.1 Teaching
3 Simplified Teaching and Playback
3.1 Teaching
3.1.1 Preparation for Teaching

Perform the following tasks before starting to teach.
• Set the operation mode to teach mode.

• Enter the job name.
1. Confirm that the mode switch on the programming pendant is

set to “TEACH.” If not, set the switch to “TEACH.”
REMOTE TEACH
PLAY
2. Press [SERVO ON READY].

SERVO
The SERVO ON lamp will blink. If [SERVO ON READY] is not ON
READY
pressed, the servo power supply cannot be turned ON using
the Enable switch.
3. Select {JOB} under the main menu, and select {CREATE

NEW JOB} in the sub menu. MAIN
MENU
JOB DOUT
DOUT
MOVE
END
JOB CONTENT
MOVE
END

SELECT
B001
MASTER JOB
IN/OUT
In Out
JOB CAPACITY
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFO
SELECT
3-1
3.1 Teaching
4. After the NEW JOB CREATE window appears, press

[SELECT]. SELECT
NEW JOB CREATE

JOB NAME : * * * * * * *
COMM. :
GROUP SET : R1
EXECUTE CANCEL
5. After the following window appears, input the job name. The
word “TEST” is used in this example job name.
[RESULT]
KEYBOARD SYMBOL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Back
Space
Q W E R T Y U I O P Cancel
A S D F G H J K L CapsLock
OFF
Z X C V B N M Space Enter
6. Move the cursor to “T” and press [SELECT]. Enter “E,” “S,”
and “T” in the same manner. The characters can also be SELECT
entered by directly touching each character on the screen.

NEW JOB CREATE

JOB NAME : TEST
COMM. :
GROUP SET : R1
EXECUTE CANCEL
3-2
3.1 Teaching
7. Press [ENTER] to register.

ENTER
JOB CONTENT
TEST : STEP NO: 0000
0000 NOP
0001 END
EXECUTE CANCEL
8. Move the cursor to “EXECUTE” and press [SELECT]. The job

“TEST” is registered and the job is displayed. The NOP and SELECT
END instructions are automatically registered.

JOB CONTENT
TEST : STEP NO: 0000
0000 NOP
0001 END
Characters which can be Used for Job Names

SUPPLE-
MENT
Job names can be created from numbers and the alphabetical letters. The input display
can be switched between upper-case characters, lower-case characters, and symbols by
GO BACK
pressing the page key PAGE during the operation 5. Up to 8 characters can be used.
3-3
3.1 Teaching
3.1.2 Teaching Procedure

To playback the manipulator, the instruction to move the manipulator must be written in a job.
This instruction is called a move instruction. The destination position, the interpolation
method, the play speed, etc. are registered in the move instruction.
Main move instructions begin with “MOV” in the INFORM III language used by the NX100.
<Example>
MOVJ VJ=50.00
MOVL V=1122 PL=1
<Example>
Refer to the following JOB CONTENT window. When executing playback, the manipulator
moves to the position of Step 1 with the interpolation type and play speed registered in Step
1’s move instruction. Then, the manipulator moves between Steps 1 and 2 with the interpola-
tion type and play speed registered in Step 2’s move instruction. Then, the manipulator
moves between Steps 2 and 3 with the interpolation type and play speed registered in Step 3’s
move instruction. After the manipulator reaches the position of Step 3, the manipulator then
executes the TIMER instruction followed by the DOUT instruction, and then continues on to
Step 4.
JOB CONTENT
JOB-A STEP NO: 0003
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=50.00 Step 1
0003 MOVL V=1122 Step 3
0004 TIMER T=5.00
Line number
0005 DOUT OT#(1) ON
0006 MOVL V=1122 Step 4
0008 END
Step 3
Step 2 MOVL V=1122
MOVJ VJ=50.00
To Step 4
Step 1
MOVJ VJ=50.00
3-4
3.1 Teaching
Teaching a Job
A job is a work program that describes the tasks that the manipulator will execute. Jobs are
created using a robot programming language called INFORM III.
The following example will instruct you how to teach the manipulator all of the steps from Point
A to Point B of the following workpiece. This job can be completed in 6 steps.
Safety Check
Ensure that there is a safe distance between you and the manipulator.
TEACHING
Register
each step.
Step 1
Step 6
Step 2 Step 5
Step 3 A B Step 4
Overlap
the first step
and last step. Step 1
New Step
Step 6
Step Confirmation INTER TEST

LOCK START
BWD FWD
Actual work is not performed here.
3-5
3.1 Teaching
Step 1 -- Start Position

Always be sure the manipulator is in a safe work area before operation.
Step 1
1. Grip the Enable switch and the servo power will turn ON. The
manipulator can then be operated.
2. Move the manipulator to the desired position using the axis

operation keys. Be sure the position is safe and that the work
area is appropriate for the job to be programmed.
3. Select joint interpolation by pressing [MOTION TYPE]. Joint

instruction “MOVJ...” will be displayed in the input buffer line. MOTION
TYPE
MOVJ VJ=0.78
4. Move the cursor to the line number 0000 and press [SELECT].
SELECT
0000 NOP
0001 END
5. The input buffer line appears. Move the cursor to the right to
VJ=*.**, which shows the speed. While pressing [SHIFT]
simultaneously, move the cursor up and down (to higher

and lower play speeds) until the desired speed is specified.
SHIFT
Set the speed to 50%.
MOVJ VJ= 50.00
6. Press [ENTER]. Step1 (Line 0001) is registered.

ENTER
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0002 END
3-6
3.1 Teaching
Step 2 -- Near the Work Start Position

Define the manipulator work pose.
Step 1
Step 2
1. Move the manipulator to the working position using the axis

operation keys.
2. Press [ENTER]. Step 2 (Line 0002) is registered.

0000 NOP ENTER
0001 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0003 END
3-7
3.1 Teaching
Step 3 -- Work Start Position

Move the manipulator to the work start position with the pose as shown in Step 2.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
1. Change to medium speed by pressing [FAST] or [SLOW] until

FAST
is displayed in the status area. MANUAL SPEED
SLOW
2. Do not release the pose in Step 2. Press [COORD] to select TOOL SEL
the cartesian coordinates. Move the manipulator to the weld- COORD

ing start position using the axis operation keys.
3. With the cursor located on the line number 0002, press

[SELECT]. SELECT

and lower play speeds) until the desired speed is specified. SHIFT
Set the speed to 12.50%.
MOVJ VJ= 12.50

ENTER
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0004 END
3-8
3.1 Teaching
Step 4 -- Work End Position

Specify the work end position.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
1. Move the manipulator to the work end position with the axis
operation keys. While the manipulator is moving, keep a wide
enough distance to ensure it will not strike the workpiece.
There is no need to follow the work line too closely.
2. Press [MOTION TYPE] to select linear interpolation (MOVL).

MOTION
MOVL V=66
TYPE
3. With the cursor located on the line number 0003, press

[SELECT]. SELECT
MOVL V=66
V=*.**, which shows the speed. While pressing [SHIFT] simul-
taneously, move the cursor up and down (to higher and

lower play speeds) until the desired speed is specified. SHIFT
Set the speed to 138 cm/min.
MOVL V= 138

ENTER
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0004 MOVL V=138
0005 END
3-9
3.1 Teaching
Step 5 -- Position Away from Workpiece and Fixture

Move the manipulator to a position where it will not strike the workpiece or fixture.
Step1
Step2
Step5
Step3
Step4
1. Change the speed to high speed by pressing [FAST].

FAST
MANUAL SPEED
NOTE This button only affects teaching speed. When the job is played, the job will execute at the
speed defined in Step 4.
2. Move the manipulator with the axis operation keys to a posi-

tion where it will not strike the fixture.
3. Press [MOTION TYPE] to set to the joint interpolation type

(MOVJ). MOTION
TYPE
MOVJ V=12.50
4. With the cursor located on line number 0004, press

[SELECT]. SELECT
MOVJ VJ=12.50
VJ=12.50, which shows the speed. While pressing [SHIFT]

Set the speed to 50%.
MOVJ VJ= 50.00

ENTER
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0004 MOVL V=138
0005 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0006 END
3-10
3.1 Teaching
Step 6 -- Near the Start Position

Move the manipulator near the start position.
Step1
Step6
Step2
Step3 Step5
Step4
1. Move the manipulator near the start position with the axis
operation keys.

ENTER
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0004 MOVL V=138
0005 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0006 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0007 END
3-11
3.1 Teaching
Ensuring the First and Last Step are Identical

The manipulator has stopped at Step 6, which should be very close to Step1.
It is possible to move directly from the welding end position of Step 5 to Step1, so the manipu-
lator can begin the next welding job quickly and efficiently.
The following operation will make Step 6 (end position) and Step1 (start position) identical.
Modified Step 6
Step 1 Corrent Step 6
Step 2 Step 5
Step 3 Step 4
1. Move the cursor to Step1 (Line 0001).

0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0004 MOVL V=138
0005 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0006 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0007 END
2. Press [FWD]. The manipulator will move to Step1.

FWD
3. Move the cursor to Step 6 (Line 0006).

0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0004 MOVL V=138
0005 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0006 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0007 END
4. Press [MODIFY].
MODIFY
5. Press [ENTER]. This will change the position of Step 6 to be

the same as Step1. ENTER
3-12
3.1 Teaching
3.1.3 Path Confirmation

The job is now complete. Try to check each step separately to ensure there are no problems.
1. Move the cursor to Step 1 (Line 0001).
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0004 MOVL V=138
0005 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0006 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0007 END
2. Change to medium speed by pressing [FAST] or [SLOW].

FAST
MANUAL SPEED
SLOW
3. Press [FWD] to confirm each step executed by the manipula-

tor. Each time [FWD] is pressed, the manipulator moves one FWD
step.
4. When you finish step confirmation, move the cursor to the

beginning of the job.
5. Run all the steps continuously. Hold down [INTERLOCK] and

INTER TEST
press [TEST START]. The manipulator plays back all the LOCK START
steps continuously and stops when one cycle is finished.
Proceed to the next section to change the position and speed of the job steps.
3-13
3.1 Teaching
3.1.4 Correcting a Job
CAUTION
• After the job is corrected, be sure to confirm the path.
Before Correcting a Job

Confirm the manipulator’s motion in each step. If any position modification or adding or delet-
ing of steps is necessary, display the job content first with the following procedure.
1. Select {JOB} under the main menu and {JOB} under the sub
MAIN
menu. MENU
JOB DOUT
MOVE JOB CONTENT
DOUT END
MOVE
END
SELECT
B001
MASTER JOB
IN/OUT
In Out
JOB CAPACITY
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFO
SELECT
3-14
3.1 Teaching
Changing the Position Data

Change the position registered in Step 2.
Current Step 2
New Step 2
1. Move the manipulator to Step 2 (Line 0002) by pressing

[FWD]. FWD
2. Move the manipulator to the modified position with the axis

operation keys.
3. Press [MODIFY].
MODIFY
4. Press [ENTER]. The step’s position data is changed.

ENTER
3-15
3.1 Teaching
Adding a Step
Add a new step between Step 5 and Step 6.
Step6 Step7
Add Step6
Step5 Step5

[FWD]. FWD
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0004 MOVL V=138
0005 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0006 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0007 END
2. Move the manipulator to the position at which you wish to add

a step using the axis operation keys.
3. Press [INSERT].
INSERT
4. Press [ENTER]. The step is added. When a step is added, the

numbering is automatically adjusted to count the new step. ENTER
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0004 MOVL V=138
0005 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0006 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0007 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0008 END
3-16
3.1 Teaching
Deleting a Step
Delete the step you just added.
Step 7 Step 6
Step 6 D el ete
Step 5 Step 5

[FWD]. FWD
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0004 MOVL V=138
0005 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0006 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0007 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0008 END
2. Make sure the cursor is on the step you wish to delete, and
press [DELETE].
DELETE
3. Press [ENTER]. The step is deleted.

ENTER
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0004 MOVL V=138
0005 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0006 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0007 END
When “Error 2070: Set Robot Exactly to Taught Position” Occurs

SUPPLE-
MENT
When the operator presses [ENTER] during the previous operation, an error can occur in
some cases. The error occurs because the manipulator has not been moved exactly to the
taught position. Cancel the error with either of the following two procedures:
• Press [CANCEL] and press [FWD] to move the manipulator to the position of the step.
• Press [MODIFY] and press [ENTER] to change the position data of the step, then press
[DELETE] and press [ENTER].
If the cursor in the window is blinking, the manipulator is not in the taught position.
3-17
3.1 Teaching
Changing the Speed between Steps

Change the manipulator speed. Slow the speed between Step 3 and Step 4.
1. Move the cursor to Step 4.

0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0004 MOVL V=138
0005 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0006 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0007 END
2. Move the cursor to the instruction and press [SELECT].

SELECT
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0004 MOVL V=138
0005 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0006 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0007 END
“V=138,” which shows the speed. While pressing [SHIFT]

Set the speed to 66cm/min.
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0004 MOVL V= 66
0005 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0006 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0007 END
4. Press [ENTER]. The speed is changed.

ENTER
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0004 MOVL V=66
0005 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0006 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0007 END
3-18
3.2 Playback
3.2 Playback
3.2.1 Preparation Before Playback
To run the program from the beginning of the job, perform the following operation.
NOTE • Move the cursor to the beginning of the job.
• Move the manipulator close to Step 1 with the axis operation keys.
When playback is started, the manipulator begins to move from the Step 1.
3.2.2 Playback Procedure

Begin operation only after ensuring there is no one in the working envelope of the manipulator.
1. Switch the mode switch on the programming pendant to

“PLAY.”
REMOTE TEACH
PLAY
2. Press [SERVO ON READY] to turn ON the servo power.

SERVO
ON
READY
3. Press [START]. The manipulator will perform one complete

taught cycle and then stop.
START
3-19
3.3 Example for Arc Welding Application
3.3.1 Example Job

The figure below shows an example of welding a workpiece with an explanation of each step.
Step 1 Step 6
Step 2
Step 3 Step 5 :Teaching point (Step)
Welding line Step 4
Line Instruction Explanation
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=25.00 Moves manipulator to standby position. (Step 1)
0002 MOVJ VJ=25.00 Moves manipulator near welding start point. (Step 2)
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50 Moves manipulator to welding start point. (Step 3)
0004 ARCON Specifies manipulator arc start.
0005 MOVL V=50 Moves manipulator to welding end point. (Step 4)
0006 ARCOF Specifies manipulator arc end.
0007 MOVJ VJ=25.00 Moves manipulator to position a safe distance away (Step 5)
from equipment.
0009 END
3-20

The teaching procedures are explained in Step 2 (welding pose definition), Step 3 (welding
start), and Step 4 (welding end).
• Step 1 and 6, which are both the waiting position, are adjusted to a safe position where
NOTE the manipulator does not collide with the workpiece and the fixture, etc.
• Ensure that the length of the wire is the same during teaching and playback. The appro-
priate wire length can be determined by using the inching procedure.
• When the manipulator comes in contact with the workpiece during the teaching proce-
dure, extend the wire 50-100mm and cut at an appropriate length.
• After teaching is completed, confirm the welding path with [FWD] and [BWD].
Step 2 -- Near Welding Start Point

Define the pose of the welding torch.
1. Using the axis operation keys, specify the correct posture for
the manipulator to begin welding.
2. Press [ENTER]. Step 2 is registered.

ENTER
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0002 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0003 END
3-21
Step 3 -- Welding Start Point

Move the welding torch to the welding start point with the pose as shown in Step 2, and regis-
ter the ARCON instruction.

FAST
SLOW
2. Move the manipulator to the welding start point with the axis
operation keys. At this time, do not release the pose input in
Step 2.
3. With the cursor located on the line number, press [SELECT].

SELECT
MOVJ VJ=50.00

MOVJ VJ= 12.50

ENTER
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0002 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0004 END
6. Press [ARCON]. ARCON is displayed in the input buffer line.

ARCON 8
ARCON
7. Press [ENTER]. The ARCON instruction is registered.
ENTER
3-22
Step 4 -- Welding End Point

Specify the welding end point.
1. Move the manipulator to the welding end point with the axis
operation keys. While the manipulator is moving, keep a wide
enough distance to ensure it will not strike the workpiece.
There is no need to follow the work line too closely.
2. Set the interpolation type to linear interpolation (MOVL) by

pressing [MOTION TYPE]. MOTION
TYPE
MOVL V=66

SELECT
MOVL V=66
V=66, which shows the speed. SELECT
Press [SELECT] to enable the input of numbers. Then, input

the desired value of 50cm/min with the Numeric keys and 7 8 9
4 5 6
press [ENTER]. 1 2 3
ENTER
0 ･ -

ENTER
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0002 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0004 ARCON ASF#(1)
0005 MOVL V=50
0006 END
6. Press [GAS ARCOFF]. ARCOF is displayed in the input buffer

line. 5
GAS
ARCOFF
ARCOF
7. Press [ENTER]. The ARCOF instruction is registered. ENTER
3-23
3.3.3 Setting Welding Conditions

There are two ways to register the welding condition, one way is using the arc start condition
file and the other way is using the additional items of the ARCON instruction.
The latter way is described here.
See "NX100 OPERATOR’S MANUAL FOR ARC WELDING" for the arc start condition file.
1. Move the cursor to the ARCON instruction and press
[SELECT]. The line can then be edited. Press [SELECT]. The
DETAIL EDIT window appears.
ARCON
SELECT
2. Press [SELECT] if the “MENU” setting is “UNUSED” or “ASF#

( )” in the DETAIL EDIT window. Select “AC=” in the selection SELECT
dialog box. The DETAIL EDIT window is shown as follows.

DETAIL EDIT
ARCON
WELDING CURR AC= 200
WELDING VOLT AVP= 100
TIMER T= 3.00
SPPED UNUSED
RETRY UNUSED
3. To change the current data “AC=” and voltage data “AVP=” or

“AV=,” move the cursor to the welding current value or the SELECT
welding voltage value and press [SELECT]. Inputting numbers

is now enabled. Type the desired value with the Numeric keys 7 8 9
4 5 6
and press [ENTER]. The welding condition specified in the 1 2 3

ENTER
DETAIL EDIT window is displayed in the input buffer line.

0 ･ -
Press [ENTER]. The welding condition is registered in the job.

ENTER
If the setting for the welding power supply is “A/%,” the input unit for voltage is %. If the
NOTE setting for the welding power supply is “A/V,” the input unit for voltage is V. These set-
tings must be made in the Power Source condition file. Refer to “NX100 OPERATOR’S
MANUAL FOR ARC WELDING.”
Shielding Gas Flow Rate

The shielding gas flow must be adjusted depending on nozzle shape, welded joint shape,
length of the wire stickout, and the welding speed.
CO2/MAG Gas Flow Rate for a Nozzle with a 20mm diameter
CO2 Gas Flow Rate MAG Gas Flow Rate

Wire Stickout (mm)
( /min.) ( /min.)
8 to 15 10 to 20 15 to 25
12 to 20 15 to 25 20 to 30
15 to 25 20 to 30 25 to 30
The table above is for a nozzle diameter of 20mm. If the nozzle diameter is smaller, lower the
gas flow rate.
3-24
3.3.4 Welding Test

Check Run
Perform the check run in order to confirm that the teaching procedure was done correctly. The
check run can be performed without performing actual work. This is possible because the
work output instruction such as an ARCON instruction is not executed.

“PLAY.”
REMOTE TEACH
PLAY
2. Select {UTILITY} and {SETUP SPECIAL RUN}. The SPECIAL

PLAY window appears.
SPECIAL PLAY
LOW SPEED START INVALID

SPEED LIMIT INVALID
DRY-RUN SPEED INVALID
MACHINE LOCK INVALID
CHECK-RUN INVALID
WEAV PROHIBIT IN CHK-RUN INVALID
COMPLETE
3. Move the cursor to the “CHECK-RUN” setting and press

[SELECT]. The condition becomes "VALID" and the check run SELECT
is turned ON.
SPECIAL PLAY

SPEED LIMIT INVALID
CHECK-RUN VALID
COMPLETE
4. Confirm that no persons are present in the P-point maximum

envelope of the manipulator and then press [START].
Confirm that the manipulator correctly operates.
Welding Execution
Once the path has been determined, the welding is finally executed. If the job is played back
with the check run disabled, the ARCON and the ARCOF instructions are executed.
3-25
Adjustments for Welding Defects

To adjust welding conditions after welding, check the appearance of the welding bead.
Welding Defect Cause Correction Method
Pore: Shortage of shielding gas • With no influence from the wind, and
Generic name of defect flow rate when the torch angle and wire stick-
caused by the influence of
H2, N2, CO2, and Ar. Pits out are correct, 15 to 30 /min is
and blowholes, etc. may assumed to be the suitable shielding
exist. gas rate.
• Change the gas flow rate according
Pit to the workpiece construction condi-
Blowhole tion.
Spatter adheres to nozzle • Remove the spatter frequently and

thoroughly.
• Choose the best welding condition to
prevent frequent spattering.
• Adjusting the torch angle and nozzle
height will also reduce the amount of
spatter.
Influence of wind • Close the shutter, door, and window.

• Avoid using a fan during welding.
• Use a screen.
Adhesion of rust and oil to Remove rust and oil with thinner,
surface brush, and grinder, etc.
Paint adhesion Remove paint using thinner.
Welding current, voltage, • Reset the voltage within the voltage

and welding speed are range.
incorrect.
• Adjust the voltage in accordance with
the arc length.
Torch angle and wire stick- • Make the torch angle smaller.
out are incorrect. • Set the wire stickout in accordance
with the welding condition.
Undercut: Excessive welding current Lower the welding current.

Defect name for when the
groove is made and not Incorrect welding voltage Adjust the voltage.
completely filled along the
toe of the weld. Excessive welding speed Lower the welding speed.
Undercut
Unsuitable torch angle and Adjust the torch angle and aim posi-
aim position tion.
3-26
Incomplete fusion: Unsuitable welding condi- Adjust the welding current, welding
State in which the welding tion speed, wire aim position, torch angle,
surfaces do not melt etc.
together well enough.
Dirt on welding surface Remove rust and oil.
Incomplete
fusion
Incomplete penetration: Unsuitable welding condi- Adjust the welding current, welding
State where there is insuffi- tion (It often occurs when speed, wire aim position, torch angle,
cient distance between the the welding current is too etc.
surface of the metal and the low or the voltage is too low
bottom of the welded area. for the current.)
Under 0.2t
Under 0.2t
Overlap: • Excessive welding current • For T joint welding, set the welding
State where the toe of weld • Unsuitable aim position current low or set the voltage to the
is not fused with the base
• Inappropriate torch angle proper value or slightly higher value.
metal. (It often occurs in T
joint welding.) • For T joint welding, move the wire
aim position forward by several milli-
Overlap
meters.
Adopt angle of advance for the torch
angle.
• Move the wire aim position forward
by 1 to 1.5mm during thin plate weld-
ing.
Convex bead: • Welding current is too • Adjust the welding speed.

Part of the fillet weld has a high. • Adjust the voltage to the proper value
swelled bead surface. It
• Welding voltage is too low. or slightly higher value.
can be seen in an upward
weld at vertical position and • Welding speed is too slow
an incline position. or too fast.
Convex
bead
3-27
Concave bead: • Welding voltage is too • Adjust the welding speed.

Part of the fillet weld has a high. • Adjust the voltage to the proper value
dented bead surface. It can
• Welding speed is too slow. or slightly lower value.
be seen in a downward
weld at a vertical position or
incline position
Concave
bead
Meandering of beads: • The welding wire is bent • Shorten the wire stickout.
State in which welding bead and twisted. • Use a pail.
is shaped like a snake.
• The welding chip’s hole • Exchange old tips for new tips.
diameter is growing larger. • Change earthing condition.
• Magnetic blow influences • Change welding direction.
welding.
3-28
3.4 Example for Handling Application
3.4.1 Example Job

The figure below shows an example of handling a workpiece. The job creating procedure is
then explained.
Step 5 Step 10
Step 1
Step 4 Step 2 Step 9

Step 6
Step 3
Workpiece
Step 7
Step 8
Pallete
Conveyer

0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=25.00 Move to standby position (Step 1)
0002 MOVJ VJ=25.00 Move near gripping position (before gripping) (Step 2)
0003 MOVL V=100.0 Move to the gripping position (Step 3)
0004 HAND 1 ON Gripping the workpiece
0005 TIMER T=0.50 Waiting for gripping the workpiece to be completed
0006 MOVL V=100.0 Move to near gripping position (after gripping) (Step 4)
0008 MOVJ VJ=25.00 Move near release position (before releasing) (Step 6)
0009 MOVL V=100.0 Move to release assistance position (Step 7)
0010 MOVL V=50.0 Move to release position (Step 8)
0011 HAND 1 OFF Releasing the workpiece
0012 TIMER T=0.50 Waiting for releasing the workpiece to be completed
0013 MOVL V=100.0 Move to near release position (after releasing) (Step 9)
0015 END
3-29
3.4.2 Usage of HAND Instruction

These instructions open and close each hand mounted to the manipulator. They correspond
to single-, double-, and triple solenoids. Up to four hands can be controlled by a single manip-
ulator.
The following solenoid signal controls are available according to the valve selected.
SP (single-solenoid)
The HAND instruction turns the tool valve (x-1) ON/OFF. The inverse signal is output to the
tool valve (x-2). Connect it to the either one when used as a single-solenoid.
2P (double-solenoid)
The HAND instruction turns the tool valve (x-1) ON/OFF. The inverse signal is output to the
tool valve (x-2).
3P (triple-solenoid)
Adding “ALL” to the HAND instruction allows both tool valve (x-1) and tool valve (x-2) to be
turned ON/OFF simultaneously. Functions as a double-solenoid if ALL is not added to the
HAND instruction.
Valve 1/2 condition of each solenoid
Instruction SP 2P 3P
(x:TOOL No.) (Valve x-1/x-2) (Valve x-1/x-2) (Valve x-1/x-2)
HAND x ON ON/-(-/OFF) ON/OFF ON/OFF
HAND x OFF OFF/-(-/OFF) OFF/ON OFF/ON
HAND x ON ALL - - ON/ON
HAND x OFF ALL - - OFF/OFF
Instruction and Additional Items

HAND #1 1 OFF ALL
Device Number (#1 or #2)

Set when two manipulators are used for handling.
Tool Number (1 to 4)
Setting always required.
Tool Output Status (ON/OFF)

Select ON or OFF. Setting always required.
Valve Simultaneous Control (ALL)

Add to turn tool valves 1 and 2 ON or OFF simultaneously.
3-30

The teaching procedure is explained in Step 2, 3, and 4 concerning gripping movement and
Step 6, 7, 8, and 9 concerning release movement.
• Step1, which is the standby position, is adjusted to a safe position where the manipulator
NOTE does not collide with the workpiece and jig,etc.
• Confirm the welding path by using [FWD] and [BWD].
Step 2 -- Near Gripping Position (before gripping)

Define the pose of the gripping torch.
1. Specify the correct posture with the axis operation keys for the
manipulator to begin gripping the workpiece. It is necessary to
choose a direction in which the tools and the workpiece do not
interfere when the manipulator approaches the workpiece,
and teach that position. (It is usually located right above the
gripping position.)

ENTER
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0002 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0003 END
Step 3 -- Gripping Position

Move the torch to the gripping position with the pose as shown in Step 2, and register the
HAND instruction.

FAST
Medium speed: is displayed in the status area. MANUAL SPEED
SLOW
2. Move the manipulator to the gripping position with the axis

Step2.
3. Set the linear interpolation ”MOVL” by pressing [MOTION

TYPE]. MOTION
TYPE
MOVL V=11.0

SELECT
MOVL V=11.0
3-31
“V=11.0,” which shows the speed. SELECT

the desired value of 100mm/s with the Numeric keys and 7 8 9
4 5 6
ENTER
0 ･ -

ENTER
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0002 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0003 MOVL V=100.0
0004 END
7. Press [TOOL1 ON/OFF]. “HAND 1 ON" is displayed in the

.
input buffer line. TOOL1
ON/OFF
HAND 1 ON
8. Press [ENTER]. The HAND instruction (gripping) is registered.

ENTER
9. Press [INFORM LIST]. The inform list is displayed.

Move the cursor to “CONTROL“ and press [SELECT]. Then, INFORM
move the cursor to “TIMER” and press [SELECT]. LIST
TIMER T=1.00
SELECT
SELECT
10.The input buffer line appears. Move the cursor to the right to
“T=1.00,” which shows the time. SELECT

the desired value of 0.5s with the Numeric keys and press 7 8 9
4 5 6
ENTER
[ENTER]. 1 2 3
0 ･ -
TIMER T= 0.50
11.Press [ENTER]. The TIMER instruction is registered.

ENTER
12.Press [INFORM LIST] again to turn OFF the LED of the

INFORM LIST key. INFORM
LIST
3-32
Step 4 -- Near Gripping Position (after gripping)

Define the standby position after gripping.
1. Move the manipulator near the gripping position with the axis
operation keys. It is necessary to choose a direction in which
the treatment device and the tools do not interfere when the
manipulator moves, and teach that position. (It is usually
located right above the gripping position. The same positon as
the step 2 is also available.)

SELECT
MOVL V=11.0

the desired value of 100.0mm/s with the Numeric keys and 7 8 9
4 5 6
ENTER
0 ･ -

ENTER
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0002 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0003 MOVL V=100.0
0004 HAND 1 ON
0005 TIMER T=0.50
0006 MOVL V=100.0
0007 END
3-33
Step 6 -- Near Release Position (before releasing)

Define the pose of the release torch.
1. Specify the correct position with the axis operation keys for the
manipulator to begin releasing the workpiece. It is necessary
to choose a position where the holded workpiece and the
piled-up workpiece do not interfere when the manipulator
approaches the palette, and teach that position. (It is usually
located right above of the release assistance position.)
2. Set the joint interpolation (MOVJ) by pressing [MOTION

TYPE]. MOTION
TYPE
MOVJ V=0.78

SELECT
MOVJ V=0.78
“VJ=0.78,” which shows the speed. While pressing [SHIFT]

MOVJ VJ= 25.00

ENTER
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0002 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0003 MOVL V=100.0
0004 HAND 1 ON
0005 TIMER T=0.50
0006 MOVL V=100.0
0007 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0008 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0009 END
3-34
Step 7 -- Release Assistance Position

Define the assistance position for releasing.
1. When moving directly from the position in Step 6 to the

release position, the workpiece which has already been piled
up and the holding workpiece interfere occasionally. The
release assistance position to conduct a detour operation is
taught at this time. The pose is set the same as Step 6.
2. Set linear interpolation (MOVL) by pressing [MOTION TYPE].

MOVL V=11.0
MOTION
TYPE

SELECT
MOVL V=11.0

4 5 6
ENTER
0 ･ -

ENTER
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0002 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0003 MOVL V=100.0
0004 HAND 1 ON
0005 TIMER T=0.50
0006 MOVL V=100.0
0007 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0008 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0009 MOVL V=100.0
0010 END
3-35
Step 8 -- Release Position

Move the torch to the release position with the pose as shown in Step 7, and register the
HAND instruction.

FAST
SLOW
2. Move the manipulator to the release position with the axis

Step 7.

SELECT
MOVL V=11.0

4 5 6
ENTER
0 ･ -

ENTER
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0002 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0003 MOVL V=100.0
0004 HAND 1 ON
0005 TIMER T=0.50
0006 MOVL V=100.0
0007 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0008 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0009 MOVL V=100.0
0010 MOVL V=50.0
0011 END
6. Press [TOOL1 ON/OFF]. “HAND 1 ON” is displayed in the

.
input buffer line. TOOL1
ON/OFF
HAND 1 ON
“ON,” which shows the tool status. While pressing [SHIFT]
simultaneously, move the cursor up and down until

“OFF” is specified. SHIFT
HAND 1 OFF
8. Press [ENTER]. The HAND instruction (releasing) is regis-

tered. ENTER
3-36
9. Press [INFORM LIST]. The inform list is displayed.

Move the cursor to “CONTROL” and press [SELECT]. Then, INFORM
move the cursor to “TIMER” and press [SELECT]. LIST
TIMER T=1.00
SELECT
SELECT
10.The input buffer line appears. Move the cursor to the right to
“T=1.00,” which shows the time. SELECT

the desired value of 0.5s with the Numeric keys and press 7 8 9
4 5 6
ENTER
[ENTER]. 1 2 3
0 ･ -
TIMER T= 0.50
11.Press [ENTER]. The TIMER instruction is registered.

ENTER
12.Press [INFORM LIST] again to turn OFF the LED of the

INFORM LIST key. INFORM
LIST
3-37
Step 9 -- Near Release Position (after release)

Define the temporary standby positon.
1. Move the manipulator near the release position with the axis
the tools and workpiece do not interfere, and teach that posi-
tion. (It is usually located right above the release position.)

SELECT
MOVL V=11.0

4 5 6
ENTER
0 ･ -

ENTER
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0002 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0003 MOVL V=100.0
0004 HAND 1 ON
0005 TIMER T=0.50
0006 MOVL V=100.0
0007 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0008 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0009 MOVL VJ=100.0
0010 MOVL VJ=50.0
0011 HAND 1 OFF
0012 TIMER T=0.50
0013 MOVL V=100.0
0014 END
3-38
3.4.4 Handling Test

Speed Limitation Drive
To confirm the taught path, the speed limitation drive is executed. All the operations operate
below the limitation speed in the teach mode (250mm/s usually) during speed limitation drive.
If the taught speed is below the limitation speed, the operation is executed at the same speed
as teaching.

“PLAY.”
REMOTE TEACH
PLAY

SPECIAL PLAY

SPEED LIMIT INVALID
CHECK-RUN INVALID
COMPLETE
3. Move the cursor to the “SPEED LIMIT” setting and press

[SELECT]. The condition becomes “VALID” and the speed SELECT
limit is turned ON.

SPECIAL PLAY

SPEED LIMIT VALID
CHECK-RUN INVALID
COMPLETE

Handling Execution
Once the path has been determined, the handling is finally executed at actual speed. If the job
is played back with the speed limitation drive disabled, the handling is executed at taught
speed.
3-39
3.5 Example for General Purpose Application
3.5.1 Example Job

The figure below shows an example of cutting. The job creation procedure is then explained.
Solenoid valve
Three-phase power source
200VAC
Compliance (+10%
-15% )
Tool
Workpiece Manipulator Programming
pendant
Pneumatic source
Air line
Valve control
cable
Fixture
Manipulator cable
NX100

0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=25.00 Moves manipulator to the standby positon. (Step 1)
0002 MOVJ VJ=25.00 Moves manipulator near the cutting start position. (Step 2)
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50 Moves manipulator to the cutting start position. (Step 3)
0004 TOOLON Starts cutting.
0005 MOVL V=50.0 Moves manipulator to the cutting end position. (Step 4)
0006 TOOLOF Ends cutting.
0007 MOVJ VJ=25.00 Moves manipulator to the position where the tools and (Step 5)
workpieces do not interfere.
0008 MOVJ VJ=25.00 Moves manipulator to the standby position. (Step 6)
0009 END
3-40

The teaching procedure of Step 2 which specifies the cutting pose and Step 3 and 4 (cutting
section) are explained.
Teach Step 1, which is the standby positon, to a safe position where the manipulator will
NOTE not collide with the workpiece and the tool.
Confirm the cutting path with [FWD] and [BWD] after teaching.
Step 2 -- Near cutting position

Define the cutting pose.
1. Specify the correct posture with the axis operation keys for the
manipulator to start cutting.

ENTER
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0002 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0003 END
3-41
Step 3 -- Cutting Start Position

Move to the cutting start position with the pose as shown in Step 2, and register the TOOLON
instruction.

FAST
SLOW
2. Move the manipulator to the cutting start position with the axis
Step 2.

SELECT
MOVJ VJ=25.00
“VJ=25.00,” which shows the speed. While pressing [SHIFT]

MOVJ VJ= 12.50

ENTER
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0002 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0004 END
6. Press [2/TOOL ON]. “TOOLON” is displayed in the input

buffer line. 2
TOOLON
TOOLON
7. Press [ENTER]. The TOOLON instruction is registered.

ENTER
3-42
Step 4 -- Cutting End Position

Define the cutting end position.
1. Move the manipulator to the cutting end position with the axis
the treatment device and the tools do not interfere when the
manipulator moves, and teach that position.
2. Set linear interpolation (MOVL) by pressing [MOTION TYPE].

MOVL V=11.0
MOTION
TYPE

SELECT
MOVL V=11.0

4 5 6
ENTER
0 ･ -

ENTER
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0002 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0004 TOOLON
0005 MOVL V=50.0
0006 END
6. Press [./TOOL OF]. “TOOLOF” is displayed in the input buffer

line. .
TOOLOF
TOOLOF
7. Press [ENTER]. The TOOLOF instruction is registered.

ENTER
3-43
3.5.3 Cutting Test

The speed limitation drive is executed to confirm the taught path. All the operations operate
below the limitation speed during teach mode (250mm/s ususally) in the speed limitation
drive. If the taught speed is below the limitation speed, the operation is executed at the same
speed as the teaching procedure.

“PLAY.”
REMOTE TEACH
PLAY

SPECIAL PLAY

SPEED LIMIT INVALID
CHECK-RUN INVALID
COMPLETE

limit is turned ON.

SPECIAL PLAY

SPEED LIMIT VALID
CHECK-RUN INVALID
COMPLETE

Cutting Execution
Once the path has been determined, cutting is finally executed at actual speed. If the job is
played back with the speed limitation drive disabled, cutting is executed at taught speed.
3-44
3.6 Example for Spot Welding Application
3.6.1 Example Job

The figure below shows an example of the spot welding of a workpiece. The job content pro-
cedure is then explained.
Air gun
Moveable side electrode

Workpiece
Step 3
Step 1
Step 5
Step 4
Step 2
Fixed side electrode
0000 NOP
0002 MOVJ VJ=25.00 Moves manipulator near welding start position. (Step 2)
0003 MOVJ VJ=25.00 Moves manipulator to welding start position (Step 3)
0004 SPOT GUN#(1) Welding starts.

MODE=0 Specifies spot welding gun no.1.
WTM=1 Specifies single gun.
Specifies welding condition 1.
0005 MOVJ VJ=25.00 Moves manipulator to position a safe disatance away (Step 4)
from equipment.
0007 END
3-45
3.6.2 Setting Welding Conditions

Setting Spot Welding Gun Condition Files
The following items are specified in the spot welding gun condition files.
• GUN NO. (Initial:1)
• GUN TYPE (Initial:SINGLE GUN)
• POWER SOURCE NO. (Initial:1)
• OPEN MONITOR (Initial:OFF)
• GUN OPEN/CLOSE SET AT STOP (Initial:ON (open))
If your setting contents are different from the system, change the file content.
1 Select {SPOT WELDING}

under the main menu.
2 Select {GUN CONDITION}. The GUN CONDITION window appears.

GUN CONDITION
GUN NO.: 1
GUN TYPE : SINGLE
POWER SOURCE NO. :1
OPEN MONITOR : OFF
GUN OPEN/CLOSE SET AT STOP : ON
DIRECT PAGE
3 Move the cursor to the item

to be set.
4 Press [SELECT].
3-46
Setting Welding Condition for the Power Source

It is necessary to set the welding power supply and the welding time for the Power Source
during spot welding.
For the setting method, refer to the manual of the Power Source being used.
Specify the Welding Condition No. that you set in the SPOT instruction line 0004.
(Example.WTM=1)
For the welding power supply and the welding time, refer to the following table:
Board Large Current - Short Time Small Current - Long Time

Thickne
ss Pressurizing Time Pressurizing
Time (cycle) Current (A) Current (A)
(mm) Power (kgf) (cycle) Power (kgf)
1.0 10 225 8800 36 75 5600
2.0 20 470 13000 64 150 8000
3.2 32 820 17400 105 260 10000
(1cycle =16.7ms)

The teaching procedure is expained in Step 2 (welding pose definition) and Step 3 (welding
start).
• Step1, which is standby position, is adjusted to a safe position where the manipulator
NOTE does not collide with the workpiece and jig, etc.
• Set the gun to the opening condition during teaching.
• Confirm the welding path by using [FWD] and [BWD] after teaching is completed.
Step 2 -- Near Welding Start Point

Define the pose of the welding torch.
1. Use the axis operation keys to specify the correct posture for
the manipulator to begin welding.
2. Press [ENTER] to register Step 2.

ENTER
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0002 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0003 END
3-47
Step 3 -- Welding Start Point

Move the torch to the welding start point and register the SPOT instruction.
1. Change the speed to medium by pressing [FAST] or [SLOW].

FAST
appears in status area. MANUAL SPEED
SLOW
2. Press the axis operation keys to move the manipulator to the

welding start point.
3. Press [ENTER] to register Step 3.

ENTER
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0002 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0004 END
4. Press [. /SPOT]. “SPOT GUN#(1) MODE=0 WTM=1” is dis-

played in the input buffer line. .
SPOT
SPOT GUN#(1) MODE=0 WTM=1
5. Press [ENTER]. The SPOT instruction is registered.

ENTER
3-48
3.6.4 Welding Test

Check Run
Execute the check run in order to confirm that the teaching procedure is done correctly. The
check run can be conducted without actually performing work. This is because the work out-
put instruction of the SPOT instruction is not executed.

“PLAY.”
REMOTE TEACH
PLAY

SPECIAL PLAY

SPEED LIMIT INVALID
CHECK-RUN INVALID
COMPLETE
3. Move the cursor to the “CHECK-RUN” setting and press

[SELECT]. The condition becomes"VALID" and the check run SELECT
is turned ON.
SPECIAL PLAY

SPEED LIMIT INVALID
CHECK-RUN VALID
COMPLETE

Welding Execution
Once the path has been determined, the welding is finally executed. If the job is played back
with the check run disabled, the SPOT instruction is executed.
3-49
3.7 Example for Painting Application
3.7.1 Example Job

The figure below shows an example of painting job with an explanation of each step.
Painting
side
Step 2 Step 3
Step 4
Path 1
Step 1
Step 6 Step 5
Path 2
Step 11
Step 7 Step 8
Path 3
Step 9
Step 10 Path 4
: Teaching point (step)
0000 NOP
0002 MOVL V=50 Moves manipulator near painting start position. (Step 2)
0003 MOVL V=50 NWAIT Moves manipulator to Path 1 start position. (Step 3)
0004 PAINTSET PCF# (1) Set painting condition number 1.
0005 SPYON ANT=1.00 Spray ON.
0006 MOVL V=100 Moves manipulator to Path 1 end position. (Step 4)
0007 MOVL V=100 Moves manipulator to Path 2 start position. (Step 5)
0012 MOVL V=100 NWAIT Moves manipulator to Path 4 end position. (Step 10)
0013 SPYOF ANT=−1.00 Spray OFF.
0014 PAINTEND Painting end
0015 MOVL V=50 Moves manipulator to standby position. (Step 11)
0016 END
3-50
3.7.2 Setting Painting Conditions

1. Select {PAINT} under the main menu.
Select {PAINT CONDITION} under the sub menu.
The PAINT CONDITION window appears.
PAINT CONDITION
CONDITION NO.: 1
SELECT
COMMENT : **********
PAINT VOLUME : 2 Level
BELL ROTATION : 3 Level
SHAPING AIR : 2 Level
HIGH VOLTAGE : 1 Level
DIRECT PAGE
2. Move the cursor to “PAINT VOLUME,” “BELL ROTATION,” 7 8 9
“SHAPING AIR,” and “HIGH VOLTAGE” to specify the value 4
1
5
2
6
with the Numeric keys. 0 ･ -
The window of the next condition number is shown by pressing

GO BACK
the page key PAGE . SELECT
The window of the desired condition number can be searched

by inputting the condition number as follows: 7 8 9
Move the cursor to the condition number, press [SELECT],

4 5 6
ENTER
1 2 3
input the desired number with the Numeric keys, and press 0 ･ -
[ENTER].

The teaching procedure is explained in Step 2 (painting pose definition), Step 3 (painting start
position), and Step 10 (painting end position).
• Teach Step 1 and 11, which are both the standby position, to a safe position where the
NOTE manipulator does not collide with the workpiece and the fixture, etc.
• After teaching is completed, confirm the painting path with [FWD] and [BWD].
Step 2 -- Near Painting Start Position

Define the pose of the painting start position.
1. Using the axis operation keys, specify the correct pose for the
manipulator to begin painting.

ENTER
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0002 MOVL V=50.0
0003 END
3-51
Step 3 -- Painting Start Position

Move to the painting start position with the pose as shown in Step 2, and register the PAINT-
SET instruction and the SPYON instruction.
FAST
SLOW
2. Move the manipulator to the painting start position with the

axis operation keys. At this time, do not release the pose input
in Step 2.
3. Press [INFORM LIST] to display the INFORM command list.

Select {DEVICE} and then select “PAINTSET.” INFORM SELECT
LIST
PAINTSET PCF#(0)
4. The input buffer line appears. Move the cursor to PCF#(0),

which shows the painting condition number. Set the number 1
with the Numeric keys.
Press [ENTER] to register the PAINTSET instruction. 7 8 9
4 5 6
ENTER
PAINTSET PCF#(1) 1 2 3
0 ･ -
5. Select “SPYON” in the INFORM command list.

SELECT
SPYON ANT=0.00
6. Move the cursor to the ANT=0.00.

Input “1.00” with the Numeric keys.
Press [ENTER] to register the SPYON instruction.
7 8 9
SPYON ANT= 1.00
4 5 6
ENTER
1 2 3
0 ･ -

SELECT
MOVJ VJ=50.00

TYPE
MOVL V=66
9. Move the cursor to the right to V=66, which shows the speed. 7 8 9
Set to 100mm/s with the Numeric keys. 4
1
5
2
6
0 ･ -
MOVL V= 100

ENTER
3-52
Step 10 -- Painting End Position

Move to the painting end position and register the SPYOF instruction.

FAST
SLOW
2. Move the manipulator to the painting end position with the axis
operation keys.
3. Press [INFORM LIST] to display the INFORM command list.

Select “SPYOF.” INFORM SELECT
LIST
SPYOF ANT=0.00
4. The input buffer line appears. Move the cursor to the

ANT=0.00.
Input “-1.00” with the Numeric keys.
Press [ENTER] to register the SPYOF instruction. 7 8 9
4 5 6
ENTER
SPYOF ANT= 1.00 1 2 3
0 ･ -

SELECT
MOVJ VJ=50.00

TYPE
MOVL V=66
7. Move the cursor to the right to V=66, which shows the speed.
Set to 100mm/s with the Numeric keys.
MOVL V= 100
7 8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
0 ･ -

ENTER
3-53
3.7.4 Painting Test

The speed limitation drive is executed to confirm the taught path. All the operations operate
below the limitation speed during teach mode (250mm/s ususally) in the speed limitation
drive. If the taught speed is below the limitation speed, the operation is executed at the same
speed as the teaching procedure.

“PLAY.”
REMOTE TEACH
PLAY

SPECIAL PLAY

SPEED LIMIT INVALID
CHECK-RUN INVALID
COMPLETE

limit is turned ON.

SPECIAL PLAY

SPEED LIMIT VALID
CHECK-RUN INVALID
COMPLETE

Painting Execution
Once the path has been determined, painting is finally executed at actual speed. If the job is
played back with the speed limitation drive disabled, painting is executed at the specified
speed during teaching.
3-54
4.1 Preparation for Teaching
4 Teaching
To ensure safety, the following operations should always be performed before teaching:
• Check the emergency stop buttons to be sure they function properly.

• Set the mode switch to “TEACH.”
• Register a job.
4.1.1 Checking Emergency Stop Buttons

The Servo ON button on the programming pendant should be lit while the power is ON for the
servo system. Perform the following operation to ensure that the emergency stop buttons on
both the NX100 and the programming pendant are functioning correctly before operating the
manipulator.
1 Press E. STOP button. Press the emergency stop button on the NX100 or the program-
ming pendant.
2 Confirm the servo power is The SERVO ON button on the programming pendant lights while
turned OFF. servo supply is turned ON. When the emergency stop button is
pressed and the servo power is turned OFF, the SERVO ON
lamp will turn OFF.
3 Press [SERVO ON READY]. After confirming correct operation, press [SERVO ON READY].
The servo power will be ready to turn ON. The servo power can
be turned ON with the Enable switch while the SERVO ON button
lamp blinks.
4.1.2 Setting the Teach Lock

For safety purposes, always set the mode switch to “TEACH” before beginning to teach.
While the teach lock is set, the mode of operation is tied to the teach mode and the machines
cannot be played back using either [START] or external input.
4-1
4.1.3 Registering a Job

Specify the name, comments (as required), and control group to register a job.
Registering Job Names

Job names can use up to 8 alphanumeric and symbol characters. These different types of
characters can coexist within the same job name.
The following rules apply to the designation of names for reserved jobs:
A maximum of six characters can be used for a reserved job name.
When a reserved job name is used, additional characters are added by the system.
<Example>
001 JOB - 1 WORK - A
1 Select {JOB} under the main The sub-menu appears.
menu.
JOB DOUT
DOUT
MOVE
END JOB CONTENT
MOVE
END
B001
MASTER JOB
IN/OUT
In Out
JOB CAPACITY
ROBOT
CYCLE
SYSTEM INFO
2 Select {CREATE NEW JOB}. The NEW JOB CREATE window appears.
NEW JOB CREATE
JOB NAME :
COMM. :
GROUP SET : R1
EXECUTE CANCEL
3 Input job name. Move the cursor to JOB NAME, and press [SELECT]. Input job
names using the character input operation. For information on
character input operation, refer to "1.2.7 Character Input."
4 Press [ENTER].
5 Select “EXECUTE.” Job names are registered to NX100 memory. Then, the JOB
CONTENT window appears. NOP and END instructions are
automatically registered.
4-2
Registering Comments
Register a commnent using up to 32 alphanumeric and symbol characters as required.
1 In the NEW JOB CREATE win-

dow, move the cursor to the
comment and press
[SELECT].
2 Enter the comment. For information on character input operation, refer to "1.2.7 Char-
acter Input."
3 Press [ENTER].
Registering Control Groups

Select the control group to be registered from the control groups which have been registered
in advance. If external axes (base axis or station axis) or multiple robot systems are not used,
the registration of control groups is not required.
Switching to the Teaching Window

After the name, comments (can be omitted), and the control groups have been registered,
switch the window to the teaching window as follows:
1 In the NEW JOB CREATE win- Job name, comments, and control groups are all registered.
dow, press [ENTER] or select Then, the JOB CONTENT window appears. NOP and END
“EXECUTE.” instructions are automatically registered.
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME TEST01 STEP NO: 0000
0000 NOP
0001 END
4-3
4.2 Teaching Operation
4.2.1 The Teaching Window

Teaching is conducted in the JOB CONTENT window. The JOB CONTENT window contains
the following items:
JOB CONTENT
0000 NOP
0001 SET B000 0
0002 SET B001 1
0003 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0004 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0005 DOUT OGH#(13) B002
0006 DOUT OT#(41) ON dCursor
0007 MOVL C00002 V=880.0 CV#(1) CTP=0.662
0009 TIMER T=3.0 eInstruction, additional items,
0010 MOVL V=880.0 comments, etc.
0011 MOVL V=880.0
0012 MOVL V=880.0
cLine numbers
Line Numbers
The number of the job line is automatically displayed. Line numbers are automatically
regenerated if lines are inserted or deleted.
Cursor
The cursor for manipulator control. For the FWD, BWD, and test operation, the manipulator
motion starts from the line this cursor points.
Instructions, Additional Items, Comments, Etc.

MOVJ VJ = 50.00
Tag Numerical Data

Instruction
Additional Item
Instructions : These are instructions needed to process or perform an

operation. In the case of MOVE instructions, the instruc-
tion corresponding to the interpolation type is automati-
cally displayed at the time position is taught.
Additional items : Speed and time are set depending on the type of
instruction. Numerical or character data is added when
needed to the tags which set conditions.
4-4
4.2.2 Interpolation Type and Play Speed

Interpolation type determines the path along which the manipulator moves between playback
steps. Play speed is the rate at which the manipulator moves.
Normally the three elements of position data, Interpolation type, and play speed are registered
for the robot axes steps at one time. If the interpolation type or play speed settings are omitted
during teaching, the data used from the previously taught step is automatically used.
Joint Interpolation
The joint interpolation is used when the manipulator does not need to move in a specific path
toward the next step position. When the joint interpolation is used for teaching a robot axis,
the move instruction is MOVJ. For safety purposes, use the joint interpolation to teach the
first step.
When [MOTION TYPE] is pressed, the move instruction on the input buffer line changes.
Play Speed Setting Window

• Speeds are indicated as percentages of the maximum rate.
• Setting “0:Speed Omit” sets the same speed as the previous determination.
1 Move the cursor to the play

speed.
2 Set the play speed by pressing The joint speed value increases or decreases.
[SHIFT] + the cursor key.
MOVJ VJ= 0.78
Fast 100.00
50.00
25.00
12.50
6.25
3.12
1.56
Slow 0.78 (%)
4-5
Linear Interpolation
The manipulator moves in a linear path from one taught step to the next. When the linear
interpolation is used to teach a robot axis, the move instruction is MOVL. Linear interpolation
is used for work such as welding. The manipulator moves automatically changing the wrist
position as shown in the figure below.
Play Speed Setting Window (same for circular and spline interpolation)
There are two types of displays, and they can be switched depending on the application.

speed.
2 Set the play speed by pressing The play speed value increases or decreases.
[SHIFT] + the cursor key.
MOVL V= 660
Fast 1500.0 Fast 9000

750.0 4500
375.0 2250
187.0 1122
93.0 558
46.0 276
23.0 138
Slow 11 (mm/s) Slow 66 (cm/min)
4-6
Circular Interpolation
The manipulator moves in an arc that passes through three points. When circular interpolation
is used for teaching a robot axis, the move instruction is MOVC.
Single Circular Arc

When a single circular movement is required, teach the circular interpolation for three points,
P1 to P3, as shown in the following figure. If joint or linear interpolation is taught at P0, the
point before starting the circular operation, the manipulator moves from P0 to P1 in a straight
line.
Interpolation Type for Single Circular Arc
Interpolation Type Instruction

Automatically becomes P2
P0 Joint or Linear MOVJ
a straight line.
MOVL
P1 Circular MOVC
P0 P1 P3 P4 P2
P3

MOVL
Continuous Circular Arcs

When continuous circular movement is required, the two arcs must be separated from each
other by a joint or linear interpolation step. This step must be inserted between two steps at an
identical point. The step at the end point of the preceding circular move must coincide with the
beginning point of the following circular move.
Interpolation Type for Continuous Circular Arc
Point Interpolation Type Instruction

MOVL
Joint or linear
P2 motion type
P1 Circular MOVC
P3 P7 P8
P2
P4 P3
P0 P1 P5
P6
MOVL
P5 Circular MOVC
P6
P7

MOVL
4-7
Play Speed
The play speed set display is identical to that for the linear interpolation.
The speed taught at P2 is applied from P1 to P2. The speed taught at P3 is applied from P2 to
P3.
If a circular operation is taught at high speed, the actual arc path has a shorter radius than that
taught.
Spline Interpolation
When performing operations such as welding, cutting, and applying primer, using the spline
interpolation makes teaching for workpieces with irregular shapes easier. The path of motion
is a parabola passing through three points. When spline interpolation is used for teaching a
robot axis, the move instruction is MOVS.
Single Spline Curve

When a single spline curve movement is required, teach the spline interpolation for three
points, P1 to P3, as shown in the figure below. If joint or linear interpolation is taught at point
P0, the point before starting the spline interpolation, the manipulator moves from P0 to P1 in a
straight line.
Interpolation Type for a Single Spline Curve
Point Interpolation Type Instruction

P2
Automatically becomes MOVL
a straight line.
P1 Spline MOVS
P2
P0 P1 P3 P4 P3

MOVL
Continuous Spline Curves

The manipulator moves through a path created by combining parabolic curves. This differs
from the circular interpolation in that steps with identical points are not required at the junction
between two spline curves.
Interpolation Type for Continuous Spline Curves
P2 Point Interpolation Type Instruciton

Identical-point
step not required P0 Joint or Linear MOVJ
MOVL
P5 P6
P3 P1 Spline MOVS
P0 P1 to
P5
P4 MOVL
When the parabolas overlap, a composite motion path is created.
Start path End path
4-8
Play Speed
The play speed setting window is identical to that for the linear interpolation.
As with the circular interpolation, the speed taught at P2 is applied from P1 to P2, and the
speed taught at P3 is applied from P2 to P3.
Teach points so that the distances between the three points are roughly equal. If there is
NOTE any significant difference, an error will occur on playback and the manipulator may operate
in an unexpected, dangerous manner. Ensure that the ratio of distances between steps
m:n is within the range of 0.25 to 0.75.
P2
n
P1 P3
m
4.2.3 Teaching Steps

Registering Move Instructions
Whenever one step is taught, one move instruction is registered. There are two ways to teach
a step. Steps can be taught in sequence as shown in the following left figure "Registering
Move Instructions" or they can be done by inserting steps between already registered steps,
as shown in the right figure "Inserting Move Instructions." This paragraph explains the teach-
ing of "Registering Move Instructions," the operations involved in registering new steps.
Step Insertion Step 2
Step 2 P1
Step 1 Step 3
Step 1 Step 3
Registering Move Instructions Inserting Move Instructions
Teaching of "Inserting Move Instructions" is called “Inserting move instruction,” to distinguish it
from the method shown in "Registering Move Instructions." For more details on this operation,
see "4.4.2 Inserting Move Instructions." The basic operations for registration and insertion
are the same. The only difference is pressing [INSERT] in the case of insertion. For registra-
tion ("Registering Move Instructions"), the instruction is always registered before the END
instruction. Therefore, it is not necessary to press [INSERT]. For insertion
("Inserting Move Instructions"), [INSERT] must be pressed.
4-9
Setting the Position Data

1 Select {JOB} under the main The sub-menu appears.

menu.
JOB DOUT
DOUT
MOVE
END
JOB CONTENT
MOVE
END
ARC WELDING JOB SELECTION
B001
MASTER JOB
IN/OUT
In Out
JOB CAPACITY
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFO
2 Select {JOB}. The contents of the currently-selected job is displayed.
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0002 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0004 ARCON ASF#(1)
0005 MOVL V=66
0006 END
3 Move the cursor on the line

immediately before the posi-
tion where a move instruction
to be registered.
4 Grasp the Enable switch. Grasp the Enable switch to turn the servo power ON.
5 Move the manipulator to the Use the axis operation key to move the manipulator to the desired
desired position using the axis position.
key.
4-10
Selecting the Tool Number

1 Press [SHIFT] + [COORD]. When selecting the “JOINT,” “XYZ/CYLINDRICAL,” or “TOOL”

coordinates, press [SHIFT] + [COORD] and the TOOL NO.
SELECT window will be shown.
TOOL NO. SELECT
NO. NAME
00 TORCH MT-3501
01 TORCH MTY-3501
02 TORCH MT-3502
03
04
05
06
07
Main Menu ShortCut Set tool mass data
2 Select desired tool number. The contents of the currently-selected job is displayed.
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0002 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0004 ARCON ASF#(1)
0005 MOVL V=66
0006 END
3 Press [SHIFT] + [COORD]. The JOB CONTENT window appears.
Using Multiple Tools with One Manipulator

SUPPLE-
MENT
When multiple tools are to be used with one manipulator, set parameter S2C261 to 1.
See " 2.6.2 Selecting the Tool Number " for details on this operation.
Setting the Interpolation Type

1 Press [MOTION TYPE]. When [MOTION TYPE] is pressed, MOVJ MOVL MOVC
MOVS are displayed in order in the input buffer line.
2 Select the desired interpola-

tion type.
4-11
Setting the Play Speed

1 Move the cursor to the instruc- 0001 MOVJ=50.00

tion.
2 Press [SELECT]. The cursor moves to the input buffer line.
MOVJ VJ= 50.00

speed to be set.
4 Press [SHIFT] + the cursor key The joint speed moves up and down.
[↑] or [↓] simultaneously.
MOVJ VJ= 50.00
5 Press [ENTER]. The MOV instruction is registered.
0000 NOP
Move instruction 0001 MOVJ VJ=50.00
is registered. 0002 END
Follow the above instructions when conducting teaching. (Tool number, interpolation type, or
play speed does not need to be set if it is same as the previous step.)
• The position level can be set at the same time that the move instruction is registered.
SUPPLE-
MENT • To make the setting so that the play speed tag is not displayed as a default, select {EDIT}
from the menu and then select “ENABLE PLAY SPEED TAG” to delete “∗.”
Setting Position Level

The position level is the degree of apporoximation of the manipulator to a taught position.
The position level can be added to move instructions MOVJ (joint interpolation) and MOVL
(linear interpolation). If the position level is not set, the precision depends on the operation
speed. Setting an appropriate level moves the manipulator in a path suitable to circumferen-
tial conditions and the workiece. The relationship between path and accuracy for position lev-
els is as shown below.
SUPPLE-
To display the position level tag as a default, select {EDIT} from the menu and then select
MENT “ENABLE POS LEVEL TAG.”
Position level 0
P2 P3
Position Levels Accuracy
0 Teaching position
Positioning level 1
Positioning level 2 1 Fine
Positioning level 3 to |
Positioning level 4 8 Rough
P1
4-12
1 Select move instruction. The DETAIL EDIT window appears.
DETAIL EDIT
MOVJ
JOINT SPEE VJ= 50.00
POS LEVEL UNUSED
NWAIT UNUSED
2 Select the position level The selection dialog box appears.

“UNUSED.”
DETAIL EDIT
MOVJ
JOINT SPEED PL
POS LEVEL UNUSED
NWAIT UNUSED
3 Select “PL.” The position level is displayed. The position initial value is 1.
DETAIL EDIT
MOVJ
JOINT SPEED VJ= 50.00
POS LEVEL PL= 1
NWAIT UNUSED
Main Menu ShortCut
4-13
4 Press [ENTER]. To change the position level, select the level in the input buffer
line, type the value using the Numeric keys, and press [ENTER].
The position level’s move instruction is registered.
JOB CONTENT
0000 NOP
Move instruction 0001 MOVJ VJ=50.00 PL=1
is registered. 0002 END
MOVJ VJ=50.00 PL=1
Main Menu ShortCut
5 Press [ENTER].
To perform the movement steps shown below, set as follows:
P1 P2 P4 P5
P3 P6
Steps P2, P4, and P5 are simple passing points, and do not require accurate positioning.
Adding PL=1 to 8 to the move instructions of these steps moves the manipulator around the
inner corners, thereby reducing the cycle time.
If complete positioning is necessary as P3 or P6, add PL=0.
<EXAMPLE>
Passing points P2, P4, and P5:
MOVL V=138 PL=3
Positioning point P3 and P6:
MOVL V=138 PL=0
4-14
Registering Reference Point Instructions

Reference point instructions (REFP) set an auxiliary point such as a wall point for weaving.
Reference point Nos. 1 to 8 are assigned for each application. Follow these procedures to
register reference point instructions.
1 Select {JOB} under the main

menu.
2 Select {JOB}.
3 Move the cursor. Move the cursor to the line immediately before the position where
the reference point to be registered.
0003 MOVL V=558

Place immediately 0004 CALL JOB: TEST
before where 0005 MOVL V=138
reference point is
to be registered.
4 Grasp the Enable switch. The servo power is turned ON.
5 Press the axis operation key. Move the manipulator to the position to be registered as the refer-
ence point.
6 Press [REFP]. The reference point instruction is displayed in the input buffer line.
REFP 1
7 Change the reference point Move the cursor to the reference point number, and press
number. [SHIFT] + the cursor key to change the reference point number.
REFP 2
If you use the Numeric keys to input the reference point number,
press [SELECT] when the cursor is on the reference point num-
ber. The data input line appears. Input the number and press
[ENTER].
Ref-point no. =
REEP
8 Press [INSERT]. The [INSERT] key lamp lights.

When registering before the END instruction, pressing [INSERT]
is not needed.
9 Press [ENTER]. The REFP instruction is registered.
0003 MOVL V=558

0004 CALL JOB: TEST
Reference point 0005 REFP 1
is registered. 0006 MOVL V=138
4-15
Registering Timer Instructions

The timer instruction stops the manipulator for a specified time. Follow these procedures to
register timer instructions.

menu.
2 Select {JOB}.
3 Move the cursor. Move the cursor to the line immediately before the position where
the timer instruction is to be registered.
Line immediately 0003 MOVJ VJ=50.00

before where timer 0004 MOVL V=138
instruction is
to be registered.
4 Press [TIMER]. The TIMER instruction is displayed on the input buffer line.
TIMER T=1.00
5 Change the timer value. Move the cursor to the timer value and change it by pressing
[SHIFT] + the cursor key. The timer unit of adjustment is 0.01 sec-
onds.
TIMER T= 2.00
If you use the Numeric keys to input the timer value, press
[SELECT] when the cursor is on the timer value. The data input
line appears. Input the value and press [ENTER].
Time =
TIMER T=
6 Press [INSERT]. The [INSERT] key lamp lights.

When registering before the END instruction, pressing [INSERT]
is not needed.
7 Press [ENTER]. The TIMER instruction is registered.
0003 MOVJ VJ=50.00

Timer instruction 0004 TIMER T=2.00
4-16
Changing Timer Value

1 Press [TIMER].
2 Press [SELECT]. The DETAIL EDIT window for the TIMER instruciton appears.
DETAIL EDIT
TIMER
TIME T= 1.00
Main Menu ShortCut
3 Input the timer value on the

When is selected, the items available to be changed are dis-
instruction DETAIL EDIT win-
dow. played in the dialog box. Select the particular item to be changed.
DETIAL EDIT
TIMER
TIME T= 1.00
CONSTANT
I
I[ ]
Main Menu ShortCut
When a number is to be changed, move the cursor to the number

and press [SELECT]. Input the desired value using the Numeric
keys, and press [ENTER].
I=
TIMER T=
4 Press [ENTER]. The DETAIL EDIT window is closed and the JOB CONTENT win-
dow appears again. Modified content is displayed in the input
buffer line.
TIMER T=I003
5 Press [INSERT]. The [INSERT] key lamp lights. When registering before the END
instruction, pressing [INSERT] is not needed.
6 Press [ENTER]. The TIMER instruction is registered.

0003 MOVJ VJ=50.00
Timer instruction 0004 TIMER T=I003
4-17
4.2.4 Overlapping the First and Last Steps
Why is overlapping the first and last step necessary?

SUPPLE-
MENT
Assume that the job shown below is to be repeated. The manipulator moves from the last
step (Step 6) to the first step (Step 1). If Step 6 and Step 1 are the same position, the
manipulator moves directly Step 5 to Step 1, thereby improving work efficiency.
Step 6
Step 6 after
change
Step 5
Step 1
The position of step 6 is changed
to overlap with step 1.
Step 2 Step 4
Step 3
1 Move the cursor to the first

step line.
2 Press [FWD]. The manipulator moves to the first step position.
3 Move the cursor to the last The cursor starts blinking. When the cursor line position and the
step line. manipulator position are different in the JOB CONTENT window,
the cursor blinks.
4 Press [MODIFY]. The key lamp lights.
5 Press [ENTER]. The position data for the first step is registered on the line of the
last step. At this time, only the position data can be changed in
the last step. Interpolation type and play speed do not change.
4-18
4.3 Checking Steps
4.3 Checking Steps
4.3.1 FWD/BWD Key Operations

Check whether the position of the taught steps is appropriate using [FWD] or [BWD] on the
programming pendant. Each time [FWD] or [BWD] is pressed, the manipulator moves by a
single step.
[FWD] : Moves the manipulator ahead in step number sequence. Only the
move instruction is executed when [FWD] is pressed, but when
[INTERLOCK] + [FWD] are pressed, all instructions are executed.
When [SHIFT] + [FWD] are pressed, the move instructions are
executed in succession.
[BWD] : Moves the manipulator backward a step at a time in reverse step

number sequence. Only the move instruction is executed.
NOTE For safety, set manual speed at or below.
1 Move the cursor to the step to

be confirmed.
2 Press [FWD] or [BWD]. If [FWD] / [BWD] are continuously pressed, the manipulator
reaches the following / previous step and stops.
Even if [FWD] is pressed, the manipulator does not

NOTE proceed to the next job when an instruction other
than the move instruction is registered. To proceed
to the next job, perform either of the following oper-
ations:
When executing instructions other than the

move instruction : Press [INTERLOCK] +
[FWD].
When not executing instructions other than the
move instruction : Move the cursor to the next
move instruction and press [FWD].
When executing move instructions in succes-
sion : Press [SHIFT] + [FWD].
To skip over a step, press [SHIFT] + the cursor key to move the
cursor to desired position and press [FWD] or [BWD]. The manip-
ulator moves directly to the step where the cursor is currently
positioned.
4-19
4.3 Checking Steps
Precautions When Using FWD / BWD Operations

FWD Movements
• The manipulator moves in step number sequence. Only move instructions are executed
when [FWD] is pressed. To execute all instructions, press [INTERLOCK] + [FWD].
• The manipulator stops after playing a single cycle. It does not move after the END instruc-
tion is reached, even if [FWD] is pressed. However, at the end of a called job, the manip-
ulator moves the instruction next to the CALL instruction.
Called Jobs
Step 4
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 (RET instruction)
(END instruction)
Manipulator stops.
Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6

Step 7
(CALL instruction) (END instruction)
BWD Movements
• The manipulator moves in reverse step number sequence. Only move instructions are
executed.
• The manipulator stops after playing a single cycle. It does not move after the first step is
reached, even if [BWD] is pressed. However, at the beginning of a called job, the manipu-
lator moves to the instruction immediately before the CALL instruction.
Called Jobs
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5
Manipulator stops.
Step 3
Step 1 Step 2
(CALL instruction)
Circular Movements with FWD/BWD Key Operations

• The manipulator moves in a straight line to the first step of the circular interpolation.
• There must be three circular interpolation steps in a row to move the manipulator in an
arc.
• If [FWD] or [BWD] operation is restarted after being stopped to move the cursor or to per-
form search, the manipulator moves in a straight line to the next step.
• If [FWD] or [BWD] operation is restarted after being stopped to move the axis as shown in
the following, the manipulator moves in a straight line to P2, the next circular interpolation.
Circular motion is restored from P2 and P3.
Moves with linear interpolation.
: Motion path for FWD/BWD key operation

P2 : Motion using axis keys
: Motion path during playback
P1 P3
4-20
4.3 Checking Steps
Spline Curve Movements with FWD/BWD Operations

• The manipulator moves in a straight line to the first step of spline interpolation.
• There must be three spline curve motion steps in a row to perform a spline curve opera-
tion.
• Depending on the position where the [FWD] / [BWD] operation is performed, the alarm
“IRREGULAR DISTANCES BETWEEN TEACHING POINTS” may occur. Note that FWD/
BWD inching operations change the path of the manipulator and caution is therefore
required. Performing these operations also increases the likelihood that the “IRREGU-
LAR DISTANCES BETWEEN TEACHING POINTS” will occur.
• If the [FWD] or [BWD] operation is restarted after being stopped to move the cursor or
perform a search, the manipulator moves in a straight line to the next step.
• If the [FWD] or [BWD] operation is restarted after being stopped to move the axis as
shown in the following, the manipulator moves in a straight line to P2, the next spline
curve motion step. Spline curve motion is restored from P2 onward. However, the path fol-
lowed between P2 and P3 is somewhat different from the path followed at playback.
Linear motion
P2 : Motion path for FWD/BWD key operation

: Motion using axis keys
: Motion path during playback
P1
P3
• If the manipulator is moved to P3 with [FWD], stopped, and then returned to P2 with
[BWD], the path followed between P2 and P3 is different for each of the following: the first
FWD operation, the BWD operation, and the consequent FWD operation.
P2
P4
P1
P3
4-21
4.3 Checking Steps
Selecting Manual Speed

When [FWD] or [BWD] is pressed, the manipulator moves at the manual speed selected at
that time. Selected manual speed can be checked by the manual speed indication on the pro-
gramming pendant.
JOB CONTENT
Manual speed is set with [FAST] and [SLOW]. FWD operation can be performed at a high
speed by pressing [HIGH SPEED]. Follow these procedures to select a manual speed.
• Each time [FAST] is pressed, the speed is changed to the next setting in the following
sequence: INCH, SLW, MED, and FST.
FAST “INCH” “SLOW” “MED” “FST”

MANUAL SPEED
• Each time [SLOW] is pressed, the speed is changed to the next setting in the following
sequence: FST, MED, SLW, and INCH.
MANUAL SPEED
SLOW “FST” “MED” “SLOW” “INCH”
NOTE • FWD/BWD operation is performed with SLW speed even if INCH is selected.
• [HIGH SPEED] is available only for the FWD operation but not for BWD operation.
Moving to Reference Point

To check the position of a taught reference point, follow these procedures to move the manip-
ulator to the reference point.
1 Move the cursor to the refer-

ence point instruction line to
be checked.
2 Press [REFP] + [FWD]. The manipulator moves to the reference point of the cursor line.
4-22
4.3 Checking Steps
Test Operations
Playback operations can be simulated in the teach mode with test operations. This function is
convenient for checking continuous paths and operation instructions.
Test operation differs in the following ways from actual playback in the play mode.
• Operation speeds greater than the maximum teaching speed are reduced to the maxi-
NOTE mum teaching speed.
• Only machine lock is available among special operations for playback in the play mode.
• Work instruction output, such as arc output, is not executed.
Test operation is performed by pressing [INTERLOCK] and [TEST START]. For safety pur-
poses, these keys will only function while the keys are held down.
NOTE Always check safety conditions before pressing [INTERLOCK] + [TEST START] to start
the manipulator in motion.

menu.
2 Press {JOB}. The test operation JOB CONTENT window appears.
3 Press [INTERLOCK] + [TEST The manipulator starts the test cycle operation. However, after the
START]. operation starts, the motion continues even if [INTERLOCK] is
released. The manipulator moves only while these keys are held
down.
The manipulator stops immediately when [TEST START] is
released.
4-23
4.4 Modifying Steps
4.4 Modifying Steps
Begin move instruction Begin move instruction

insertion. deletion.
Move step cursor to

Move cursor to location of
location where you want
instruction to be deleted.
to insert the instruction.
Perform axis operations. Press [DELETE].
Set interpolation type. Press [ENTER].
Set play speed. Deletion completed.
Set position level when

necessary.
Press [INSERT].
Press [ENTER].
Insertion completed.
4-24
4.4 Modifying Steps
Begin Move instruction

modification.
Move step cursor to step

to be modified.
Modifying position data Modifying interpolation type
Move to position to be Perform axis

modified using the operations to position
axis operation keys. to be modified.
Press [MODIFY]. Delete MOV

instruction.
Press [MOTION TYPE]

Press [ENTER]. and select motion
type.
Modification Insert MOV

completed. Instruction.
Modification
completed.
NOTE It is not possible to change a move instruction to a reference point instruction and vice
versa.
4-25
4.4 Modifying Steps
Begin REFP instruction

modification.
Deletions Modifications
Move step cursor to the Move step cursor to the

REFP instruction to be REFP instruction to be
deleted,and move the modified.
manipulator to the
position.
Perform axis operations.

Press [DELETE].
Press [REFP].
Press [ENTER].
Press [MODIFY].
Deletion completed.
Press [ENTER].
Modification completed.
4-26
4.4 Modifying Steps
Begin TIMER Instruction

Modification.
Deletions Modification
Move edit cursor to the Move edit cursor to the

TIMER instruction to be TIMER instruction to be
deleted. modified.
Press [DELETE]. Press [TIMER].
Press [ENTER]. Enter timer value.
Deletion completed. Press [MODIFY].
Press [ENTER].
Modification completed.
4-27
4.4 Modifying Steps
4.4.1 Displaying the JOB CONTENT Window for Editing

Currently Called Up Job

menu.
2 Select {JOB}. The JOB CONTENT window appears.
Calling Up Other Jobs
NOTE In any other than the teach mode, set the mode switch to “TEACH.”

menu.
2 Select {SELECT JOB}. The JOB LIST window appears.
JOB LIST
TEST3A-! TEST03 TEST3A

TEST02 TEST TEST01
3 Select the job name to be

called.
4-28
4.4 Modifying Steps
4.4.2 Inserting Move Instructions
NOTE Move instructions cannot be inserted when the servo power is OFF.
Step where move instruction is to be inserted
Path after insertion
Path before insertion
1 Move the cursor to the line

0006 MOVL V=276
immediately before the insert Place immediately 0007 TIMER T=1.00
position. before where 0008 DOUT OT#(1) ON
move instruction 0009 MOVJ VJ=100.0
is to be added.
2 Press the axis operation key. Turn ON the servo power and press the axis operation key to
move the manipulator to the position to be inserted.
NOTE Confirm the move instruction on the input buffer line

and set desired interpolation type and play speed.
3 Press [INSERT]. The key lamp will light.
When the inserting position is immediately before

NOTE the END instruction, pressing [INSERT] is not
needed.
4 Press [ENTER]. The move instruction is inserted after the cursor line.
0006 MOVL V=276
Move instruction 0007 TIMER T=1.00
is added. 0008 DOUT OT#(1) ON
0009 MOVL V=558
0010 MOVJ VJ=100.0
<Examples of Inserting a Move Instruction>

When a move instruction is inserted in the following job, it is
placed on different lines according to the setting in the
TEACHING CONDITION window.
Before adding
Cursor line 0006 MOVL V=276
0007 TIMER T=1.00
0008 DOUT OT#(1) ON
0009 MOVJ VJ=100.0
After adding: when inserting before the next step After adding: when inserting after the cursor line
0006 MOVL V=276 0006 MOVL V=276
0007 TIMER T=1.00 Add 0007 MOVL V=558
0008 DOUT OT#(1) ON 0008 TIMER T=1.00
Add 0009 MOVL V=558 0009 DOUT OT#(1) ON
0010 MOVJ VJ=100.0 0010 MOVJ VJ=100.0
4-29
4.4 Modifying Steps
Positions where the move instructions are inserted.

NOTE
The default location for insertions is for “before the next step,” but it is also possible to
insert “after the cursor line.” This setting is made in the “Move Instruction Register Method”
in the TEACHING CONDITION window.
4.4.3 Deleting Move Instructions
Step where move instruction is to be deleted
Path before deletion
Path after deletion
1 Move the cursor to the move

0003 MOVL V=138
instruction to be deleted. Move instruction 0004 MOVL V=558
to be deleted 0005 MOVJ VJ=50.00
If the manipulator position differs from the cursor

NOTE position on the window, the cursor blinks. Stop the
blinking by either of the following procedures.
• Press [FWD] and move the manipulator to the
position where the move instruction is to be
deleted.
• Press [MODIFY] [ENTER] to change the posi-
tion data of the blinking cursor position to the cur-
rent manipulator position.
2 Press [DELETE]. The key lamp will blink.
3 Press [ENTER]. The step indicated by cursor line is deleted.
0003 MOVL V=138

0004 MOVJ VJ=50.00
4-30
4.4 Modifying Steps
4.4.4 Modifying Move Instructions

Modifying Position Data
1 Move the cursor to the MOV Display the JOB CONTENT window and move the cursor to the
instruction to be modified. move instruction to be changed.
2 Press the axis operation key. Turn ON the servo power and press the axis operation key to
move the manipulator to the desired position.
3 Press [MODIFY]. The key lamp will blink.
4 Press [ENTER]. The position data in the present position is registered.
For MOV instructions for which position variables

SUPPLE-
MENT have been set, the position variables will not be
changed.
Modifying Interpolation Type
NOTE Modifying only interpolation type is impossible. The interpolation type can be modified as a
choice for modifying the position data.
1 Move the cursor to the move Display the JOB CONTENT window, and move the cursor to the
instruction to be modified. move instruction for which interpolation type is to be changed.
2 Press [FWD]. Turn ON the servo power and press [FWD] to move the manipula-
tor to the position of the move instruction.
4 Press [ENTER]. The cursor line step is deleted.
5 Press [MOTION TYPE]. Press [MOTION TYPE] to change the interpolation type. Each
time [MOTION TYPE] is pressed, the input buffer line instruction
alternates.
6 Press [INSERT].
7 Press [ENTER]. The interpolation type and position data are changed at the same
time.
4-31
4.4 Modifying Steps
4.4.5 Undo Operation after Editing a Move Instruction

After inserting, deleting, or modifying a move instruction, the operation can be undone.
The undo operation can be performed even after the manipulator is moved by the FWD or
NOTE BWD operation or test operation after inserting, deleting, or modifying a move instruction.
However, the undo operation cannot be performed if other instructions are edited or a job is
executed in the play mode after editing the move instruction.
When the undo operation is invalid, it cannot be selected by pressing [ASSIST]. The undo
operation works only for the last edited instruction only.
1 Press [ASSIST]. The assist menu appears.

UNDO
HELP
2 Select {UNDO}. The last operation is undone.
4.4.6 Modifying Reference Point Instructions

Deleting Reference Point Instructions
If the manipulator position differs from the cursor position, an error message is displayed.
NOTE If this occurs, follow either of the procedures below.
• Press [REFP] + [FWD] to move the manipulator to the position to be deleted.
• Press [MODIFY] then [ENTER] to change the reference point position data to the current
position of the manipulator.

ence point instruction to be
deleted.
3 Press [ENTER]. The reference point instruction at the cursor line is deleted.
4-32
4.4 Modifying Steps
Modifying Reference Point Instructions

ence point instruction to be
modified.
2 Move the manipulator with the Turn ON the servo power and use the axis operation keys to
axis operation keys. move the manipulator to the desired position.
3 Press [REFP].
4 Press [MODIFY]. The key lamp will light.
5 Press [ENTER]. The reference point instruction at the cursor line is changed.
4.4.7 Modifying Timer Instructions

Deleting Timer Instructions
1 Move the cursor to the timer

0003 MOVJ VJ=50.00
instruction to be deleted. Timer instruction 0004 TIMER T=0.50
to be deleted 0005 MOVL V=138
2 Press [DELETE]. The key lamp will light.
3 Press [ENTER]. The timer instruction at the cursor line is deleted.
0003 MOVJ VJ=50.00

0004 MOVL V=138
4-33
4.4 Modifying Steps
Modifying Timer Instructions
1 Move the cursor to the timer

0003 MOVJ VJ=50.00
instruction to be modified. 0004 TIMER T=0.50
0005 MOVL VJ=138
0006 MOVL VJ=138
2 Press [TIMER].
0003 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0004 TIMER T=0.50
0005 MOVL VJ=138
0006 MOVL VJ=138
3 Move the cursor to the input Move the cursor to the input buffer line timer value and press
buffer line timer value. [SHIFT] + the cursor key to set the data. To use the Numeric keys
to input data, move the cursor to the input buffer line timer value
and press [SELECT].
TIMER T= 0.50
4 Change the timer value.
5 Press [MODIFY]. This key lamp will light.
6 Press [ENTER]. The timer instruction at the cursor line is changed.

0003 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0004 TIMER T=1.00
0005 MOVL VJ=138
0006 MOVL VJ=138
4-34
4.5 Modifying Jobs
4.5 Modifying Jobs
4.5.1 Calling Up a Job

menu.

JOB LIST

TEST02 TEST TEST01
3 Select the desired job.
4.5.2 Windows Related to Job

There are five types of job windows. Jobs can be checked and edited in these windows.
• JOB HEADER Window

Comments, data and time of registration, edit prohibit status, and so on are displayed and
edited.
• JOB CONTENT Window
The content of the registered job can be displayed and edited.
• COMMAND POSITION Window
The taught data is displayed.
• JOB LIST Window
The registered job is sorted alphabetically, then displayed, and the job is selected.
• JOB CAPACITY Window
The number of registered jobs, amount of memory, number of steps used, etc. is shown.
JOB HEADER Window


menu.
2 Select {JOB}.
4-35
4.5 Modifying Jobs
3 Select {DISPLAY} under the

menu.
4 Select {JOB HEADER}. The JOB HEADER window appears. Scroll the window using the
cursor.
JOB HEADER
c JOB NAME: TEST01
d COMM. : This job is test job
e DATE : 2003/05/20 12:00
f CAPACITY : 1024 BYTE
g LINES : 30 LINE
h STEPS : 20 STEP
i EDIT LOCK : OFF
j TO SAVE TO FD : NOT DONE
k GROUP SET : R1
Main Menu ShortCut
JOB NAME
Displays the name of the current job.
COMM
Displays the comments attached to the current job. This
can be edited in this window.
DATE
Displays the date and time of the last editing of the job.
CAPACITY
Displays the amount of memory that is being used to reg-
ister this job.
LINES
Displays the total number of instructions registered in this
job.
STEPS
Displays the total number of move instructions registered
in this job.
EDIT LOCK
Displays whether the edit prohibit setting for this job is at
ON or OFF. This can be changed in this window.
TO SAVE TO FD
Displays “DONE” if the contents of the job are saved to a
floppy disk since the date and time of the last editing oper-
ation, and displays “NOT DONE” if they are not saved.
The job is marked as “DONE” only if it is saved as an
independent job or as a related job. If it is saved in a
CMOS batch operation, it is not marked as “DONE.”
GROUP SET
Displays the setting status for the group axes that this job con-
trols. If the master axis is specified, the master axis is high-
lighted.
To return to the JOB CONTENT window from the
SUPPLE-
MENT JOB HEADER window, select {DISPLAY} from the
menu and then select {JOB CONTENT}.
4-36
4.5 Modifying Jobs
JOB CONTENT Window

1 Select {JOB} under the

main menu.
 (Left) : The cursor is moved to the address area.
(Right): The cursor is moved to the instruction area.
JOB CONTENT
0000 NOP
0001 SET B000 0
0002 SET B001 1
c 0003 MOVJ VJ=80.00 d
0004 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0005 DOUT OGH#(13) B002
0007 MOVL C00002 V=880.0 CV#(1) CTP=0.662
0009 TIMER T=3.0
0010 MOVL V=880.0
0011 MOVL V=880.0
0012 MOVL V=880.0
MOVJ VJ=80.00
Address Area
Displays line numbers.
Instruction Area
Displays instructions, additional items, and comments. Line
editing is possible.
4-37
4.5 Modifying Jobs
COMMAND POSITION Window

1 Select {ROBOT} under the

main menu.
2 Select {COMMAND POSI- Edit operations cannot be conducted from this window, but the
TION}. taught play speed and position data can be viewed on this win-
dow.
COMMAND POSITION
c INTR: ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ SPD: 558 cm/min d
[CMD] TOOL: ∗∗ [CURR] TOOL: ∗∗
R1:S ∗ R1:S 0
L ∗ L 0
U ∗ U 0 f
e R ∗ R 0
B ∗ B 0
T ∗ T 0
Interpolation
Displays the interpolation type.
Speed
Displays the play speed.
Command Position
Displays the tool file number and position data that has
been taught for this job. Steps which have no position
data, such as move instructions which use position vari-
ables, are marked with an asterisk (*).
Current Data
Displays the current tool file number and position of the manip-
ulator.
4-38
4.5 Modifying Jobs
JOB CAPACITY Window


main menu.
2 Select {JOB CAPACITY}.
JOB CAPACITY
c NUMBER OF JOBS : 9
d USED MEMORY : 2360 BYTES

REST : 841408 BYTES
e STEPS : 50
REMAIN STEPS : 45611
EDITING BUFFER : UNUSED
NUMBER OF JOBS
Displays the total number of jobs currently registered in
the memory of NX100.
USED MEMORY
Displays the total amount of memory used in the NX100.
STEPS
Displays the total number of used steps.
4-39
4.6 Editing Instructions
The content of editing differs depending on where the cursor is in the address area or instruc-
tion area.
JOB CONTENT
CONTROL GROUP: R1 TOOL: *
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=25.00 PL=0 NWAIT ACC=20 DCC=20
c 0002 MOVJ VJ=25.00 d
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0004 ARCON ASF#(1)
0005 END
MOVJ VJ=50
When the cursor is in the address area

Instructions can be inserted, deleted, or modified.
When the cursor is in the instruction area
Date of additional items of already-registerd instructions can be modified, inserted, or
deleted.
Editing additional items only is called “line editing.”
When inserting or modifying instructions, input the instruction with the function keys such as
[TIMER], etc. or using the instruction list dialog box. The selected instruction is displayed on
the input buffer line with the same additional items as registered previously.
4.6.1 Instruction Group

The instructions are divided into eight groups by processing or each work.
By pressing [INFORM LIST] INFORM

LIST
, the instruction group list dialog box appears.
JOB CONTENT
IN/OUT
CONTROL GROUP: R1 TOOL: * CONTROL
0000 NOP DEVICE
0002 MOVJ VJ=25.00 MOTION
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50 ARITH
0004 ARCON ASF#(1)
0005 END SHIFT
OTHER
SAME
PRIOR
MOVJ VJ=50
4-40
Instruction
Display Contents Example
Group
IN/OUT I/O Instructions Controls input and output DOUT, WAIT

CONTROL Control Controls processing or each work JUMP, TIMER
Instructions
DEVICE Work Operates arc welding, spot welding, handling, ARCON, WVON,
Instructions painting, etc. SVSPOT, SPYON
MOTION Move Moves the manipulator MOVJ, REFP
Instructions
ARITH Operating Performs arithmetic calculation ADD, SET
Instructions
SHIFT Shift Shifts the teaching point SFTON, SFTOF
Instructions
SENS Sensor Instructions related to the sensor COMARCON
(Option) Instructions
(Option)
OTHER Other Instructions for functions other than above SHCKSET
Instructions
SAME - Specifies the instruction where the cursor is.
PRIOR - Specifies the previously-registered instruction.
By selecting a group, the instruction list dialog box of the selected group appears.
IN/OUT
JUMP CONTROL
CALL DEVICE
TIMER MOTION
LABEL ARITH
COMMENT SHIFT
RET OTHER
SAME
PRIOR
4-41
4.6.2 Inserting Instructions

1 Move the cursor to the Move the cursor to the line immediately before where the instruc-
address area in the JOB CON- tion is to be inserted, in the teach mode.
TENT window.
Line before 0000 NOP
where instruction 0001 MOVJ VJ=25.00 PL=0 NWAIT ACC=20 DCC=20
is to be added. 0002 MOVJ VJ=25.00
2 Press [INFORM LIST]. The INFORM command list appears, and an underline is dis-
played beneath the line number in the address area.
JOB CONTENT
IN/OUT
CONTROL GROUP: R1 TOOL: * CONTROL
0000 NOP DEVICE
0002 MOVJ VJ=25.00 MOTION
0004 ARCON ASF#(1)
0005 END SHIFT
OTHER
SAME
PRIOR
MOVJ VJ=50
3 Select the instruction group. The instruction list dialog box appears. The selected instruction is
displayed on the input buffer line with the same additional items
as registered previously.
JOB CONTENT
IN/OUT
CONTROL GROUP: R1 JUMP
TOOL: * CONTROL
0000 NOP CALL DEVICE
0002 MOVJ VJ=25.00 TIMER MOTION
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50 LABEL ARITH
0004 ARCON ASF#(1)
0005 END COMMENT SHIFT
RET OTHER
SAME
PRIOR
JUMP *LABEL
4 Select the instruction.
4-42
5 Change the data of additional <When Nothing is to be Changed>

items or variables as required. Proceed to Step 6.
<When Additional Items are to be edited>

• Changing numeric data
Move the cursor to the desired item and press [SHIFT] + the
cursor key to increase or decrease the value.
PULSE OT#( 2 )
To directly input the value using Numeric keys, press [SELECT]

to display the input buffer line.
OUTPUT NO.
PULSE OT#( )
Type the value and press [ENTER]. The value on the input
buffer line is changed.
• Adding, modifying, or deleting an item

To add, modify, or delete an additional item, move the cursor to
the instruction on the input buffer line and press [SELECT]. The
DETAIL EDIT
PULSE
OUTPUT NO. OT#( ) 2
TIME UNUSED
PULSE OT#(2)
Main Menu ShortCut
To add an item, move the cursor to “UNUSED” and press

[SELECT]. The selection dialog box appears.
Move the cursor to the desired item and press [SELECT].
To delete an item, move the cursor to the item to be deleted and

select “UNUSED.”
DETAIL EDIT
PULSE
OUTPUT NO. OT#( ) 2
TIME T=
UNUSED
PULSE OT#(2)
Main Menu ShortCut
4-43
5 (cont’d) • Changing the data type

To change the data type of an additional item, move the cursor
to of the item and press [SELECT]. The data type list
appears. Select the desired data type.
DETIAL EDIT
PULSE
OUTPUT NO. OT#( ) 2
TIME CONSTANT
I
I[ ]
PULSE OT#(2)
Main Menu ShortCut
After additional items have been added, modified, or deleted as

required, press [ENTER]. The DETAIL EDIT window closes and
the JOB CONTENT window appears.
6 Press [INSERT] and [ENTER]. The instruction displayed in the input buffer line is inserted.
When adding immediately before the END instruction, pressing
[INSERT] is not needed.
JOB CONTENT
IN/OUT
CONTROL GROUP:R1 JUMP :* CONTROL
0000 NOP CALL DEVICE

TIMER MOTION
0002 PULSE OT#(2)
0003 MOVJ VJ=25.00 LABEL ARITH
0004 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0005 ARCON ASF#(1) COMMENT SHIFT
0006 END RET OTHER
SAME
PRIOR
JUMP *LABEL
4-44
4.6.3 Deleting Instructions

1 Move the cursor to the Move the cursor to the instruction line to be deleted, in the teach
address area in the JOB CON- mode.
TENT window.
2 Move the cursor to the delet-

ing line in the address area.
0020 MOVL V=138
The line desired 0021 PULSE OT#(2) T=I001
to be deleted 0022 MOVJ VJ=100.00
3 Press [DELETE] and The instruction is deleted and the following lines move up.
[ENTER].
0021 MOVL V=138
The following
0022 MOVJ VJ=100.00
lines move up.
0023 DOUT OT#(1) ON
4.6.4 Modifying Instructions

1 Move the cursor to the Move the cursor to the instruction line to be modified, in the teach
address area in the JOB CON- mode.
TENT window.
0022 MOVJ VJ=100.00
Instruction line 0023 DOUT OT#(1) ON
to be changed 0024 MOVJ VJ=50.00
2 Press [INFORM LIST]. The INFORM command list appears, and an underline is dis-
played beneath the line number in the address area.
0017 TIMER T=1.00 IN/OUT
0018 MOVJ VJ=12.50
CONTROL
0019 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0020 MOVL V=138 DEVICE
0021 PULSE OT#(2) T=I001 MOTION
0023 DOUT OT#(1) ON
SHIFT
OTHER
SAME
PRIOR
3 Select the instruction group. The instruction list dialog box appears. The selected instruction is
displayed on the input buffer line with the same additional items
as registered previously.
0017 TIMER T=1.00 IN/OUT
0018 MOVJ VJ=12.50
DOUT CONTROL
0019 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0020 MOVL V=138 DIN DEVICE
0021 PULSE OT#(2) T=I001 WAIT MOTION
0022 MOVJ VJ=100.00 PULSE ARITH
0023 DOUT OT#(1) ON
SHIFT
PULSE OT#(1) OTHER
SAME
PRIOR
4 Select the instruction to be

modified.
4-45
5 Change the data of additional <Editing Additional Items>

items or variables as required. • Changing numeric data
Move the cursor to the desired item and press [SHIFT] + the
cursor key to increase or decrease the value.
PULSE OT#( 2 )
To directly input the value using Numeric keys, press [SELECT]

to display the input buffer line.
OUTPUT NO.
PULSE OT#( )
Type the value and press [ENTER]. The value on the input
buffer line is changed.
• Adding, modifying, or deleting an item

To add, modify, or delete an additional item, move the cursor to
the instruction on the input buffer line and press [SELECT]. The
DETAIL EDIT
PULSE
OUTPUT NO. OT#( ) 2
TIME UNUSED
PULSE OT#(2)
To add an item, move the cursor to “UNUSED” and press

[SELECT]. The selection dialog box appears.
Move the cursor to the desired item and press [SELECT].
To delete an item, move the cursor to the item to be deleted and

select “UNUSED.”
DETAIL EDIT
PULSE
OUTPUT NO. OT#( ) 2
TIME T=
UNUSED
PULSE OT#(2)
4-46
5 (cont’d) • Changing the data type

To change the data type of an additional item, move the cursor
to of the item and press [SELECT]. The data type list
appears. Select the desired data type.
DETAIL EDIT
PULSE
OUTPUT NO. OT#( ) 2
TIME CONSTANT
I
I[ ]
PULSE OT#(2)
After additional items have been added, modified, or deleted as

required, press [ENTER]. The DETAIL EDIT window closes and
the JOB CONTENT window appears.
6 Press [MODIFY] and The instruction is modified to the instruction displayed in the input
[ENTER]. buffer line.
DETAIL EDIT
IN/OUT
PULSE
DOUT CONTROL
OUTPUT NO. OT#( ) 2
TIME UNUSED
CONSTANT DIN DEVICE
I WAIT MOTION
I[ ]
PULSE ARITH
SHIFT
OTHER
SAME
PRIOR
PULSE OT#(2)
Main Menu ShortCut
4.6.5 Undo Operation after Modifying Instructions

After modifying an instruction, the operation can be undone.

UNDO
HELP
4-47
4.6.6 Viewing Description for an Instruction

When registering an instruction, the description for the specified instruction can be viewed.
1 Press [INFORM LIST]. The instruction list dialog box appears.

IN/OUT
CONTROL
DEVICE
MOTION
ARITH
SHIFT
OTHER
SAME
PRIOR
2 Select the instruction group. The instruction list of the selected group appears.
IN/OUT
JUMP CONTROL
CALL DEVICE
TIMER MOTION
LABEL ARITH
COMMENT SHIFT
RET OTHER
SAME
PRIOR
3 Move the cursor to the The description window for the instruciton where the cursor
desired instruction and press points appears.
[ASSIST].
Instruction explanation
JUMP
CONTROL
Instruction Explanation
JUMP Jump to label or job
CALL Read the specified job
TIMER Stop the specified time
LABEL Label
COMMENT Comment
RET Return to the call job
4 Press [CANCEL]. The description window closes and the instruction list appears
again.
4-48
4.6.7 Modifying Additional Numeric Data

1 Mote the cursor to the instruc-

tion area in the JOB CON-
TENT window.
2 Select the line where the num- The selected line can now be edited.
ber data is to be modified.
0017 TIMER T=1.00
0018 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0019 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0020 MOVL V=138
Number data 0021 PULSE OT#(2) T=I001
to be modified 0022 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0023 DOUT OT#(1) ON
3 Move the cursor to the

numeric data to be modified.
4 Input the desired number. Press [SHIFT] + the cursor key to increase or decrease the value.
To directly input the number, press [SELECT]. The input buffer
line appears. Type the number and press [ENTER].
PULSE OT#( 2 ) T=I001
5 Press [ENTER]. The numeric data is modified.

0017 TIMER T=1.00
0018 MOVJ VJ=12.50
Instruction line 0019 MOVJ VJ=50.00
for which 0020 MOVL V=138
numeric data 0021 PULSE OT#(1) T=I001
was changed. 0022 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0023 DOUT OT#(1) ON
4-49
4.6.8 Modifying Additional Items

1 Move the cursor to the instruc-

TENT window.
2 Select the instruction line for The selected line can now be edited.
which the additional item is to
0017 TIMER T=1.00
be modified. 0018 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0019 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0020 MOVL V=138
Instruction line 0021 WAIT IN#(1)=ON
for which additional 0022 MOVJ VJ=100.00
item is to be modified. 0023 DOUT OT#(1) ON
3 Select the instruction. The DETAIL EDIT window appears.

DETAIL EDIT
WAIT
WAIT TARGET IN#( ) 1
CONDITION =
CONDITION ON
TIME UNUSED
4 Select the additional item to be The selection dialog box appears.

modified.
DETAIL EDIT
WAIT
WAIT TARGET IN#( IN#(
) ) 1
CONDITION OT#( ) =
CONDITION SIN#( )ON
TIME SOUT#( )
IG#( )
5 Select the desired additional The modified additional item is displayed on the DETAIL EDIT
item. window.
DETAIL EDIT
WAIT
WAIT TARGET OT#( ) 1
CONDITION =
CONDITION ON
TIME UNUSED
6 Press [ENTER]. The DETAIL EDIT window closes, and the JOB CONTENT win-
dow appears.
7 Press [ENTER]. Contents of the input buffer line are registered on the cursor line
of the instruction area.
0017 TIMER T=1.00
0018 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0019 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0020 MOVL V=138
Instruction line 0021 WAIT OT#(1)=ON
item was modified. 0023 DOUT OT#(1) ON
4-50
4.6.9 Inserting Additional Items


TENT window.
2 Select the instruction line for The selected line can now be edited.
which the additional item is to
0017 TIMER T=1.00
be inserted. 0018 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0019 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0020 MOVL V=138
Instruction line 0021 WAIT IN#(1)=ON
item is to be added. 0023 DOUT OT#(1) ON

DETAIL EDIT
WAIT
WAIT TARGET OT#( ) 1
CONDITION =
CONDITION ON
TIME UNUSED
4 Select the additional item to be The selection dialog box appears.

inserted.
DETAIL EDIT
WAIT
CONDITION T= =
CONDITION UNUSEDON
TIME UNUSED
5 Select inserting additional The additional item is inserted.

item.
DETAIL EDIT
WAIT
CONDITION =
CONDITION ON
TIME T= 0.01
When the additional item needs the numeric data, move the cur-
sor to the number and press [SELECT]. The input buffer line
appears. Type the number and press [ENTER].
Time =
WAIT IN#(1)=ON T=
dow appears.
7 Press [ENTER]. Contents of the the input buffer line are registered on the cursor
line of the instruction area.
0017 TIMER T=1.00
0018 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0019 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0020 MOVL V=138
Instruction line 0021 WAIT IN#(1)=ON T=0.50
item was added. 0023 DOUT OT#(1) ON
4-51
4.6.10 Deleting Additional Items
NOTE This operation cannot be used for the additional item which is locked.

TENT window.
2 Select the line where the addi- The selected line can be now be edited.
tional item is to be deleted.
0017 TIMER T=1.00
0018 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0019 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0020 MOVL V=138
Instruction line 0021 WAIT IN#(1)=ON T=1.00
item is to be deleted. 0023 DOUT OT#(1) ON

DETAIL EDIT
WAIT
CONDITION =
CONDITION ON
TIME T= 0.01
4 Select the addtional item to be The selection dialog box appears.

deleted.
DETAIL EDIT
WAIT
CONDITION T= =
CONDITION UNUSED ON
TIME T=1.00
5 Select “UNUSED.” “UNUSED” is displayed on the DETAIL EDIT window.

DETAIL EDIT
WAIT
CONDITION =
CONDITION ON
TIME UNUSED
dow appears.
7 Press [ENTER]. Contents of the input buffer line are registered on the cursor line
of the instruction area.
0017 TIMER T=1.00
0018 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0019 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0020 MOVL V=138
Instruction line for 0021 WAIT IN#(1)=ON
which the additional 0022 MOVJ VJ=100.00
item was deleted. 0023 DOUT OT#(1) ON
4-52
4.6.11 Undo Operation after Modifying Additional Items

After modifying an additional item, the operation can be undone.

UNDO
HELP
4-53
4.7 Editing Jobs
4.7 Editing Jobs
The following five operations are to edit jobs.
Copy :Copies a specified range to the buffer.

Cut :Copies a specified range from a job to the buffer, and deletes it in
a job.
Paste :Inserts the contents of the buffer into a job.
Reverse Paste :Reverses the order of the contents of the buffer, and inserts them
into a job. (Refer to the following figure.)
Base Reverse Paste :Reverses the order of the contents of the buffer and adjusts the to-
and-from speeds same, and inserts them into a job.
(Refer to the following figure.)
V=100 V=50 V=80

:
MOVL V=100 ;Move to at V=100
MOVL V=50 ;Move to at V= 50 V=30
:
V=70
Excute Reverse Paste
　：
MOVL V=100 ;Move to at V=100 V=100 V=50 V=80
MOVL V=50 ;Move to at V= 50 V=??
MOVL V=80 ;Move to at V=80 V=100 V=50
V=30
MOVL V=70 ;Move to at V=70 V=80
MOVL V=80 ;Move to at V=80 The speed and interpolation are
MOVL V=50 ;Move to at V= 50 different going and returning.
: V=30
V=70
Execute Base Reverse Paste

　：
;Move to at V=100
V=100 V=50 V=80
MOVL V=100
MOVL V=50 ;Move to at V= 50
MOVL V=80 ;Move to at V=80 V=50 V=80
V=30
MOVL V=70 ;Move to at V=70 V=30
MOVL V=70 ;Move to at V=70 The speed and interpolation are
MOVL V=30 ;Move to at V=30 the same going and returning.
MOVL V=80 ;Move to at V= 80
: V=70 V=70
4-54
4.7 Editing Jobs
0000 NOP
MOVJ VJ=50.00 0001 'TEST JOB
Copy 0002 MOVJ VJ=50.00
TIMER T=1.00
MOVL V=100 Cut 0003 TIMER T=1.00
0004 MOVL V=100
0005 MOVL V=100
0000 NOP
0001 'TEST JOB
0005 MOVL V=100
0000 NOP
0001 'TEST JOB
Paste 0002 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0003 TIMER T=1.00
The buffer content is inserted. 0004 MOVL V=100
0005 MOVL V=100
0000 NOP
0001 'TEST JOB
Reverse paste 0002 MOVL V=100
0003 TIMER T=1.00
Buffer content order is reversed and inserted. 0004 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0005 MOVL V=100
4-55
4.7 Editing Jobs
4.7.1 Selecting the Range

After setting the range, Copy and Delete can be performed.

JOB EDIT UTILITY
tion area in the JOB CON- DISPLAY
TENT window. JOB CONTENT

0000 NOP
0001 SET B000 0
0002 SET B001 1
0003 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0004 MOVJ VJ=80.00 Move the cursor to
0005 DOUT OGH#(13) B002 instruction area.
0007 MOVL C00002 V=880.0 CV#(1) CTP=0.662
0009 TIMER T=3.0
0010 MOVL V=880.0
0011 MOVL V=880.0
0012 MOVL V=880.0
2 Move the cursor to the start The range specification begins, and the address is displayed in
line and press [SHIFT] + reverse.
[SELECT].
JOB CONTENT
0000 NOP
0001 SET B000 0
0002 SET B001 1
0003 MOVJ VJ=80.00
Start line 0004 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0005 DOUT OGH#(13) B002
End line 0006 DOUT OT#(41) ON
0007 MOVL C00002 V=880.0 CV#(1) CTP=0.662
0009 TIMER T=3.0
0010 MOVL V=880.0
0011 MOVL V=880.0
0012 MOVL V=880.0
3 Move the cursor to the end Moving the cursor effects to the range. Up to the line specified by
line. the cursor is the range.
4-56
4.7 Editing Jobs
4.7.2 Copying
Before copying, the range to be copied has to be specified.
1 Select {EDIT} under the menu. The pull-down menu appears.

COPY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: TESTCUT STEP NO: 0003
PASTE
0001 SET B000 0
0002 SET B001 1 PASTE
REVERSE
0003 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0004 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0005 DOUT OGH#(13) B002
0006 WAIT IF IN#(5)=ON
0007 MOVL V=880.0
0009 TIMER T=3.0
0010 MOVL V=880.0
0011 MOVL V=880.0
0012 MOVL V=880.0
MOVJ VJ=50.00 PL=1
Main Menu ShortCut
2 Select {COPY}. The specified range is copied to the buffer.
4.7.3 Cutting
Before cutting, the range to be cut has to be specified.

COPY
JOB CONTENT
PASTE
0000 NOP
REVERSE
0002 SET B001 1
0003 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0004 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0005 DOUT OGH#(13) B002
0007 MOVL V=880.0
0009 TIMER T=3.0
0010 MOVL V=880.0
0011 MOVL V=880.0
0012 MOVL V=880.0
MOVJ VJ=50.00 PL=1
Main Menu ShortCut
2 Select {CUT}. The confirmation dialog box appears. When “YES” is selected,
the specified range is deleted and copied to the buffer.
When “NO” is selected, the cutting operation is cancelled.
Delete
YES NO
4-57
4.7 Editing Jobs
4.7.4 Pasting
Before pasting, the range to be pasted has to be stored in the buffer.

immediately before the
desired position in the JOB
CONTENT window.

COPY
JOB CONTENT
PASTE
0000 NOP
REVERSE
0002 SET B001 1
0003 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0004 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0005 DOUT OGH#(13) B002
0007 MOVL V=880.0
0009 TIMER T=3.0
0010 MOVL V=880.0
0011 MOVL V=880.0
0012 MOVL V=880.0
MOVJ VJ=50.00 PL=1
Main Menu ShortCut
3 Select {PASTE}. The confirmation dialog box appears. When “YES” is selected,
the contents of the buffer are inserted to the job.
When “NO” is selected, the pasting operation is cancelled.
Paste?
YES NO
4-58
4.7 Editing Jobs
4.7.5 Reverse Pasting

Before pasting, the range to be pasted has to be stored in the buffer.

immediately before the
desired position in the JOB
CONTENT window.

COPY
JOB CONTENT
PASTE
0000 NOP
REVERSE
0002 SET B001 1
0003 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0004 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0005 DOUT OGH#(13) B002
0007 MOVL V=880.0
0009 TIMER T=3.0
0010 MOVL V=880.0
0011 MOVL V=880.0
0012 MOVL V=880.0
MOVJ VJ=50.00 PL=1
Main Menu ShortCut
3 Select {REVERSE PASTE}. The confirmation dialog box appears. When “YES” is selected,
the contents of the buffer are reverse pasted to the job.
When “NO” is selected, the pasting operation is cancelled.
Paste?
YES NO
4-59
4.8 Test Operations
4.8 Test Operations
Playback operations can be simulated in the teach mode with test operations. This function is
convenient for checking continuous paths and operation instructions.
Test operation differs in the following ways from actual playback in the play mode.
• Operation speeds greater than the maximum teaching speed are reduced to the maxi-
NOTE mum teaching speed.
• Only machine lock is available among special operations for playback in the play mode.
• Work instruction output, such as arc output, is not executed.
Test operation is performed by pressing [INTERLOCK] and [TEST START]. For safety pur-
poses, these keys will only function while the keys are held down.
NOTE Always check safety conditions before pressing [INTERLOCK] + [TEST START] to start
the manipulator in motion.

menu.
2 Press {JOB}. The test operation JOB CONTENT window appears.
3 Press [INTERLOCK] + [TEST The manipulator starts the test cycle operation. However, after the
START]. operation starts, the motion continues even if [INTERLOCK] is
released. The manipulator moves only while these keys are held
down.
The manipulator stops immediately when [TEST START] is
released.
4-60
4.9 Other Job-editing Functions
4.9.1 Editing Play Speed

There are two ways to modify play speed:
• Modification of Speed Type
• Relative Modification
Modification of Speed Type

This method is used to modify the speed type (such as VJ, V, VR, etc.).
0005 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0006 MOVL V=138
0007 MOVJ VJ=50.00
Only VJ is changed to 100.
0005 MOVJ VJ=100.00

0006 MOVL V=138
0007 MOVJ VJ=100.00
Type of
Explanation
Play Speed
VJ Joint Speed Normal robot axes
V TCP Speed
VR Posture Angle Speed
VE Base Axis Speed
Relative Modification
All steps are selected regardless of the play speed type. This method is used to change all
steps by a specified percentage (1% to 200%). This is called relative modification.
0005 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0006 MOVL V=138
0007 MOVJ VJ=50.00
Speed is doubled.
0005 MOVJ VJ=50.00

0006 MOVL V=276
0007 MOVJ VJ=100.00
The speed of the entire job or specified section can be changed.

menu.
4-61

tion area.
4 Press [SHIFT] + [SELECT] in If the section is not specified, the speed of the entire job will be
the speed modify start line. changed.
5 Move the cursor to the end The line numbers of the selected lines are highlighted.
line.
6 Select {EDIT} under the menu.
7 Select {CHANGE SPEED}. The SPEED MODIFICATION window appears.

SPEED MODIFICATION
c START LINE NO. 0001

d END LINE NO. 0002
e MODIFICATION TYPE CONFIRM
f SPEED KIND VJ
g SPEED 50 %
EXECUTE CANCEL
Main Menu ShortCut
8 Set desired items. START LINE NO.

Displays the first line number of the section to be modi-
fied.
END LINE NO.
Displays the last line number of the section to be modi-
fied.
MODIFICATION TYPE
Selects the confirmation before changing: “CONFIRM” or
“NO CONFIRM.”
Each time [SELECT] is pressed when the cursor is on this
item, the setting alternates between “CONFIRM” and “NO
CONFIRM.”
SPEED KIND
Selects the speed type.
When [SELECT] is pressed when the cursor is on this
item, selection dialog box appears. Select the speed type
to be changed.
SPEED
Specifies the speed value.
When [SELECT] is pressed when the cursor is on this
item, the mode changes to number input mode. Input the
speed value and press [ENTER].
9 Select “EXECUTE.” The speed begins to change.

If “MODIFICATION TYPE” is set to “CONFIRM,” the confirmation
dialog box “Modifying speed” is displayed. Press [ENTER] to
change the speed on the first line and search for the next speed.
Press the UP/DOWN cursor button to keep the speed on the first
line and search for the next speed. To cancel the speed modifica-
tion, press [CANCEL].
If “MODIFICATION TYPE” is set to “NOT CONFIRM,” all the
speeds of the specified section are changed.
4-62
Modification by TRT (Traverse Time)

Modifications made by TRT have the following characteristics:
• By setting the time required to execute a move instruction (moving time) to a desired
value, the speeds can be modified.
• It is possible to measure the moving time without actually moving the manipulator.
For example, when the movement from lines 5 through 20 currently requires 34 seconds, and
you want to reduce it to 15 seconds or extend it to 50 seconds, this function is used.

menu.

tion area.
4 Press [SHIFT] + [SELECT] in

the weaving time measure
start line.
5 Move the cursor to the end The line numbers of the selected lines are highlighted.
line.
7 Select {TRT}. The TRT window appears.

TRT
c START LINE NO. 0001

d END LINE NO. 0002
e MOVING TIME 00010.00 sec
f SETTING TIME 00007.00 sec
EXECUTE CANCEL
Main Menu ShortCut
4-63
8 Set the desired items. START LINE NO.

Displays the first line number of the section to be measured
and modified.
END LINE NO.
Displays the last line number of the section to be measured
and modified.
MOVING TIME
The weaving time needed to move from the first number to last
number is measured and displayed.
SETTING TIME
Set the desired weaving time.
When [SELECT] is pressed when the cursor is on this item, the
input buffer line appears. Input the desired weaving time and
press [ENTER].
9 Select “EXECUTE.” The speed is changed according to the setting.
• If instructions that include specific speed data

NOTE such as SPEED or ARCON instructions (including
speed data of the welding condition file) exist in
the specified section, the speed data for those
steps are not changed. Therefore, in such cases,
the set time and the actual time required are not
same.
• If the speed data is limited by the maximum value,
the following message is displayed.
!Limited to maximum speed
4-64
4.9.2 Editing Interpolation Type


menu.

tion area.
4 Select the line to be modified. The instruction on the cursor is displayed in the input buffer line.
JOB CONTENT TOOL: 00
0001 NOP
0002 'CAR TYPE-A JOB
0003 JUMP JOB:JOB-01
0004 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0005 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0006 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0007 MOVJ VJ=50.00
MOVJ VJ=50.00
5 Press [SHIFT] + the cursor key The interpolation type in the input buffer line changes.
simultaneously. The modification of the speed according to the modification of the
interpolation type is calculated by the ratio to maximum speed at
each speed.
Joint Speed: MAX=100.0%

Linear Speed: MAX=9000cm/min
(e.g.)
Joint Speed: 50% = Linear Speed: 4500cm/min
Linear Speed: 10% = Linear Speed: 900cm/min
0006 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0007 MOVJ VJ=50.00
MOVL V=4500
6 Press [ENTER]. The instruction on the cursor line is replaced with one on the input
buffer line.
JOB CONTENT TOOL: 00
0001 NOP
0002 'CAR TYPE-A JOB
0003 JUMP JOB:JOB-01
0004 MOVL V=4500
0005 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0006 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0007 MOVJ VJ=50.00
MOVL V=4500
4-65
4.9.3 Editing Condition Files

Condition files are prepared in order to set the conditions for the manipulator to execute
instructions. The desired conditions are saved in the condition file, and a file number is
assigned.
Multiple condition files are provided. More than one pattern can be set up in each condition
file. The patterns are listed by “condition numbers.”
NOTE Refer to NX100 Instructions for information regarding the contents and editing methods for
the condition file.
Condition Files
Application A Application B Application C
Condition Condition Condition

Condition Condition Condition
Number 1 Condition Number 1 Number 1 Condition
Number 2 Number 2 Number 2 Condition
Number 3 Number 3
Number 4
4-66
4.9.4 Editing User Variables

User variables are used for temporary storage for counters, calculations and input signals. It
is possible to edit which variables are used for what purpose for each job. Since the same
user variable can be used in multiple jobs, save the numerical values as common references
for the jobs.
User variables have the following applications:
• Controlling of the number of workpieces

• Controlling of the number of jobs
• Sending/receiving of information between jobs
User variable values are maintained even when the power is turned OFF. The data formats
for user variables are as described in the following table:
User Variables
Variable No.
Data Format Functions
(pcs)
Byte Type Range of storable values is from 0 to 255.

B000 to B099
Can store I/O status.
(100)
Can perform logical operations (AND, OR, etc.).
Integer Type I000 to I099 Range of storable values is from -32768 to 32767.
(100)
Double Precision D000 to D099 Range of storable values is from -2147483648 to

Integer Type (100) 2147483647.
Real Type R000 to R099 Range of storable values is from -3.4E+38 to 3.4E38.
(100) Accuracy: 1.18E-38 < x ≤ 3.4E38
Character Type S000 to S099 Maximum storable number of characters is 16.

(100)
Position Robot P000 to P127 Can store position data in pulse form or in XYZ form.
Type Axes (128) XYZ type variable can be used as target position data
for move instructions, and as incremental values for
Base BP000 to BP127 parallel shift instructions.
Axes (128)
Station EX000 to EX127

Axes (128)
4-67
• Play Speed V:
NOTE MOVL V=I000
The variable I000 is used for speed V with this move instruction.
The unit for V is 0.1mm per second.
For example, if I000 were set as 1000, the following would be true:
I000=1000 unit for V is 0.1mm/s V=100.0mm per second
Note that, depending on the unit being used, the value of the variable and the value of the
actual speed on occasion might not match.
• Play Speed VJ:

MOVL VJ=I000
The unit for VJ is 0.01%.
I000=1000 unit for VJ is 0.01% VJ=10.00%.
• Timer T:
TIMER T=I000
The unit for T is 0.01 seconds.
I000=1000 unit for T is 0.01 seconds T=10.00 seconds.
4-68
Displaying Byte, Integer, Double Precision Integer, and Real Type

Variables
1 Select {VARIABLE} under the

main menu.
2 Select desired variable type. Select any variable among {BYTE}, {INTEGER}, {DOUBLE}, and
{REAL} under the sub menu.
The BYTE VARIABLE window appears. (Following is a case that
{BYTE} is selected.)
BYTE VARIABLE
NO. CONTENT NAME
B000 2 0000_0010 WORK NUM
B001 0 0000_0000
B002 255 1111_1111
B003 0 0000_0000
B004 0 0000_0000
B005 10 0000_1010
B006 1 0000_0001
B007 1 0000_0001
B008 1 0000_0001
B009 1 0000_0001
B010 1 0000_0001
3 Move the cursor to the desired When the desired variable number is not displayed, move the cur-
variable No. sor with either of the following operations.
• Move the cursor on the variable No. and press [SELECT]. Then
input the variable No. using the Numeric keys and press
[ENTER].
• Move the cursor to the menu area and select {EDIT}
{SEARCH}. Then input the variable No. with the Numeric keys
and press [ENTER].
BYTE VARIABLE
NO. CONTENT NAME
Cursor is moved B055 10 0000_1010

to desired B056 255 1111_1111
variable number. B057 255 1111_1111
4-69
Setting Byte, Integer, Double Precision Integer, and Real Type Vari-
ables

main menu.
2 Select desired variable type. Select any variable among {BYTE}, {INTEGER}, {DOUBLE}, and
{REAL} under the sub menu.
[ENTER].
and press [ENTER].
4 Move the cursor to the data of

the variable.
5 Press [SELECT]. The number can be directly typed.
6 Input the desired number.
7 Press [ENTER]. Input value is set to the variable on the cursor position.
BYTE VARIABLE
NO. CONTENT NAME
B000 2 0000_0010 WORK NUM
B001 12 0000_0000
B002 255 1111_1111
4-70
Displaying Character Type Variables


main menu.
2 Select {STRING}. The STRING VARIABLE window appears.

STRING VARIABLE
NO. CONTENT NAME
S000
S001
S002
S003
S004
S005
S006
S007
S008
S009
S010
[ENTER].
and press [ENTER].
STRING VARIABLE
NO. CONTENT NAME
The cursor is
moved to S055
desired variable
number.
4-71
Setting Character Type Variables


main menu.
2 Select {STRING}.
[ENTER].
and press [ENTER].
4 Move the cursor to the data of

the variable.
5 Press [SELECT]. The characters can be directly typed.
6 Input the desired characters. For information on character input operation, refer to "1.2.7 Char-
acter Input."
7 Press [ENTER]. The input characters are set to the variable on the cursor position.
STRING VARIABLE
NO. CONTENT NAME
S000
S001 WORK NUM
S002
S003
S004
S005
S006
S007
4-72
Registering Variable Name


main menu.
2 Select desired variable. Select any variable type from among byte type, integer type, dou-
ble precision integer type, real type, robot position type, base
position type, and station position type.
3 Move the cursor to desired If desired variable number is not displayed, move the cursor by
variable number. either of following operations.
• Select the variable number, input desired variable number and
press [ENTER]
The cursor moves to the variable number to be input.
• Move the cursor to the menu area and select
{EDIT} {SEARCH}. Input desired variable number and press
[ENTER].
The cursor moves to the variable number to be input.
4 Select “NAME.” The input buffer line appears.
SUPPLE-
Refer to " 1.2.7 Character Input " for the character
MENT input operation.
5 Input name.
6 Press [ENTER]. The variable name is registered.

BYTE VARIABLE
NO. CONTENT NAME
B000 2 0000_0010 WORK NUM
B001 12 0000_0000 WORK2 NUM
B002 255 1111_1111
4-73
Displaying Position Variables


main menu.
2 Select desired position vari- The POSITION VARIABLE window of desired type among robot
able type. type, base type, and station type appears.
POSITION VARIABLE
#P000 ROBOT NAME: SHIFT DATA
R1:X 330.000 TOOL: 01
Y 0.000
Z -10.000 <TYPE>
Rx 0.00 FRONT S<180
Ry 0.00 UP R<180
Rz 0.00 FLIP T<180
DIRECT PAGE
3 GO BACK GO BACK
Press the page key PAGE . Select the desired number by pressing the page key PAGE .
If [SHIFT] is pressed simultaniously, the window returns to previ-
ous page.
When the desired variable number is not displayed, move the cur-
sor with either of the following operations.
• Press [DIRECT PAGE]. Then input the variable No. using the
Numeric keys and press [ENTER].
and press [ENTER].
POSITION VARIABLE
Move to desired #P025 PULSE NAME:
variable number R1:S 28109 TOOL: 01
page. L -136
U 0
4-74
Setting Position Variables

The following table shows the types of position variables and setting methods.
NOTE The setting of position variables is done in the teach mode.

Turn the servo power ON when setting the variables with the axis keys.
Types of Position Variables and Setting Methods
BPxxx EXxxx
Pxxx (Robot Axes)
(Base Axes) (Station Axes)
Type
Pulse XYZ
Pulse Type XYZ Type Pulse Type
Type Type
Select coordinates from

base, robot, user, tool.
Z-axis
Using the numeric keys
45000 7 8 9
4 5. 6
1 2 3
0 . -
Y- a x i s
Setting X-axis
Method
Using the axis keys

X- X+ X- X+
S- S+ R- R+
Y- Y+ Y- Y+
L- L+ B- B+
Z- Z+ Z- Z+
U- U+ T- T+
4-75
Setting Position Variables Using the Numeric Keys

Pulse Type

main menu.
2 Select desired position vari- The desired variable window appears (robot, base, or station).
able type. (The POSITION VARIABLE window is used for this example.)
POSITION VARIABLE
#P000 ******* NAME:
**:S * TOOL: **
L *
U *
R *
B *
T *
DIRECT PAGE
3 Select the variable data type. The selection dialog box appears.
#P000 ******* NAME:
PULSE
BASE
ROBOT
USER
TOOL
MASTER TOOL
If the position variable was set before, confirmation dialog box

appears for data clear. If “YES” is selected, the data is cleared.
Clear data?
YES NO
4 Select {PULSE}.
5 Move the cursor to desired

data to be input and press
[SELECT].
6 Input the value.
7 Press [ENTER]. The value is set in the cursor position.

POSITION VARIABLE
#P000 PULSE NAME:
**:S 45000 TOOL: 00
L 0
4-76
XYZ Type

main menu.
2 Select desired position vari-

able type.
3 Select the variable data type. The selection dialog box appears.
#P000 ******* NAME:
PULSE
BASE
ROBOT
USER
TOOL
MASTER TOOL
4 Select desired coordinates

except PULSE.
5 Move the cursor to desired

data to be input and press
[SELECT].
6 Input the value.
7 Press [ENTER]. The value is set in the cursor position.

POSITION VARIABLE
#P000 ROBOT NAME:
R1:X 330.000 TOOL: 00
Y 0.000
Z -10.000 <TYPE>
Rx 0.00 FRONT S<180
Ry 0.00 UP R<180
Rz 0.00 FLIP T<180
DIRECT PAGE
Setting of “<TYPE>”
Each time [SELECT] is pressed when the cursor is on the setting
data in the input buffer line, the settings alternate.
#P000 ROBOT NAME:
R1:X 330.000 TOOL: 00
Y 0.000
Z -10.000 <TYPE>
Rx 0.00 REAR S<180
Ry 0.00 UP R<180
Rz 0.00 FLIP T<180
About “<TYPE>”
• It is not necessary to set a type if the position variable is to be used for parallel shift
operations.
• When the position variable is used with a move instruction such as “MOVJ P001,” it
is necessary to set a type. For details on types, refer to " Manipulator Types " on the
page 4-81.
Current Position Window (XYZ) shows the current setting of a type.
4-77
Setting Position Variables Using the Axis Keys

Pulse Type

main menu.
2 Select desired position vari- The desired variable window appears (robot, base, or station).
able type.
3 Press [SHIFT] + [ROBOT]. When you need an external axis position, press
[SHIFT]+[EX.AXIS].
When there are two or more robot axis, base axis, or a station
axis, specify the axis with following operation.
• Robot Axis
Each time [SHIFT] + [ROBOT] is pressed, the axis displayed on
the status line changes:
R1 R2 R3 R4.
• Base or Station Axis
Each time [SHIFT]+[EX.AXIS] is pressed, the axis displayed on
B1 B2 B3 B4 S1 S2 S3 S12
4 Move the manipulator with the Move the manipulator or the external axis to the desired position
axis keys. to be set to position variable.
5 Press [MODIFY].
6 Press [ENTER].
XYZ Type

main menu.
2 Select desired position vari- When there are two or more robot axis, base axis, or a station
able type. axis, specify the axis with following operation.
• Robot Axis
R1 R2 R3 R4.
B1 B2 B3 B4 S1 S2 S3 S12
3 Move the manipulator with the Move the manipulator or the external axis to the desired position
axis keys. to be set to position variable.
4 Press [MODIFY].
5 Press [ENTER].
4-78
Deleting Data Set of Position Variables

1 Select {VARIABLE} under

the main menu.
2 Select desired position vari-
able type.
3 Select {DATA} under the The pull-down menu appears.
menu. DATA EDIT DISPLAY UTILITY
CLEAR DATA
#P000 ROBOT NAME:
R1:X 330.000 TOOL: 00
Y 0.000
Z -10.000 <TYPE>
Rx 0.00 FRONT S<180
Ry 0.00 UP R<180
Rz 0.00 FLIP T<180
4 Select {CLEAR DATA}. The position variable data on the displayed page are deleted.
POSITION VARIABLE
#P000 ******* NAME:
:S * TOOL: **
L *
U *
R *
B *
T *
4-79
Checking Positions by Position Variables


main menu.
2 Select desired position vari- When there are two or more robot axis, base axis, or a station
able type. axis, specify the axis with following operation.
• Robot Axis
R1 R2 R3 R4.
B1 B2 B3 B4 S1 S2 S3 S12
3 Press [FWD]. Selected axis moves to the position specified by the variable.
The selected axis (maipulator, base, or station)

NOTE moves directly to the set variable position. Before
pressing [FWD], check that the surrounding area is
safe.
4-80
Manipulator Types
When robot axis position data is described in the XYZ format, a number of solutions are
obtained from the manipulator’s structure when moving it to the described position. In order to
select one appropriate solution, it is necessary to specify the manipulator type. This manipula-
tor type is called “Type.” There are up to six types in NX100 system. These types also vary
according to the manipulator models.
• Flip/No Flip: R-axis Position

• R-axis Angle
• T-axis Angle
• Front/Back: Relationship Between the S-axis and TCP
• Upper Arm/Lower Arm: Type Comprised of the L- and U-axes
• S-axis Angle
These six types are described in the following:
• Flip/No Flip
This shows the R-axis position.
When the R-axis is in the position at A as shown in the following diagram, it is known as
“Flip;” when it is in the B position, it is called “No Flip.” However, in a manipulator in which
the R-axis can move more than ±180° even in position A, it is necessary to specify
whether the R-axis is from -90° to 90°, or from 270° to 360°, or from -360° to -270°. The
same is true for the B position. This is set at the folowing “R-axis Angle.”
Flip No Flip
0° 0°
A B
-90 < θ R ≤ 90 90 < θ R ≤ 270

270 < θ R ≤ 360, -360 < θ R ≤ -270 -270 < θ R ≤ -90
NOTE θ R is the angle when the R-axis home position is 0°.
4-81
• R-axis Angle
This specifies whether the R-axis angle is less than ±180° or greater than ±180°.
R < 180° R ≥ 180°
0° 0°
360° -360°
-180° 180°
-180 < θ R ≤ 180 180 < θ R ≤ 360, -360 < θ R ≤ -180
NOTE θ R is the angle when the R-axis home position is 0°.
• T-axis Angle
This specifies positions of the R-, B-, and T-axis.
For manipulators with wrist axes (three axes), this specifies whether the T-axis angle is
less than ±180° or greater than ±180°.
T <180° T ≥ 180°
0° 0°
360° -360°
-180° 180°
-180 < θ T ≤180 180 < θ T ≤ 360, -360 < θ T ≤ -180
NOTE θ T is the angle when the T-axis home position is 0°.
4-82
• Front/Back
This specifies where in the S-axis rotation center the B-axis rotation center locates when
viewing the L-axis and U-axis from the right-hand side. When viewed from the right-hand
side, the right of the S-axis rotation center is called the front, and the left is called the
back.
Right-hand side
(S-axis 0°)
S-axis 0° S-axis 180°
Back Front Front Back
The diagram above shows the S-axis at 0° and at 180°. This is the configuration when
the L-axis and the U-axis are viewed from the right-hand side.
4-83
• Upper Arm/Lower Arm

This specifies a type comprised of L-axis and U-axis when the L-axis and U-axis are
viewed from the right-hand side.
Right-hand side
Upper Arm Lower Arm
• S-axis Angle
This designation is required for the manipulators which have working envelopes greater
than ±180°.
This specifies whether the S-axis angle is less than ±180° or greater than ±180°.
S<180° S ≥ 180°
0° 0°
360° -360°
-180° 180°
-180° < θ S ≤ 180° 180° < θ S ≤ 360°

-360° < θ S ≤ -180°
NOTE θ S is the angle when the S-axis home position is 0°.
4-84
4.9.5 Editing Local Variables

User variables and local variables can be used in the storage of counters, calculations, and
input signals. The data format is the same as that of user variables. As shown in the follwoing
table, the letter L is affixed to the variable number to indicate a local variable.
Local Variables
Data Format Variable No. Functions
Byte Type Range of storeable values is from 0 to 255.

LB000 to
Can store I/O status.
LB
Can perform logical operations (AND, OR, etc.).
Integer Type Ll000 to Range of storeable values is from -32768 to 32767.

LI
Double Precision LD000 to Range of storeable values is from -2147483648 to

Integer Type LD 2147483647.
Real Type LR000 to Range of storeable values is from -3.4E+38 to 3.4E+38

LR Accuracy: 1.18E-38 < x ≤ 3.4E+38
Character Type LS000 to Maximum storeable number of characters is 16.

LS
Position Robot LP000 to Can store position data in pulse form or in XYZ form. XYZ
Type Axes LP type variables can be used as target position data for
move instructions, and as incremental values for parallel
Base LBP000 to shift instructions.
Axes LBP
Station LEX000 to
Axes LEX
Local variables differ from user variables in the following four ways:
• Used in One Job Only
With user variables it is possible to define and use one variable in multiple jobs, but local
variables are used only in the one job in which they are defined, and cannot be read from
other jobs. Accordingly, local variables do not affect other jobs, so it is possible to define a
variable number (such as LB001) separately in different jobs, and use it in different ways
in each of these jobs.
User Variable
B001
Job 1 Job 2 Job 3

Job 1 Job 2 Job 3 Local Variable Local Variable Local Variable
LB001 LB001 LB001
User Variables Local Variables
• Able to Use Any Number of Variables

The number is set in the JOB HEADER window. When the number is set, the area for the
value is saved in memory.
4-85
• Not Able to Display the Variable Contents

To display the local variable contents, user variables are needed.
For example, to view the contents of local variable LP000, save it temporarily as user vari-
able P001. Then execute the instruction SET P001 LP000, and view the POSITION VARI-
ABLE window for P001.
• Enabled Only During the Execution of the Defined Job

The contents of the local variables are enabled only during the execution of the defined
job.
The local variable field is assured when the defined job is called (when the job is executed
by a CALL or JUMP instruction, or the job is selected by the menu). Once the job is com-
pleted by the execution of a RET, END, or JUMP instruction, the local variable data that
was set is disabled. However, if a job which uses local variables itself calls a separate job,
then is returned to by use of a RET instruction, the data that was present prior to the
CALL instruction remains in effect and can be used.
Precautions for Variables and Units

NOTE As was the case with user variables, note that, depending on the value of the unit being
used, the value of the variable and the value of the actual speed or time an occasion might
not match. Refer to "4.9.4 Editing User Variables."
4-86
Setting the Number of Local Variables

How many local variables are to be used in a job is set in the JOB HEADER window. When
setting the number of variables, the memory area needed for those variables is saved.
Only when expanding the “LANGUAGE LEVEL,” it is possible to use local variables. Refer
NOTE to “9.14 Instruction Level Setting” of “NX100 INSTRUCTIONS” for details on setting the
language level.

menu.
2 Select {JOB}.

menu.
4 Select {JOB HEADER}. The JOB HEADER window appears. Scroll the window using the
cursor.
JOB HEADER
JOB NAME: TEST01
COMM. :'This job is test job
DATE : 2003/05/20 12:00
CAPACITY : 1024 BYTE
LINES : 30 LINE
STEPS : 20 STEP
EDIT LOCK : OFF
TO SAVE TO FD : NOT DONE
GROUP SET : R1
BYTE (LB) ROBOT (LP)

INT (LI)
DOUBLE (LD)
REAL (LR)
CHARACTER (LS)
Main Menu ShortCut
5 Select the number of local The input buffer line appears.

variables to be set.
6 Input the number of variables.
7 Press [ENTER]. The number of local variables are set.

JOB HEADER
JOB NAME: TEST01
COMM. :'This job is test job
DATE : 2003/05/20 12:00
CAPACITY : 1024 BYTE
LINES : 30 LINE
STEPS : 20 STEP
EDIT LOCK : OFF
GROUP SET : R1
BYTE (LB) ROBOT (LP)

INT (LI)
DOUBLE (LD)
REAL (LR)
CHARACTER (LS)
Main Menu ShortCut Reconstruct local variable from next start
4-87
4.9.6 Searching
When performing editing or confirmation, a search for the job or step can be done. The
search can be done when the cursor is in either the address or instruction area on the JOB
CONTENT window.

menu.

TOP LINE
JOB CONTENT
END LINE
CONTROL GROUP:
SEARCH
R1 TOOL: 00
0000 NOP
0001 ENABLE job
THThis SPEED TAG job
is test
0002 MOVJ
ENABLEVJ=50.00
POS LVL TAG
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0004 MOVL V=276
0005 TIMER T=1.00
0006 DOUT OT#(1) ON
MOVJ VJ=100.00
4 Select {SEARCH}. The selection dialog box appears.

JOB CONTENT
0000 NOP
0001 'This job is test job
0002 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
LINE
0004 SEARCH
MOVL V=276
STEP SEARCH
0005 TIMER T=1.00
LABEL SEARCH
0006 DOUT OT#(1) ON
INSTRUCTION
0007 SEARCH
MOVL V=138
5 Select the searching type.
Searching is an operation by which the cursor is moved to a specific step or instruction in the
edit job. A target point can be instantaneously searched out without using the cursor.
4-88
Line Search
This function moves the cursor to the desired line number.
1 Select “LINE SEARCH.” The input buffer line appears.
2 Input desired line number.
3 Press [ENTER]. The cursor is moved to the line number and the window appears.
JOB CONTENT
0100 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0101 TIMER T=1.00
0102 MOVL V=138
0103 MOVL V=138
0104 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0105 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0106 DOUT OT#(1) ON
0107 TIMER T=0.50
MOVJ VJ=100.00
Step Search
This function moves the cursor to the desired step number (move instruction).
1 Select “STEP SEARCH.” The input buffer line appears.
2 Input desired step number.
3 Press [ENTER]. The cursor is moved to the input step and the window appears.
JOB CONTENT
0100 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0101 TIMER T=1.00
0102 MOVL V=138
0103 MOVL V=138
0104 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0105 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0106 DOUT OT#(1) ON
0107 TIMER T=0.50
MOVJ VJ=100.00
4-89
Label Search
This function searches for the desired label and the instruction using that label.
1 Select “LABEL SEARCH.” The input buffer line appears.
2 Input desired label name. For information on character input operation, refer to "1.2.7 Char-
acter Input."
At this time, search can be conducted by entering any one char-
acter of the label. For example, to search for the “START” label,
enter only “S,” and the search can be done.
3 Press [ENTER]. The label is searched out and the cursor is on its line number.
JOB CONTENT
0099 *START
0100 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0101 TIMER T=1.00
0102 MOVL V=138
0103 MOVL V=138
0104 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0105 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0106 DOUT OT#(1) ON
*START
4 Use the cursor to continue It is possible to continue searching by pressing the cursor key.
searching. To end searching, select {EDIT} {END SEARCH} on the menu
and press [SELECT].
TOP LINE
JOB CONTENT
END LINE
CONTROL GROUP:
END SEARCH
R1 TOOL: 00
0099 *START
0100 ENABLE
MOVJ SPEED TAG
VJ=100.00
0101 TIMER
ENABLE T=1.00
POS LVL TAG
0102 MOVL V=138
0103 MOVL V=138
0104 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0105 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0106 DOUT OT#(1) ON
4-90
Instruction Search
This function moves the cursor to a desired instruction.
1 Select “INSTRUCTION The INFORM command list appears.

SEARCH.” JOB EDIT UTILITY
DISPLAY
JOB CONTENT
IN/OUT
CONTROL GROUP: R1 TOOL: 00 CONTROL
0000 NOP DEVICE
MOTION
0002 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0004 MOVL V=276
SHIFT
0005 TIMER T=1.00
0006 DOUT OT#(1) ON OTHER
0007 MOVL V=138
2 Select desired instruction

group.
3 Select desired instruction. The instruction is searched out and the cursor is on its line num-
ber.
JOB CONTENT
0010 ARCON ASF#(1)
0011 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0012 TIMER T=1.00
0013 MOVL V=138
0014 MOVL V=138
0015 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0016 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0017 DOUT OT#(1) ON
ARCON ASF#(1)
and press [SELECT].
TOP LINE
JOB CONTENT
END LINE
CONTROL GROUP:
END SEARCHR1 TOOL: 00
0010 ARCON ASF#(1)
0011 ENABLE
MOVJ SPEED TAG
VJ=100.00
0012 TIMER
ENABLE T=1.00
POS LVL TAG
0013 MOVL V=138
0014 MOVL V=138
0015 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0016 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0017 DOUT OT#(1) ON
4-91
Tag Search
This function moves the cursor to the desired tag.
1 Select “TAG SEARCH.” The instruction list dialog box appears.

JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: TEST01 IN/OUT
STEP NO: 0003
0000 NOP DEVICE
MOTION
0002 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0004 MOVL V=276
SHIFT
0005 TIMER T=1.00
0006 DOUT OT#(1) ON OTHER
0007 MOVL V=138
SAME
PRIOR
2 Select desired instruction

group.
3 Select desired instruction for The tag list dialog box for selected instruction appears.
which the tag is to be
searched.
JOB CONTENT
B IN/OUT
JOB NAME: TEST01
CONTROL GROUP: R1 B[ ] CONTROL
0000 NOP D DEVICE
I MOTION
0002 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50 OG#( ) ARITH
0004 MOVL V=276
OGH#( ) SHIFT
0005 TIMER T=1.00
0006 DOUT OT#(1) ON OT#( ) OTHER
0007 MOVL V=138
SAME
PRIOR
4 Select the desired tag. The cursor is moved to the selected tag and the window appears.
JOB CONTENT
0010 DOUT OT#(1) ON
0011 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0012 TIMER T=1.00
0013 MOVL V=138
0014 MOVL V=138
0015 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0016 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0017 DOUT OT#(1) ON
DOUT OT#(1) ON
4-92
and press [SELECT].
TOP LINE
JOB CONTENT
END LINE
CONTROL GROUP:
END SEARCHR1 TOOL: 00
0010 DOUT OT#(1) ON
0011 ENABLE SPEED
MOVJ VJ=100.00 TAG
0012 TIMER
ENABLE T=1.00
POS LVL TAG
0013 MOVL V=138
0014 MOVL V=138
0015 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0016 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0017 DOUT OT#(1) ON
4-93
5.1 Preparation for Playback
5 Playback
Playback is the act of executing a taught job. Before playback operation, first call the job to be
executed.
Calling a Job

menu.

JOB LIST

TEST02 TEST TEST01
3 Select the desired job.
5-1
Registering the Master Job

If a particular job is played back frequently, it is convenient to register that job as a master job
(master registraton). A job registered as the master job can be called more easily than the
method described on the preceding page.
NOTE Only one job can be registered as the master job. Registering a master job automatically
releases the previously registered master job.
Be sure to register a master job in the teach mode.

main menu.
2 Select {MASTER JOB}. The MASTER JOB window appears.
MASTER JOB
MASTER JOB: *******
3 Press [SELECT]. The selection dialog box appears.

MASTER JOB
MASTER JOB: *******

CALL MASTER JOB
SETTING MASTER JOB
CANCEL MASTER JOB
5-2
4 Select {CALL MASTER JOB}. The JOB LIST window appears.

JOB LIST

TEST02 TEST TEST01
5 Select a job to be registered The selected job is registered as the master job.
as a master job.
MASTER JOB
MASTER JOB: TEST01
Calling the Master Job

This operation is to call a master job. The job can be called in the JOB CONTENT window,
PLAYBACK window, JOB SELECT window, or the MASTER JOB window.
Calling from the JOB CONTENT, PLAYBACK, JOB SELECT Window
1 Select {JOB} under the menu. The pull-down menu appears.

JOB
JOB CONTENT JOB CONTENT
DOUT
MOVE
END
DOUT
MOVE
END
ARC WELDING SELECT JOB 0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0002 MOVL V=138
VARIABLE CREATE NEW JOB0003 MOVL V=138
0004 MOVL V=138
B001 0005 MOVL V=138
MASTER JOB
0006 END
IN/OUT
In Out
JOB CAPACITY
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFO
MOVJ VJ=0.78
2 Select {MASTER JOB}. The master job is called, and the JOB CONTENT window
appears.
5-3
Calling from the MASTER JOB Window

menu.
2 Select {MASTER JOB}. The MASTER JOB window appears.

MASTER JOB
MASTER JOB: TEST01
3 Press [SELECT]. The selection dialog box appears.

MASTER JOB
CALL MASTER JOB

MASTER JOB: *******
SETTING MASTER JOB
CANCEL MASTER JOB
4 Select {CALL MASTER JOB}. The master job is called, and the JOB CONTENT window (during
the teach mode), or the PLAYBACK window (during the play
mode) appears.
5-4
5.2 Playback
5.2 Playback
5.2.1 The PLAYBACK Window

When the mode switch on the programming pendant is switched to “PLAY” while displaying
the JOB CONTENT window, the PLAYBACK window appears.
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: TEST STEP NO: 0003
0000 NOP
0001 SET B000 0
0002 SET B001 1
0003 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0004 MOVJ VJ=80.00
c 0005 DOUT OGH#(13) B002
0007 MOVL V=880.0
0008 MOVL V=880.0
0009 MOVL V=880.0
d SPEED ADJUSTMENT (MODIFY: OF) 100 %

f MEASURE START JOB J:TEST01 S:000
eg MOVING TIME 24.00 sec
h PLAYBACK TIME 44.50 sec
Main Menu ShortCut
Job Content
The cursor moves according to the playback operation. The contents are automatically
scrolled as needed.
Override Speed Settings

Displayed when override speed setting is performed.
Cycle Time
Displays the operating time of the manipulator. Each time the manipulator is started, the
previous cycle time is reset, and a new measurement begins. The setting can be made for
display or no display.
Start No.
First step in the measurement. Measurement starts when the start button lamp lights and
the playback starts.
Motion Time
Displays the weaving time of the manipulator.
Playback Time
Displays the time from beginning to the end of the measurement. Measurement ends when
the manipulator stops and the start button lamp goes off.
5-5
5.2 Playback
Setting Display or Non-display of Cycle Time

Follow the procedure below to set whether or not to display the cycle time on the PLAYBACK
window.

menu.
2 Select {CYCLE TIME}. The cycle time is displayed. Doing the same operation one more
time will delete the cycle time display.
5.2.2 Playback Operation

Playback is the operation by which the taught job is played back. Follow the procedures
below to start the playback operation.
NOTE After checking to be sure there is no one near the manipulator, start the playback operation
by following the procedures below.
• Programming pendant (start button)

• Peripheral device (external start input)
Which is used to start playback is specified by the mode switch on the programming pendant.
"REMOTE"
Start up by peripheral
device
Programming Pendant
Mode Switch
Start up by
programming pendant
"PLAY"
For playback using the programming pendant, follow the procedures below.
Selecting the Start Device

1 Set the mode switch on the The remote mode is disabled and the play mode is enabled so
programming pendant to the machines are to be started up by the programming pendant.
“PLAY.”
5-6
5.2 Playback
Start Operation
1 Press [START]. The start button lamp lights and the manipulator begins operation.
About the Operation Cycle

There are three types of manipulator operation cycles:
• AUTO : Repeats a job continuously.

• 1 CYCLE : Executes a job once. If there is a called job during execution, it is performed,
after which the manipulator returns to the original job.
• 1 STEP : Executes one step (instruction) at a time.
The operation cycle can be changed using the following:

main menu, and then select
{CYCLE}.
2 Select the operation cycle The operation cycle is changed.
to be changed. DATA EDIT DISPLAY UTILITY
JOB FD/PC CARD CYCLE

DOUT
MOVE
END CF
WORK SELECT 1 STEP

1 CYCLE
CONTINUOUS
VARIABLE SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In Out
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFO
5-7
5.2 Playback
Automatic Setting for Operation Cycle

Automatic setting of the operation cycle can be changed by the following operation.
This can be done in the management mode only.
1 Select {SETUP} under the

main menu.
2 Select {OPERATE COND}. The OPERATING CONDITION window appears. Use the cursor
to scroll the screen.
DATA EDIT DISLAY UTILITY
OPERATING CONDITION
MASTER JOB CHANGE PERMIT
RESERVED START PROHIBIT
RESERVED START JOB CHANGE PERMIT
SPEED DATA INPUT FORM cm/min
CYCLE SWITCH IN TEACH MODE 1 CYCLE
CYCLE SWITCH IN PLAY MODE 1 CYCLE
CYCLE SWITCH IN LOCAL MODE 1 CYCLE
CYCLE SWITCH IN REMOTE MODE 1 CYCLE
SET CYCLE ON POWER ON 1 CYCLE
Main Menu ShortCut
3 Select desired operation. The selection dialog box appears.

OPERATING CONDITION
RESERVED START JOB CHANGED PERMIT
CYCLE SWITCH IN TEACH MODE 1 CYCLE1 STEP
CYCLE SWITCH IN PLAY MODE 1 CYCLE1 CYCLE
AUTO
NONE
Main Menu ShortCut
“NONE” setting
SUPPLE-
MENT
The operation cycle is not changed when “NONE”

is set.
For example, if the setting is “CYCLE SWITCH IN
TEACH MODE = NONE,” the operation cycle after
selecting the teach mode is the same as the one
before.
5-8
5.2 Playback
4 Select desired cycle. The operation cycle set automatically is changed.

OPERATING CONDITION
RESERVED START JOB CHANGED PERMIT
CYCLE SWITCH IN TEACH MODE 1 STEP
CYCLE SWITCH IN PLAY MODE 1 CYCLE
Main Menu ShortCut
5.2.3 Special Playback Operations

The following special operations can be performed during playback:
• Low speed operation

• Limited speed operation
• Dry run speed operation
• Machine lock operation
• Check mode operation
Two or more special operations can be performed at the same time. If multiple operations are
selected, the speed during playback is limited to the speed of the slowest of the operations.
Settings for special operations are done in the SPECIAL PLAY window.
When displaying the PLAYBACK window, move the cursor to the menu area and select {UTIL-
ITY} {SETUP SPECIAL RUN}. The SPECIAL PLAY window appears.
SPECIAL PLAY
SPEED LIMIT INVALID
CHECK-RUN INVALID
COMPLETE
Main Menu ShortCut
5-9
5.2 Playback
Low Speed Operation

The manipulator moves at low speed during the first step after starting. After the operation of
this step, the manipulator stops regardless of the selection of the operation cycle. Low speed
operation is canceled when the manipulator stops. Even if the manipulator is manually
stopped during low speed operation, the low speed is cancelled.
1 Select “LOW SPEED START” The setting alternates between “VALID” and “INVALID.”
on the SPECIAL PLAY win-
dow.
2 Select “COMPLETE.” The window returns to the PLAYBACK window.
3 Press [START]. When set to “VALID,” the manipulator starts playback operation at
a low speed for the first step and stops. After this, press [START]
to execute each of the remaining steps. The manipulator moves
at the speeds taught.
Limited Speed Operations

The manipulator operates within the limited speed for the teach mode. Usually, the limited
speed is set to 250mm/s. Therefore, steps with speeds faster than 250mm/s are restricted to
this speed limit. However, operation is performed at actual playback speeds for steps in which
the set speed is under this limit.
1 Select “SPEED LIMIT” under The setting alternates between “VALID” and “INVALID.”
the SPECIAL PLAY window.
limited speed.
5-10
5.2 Playback
Dry-run Speed Operations

The dry-run speed is a constant speed that is independent of the teaching speeds. When the
dry-run operation is started, the manipulator executes all the steps at a constant dry-run
speed. Dry-run operation is convenient for quick check of a job consisting of slow operations.
The dry-run speed is 10% of maximum speed.
NOTE Be careful of steps programmed at lower speeds than the dry-run speed, because they are
executed at greater speeds than programmed.
1 Select the “DRY-RUN The setting alternates between “VALID” and “INVALID.”
SPEED” under the SPE-
CIAL PLAY window.
dry-run speed.
Speed
Play speed
Safety speed
Dry-run speed
Step
Safety Speed and Dry-run Speed
Machine Lock Operation

In machine lock operation, a job is played back without moving the manipulator to check the
status of input and output.
1 Select “MACHINE LOCK” The setting alternates between “VALID” and “INVALID.”
under the SPECIAL PLAY win-
dow.
3 Press [START]. When set to “VALID,” the manipulator starts machine lock opera-
tion.
5-11
5.2 Playback
Check Mode Operation

During check mode operation, the machine runs without issuing work instructions, such as the
ARCON instruction. It is used primarily to check the path of the program.
1 Select “CHECK-RUN” under The setting alternates between “VALID” and “INVALID.”
the SPECIAL PLAY window.
3 Press [START]. When set to “VALID,” the manipulator starts check operation.
Weaving Prohibit Setting during Check Mode Operation

When weaving prohibit is specified for the check mode operation, the weaving operation is not
executed in the weaving section of the job.
1 Select “WEAV PROHIBIT IN The setting alternates between “VALID” and “INVALID.”
CHK-RUN” under the SPE-
CIAL PLAY window.
3 Press [START]. When set to “VALID,” the manipulator does not execute the weav-
ing operation during check run execution.
Cancel All Special Operations
1 Select {EDIT} from the menu.
2 Select “CANCEL ALL The message “All special functions canceled” appears.
SELECT.”
NOTE Special operations are also automatically cancelled if the main power is shut OFF.
5-12
5.3 Stop and Restart
The manipulator stops in the following conditions:

• Hold
• Emergency stop
• Stop by alarm
• Others
• During each application
5.3.1 Hold
Hold operation causes the manipulator to stop all motion. There are two ways to hold the
manipulator motion.
• [HOLD] on the programming pendant

• External input signal (system input)
Using the Programming Pendant

Hold
When [HOLD] on the programming pendant is pressed, the manipulator stops.
SUPPLE-
[HOLD] lamp lights while it is held down. At the same time, [START] lamp goes
MENT OFF.
Release
Press [START] on the programming pendant. The manipulator restarts its operation from the
position where it was stopped.
Using an External Input Signal (System Input)

Hold
1 Turn ON the hold signal from The manipulator stops momentarily.

an external input (system
input). External holding
The output signal “HOLD” turns ON.

The programming pendant [HOLD] lamp lights. At the same time,
[START] lamp on the programming pendant turns OFF.
5-13
Release
1 Turn off the hold signal from Hold is released. To continue the operation, press [START] or turn
an external input (system ON the external input signal (system input). The manipulator
input). restarts its operation, beginning from the position where it was
stopped.
5.3.2 Emergency Stop

At an emergency stop, the servo power supply that drives the manipulator is turned OFF and
the manipulator stops immediately. An emergency stop can be performed by using either of
the following:
• Programming pendant
• External input signal (system input)
Emergency Stop
1 Press the emergency stop The servo power turns OFF and the manipulator stops immedi-
ately.
button . EMERGENCY STOP
On the front door of the NX100:
On the programming pendant:
Using the Emergency Stop Button on the Programming Pendant
Robot stops by P.P. emergency stop
Using the External Input Signal (System Input)
Robot stops by external emergency stop
5-14
Release
1 Turn the emergency stop

TURN
button in the direction On the front door of the NX100:
of the arrows.
TURN
On the programming pendant:
To turn ON the servo power supply again, press [SERVO ON

READY] and then grasp the Enable switch of the programming
pendant.
SERVO
ON
READY
5-15
5.3.3 Restart After Emergency Stop
CAUTION
• Prior to restarting after an emergency stop, confirm the position for the
next operation and make sure there is no interference with the work-
piece or fixture.
The application of an emergency stop during high speed operations on continuous steps
can result in the manipulator stopping two or three steps prior to the step that is being dis-
played. There is a risk of interference with the workpiece or fixture when the manipulator
is restarted under such conditions.
5.3.4 Stop by Alarm

If an alarm occurs during operation, the manipulator stops immediately and the ALARM win-
dow appears on the programming pendant indicating that the machine was stopped by an
alarm.
If more than one alarm occurs simultaneously, all alarms can be viewed on the window. Scroll
down the viewing area of the window when necessary.
ALARM
ALARM 4100 [1]
OVER RUN (ROBOT)
ALARM 4321 [SLURBT]
OVER LOAD
ALARM 4315 [SLURBT]
OCCUR TIMES: 3
RESET
Main Menu ShortCut
The following operations are available in the alarm status: window change, mode change,
alarm reset, and emergency stop.
To display the ALARM window again when the window is changed during alarm occurrence,
select {SYSTEM INFO} and then {ALARM HISTORY}.
5-16
Releasing Alarms
Alarms are classified by minor and major alarms.
• Releasing Minor Alarms
1 Press [SELECT]. Select “RESET” under the ALARM window to release the alarm
status. When using an external input signal (system input), turn
ON the “ALARM RESET” setting.
• Releasing Major Alarms
1 Turn OFF the main power sup- If a severe alarm, such as hardware failure occurs, servo power is
ply and remove the cause of automatically shut off and the manipulator stops. If releasing
the alarm. does not work, turn OFF the main power and correct the cause of
the alarm.
5.3.5 Others
Temporary Stop by Mode Change
When the play mode is switched to the teach mode during playback, the manipulator stops
immediately.
!Stopped by switching mode
To restart the operation, return to the play mode and perform a start operation.
Temporary Stop by the PAUSE Instruction

When the PAUSE instruction is executed, the manipulator stops operating.
!Robot stops by execution PAUSE command
To restart the operation, perform a start operation. The manipulator restarts from the next
instruction.
5-17
5.4 Modifying Play Speed
5.4.1 Modifying with Speed Override

Speed modifications using the speed override have the following features:
• Speed can be modified during playback.

• The job can be played back at various speeds until the play speed is properly adjusted.
• Speed can be increased or decreased by a ratio of the current play speed. The ratio set-
tings range from 50% to 150% in increments of 1%.
• All play speed values used in the job can be increased or decreased by a constant ratio.
Therefore, it is convenient when, for example, all play speed settings are to be increased by
150% at the same time.
The operation flow override of play speeds is as shown in the following:
5-18
Start speed override
Call job to perform speed override
Set speed override

(Speed data modify :OFF,specify the ratio)
Changes experimentally,
without modifying registered
Start playback
speed
Adjust the ratio during playback if needed
(1cycle completed)
YES
Reset and playback?
NO
NO
Modify?
YES
Call job to perform speed override
Set speed override

(Speed data modify: ON,specify the ratio) Modifies play speed
Start playback
Modify play speed simultaneously
(1cycle completed)
Start speed override
5-19
Setting Speed Overrides
1 Select {UTILITY} under the

menu in the PLAYBACK win-
dow.
2 Select {SPEED OVERRIDE}. The PLAYBACK window becomes the speed override condition.
PLAYBACK
TEST: STEP NO: 0000
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0002 MOVL V=1500
0003 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0004 MOVL V=1500
0005 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0006 MOVJ VJ=100.00
SPEED ADJUSTMENT (MODIFY: OF) 100 %
3 Select “ON” or “OFF” under Each time [SELECT] is pressed when the cursor is on the data of
“MODIFY.” the item “MODIFY,” “ON” and “OFF” alternate.
Select “ON” to modify the registered play speed during playback.
When “OFF” is selected, the registered play speed is not modi-
fied. To change the play speed temporarily (for example, to exper-
iment with various speeds), select “OFF.”
SPEED ADJUSTMENT (MODIFY: OF) 100 %
4 Set the override ratio. Line up the cursor with the override ratio and move the cursor up
and down to change the ratio.
If you want to input the ratio number directly, move the cursor to
the override ratio and press [SELECT]. The number input line
appears. Input the override ratio using the Numeric keys.
SPEED ADJUSTMENT:
SPEED ADJUSTMENT (MODIFY: OF) %
Modifying Play Speed

1 Set speed override.
2 Playback the manipulator. The manipulator starts operating. The play speed is increased or
decreased in the set ratio. When setting “MODIFY” to “ON,” the
step’s play speed is modified when each step is reached.
When one cycle is completed by the END instruction, the speed
override setting is released.
5-20
• Assuming that the manipulator moves from step 1 to step 2, the play speed of step 2 is
NOTE not modified if the speed override is released before reaching step 2.
• When the play speed is changed by speed override, the maximum and minimum speed is
limited by the manipulator.
• When the safety speed operation is commanded with the setting of “MODIFY: ON,” the
manipulator operates at safety speed. However, the play speed in memory is modified
as set using speed override.
• Play speed set by the SPEED instruction is not modified.
Modifying Speed Override Ratio


dow.
2 Select {SPEED OVERRIDE}.
3 Set the desired speed override Line up the cursor with the speed ratio and press [SHIFT] + the
ratio with the cursor. cursor key to change the ratio. To set the value directly, first
select the speed ratio and the number input line will appear. Use
the Numeric keys to input the new ratio. If [CANCEL] is pressed,
the modified ratio is released.
Releasing Speed Override Settings


dow.
2 Select {SPEED OVERRIDE}. The setting of the speed override ratio is released. If it is
released, the speed ratio setting is not displayed on the PLAY-
BACK window.
The speed override settings are automatically released in the fol-

lowing cases:
• When dry-run speed operation is set.

• When the mode is changed to any mode other than the play
mode.
• When an alarm or error occurs.
• When one cycle operation is completed with the END instruc-
tion.
• When the power supply is turned OFF.
5-21
5.5 Playback with Reserved Start
5.5.1 Preparation for Reserved Start

In the reserved start function, jobs registered at different stations are played back in the
reserved order using the start buttons on the stations.
Station 3
(Job 3 registered)
Station 1
(Job 1 registered)
Station 2
(Job 2 registered)
For example, in a case where three stations handle three different workpieces, as shown in
the illustration above, the jobs would be registered as follows:
• Job 1 is registered to process workpiece 1 at Station 1

To play back the jobs, prepare workpiece 1 and press the start button on Station 1. The manip-
ulator executes Job 1. Prepare workpieces 2 and 3 while Job 1 is being executed, and press
the start buttons on Stations 2 and 3. Even if Job 1 is being executed at that time, jobs on dif-
ferent stations are reserved in the order that the start buttons were pressed, and will be exe-
cuted in that order. During playback, the status of the reservation can be checked on the start
reservation window.
5-22
Enabling Reserved Start

The start button on the station is operative when the reserved start function is enabled, and
the following start operations are impossible.
• [START] on the programming pendant

• Start operation from external input signal (system input)

main menu.
2 Select {OPERATE COND}. The OPERATING CONDITION window appears. The screen is
scrolled up/down by the cursor key when it locates at the top/bot-
tom of the items.
OPERATING CONDITION
EXTERNAL START PERMIT
EXTERNAL MODE SWITCH PERMIT
EXTERNAL CYCLE SWITCH PERMIT
PP CYCLE SWITCH PERMIT
EXTERNAL SERVO ON PERMIT
CHECK/MACHINE LOCK PERMIT
MASTER CALLING UP PERMIT
NOTE The OPERATING CONDITION window is shown

only when the security mode is management mode.
3 Select “RESERVED START.” Each time [SELECT] is pressed, “PERMIT” and “PROHIBIT”
alternate. Select “PERMIT.”
OPERATING CONDITION
EXTERNAL START PERMIT
EXTERNAL MODE SWITCH PERMIT
EXTERNAL CYCLE SWITCH PERMIT
PP CYCLE SWITCH PERMIT
EXTERNAL SERVO ON PERMIT
CHECK/MACHINE LOCK PERMIT
MASTER CALLING UP PERMIT
RESERVED START PERMIT
When reserved start is enabled, the external start

NOTE and the programming pendant start are prohibited
even if setting is “PERMIT.”
Regardless of the operation cycle selected, it is
automatically set to 1 CYCLE.
5-23
Registering Reserved Start I/O Signal

Register the start I/O signal as a preparation to perform start operation from the station.
NOTE This operation can be done only when the operation mode is teach mode and the sucurity
mode is management mode.

main menu.
2 Select {RES. START(CNCT)}. The RESERVED START (CNCT) window appears.

RESERVED START (CNCT)

NO. START IN START OUT
1 *** ***
2 *** ***
3 *** ***
4 *** ***
5 *** ***
6 *** ***
Main Menu ShortCut
3 Select “START IN” or “START The number can now be entered.

OUT” for each station.

1 ***
2 *** ***
3 *** ***
4 *** ***
5 *** ***
6 *** ***
4 Input desired signal number.
5 Press [ENTER]. The input/output signal number is registered.


1 48 ***
2 *** ***
3 *** ***
4 *** ***
5 *** ***
6 *** ***
5-24
Registering Jobs to Stations

Register the starting job of each station.
This operation can be done only when the operation mode is teach mode and the setting of
NOTE “RESERVED START JOB CHANGE” is “PERMIT” in the OPERATING CONDITION win-
dow. For oparation, refer to “Enabling Reserved Start” on the page 5-23.

menu.
2 Select {RES. START(JOB)}. The RESERVED START (JOB) window appears.

indicates that the input/output number is registered.
indicates that the input/output number is not registered.
RESERVED START (JOB)

NO. JOB NAME CONNECTION
1 z
2 z
3 z
4 z
5 {
6 {
Main Menu ShortCut
3 Select job name for each sta- The selection dialog box appears.
tion.

1 z
2 z
SETTING START JOB
3
CANCEL START JOB
z
4 z
5 {
6 {
4 Select “SETTING START The JOB LIST window appears.

JOB.”
5 Select desired job. The starting job is registered.

1 JOB1 z
2 z
3 z
4 z
5 {
6 {
5-25
Deleting Registered Jobs from Stations

Delete the registered job of each station.
This operation can be done only when the operation mode is teach mode and the setting of
NOTE “RESERVED START JOB CHANGE” is “PERMIT” in the operation condition display.
For oparation, refer to“Enabling Reserved Start” on the page 5-23.

menu.
2 Select {RES. START(JOB)}. The RESERVED START (JOB) window appears.
3 Select job name for each sta- The selection dialog box appears.
tion.

1 JOB1 z
2 JOB2 z
3 SETTING START JOB z
JOB3
4 CANCEL START JOB z
JOB4
5 {
6 {
Main Menu ShortCut
4 Select “CANCEL START Registered job is deleted.

JOB.”

1 JOB1 z
2 JOB2 z
3 JOB3 z
4 JOB4 z
5 {
6 {
Main Menu ShortCut
5-26
5.5.2 Playback from Reserved Start

Start Operation
1 Set the mode switch to “PLAY.”
2 Press start button on the sta- The job registered for the station starts up and the manipulator
tion. performs one cycle operation.
• While the job is being executed, the start button lamp on the station lamps.
NOTE • If the workpiece must be prepared at the station, prepare it before pressing the start but-
ton.
• If the start button of another station is pressed during execution of a job at one station, the
job on the station is reserved and prepares to start. Jobs are reserved and executed in
the order that the start buttons are pressed.
• When a job is reserved, the start button lamp on the station blinks.
• No station job is reserved when it is being executed even if its start button is pressed.
• To suspend a job being executed, perform the Hold operation.
SUPPLE-
Reservations are cancelled when the start button is pressed again during the job reserva-
MENT tion operation.
5-27
Checking Job Reservation Status

The job reservation status during playback can be checked.

menu.
2 Select {RES. STATUS}. The RESERVATION STATUS window appears.

RESERVATION STATUS
NO. JOB NAME STATUS START IN
1 JOB1 STARTING {
2 JOB2 RESERVE1 {
3 JOB3 RESERVE2 {
4 JOB4 RESERVE3 {
5 {
6 {
c
d
Main Menu ShortCut
STATUS
Reservation status is displayed.
STARTING: Indicates the station currently working.
STOP: Indicates any station where work has been temporarily
stopped by a hold operation.
RESERVE1,RESERVE2,...: Indicates the order in which jobs
have been reserved for start.
START IN
Input signal status is displayed.
“ ”: Input signal ON
“ ”: Input signal OFF
5-28
Resetting Job Reservation

The job reservation can be reset.
NOTE If “STARTING” is displayed, the job cannot be reset.
1 Select {JOB} on the RESER-

VATION STATUS window.
2 Select {RESET RESERVA- When {RESET RESERVATION} is selected, job reservation

TION} or {RESET ALL}. stated to “RESERVE“ is reset.
When {RESET ALL} is selected, job reservation stated to
“STOP” and “RESERVE” is reset.
RESERVATION STATUS
NO. JOB NAME STATUS START IN
1 JOB1 {
2 JOB2 {
3 JOB3 {
4 JOB4 {
5 {
6 {
Main Menu ShortCut
All job reservations are reset automatically in the

NOTE following conditions:
• When the reserved start sets to “PROHIBIT.”
(When “RESERVED START” is set to “PROHIBIT”
on the OPERATING CONDITION window.)
• When another job is called or an edit operation is
performed.
The confirmation dialog box appears.
Clear data?
YES NO
3 Select “YES.”
5-29
5.5.3 Hold Operation

Hold operation causes the manipulator to stop all motion. It can be performed by the the fol-
lowing buttons or signal.
• [HOLD] on the programming pendant

• External Input Signal (system input)
• Hold button for the station axis
[HOLD] on the Programming Pendant

Hold
The manipulator stops temporarily when [HOLD] on the programming pendant is pressed.
SUPPLE-
The [HOLD] lamp lights while it is held down. At the same time, the [START] lamp goes
MENT OFF.
Release
Press the start button on the suspended station. The manipulator restarts its operation from
the position where it was stopped.
Hold by External Input Signal (System Input)

Hold
1 Input ON signal to the external The manipulator stops temporarily.

input (system input) specified
for hold operation. External holding
The hold lamp for the external output signal lights.

The [HOLD] lamp on the programming pendant lights and the
[START] lamp turns OFF.
Release
1 Input OFF signal to the exter- Hold is released.

nal input (system input) speci- To continue the operation, press the start button on the sus-
fied for hold operation. pended station. The manipulator restarts its operation from the
position where it was stopped.
5-30
Hold at the Station

Hold
1 Press the hold button on the The manipulator stops temporarily.

station.
External holding
Release
1 Press the hold button on the Hold is released.

suspended station. To continue the operation, press the start button on the station.
The manipulator restarts its operation from the position where it
was stopped.
Pressing the start button on a station that is not in Hold status does not start manipulator
SUPPLE-
MENT operation. The job registered for the station is reserved or the reservation, if it has been
made, is canceled.
5-31
5.6 Displaying Job Stack
5.6 Displaying Job Stack
During execution of the series of jobs that combined with CALL or JUMP instructions, the job
stack can be displayed to check where the current job is and how many jobs left.
Stack Level 1 Stack Level 2 Stack Level 3 Stack Level 4
Job call
Job A
Job call
Job B
Job call
Return Job C
Job call
Return Job D
Return
SUPPLE- Job calls can be used for up to 8 stack levels.

MENT
1 Select {DISPLAY} under the The pull-down menu appears.

menu on the PLAYBACK win-
dow.
CYCLE TIME
PLAYBACK
J: JOB-A JOB STACK STEP NO: 0003
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0002 MOVL V=1500
0003 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0004 MOVL V=1500
0005 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0006 CALL JOB:JOB-B
0007 MOVJ VJ=100.00
2 Select {JOB STACK}. The job stack status dialog box appears. To close the job stack
status dialog box, select {DISPLAY} and then {JOB STACK}
under the menu again.
PLAYBACK
J: JOB-C STEP NO: 0003
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0002 MOVL V=1500
0003 MOVJ VJ=100.00 <JOB STACK>
0004 MOVL V=1500 1: JOB-A
0005 MOVJ VJ=100.00 2: JOB-B
0006 MOVJ VJ=100.00 3:
0007 MOVJ VJ=100.00 4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
For above example, the playback of Job C is being executed and
the Job C is called from Job B. Also, the Job B is called from Job
A.
5-32
6 Editing Jobs
This section explains how to manage the jobs without moving the manipulator. Copying,
deleting, and modifying of the jobs can be done in the teach mode only. Other operations can
be done in any mode.
NOTE Edit operations are restricted when the edit lock is applied.
Editing Move Instructions

NOTE
See " 4 Teaching " for basic information on editing move instructions.
It is not possible to add, delete, or modify move instructions which have position data. See
" 4.4 Modifying Steps " for details.
The following MOV instruction edit operations are explained in this section:
For move instructions:

• Insertion, deletion, or modification of additional items
• Modification of interpolation type or play speed for move instructions
• Setting, modification, or deletion of UNTIL statements (interruption conditions based
on input signals)
• Setting and deletion of NWAIT instructions
For move instructions using position variables:
• Insertion and deletion of move instruction.
6-1
6.1 Copying Jobs
6.1 Copying Jobs
This operation is used to copy registered jobs and use them to create new jobs. It can be
done using either the JOB CONTENT window or the JOB LIST window.
6.1.1 Copying Jobs on the JOB CONTENT Window

On the JOB CONTENT window, the current edit job becomes the copy source job.

menu.

JOB CONTENT
0000 NOP
0001 SET B000 0
0002 SET B001 1
0003 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0004 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0005 DOUT OGH#(13) B002
3 Select {JOB} under the menu. The pull-down menu appears.

SELECT JOB
JOB NAME:
MASTER JOB JOB-A STEP NO: 0003
CREATE NEW JOB
0000 NOP
0001 SET B000 0
RENAME JOB
0002 SET B001 1
COPY JOB
0003 0OVJ VJ=80.00
0004 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0005 DOUT OGH#(13) B002
4 Select {COPY JOB} under the

pull-down menu.
5 Input the new job name. The name of the copy source job is displayed on the input area. It
is possible to partially change this name to enter a new name.
> JOB-B
SUPPLE-
See " 1.2.7 Character Input " for information on let-
MENT ter input operations.
6-2
6.1 Copying Jobs
6 Press [ENTER]. The confirmation dialog box appears.

If “YES” is selected, the job is copied and the new job appears.
If “NO” is selected, the job copy is not executed, and the pro-
cess is cancelled.
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: JOB-A STEP NO: 0003
0000 NOP
0001 SET B000 0
0002 SET B001 1
0003 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0004 MOVJ VJ=80.00 Copy?
0005 DOUT OGH#(13) B002
0006 WAIT IF IN#(5)=ON YES NO
0007 MOVL V=880.0
0008 MOVL V=880.0
0009 MOVL V=880.0
0010 DOUT OGH#(14) B003
0011 DOUT OT#(5) ON
0012 DOUT OT#(6) ON
Main Menu ShortCut
6-3
6.1 Copying Jobs
6.1.2 Copying Jobs on the JOB LIST Window

On the JOB LIST window, select the copy source job from the registered jobs and specify the
copy destination directory.

menu.
2 Select {SELECT JOB} under The JOB LIST window appears.

the pull-down menu.
JOB LIST

TEST02 TEST TEST01
3 Move the cursor to the copy

source job.

menu.
5 Select {COPY JOB} under

the pull-down menu.
SELECT JOB
CALL MASTER JOB

CREATE NEW JOB
TEST02 TEST TEST01
RENAME JOB
COPY JOB
6 Input the new job name. The name of the copy source job is displayed on the input area.
It is possible to partially change this name to enter a new name.
> JOB-B
SUPPLE-
6-4
6.1 Copying Jobs

If “YES” is selected, the job is copied and the new job appears.
If “NO” is selected, the job copy is not executed, and the pro-
cess is cancelled.
JOB CONTENT
0000 NOP
0001 SET B000 0
0002 SET B001 1
0003 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0004 MOVJ VJ=80.00 Copy?
0005 DOUT OGH#(13) B002
0007 MOVL V=880.0
0008 MOVL V=880.0
0009 MOVL V=880.0
0010 DOUT OGH#(14) B003
0011 DOUT OT#(5) ON
0012 DOUT OT#(6) ON
Main Menu ShortCut
6-5
6.2 Deleting Jobs
6.2 Deleting Jobs
This operation is used to delete jobs that are registered on the NX100. It can be performed in
either the JOB CONTENT window or the JOB LIST window.
6.2.1 Deleting Jobs on the JOB CONTENT Window

On the JOB CONTENT window, the current edit job is deleted.

menu.
3 Select {JOB} from the menu. The pull-down menu appears.

SELECT JOB
: JOB-A
CALL MASTER JOB STEP NO: 0003
CREATE NEW JOB
0000 NOP
0001 SET B000 0
RENAME JOB
0002 SET B001 1
COPY JOB
0003 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0004 MOVJ VJ=80.00
DELETE JOB
0005 DOUT OGH#(13) B002
4 Select {DELETE JOB} under The confirmation dialog box appears.

the pull-down menu. When “YES” is selected, the edit job is deleted. When deletion is
completed, the JOB LIST window appears.
When “NO” is selected, the job deletion is cancelled.
JOB CONTENT
0000 NOP
0001 SET B000 0
0002 SET B001 1
0003 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0004 MOVJ VJ=80.00 Delete?
0005 DOUT OGH#(13) B002
0007 MOVL V=880.0
0008 MOVL V=880.0
0009 MOVL V=880.0
0010 DOUT OGH#(14) B003
0011 DOUT OT#(5) ON
0012 DOUT OT#(6) ON
Main Menu ShortCut
6-6
6.2 Deleting Jobs
6.2.2 Deleting Jobs on the JOB LIST Window

On the JOB LIST window, select the job to be deleted from the list of the registered jobs.

menu.

JOB LIST

TEST02 TEST TEST01
3 Move the cursor to the job to

be deleted.
4 Select {JOB} from the menu.

SELECT JOB
CALL MASTER JOB

CREATE NEW JOB
TEST02 TEST TEST01
RENAME JOB
COPY JOB
DELETE JOB
5 Select {DELETE JOB} under The confirmation dialog box appears.

the pull-down menu. JOB EDIT UTILITY
DISPLAY
JOB LIST

TEST02 TEST TEST01
Delete?
YES NO
If “NO” or [CANCEL] is selected, the job deletion is cancelled and

the JOB LIST window appears.
6 Select “YES.”
SUPPLE-
To select all the registered jobs at a time, select {EDIT} from the menu and then select
MENT “SELECT ALL.”
6-7
6.3 Modifying Job Names
This operation is used to modify the name of a job that is registered. The operation can be
performed in either the JOB CONTENT window or the JOB LIST window.
6.3.1 Modifying Job Names on the JOB CONTENT Window

menu.

JOB CONTENT
0000 NOP
0001 SET B000 0
0002 SET B001 1
0003 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0004 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0005 DOUT OGH#(13) B002
3 Select {JOB} from the menu. The pull-down menu appears.

SELECT JOB
JOB
CALL NAME:
MASTER JOBJOB-A STEP NO: 0003
CREATE NEW JOB
0000 NOP
0001 SET
RENAME JOB B000 0
0002 SET B001 1
COPY JOB
0003 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0004 MOVJ VJ=80.00
4 Select {RENAME JOB} under

the pull-down menu.
6-8
5 Input the job name. Input the new job name on the input area.
The name of the source job is displayed on the input area. It is
possible to partially change this name to enter a new name.
SUPPLE-
JOB CONTENT
0000 NOP
0001 SET B000 0
0002 SET B001 1
0003 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0004 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0005 DOUT OGH#(13) B002
0007 MOVL V=880.0
0008 MOVL V=880.0
0009 MOVL V=880.0
0010 DOUT OGH#(14) B003
0011 DOUT OT#(5) ON
0012 DOUT OT#(6) ON
JOB-B
Main Menu ShortCut

When “YES” is selected, the job name is changed and a new job
name is displayed.
When “NO” is selected, the job name is not changed, and the pro-
cess is cancelled.
JOB CONTENT
0000 NOP
0001 SET B000 0
0002 SET B001 1
0003 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0004 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0005 DOUT OGH#(13) B002 Rename?
0007 MOVL V=880.0 YES NO
0008 MOVL V=880.0
0009 MOVL V=880.0
0010 DOUT OGH#(14) B003
0011 DOUT OT#(5) ON
0012 DOUT OT#(6) ON
Main Menu ShortCut
6-9
6.3.2 Modifying Job Names on the JOB LIST Window

On the JOB LIST window, select the job whose name is to be modified from the list of the reg-
istered jobs.

menu.

JOB LIST

TEST02 TEST TEST01
3 Move the cursor to the name

to be changed.
4 Select {JOB} from the menu.

SELECT JOB
CALL MASTER JOB

CREATE NEW JOB
TEST02 TEST TEST01
RENAME JOB
COPY JOB
5 Select {RENAME JOB} under

the pull-down menu.
6 Enter the job name and press The confirmation dialog box appears.
[ENTER].
Rename?
YES NO
7 Select “YES.”
6-10
6.4 Editing Comments
6.4 Editing Comments
Comments of up to 32 characters can be affixed to jobs to identify them more specifically.

Comments are displayed and edited on the JOB HEADER window.

menu.
2 Select {JOB}.

pull-down menu.
4 Select {JOB HEADER}. The JOB HEADER window appears.

JOB HEADER
JOB NAME: TEST
COMM. :
DATE : 2003/05/20 12:00
CAPACITY : 1024 BYTES
LINES : 30 LINES
STEPS : 20 STEPS
EDIT LOCK : OFF
GROUP SET : R1
5 Select “COMM.” The window for character input appears.
6 Input comments. For jobs that are already registered, comments are displayed on
the input area. It is possible to partially change comments to
enter new comments.
THIS JOB IS TEST JOB
SUPPLE-
See " 1.2.7 Character Input " for information on
MENT character input operations.
7 Press [ENTER]. The input area comment is registered and is displayed in the
“COMM.” area on the JOB HEADER window.
JOB HEADER
JOB NAME: TEST
COMM. : THIS JOB IS TEST JOB
DATE : 2003/05/20 12:00
LINES : 30 LINES
STEPS : 20 STEPS
EDIT LOCK : OFF
GROUP SET : R1
6-11
6.5 Setting Edit Lock on Individual Job Units
6.5 Setting Edit Lock on Individual Job Units
In order to prevent inadvertent changes in registered jobs or data, it is possible to apply an

edit lock to individual jobs. When a job is protected from editing, the job cannot be edited or
deleted. Edit lock is set and cancelled on the JOB HEADER window.

menu.
2 Select {JOB}.

pull-down menu.
4 Select {JOB HEADER}. The JOB HEADER window appears.

JOB HEADER
JOB NAME: TEST01
COMM. : THIS JOB IS TEST JOB
DATE : 2003/05/20 12:00
LINES : 30 LINES
STEPS : 20 STEPS
EDIT LOCK : OFF
5 Select “EDIT LOCK” and set Each time [SELECT] is pressed, the setting alternates between
the edit prohibit. “ON” (edit disabled) and “OFF” (edit enabled).
6-12
6.6 Enabling the Modification of Position Data Only
6.6 Enabling the Modification of Position Data Only
It is possible to set conditions to allow changes of position data only, in jobs which are locked.

main menu.
2 Select {TEACHING COND}. The TEACHING CONDITION window appears.

TEACHING CONDITION
RECT/CYLINDRICAL RECT
LANGUAGE LEVEL SUBSET
INSTRUCTION INPUT LEARNING VALID
MOVE INSTRUCTION SET STEP
STEP ONLY CHANGING PROHIBIT
TEACHING CONDITION window is shown only

NOTE when the security mode is edit mode or manage-
ment mode.
3 Select “STEP ONLY CHANG-

ING.”
4 Press [SELECT]. Each time [SELECT] is pressed, the setting alternates between
“PROHIBIT” and “PERMIT.”
6-13
7.1 One-touch Operation “Direct Open”
7 Convenient Functions
The direct open function immediately shows the JOB CONTENT window or condition file con-
tents of a job called with the CALL instruction. Move the cursor to the desired job name or
Direct
condition file name and simply press the direct open key open
to display the contents of the
file. This function can be used for the following window:
• JOB CONTENT window for a job name directly specified by a CALL instruction
• CONDITION FILE window for a file name directly specified by a work instruction
• COMMAND POS window for a move instruction
• I/O window with an I/O instruction (when I/O numbers are specified)
7-1
<Example> Example Using Direct Open


COMMAND POS
INTR:********** SPD: 558 cm/min
[CMD] TOOL: ** [CURR] TOOL: **
JOB CONTENT R1:S * R1:S 0
JOB NAME: TEST01 STEP NO: 0003 In the 8th line L
U
* L
U
0
0
*
CONTROL GROUP: R1 TOOL: 00 R * R 0
Direct
B B 0
0008 MONJ VJ=50.00 open
T
*
* T 0
0009 DOUT OT#(1) ON
0010 WVON WEV#(2)
0011 CALL JOB:JOB-C
In the 9th line COMMAND POS window

Direct
open DATA EDIT DISPLAY UTILITY
USER OUTPUT
GROUP OG#01 0: DEC. 00: HEX.
OUT#C01 #1010 {
OUT#C02 #1011 {
OUT#C03 #1012 {
OUT#C04 #1013 {
OUT#C05 #1014 {
OUT#C06 #1015 {
OUT#C07 #1016 {
OUT#C08 #1017 {
In the 10th line

Direct
open
USER OUTPUT window

WEAVING CONDITION
WEAVING COND NO.: 1/16
MODE SINGLE
SMOOTH ON
SPEED FREQ
FREQUENCY 3.5 Hz
<PATTERN>
AMPLITUDE 2.000 mm
VERTICAL 10.000 mm
HORIZONTAL 10.000 mm
In the 11th line ANGLE
TRAVEL ANGLE
45.00 ∞
0.00 ∞
Direct
<TIMER MODE>
open
WEAVING CONDITION window

JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: JOB-C STEP NO: 0003
0000 NOP
0001 END
JOB CONTENT window for "JOB-C"
1 In the JOB CONTENT win-

dow, move the cursor to the
job name or condition file
for which the window is to
be displayed.
2 Press the direct open key This key lamp lights and the JOB CONTENT window or the condi-
Direct Direct
open
. tion file window appears. When the direct open key open
is
pressed once more, the key lamp turns OFF, and the window
returns to the former JOB CONTENT window.
7-2
7.2 Parallel Shift Function
• The direct open function cannot be used again while a directly opened window is shown.
NOTE • If another window is selected while the direct open function is effective, the function is
automatically cancelled and the lamp on the direct open key goes out.
• Once another JOB CONTENT window is opened by the direct open function, the source
job cannot be continuously operated. (Stopped until the opened JOB CONTENT window
is closed.)
7.2.1 Function Overview

Parallel shift refers to the shifting of an object from a fixed position in such a way that all points
within the object move an equal distance. In the model for parallel shift shown in the following,
the shift value can be defined as the distance L (three-dimensional coordinate displacement).
The parallel shift function is relevant to the actual operation of the manipulator because it can
be used to reduce the amount of work involved in teaching by shifting a taught path (or posi-
tion).
In the example in the figure below, the taught position A is shifted in increments of the distance
L (this is actually a three-dimensional XYZ displacement that can be recognized by the robot)
in order to enable the operation that was taught at position A to also be performed at positions
B through G.
A B C D E F G
L
Teaching position
7-3
The block from the SFTON to the SFTOF instructions is subject to the shift operation.
Line (Step) Instruction
0000 NOP
0001(001) MOVJ VJ=50.00
0002(002) MOVL V=138
0003 SFTON P UF# (1)
0004(003) MOVL V=138
0005(004) MOVL V=138 Shifted block
0006(005) MOVL V=138
0007 SFTOF
0008(006) MOVL V=138
1 2 3 4 5 6
When shifting an entire series of operations, the range to be shifted by the shift instruction can
be set using the method indicated above, but the method shown in the following, in which just
the part to be shifted is made into a separate job, can also be used.
SFTON P
CALL JOB: Job to perform the shifting
SFTOF
7-4
7.2.2 Setting the Shift Value

Registering Position Variables
The NX100 has 128 position variables (P000 to P127); these can be used to define parallel
shift values. When using the parallel shift function, it is necessary to measure the distance
between the teaching point and the shift destination position (XYZ displacement of each coor-
dinate) and then register this in advance as a position variable.
When the shift instruction is executed in playback, the operation is performed at a location
shifted from the taught position by the amount registered for the specified position variable.
The POSITION VARIABLE window is shown in the following.
POSITION VARIABLE
#P000 ROBOT NAME:
R1:X -200.000 TOOL: 00
Y 0.000 Amount of
Z 500.000 <TYPE> shift (mm)
Rx 0.00 FRONT S>=180
Ry 0.00 UP R>=180
Rz 0.00 FLIP T< 180
Amount of wrist
displacement (° )
SFTON P000
Coordinate Systems
The shift value for parallel shift is X, Y, and Z increment in each coordinates. There are four
coordinates: base coordinates, robot coordinates, tool coordinates, and user coordinates. In
systems with no servo track, the base coordinates and robot coordinates are the same.
Tool coordinates
Robot coordinates
User coordinates
Base coordinates
User coordinates
7-5
Setting the Shift Value

When setting the shift value for the position variables, use the current position (coordinates) of
the manipulator in the window.
DATA EDIT DISPLAY UTILITY DATA EDIT DISPLAY UTILITY
CUR POS CUR POS

COORDINATE USER COORD #01 TOOL: 00 COORDINATE USER COORD #01 TOOL: 00
R1: X 5.360 mm Rx -179.91 deg R1: X 105.360 mm Rx -179.91 deg
Y 66.080 mm Ry -2.17 deg Y 66.080 mm Ry -2.17 deg
Z 316.940 mm Rz -102.89 deg Z 416.940 mm Rz -102.89 deg
<ROBOT TYPE> <ROBOT TYPE>
FRONT S>= 180 FRONT S>= 180
UP R>= 180 UP R>= 180
NO FLOP T< 180 NO FLIP T< 180
Teaching position Position to be shifted

(Move the manipulator using the programming pendant.)
Differences are assumed to be shift amounts.

POSITION VARIABLE
#P000 ROBOT NAME:
R1:X -100.000 TOOL: 00
Y 0.000
Z -100.000 <TYPE>
Rx 0.00 FRONT S>=180
Ry 0.00 UP R>=180
Rz 0.00 FLIP T< 180
Main Menu ShortCut
The shift value is the X, Y, and Z difference between the shift position and teaching position
and the difference in angular displacement RX, RY, And RZ (normally set at “0”). If shifting is
executed at equal pitch intervals, for example for palletizing, find the difference between the
teaching position and the final shift position, then divide by the number of pitch intervals (num-
ber of divisions) to calculate the shift value per pitch.
L1
L2
L1
L2=
Number of pitches
Teaching position Final shift position
The posture of the wrist is defined by the angular displacement of the coordinates of the wrist
axes. Consequently, if the shift value is specified with X, Y, and Z only (RX, RY, RZ=0), the
wrist is shifted while maintaining the same posture as at the teaching point. Since shifting is
normally performed without changing the posture, there is no need to specify an angular dis-
placement for the wrist. The motion when a parallel shift is performed is shown in the follow-
ing:
7-6
Shift without changing the wrist posture

(RX,RY,RZ=0)
Teaching posture
Shift with wrist posture change
(RX,RY,RZ ≠ 0)
Shift value
The shift value is calculated on the position data window for the coordinates in which the shift
is performed. Since this is normally performed in the user coordinates, the position data win-
dow for the user coordinates is used.
7.2.3 Registering Shift Instructions

To register the instruction, move the cursor to the address area in the JOB CONTENT window
during teach mode as follows:

menu.

Address area Instruction area
JOB CONTENT
0000 NOP
0001 SET B000 0
0002 SET B001 1
0003 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0004 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0005 DOUT OGH#(13) B002
0007 MOVL C00002 V=880.0 CV#(1) CTP=0.662
0009 TIMER T=3.0
0010 MOVL V=880.0
0011 MOVL V=880.0
0012 MOVL V=880.0
0013 MOVL V=880.0

address area.
7-7
SFTON Instruction
This is the instruction that starts a parallel shift.

immediately before where the 0020 MOVL V=138
Line immediately 0021 MOVL V=138
SFTON instruction is to be before where 0022 MOVL V=138
registered. SFTON instruction
is to be registered.

IN/OUT
CONTROL
DEVICE
MOTION
ARITH
SFTON SHIFT
SFTOF OTHER
MSHIFT SAME
PRIOR
3 Select {SHIFT}.
4 Select the SFTON instruction. The SFTON instruction is displayed in the input buffer line.
5 Modify the additional items or <When Nothing is to be Changed>

number values as required. Proceed to Step 6.
<When Editing Additional Items>

• Additing or modifying additional items
To change the position variable number, move the cursor to the
position variable number and press [SHIFT] + the cursor key to
increase or decrease the value.
SFTON P000
To directly input the value using the Numeric keys, press

[SELECT] to display the input buffer line.
P=
SFTON
After the number is input, press [ENTER] to modify the number

value in the input buffer line.
7-8
5 (cont’d) • Adding the coordinate system in which the shift is performed

Move the cursor to the instruction in the input buffer line and
press [SELECT]. The DETAIL EDIT window appears.
SFTON P001
DETAIL EDIT
SFTON
P-VAR (RESULT) : P000
COORDINATE : BF
Line up the cursor with ”UNUSED” and press [SELECT]. The

selection dialog box appears. Line up the cursor with the coor-
dinate system to be added, and press [SELECT].
DETAIL EDIT
SFTON
P-VAR ROBOT
COORDINATE : BF
RF
TF
UF#( )
UNUSED
After the coordinate system addition is completed, press

[ENTER]. The DETAIL EDIT window closes and the JOB CON-
TENT window appears.
6 Press [INSERT] and then The instruction displayed in the input buffer line is registered.
[ENTER].
0020 MOVL V=138
Line where SFTON 0021 SFTON P001 BF
instruction is 0022 MOVL V=138
registered.
7-9
SFTOF Instruction
This is the instruction that ends a parallel shift.

immediately before where the 0030 MOVL V=138
Line immediately 0031 MOVL V=138
SFTOF instruction is to be reg- before where
istered. SFTOF instruction
is to be registered.
3 Select {SHIFT}.
4 Select the SFTOF instruction. The SFTOF instruction is displayed in the input buffer line.
SFTOF
5 Press [INSERT] and then The SFTOF instruction is registered.

[ENTER].
0030 MOVL V=138
0031 SFTOF
0032 MOVL V=138
MSHIFT Instruction
When a parallel shift of the wrist posture is attempted, the manipulator may not be shifted to
the target posture in the following cases.
• Posture displacement (Rx, Ry, Rz) is specified to the shift value set by the user.
• When a displacement between two points is calculated using an INFORM operating
instruction (ADD instruction, SUB instruction, etc.), and a posture displacement (Rx, Ry,
Rz) is specified in the shift value.
In such cases, the MSHIFT instruction can be used to automatically calculate the optimum
shift value for an operation to reach the target shift position and posture. With an MSHIFT
instruction, the shift value between the reference position and target position (shift position)
when parallel shift is performed is determined in the specified coordinate system, and set as
the specified position variable.
7-10

immediately before where the 0003 MOVJ VJ=10.00
Line immediately 0004 GETS PX001 $PX000
MSHIFT instruction is to be before where 0005 END
registered. MSHIFT instruction
is registered.

IN/OUT
CONTROL
DEVICE
MOTION
ARITH
SFTON SHIFT
SFTOF OTHER
MSHIFT SAME
PRIOR
3 Select {SHIFT}.
4 Select the MSHIFT instruction. The MSHIFT instruction is displayed in the input buffer line.
5 Change the number data or <When Notiong is to be Changed>

additional items as required. Proceed to Step 6.
<When Editing Additional Items>

• Additing or modifying additional items
To change the position variable number, move the cursor to the
position variable number and press [SHIFT] + the cursor key to
increase or decrease the value.
MSHIFT PX000 BF PX001 PX002
To directly input the value using the Numeric keys, press

[SELECT] to display the input buffer line.
PX =
MSHIFT 0 BF PX001 PX002
After the number is input, press [ENTER] to modify the number

value in the input buffer line.
7-11
5 (cont’d) • Changing the coordinate system in which the shift is performed

Move the cursor to the instruction in the input buffer line and
press [SELECT]. The DETAIL EDIT window appears.
MSHIFT PX000 BF PX001 PX002
DETAIL EDIT
MSHIFT
P-VAR (RESULT) : P000
COORDINATE : BF
P-VAR (BASE) : PX001
P-VAR (DEST) : PX002
Line up the cursor with “BF” and press [SELECT]. The selection
dialog box appears.
Line up the cursor with the coordinate system to be changed,
and press [SELECT].
DETAIL EDIT
MSHIFT
P-VAR (RESULT) :
COORDINATE : BF
BF
P-VAR (BASE) : PX001
RF
P-VAR (DEST) : PX002
TF
UF#( )
MTF
After the coordinate system modification is complete, press

[ENTER]. The DETAIL EDIT window closes and the JOB CON-
TENT window appears.
6 Press [INSERT] and then The instruction displayed in the input buffer line is registered.
[ENTER].
0003 MOVJ VJ=10.00
Line where 0004 GETS PX001 $PX000
MSHIFT is 0005 MSHIFT PX000 RF PX001 PX002
registered.
7-12
7.2.4 Continuation of the Parallel Shift Function
CAUTION
• If the shift function is cancelled through a job editing operation after
execution of a parallel shift instruction, the job must be started again
from the beginning.
Because no shift is performed when the operation is restarted, there is a possibility of

interference between the workpiece and fixture.
If any of the following operations are performed after executing a parallel shift instruction, the
shift function is cancelled.
• Job editing operation (changing, deleting, adding)

• Job copy, job name change
• Registering a new job, deleting a job, or modifying a selected job
• Restart after the alarm occurs
• When control power is turned OFF
NOTE The parallel shift function remains in effect even if the control power supply is turned OFF.
7-13
7.2.5 Examples of Use

Example of Use of Shift Addition/Subtraction
Workpiece Stacking Operation
Line Instruction
0000 NOP
0001 SET B000 0 Make the first shift value zero.
0002 SUB P000 P000
0003 *A
0004 MOVJ Step 1
0005 MOVL Step 2
0006 ’Gripping workpiece
0007 MOVL Step 3
0008 MOVL Step 4
0009 SFTON P000 UF#(1) Shift start
0010 MOVL Shift position Step 5
0011 ’Releasing workpiece
0012 SFTOF Shift end
0013 ADD P000 P001 Add the shift value for the next operation.
0014 MOVL Step 6
0015 MOVL Step 7
0016 INC B000
0017 JUMP *A IF B00<6
0018
SFTON P000 UF#(1)

Since the shift data is retained in memory,
SFTOF the same data can be used (with subtraction
SUB P000 P001 instead of addition) to perform a workpiece
unloading operation.
1,7 3 4,6
2
Workpiece
7-14
Example of Use of MSHIFT Instruction
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=20.00 Move the manipulator to the reference position.
0002 GETS PX000 $PX000 Set the reference position as position variable P000.
0003 MOVJ VJ=20.00 Move the manipulator to the target position.
0004 GETS PX001 $PX000 Set the target position as position variable P001.
0005 MSHlFT PX010 BF PX000 PX001 Set shift value and set it as position variable P010.
0006 END
7-15
7.3 Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function

If the manipulator and base positions are moved after a job has been taught, the entire job has
to be modified. The parallel shift conversion function shortens the modification time required in
cases like this by shifting all steps of the job by the same value to create a new job.
When parallel shift conversion is performed, all job steps are shifted by the same value.
Steps Outside the P-point Maximum Envelope

NOTE “/OV” is displayed for steps which result in a position outside the P-point maximum enve-
lope of the manipulator. When the position is corrected, “/OV” display disappears.
Position Variable
Position variables are not subject to parallel shift job conversion.
Not Converted Job

The following jobs cannot be converted. If conversion is attempted, no operation is per-
formed.
• Jobs without any group axes
• Concurrent jobs (optional)
Coordinate Systems for Conversion

When performing parallel shift job conversion, it is necessary to specify the coordinate sys-
tems in which the conversion is to be performed. The coordinate system can be selected from
the following:
• Base coordinates
• Robot coordinates
• Tool coordinates
• User coordinates (24 types)
• Master tool coordinates (R1+R2 job)
• Joint coordinates
In the case of an ordinary job for which group axes are registered, shift conversion is per-
formed in accordance with the selected coordinate system. The relationship between group
combinations and coordinates are shown in the following table.
7-16
to in the table are followed by their explanations.
Relationship Between Group Combinations and Coordinates at Conversion
Group Explanation
Combination
in Job Usable Coordinate System
R Shift is performed on basis of selected coordinates.
Base coordinates, robot coordinates, tool coordinates, user coordinates
R(B) Shift is performed on basis of selected coordinates.
Base The base axis is shifted by the specified amount and the TCP
Coordinates of the manipulator is shifted by the specified amount in the
base coordinates.
Robot The base axis is shifted by the specified amount.

Coordinates The TCP of the manipulator is shifted by the specified amount
in the robot coordinates. These shifts are carried out indepen-
dently.
Tool The base axis is shifted by the specified amount.

Coordinates The TCP of the manipulator is shifted by the specified amount
in the tool coordinates. These shifts are carried out indepen-
dently.
User The base axis is shifted by the specified amount and the TCP
Coordinates of the manipulator is shifted by the specified amount in the
user coordinates.
S Shift is performed on the basis of pulse values regardless of the coordinates.
R+S The manipulator is shifted in the selected coordinates.

The station axis is shifted on the basis of pulse values regardless of the coordinates.
Base coordinates, robot coordinates, tool coordinates, user coordinates
R(B)+S The manipulator is shifted in the selected coordinates, as in to above.

The station axis is shifted on the basis of pulse values regardless of the coordinates.
R+R Two manipulators are shifted in the selected coordinates.
Base coordinates, robot coordinates, tool coordinates, user coordinates, master

tool coordinates*1
R(B)+R(B) Two manipulators are shifted in the selected coordinate system, as in to

above. Two base axes are also shifted.
*1 In the master tool coordinates, conversion only occurs at the “slave” from the stand-
point of the SMOV instruction.
7-17
Base Coordinates
The base axis is shifted by B and the TCP of the manipulator is shifted by A in the base coor-
dinates.
Base coordinates
Base
Robot Coordinates
The base axis is shifted by B. The TCP of the manipulator is shifted by A in the robot coordi-
nates. These shifts are carried out independently.
Robot coordinates
Base coordinates
7-18
Tool Coordinates
The base axis is shifted by B and the TCP of the manipulator is shifted by A in the tool coordi-
Base coordinates
Tool coordinates
User Coordinates
The base axis is shifted by B and the TCP of the manipulator is shifted by A in the user coordi-
User coordinates
Base coordinates
7-19
Converting R1+R2 Jobs with Master Tool Coordinates

R1+R2 coordinated jobs can be subjected to parallel shift job conversion in the master tool
coordinates. Only steps taken at the “slave” from the standpoint of the SMOV instruction are
subject to conversion.
R2
R1
X-axis
Y-axis Master tool coordinates
Z-axis
1
0001 MOV
+MOV
0002 MOV
+MOV 6
0003 SMOV 5
+MOV 2
0004 SMOV
+MOV
0005 SMOV
+MOV 4
3
0006 MOV
+MOV Motion path
after conversion
7-20
7.3.2 Operating Methods

Specifying the Conversion Items

menu.

pull-down menu.
4 Select {PARALLEL SHIFT The PARALLEL SHIFT JOB window appears.

JOB}.
PARALLEL SHIFT JOB
c SOURCE JOB : JOB1

d STEP SECTION : 001 → 010
e DESTINATION JOB : *******
f COORDINATES : PULSE
BASE POINT : TEACH SETTING
<SHIFT VALUE> R1:S 0
L 0
U 0
R 0
B 0
T 0
EXECUTE CANCEL
5 Specify the conversion items. Specify the following items.
SOURCE JOB
Selects the job before conversion. The job which is shown in
the JOB CONTENT window is set initially. To change the job,
perform the following procedure.
Move the cursor to the job name and press [SELECT]. The
JOB LIST window appears. Select the desired job.
STEP SECTION (Start Step End Step)

Specifies the step section of the source job. All the steps are
set initially. If there is no steps in the source job, “***” is dis-
played. To change the section, perform the following proce-
dure.
Move the cursor to the step section indication and press
[SELECT]. The input buffer line appears. Input the step number
and press [ENTER].
7-21
5 (cont’d) DESTINATION JOB

Specifies the converted job. If this is not specified( “********” is
displayed), the source job is specified. To change the job, per-
form the following procedure.
Move the cursor to the converted job name indication and
press [SELECT]. The character input line appears. The source
job name is displayed in the input line. To enter job name with-
out using the source job name, press [CANCEL] and then input
a job name.
COORDINATES
Selects the conversion coordinates. Move the cursor to the
coordinates name and press [SELECT]. The selection dialog
box appears. Select the desired coordinates.
When the user coordinates are selected, the input buffer line
appears. Input the desired user coordinate number and press
[ENTER].
Specifying the Shift Value

There are two methods for specifying the shift value.
• Directly input the shift value by numerical value.
• Calculate the shift value by teaching the original base point and converted base point.
Numerical Value Input

1 Display the PARALLEL SHIFT

JOB window.
2 Select the shift value to be set. The number can now be entered.
PARALLEL SHIFT JOB
SOUCE JOB : JOB1

STEP SECTION : 001 → 010
DESTINATION JOB : JOB2
COORDINATES : ROBOT
<SHIFT VALUE> R1:X 0.000
Y 0.000
Z 0.000
EXECUTE CANCEL
3 Type the shift value using the

Numeric keys.
7-22
4 Press [ENTER]. The shift value is set.

PARALLEL SHIFT JOB
SOURCE JOB : JOB1

COORDINATES : ROBOT
Y 0
Z 0
EXECUTE CANCEL
7-23
Calculation by Teaching

JOB window.
2 Select “TEACH SETTING” in

the item of “BASE POINT.” DATA EDIT DISPLAY UTILITY
PARALLEL SHIFT JOB
BASE POINT (SRC) BASE POINT (DEST)

R1:X 0.000 R1:X 0.000
R1:Y 0.000 R1:Y 0.000
R1:Z 0.000 R1:Z 0.000
EXECUTE CANCEL
3 Select “BASE POINT(SRC).”
4 Move the manipulator to the

original base point by the axis
keys.
5 Press [MODIFY] and The original base point is set.

[ENTER].
PARALLEL SHIFT JOB

R1:X 230.000 R1:X 0.000
R1:Y 40.000 R1:Y 0.000
R1:Z 20.000 R1:Z 0.000
EXECUTE CANCEL
6 Select “BASE POINT(DEST).”
7 Move the manipulator to the

converted base point by the
axis keys.
7-24
8 Press [MODIFY] and The conversion base point is set.

[ENTER].
PARALLEL SHIFT JOB

R1:X 230.000 R1:X 460.000
R1:Y 40.000 R1:Y 60.000
R1:Z 20.000 R1:Z 100.000
EXECUTE CANCEL
9 Select “EXECUTE.” The difference is calculated by the two teaching points and set as
a shift value.
PARALLEL SHIFT JOB
SOUCE JOB : JOB1

COORDINATES : ROBOT
Y 20.000
Z 80.000
EXECUTE CANCEL
7-25
Executing Conversion

JOB window.
2 Select “EXECUTE.” The confirmation dialog box appears when the converted job is
not specified. Select “YES” then the conversion is executed. The
JOB CONTENT window appears when the conversion is com-
pleted.
PARALLEL SHIFT JOB
SOURCE JOB : JOB1

COORDINATES
BASE POINT Overwrite?
YES NO
Y 20.000
Z 80.000
SUPPLE-
If an alarm occurs during conversion, conversion is
MENT suspended.
JOB CONTENT
0000 NOP
0002 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50 At step outside the
0004 ARCON ASF#(1) P-point maximum
0005 END
envelope, "/OV" is
displayed after the
move instruction.
MOVJ VJ=50
7-26
7.4 PAM Function
7.4 PAM Function

The function for position adjustment during playback (PAM: Position Adjustment by Manual)
allows position adjustment by simple operations while observing the motion of the manipulator
and without stopping the manipulator. Positions can be adjusted in both teach mode and play
mode.
The following data can be adjusted by key input at the programming pendant.
• Teaching Point
• Operation Speed
• Position Level
Input Ranges for Adjustment Data

The input ranges for adjustment data are indicated in the following table.
Data Input Range
Number of Steps for Adjustment Up to 10 steps can be adjusted at the same time.
Position Adjustment Range (X, Y, Z) Unit: mm, valid to two decimal places, maximum ±10mm
Speed Adjustment Range (V) Unit: %, valid to two decimal places, maximum ±50%
PL Adjustment Range 0 to 8
Adjustment Coordinates Robot coordinates, base coordinates, tool coordinates,

user coordinates (Default coordinates: robot coordinates)
The input ranges for adjustment data can be changed by the following parameters:
SUPPLE-
MENT S3C806: Position adjustment range (unit: mm)
S3C807: Speed adjustment range (unit: 0.01%)
S3C808: Adjustment coordinate specification
For details, refer to “9 Parameter Description.”
• Base axis and station axis data cannot be adjusted.

NOTE • Adjustment when a TCP instruction is executed is performed by adjusting the data of the
selected tool.
• When the coordinates for adjustment are user coordinates, an error occurs if teaching
has not been performed in the user coordinates.
• If an attempt is made to adjust “PL” when there is no “PL” in the step subject to the adjust-
ment, an error occurs.
• Position variable and reference point steps cannot be adjusted. An error occurs if adjust-
ment is attempted.
• An attempt to adjust the speed at a step that has no speed tag will cause an error.
7-27
7.4 PAM Function
7.4.2 Operating Methods

Setting Adjustment Data

menu.
2 Select {JOB}. The JOB CONTENT window (in the teach mode) or the PLAY-
BACK window (in the playback mode) appears.

pull-down menu.
4 Select {PAM}. The PAM window appears.
PAM
c JOB : *******
d INPUT COORD : ROBOT COORD
STEP X(mm) Y(mm) Z(mm) V(%) PL
000 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 −
000 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 − f
e 000 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 − g
000 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 −
−
h
000 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
000 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 −
COMPLETE CANCEL
5 Set adjustment data. Set adjustment data.

JOB
Set the job name to be adjusted.
Line up the cursor and press [SELECT] to display the JOB
LIST window. Move the cursor to the desired job and press
[SELECT] to set the adjusted job.
INPUT COORD
Set the desired coordinates.
Line up the cursor and press [SELECT] to display the selec-
tion dialog box. Move the cursor to the desired coordinate
system and press [SELECT] to set the input coordinates.
Step Number
Set the step number to be adjusted.
Line up the cursor and press [SELECT] to display the num-
ber input buffer line. Input the step number and press
[ENTER] to set the value.
7-28
7.4 PAM Function
5 (cont’d) XYZ Coordinate Adjustment

Set the direction and amount of the X, Y, and Z coordinates.
Line up the cursor with the data to be adjusted and press
[SELECT] to display the number input buffer line. Input the
number data and press [ENTER] to set the adjusted data.
V Coordinate Adjustment
Set the speed.
Line up the cursor and press [SELECT] to display the num-
ber input buffer line. Input the number data and press
[ENTER] to set the adjusted data.
PL
This is displayed when the position level of the job to be
adjusted for the step set in is already decided, and the
data can be modified. When the position level is not
decided, [-] is displayed, and cannot be set. To modify the
position level, line up the cursor, press [SELECT], input the
number value and press [ENTER].
7-29
7.4 PAM Function
Executing the Adjustment

Executing the Adjustment
1 Touch “COMPLETE” on the

screen.
PAM
JOB : *******
INPUT COORD : ROBOT COORD
007 10.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 −
008 20.00 0.00 5.00 0.00 −
009 0.00 5.00 0.00 0.00 −
010 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 −
011 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 −
012 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 −
013 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 −
014 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 −
015 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 −
COMPLETE CANCEL
The confirmation dialog box appears.

PAM
JOB : *******
007 10.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -
008 20.00 0.00Correct?5.00 0.00 -
009 0.00 5.00 0.00 0.00 -
010 0.00 0.00
YES NO
0.00 0.00 -
011 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -
012 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -
013 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -
014 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -
015 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -
2 Select “YES.” In the teach mode, the job adjustment can be immediately exe-
cuted. In the play mode, the job can be adjusted just before exe-
cution (move operation).
When the job adjustment is completed, the set data shown in the
PAM window is cleared. However, if the step’s adjusted position
exceeds the software limit, an error occurs, and the data in only
that step cannot be cleared on the window.
7-30
7.4 PAM Function
Cancelling the Execution

In the play mode, during the adjustment wait status, “CANCEL” is displayed in the PAM win-
dow. To cancel the adjustment process, touch “CANCEL” on the screen. Also, if the following
occurs before executing, the process is automatically cancelled.
• If the mode is changed
• If an alarm occurs
• If the power is turned OFF
PAM
JOB : *******
007 10.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 −
008 20.00 0.00 5.00 0.00 −
009 0.00 5.00 0.00 0.00 −
010 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 −
011 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 −
012 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 −
013 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 −
014 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 −
015 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 −
COMPLETE CANCEL
Editing Data
Clearing Data
If there is a mistake made when adjusting the data, or if the adjustment of the step becomes
unnecessary, the data can be cleared.
1 Move the cursor to the step of

the data to be cleared. DATA EDIT DISPLAY UTILITY
PAM
JOB : *******
Steps in which 007 10.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 −
data is to be 008 20.00 0.00 5.00 0.00 −
cleared. 009 0.00 5.00 0.00 0.00 −
010 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 −
011 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 −
012 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 −
013 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 −
014 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 −
015 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 −
COMPLETE CANCEL
3 Select {LINE CLEAR}. The line data is cleared.
7-31
7.4 PAM Function
Copying Data
To input the same data as those set previously, perform the following operation.
1 Move the cursor to the line to

be copied.
LINE CLEAR
PAM
LINE COPY
JOB : *******
LINE PASTE : ROBOT COORD
INPUT COORD
007 10.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 −
008 20.00 0.00 5.00 0.00 −
009 0.00 5.00 0.00 0.00 −
010 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 −
011 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 −
012 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 −
013 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 −
014 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 −
015 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 −
COMPLETE CANCEL
3 Select {LINE COPY} under the

pull-down menu.

where the item is to be copied.
6 Select {LINE PASTE}. The desired data is copied to the line. However, if the line where
the data is to be copied does not have a speed value or PL value,
it cannot be copied.
7-32
7.5 Mirror Shift Function

With the mirror shift function, a job is converted to the job in which the path is symmetrical to
that of the original job. This conversion can be performed for the specified coordinate among
the X-Y, X-Z, or Y-Z coordinate of the robot coordinates and the user coordinates.
The mirror shift function is classified into the following three: the pulse mirror-shift function, the
robot-coordinates mirror-shift funciton, and the user-coordinates mirror-shift function.
Mirror shift
The original path The converted path

before the mirror shift after the mirror shift
7.5.2 Pulse Mirror-shift Function

With the pulse mirror-shift function, the mirror shift is performed by reversing the sign (+/-) for
the axes which are specified with the parameter in advance.
R-ax is R-axi s
T-ax is T-axi s
S -ax is S-axis
Parameter Setting
Using the following parameter, specify the axes for which the sign is to be reversed.
S1CxG065: Mirror Shift Sign Reversing Axis Specification
The 1st axis (0:Not reversed, 1:Reversed)
The 6th axis
7-33
Object Job
Jobs without group axes and relative jobs cannot be converted.
Group Axes Specification

When specifying the group axes for the converted job in a multiple group axes system, the
group axes specified in the original and converted jobs must be the same.
• Robot Axis: Same model
• Base Axis: Same configulation
• Station Axis: Same configulation
Position Variables
Position variables are not converted by the mirror shift function.
7.5.3 Robot-coordinates Mirror-shift Function

With the robot-coordinates mirror-shift function, the mirror shift is performed on the X-Z coordi-
nate of the robot coordinates.
Z Z
Y Y
X X
Object Job
Jobs without group axes cannot be converted.

7-34
Position Variables
Mirror shift conversion for the base axis is not performed with the robot-coordinates
NOTE mirror shift function.
With the robot-coordinates mirror shift function, mirror shift conversion for the station
axis is performed by reversing the sign for the axes specified with the parameter
S1CxG065 "Mirror Shift Sign Reversing Axis Specification."
7.5.4 User-coordinates Mirror-shift Function

With the user-coordinates mirror-shift function, the mirror shift is performed on the X-Z, X-Y, or
Y-Z coordinate of the specified user coordinates.
Z Z
Y Y
X X
Object Job
Jobs without group axes cannot be converted.

Position Variables
With the user-coordinates mirror shift function, mirror shift conversion for the station axis is
NOTE performed by reversing the sign for the axes specified with the parameter S1CxG065 "Mir-
ror Shift Sign Reversing Axis Specification."
7-35
7.5.5 Notes on the Mirror Shift Function

For manipulators, such as a polishing wrist, whose center of S-axis rotation and T-axis rotation
are offset in the X-coordinate direction, the mirror shift cannot correctly be performed by the
pulse mirror-shift function. Be sure to use the robot-coordinates mirror-shift function or use the
user-coordinates mirror-shift function with the user coordinates specified on the center of the
T-axis rotation.
• Using the Robot-coordinates Mirror-shift Function

When the robot-coordinates mirror-shift function is performed, the mirror shift is per-
formed on the X-Z coordinate of the robot coordinates. The path of the converted job is as
follows:
R o b o t - c o o rd i n a t e s M i rro r-s h i f t Co n v e rs i o n
A f t e r c o n v ers i o n B e f o re c o n v e rs i o n
• Using the User-coordinates Mirror-shift Funciton

To use the user-coordinates mirror-shift function, specify the user coordinates on the cen-
ter of T-axis rotation in advance.
Us er-coordinates Mirror-shift Conversi on
User coordi nates
A fter c onversi on Before conversi on
7-36
7.5.6 Operation Procedures

Calling Up the JOB CONTENT Window
Call up the JOB CONTENT window of the job to be converted as follows:
For Current Job

menu.
2 Select {JOB}.
For Another Job

menu.
3 Select desired job.
7-37
Executing the Mirror Shift Conversion
1 Display the JOB CONTENT

window of the job to be con-
verted.

menu.
3 Select {MIRROR SHIFT}. The MIRROR SHIFT window appears.
4 Set items as required.
MIRROR SHIFT
c SOURCE JOB : JOB1

d SOURCE CTRL GROUP : R1
e STEP SECTION : 001 → 010
f DESTINATION JOB : ****
g DEST CTRL GROUP : ****
h COORDINATES : PULSE
i USER COORD NO. :
j TARGET :
k EXECUTE CANCEL
SOURCE JOB
Selects the conversion source job.
To select another job to be converted, move the cursor
to the name and press [SELECT] to call up the list of
jobs. Select the desired job and press [SELECT].
SOURCE CTRL GROUP

Displays the control group of the conversion source job.
STEP SELECTION
Specifies the steps to be converted. From the first step
to the last step of the selected job are specified as initial
value.
DESTINATION JOB
Specifies the converted job name. To enter the name,
move the cursor to the name and press [SELECT]. The
name of the conversion source job is displayed in the
input line as initial value. When "***" is displayed, the
name for the converted job is to be the same as that of
the conversion source job.
7-38
4 (cont’d) DEST CTRL GROUP

Selects the control group for the converted job. When
the destination job name is entered, the same control
group as the conversion source job is automatically set.
To change it, move the cursor to the control group and
press [SELECT] to call up the selection dialog box.
COORDINATES
Specifies the coordinates used for conversion. "PULSE,"
"ROBOT," or "USER" can be selected. The initial value
is "PULSE."
"PULSE": Executes the pulse mirror-shift conversion.
"ROBOT": Executes the mirror-shift conversion on the
basis of the cartesian coordinates.
"USER": Executes the mirror-shift conversion on the
basis of the specified user coordinates.
USER COORD NO.

Specifies the user coordinates number when "USER" is
selected in . "01" is automatically set as initial value
when the "USER" is selected in .
This item cannot be set when "PULSE" or "ROBOT" is
selected in .
TARGET
Specifies the coordinate where conversion is to be done
when "ROBOT" or "USER" is selected in . "XY," "XZ,"
or "YZ" can be selected. The "XZ" is automatically set as
initial value when "ROBOT" or "USER" is selected in .
Always specify "XZ" for "ROBOT."
EXECUTE
Executes the conversion. When the conversion destina-
tion job name is entered, the converted job is created
with that name as a new job. When the conversion desti-
nation job name is not entered, the conversion source
job is converted and overwritten.
5 Select "EXECUTE."
7-39
8.1 External Memory Devices
8 Controlling Peripheral Devices
8.1.1 Compact Flash Memory Card

Insert a compact flash memory card (ATA Flash) in the compact flash slot on the programming
pendant in advance.
The following compact flashes are recommended for the programming pendant. (These are to
be sold on the open market and also by YASKAWA.)
• "CFI-***MBA" made by HAGIWARA sys-com.
• "SDCFBI-**-****" made by SUN DISK.
The following illustration shows the appearance of the compact flash.
64
Co M
B
m
pa
ct
Fl
as
h
Note: Compact Flash is a registered trademark of SUN DISK.
Precautions
Observe the following precautions when using the compact flash.
• Handle the compact flash with care to protect the stored data.
• Do not use or keep the compact flash in places where strong static electricity or electronic
noise may occur.
• Do not drop or exert any shock or strong force to the compact flash.
• Do not remove the compact flash or turn OFF the power when accessing the compact
flash (writing-in or reading-out the compact flash data). The data in the compact flash
may be lost.
• Back up the data from the compact flash to other media such as floppy disks or hard
disks.
8-1
Inserting a Compact Flash

To insert a compact flash into the programming pendant, open the cover on the rear of the
programming pendant. Insert the compact flash so that the product label is on the front side.
The card cannot be inserted in any other position. Do not forcibly insert the card. After insert-
ing the card, be sure to close the cover before starting operation.
REMOTE TEACH
PLAY START HOLD
Insertion slot for

the compact flash
LAYOUT GO BACK
DIRECT
OPEN
COORD
Multi PAGE AREA
MAIN SHORT
SERVO SELECT
ON !? CANCEL
MENU CUT
READY ASSIST
SERVO ON
X X
S S X X
HIGH R R
SPEED
Y Y
L L Y Y
B B
FAST
Z Z MANUAL SPEED
U U Z Z
SLOW T T
INTER 7 8 9 TEST
SHIFT LOCK START SHIFT
ROBOT INFORM 4 5 6 BWD

LIST FWD
EX.AXIS 1 2 3 DELETE INSERT
BACK
MOTION 0 . − MODIFY ENTER
SPACE TYPE
MOTOMAN
Installing the Compact Flash
8-2
8.1.2 File Management

The flowchart below shows file transfer and file management. The operations are performed
with the progamming pendant.
<Main Menu>
{FD/PC CARD}
Sub Menu
{LOAD}] {SAVE} {VERIFY} {DELETE} {FORMAT}*1 {DEVICE}
Select Data Group Select Floppy Type Select Device
Select Data Select Format Size
Specify Folder
Select "EXECUTE"
END
*1 For future use. (Cannot be used with the NX100 of the current version.)
8-3
Data that can be Saved and Save Destination File Names

The FLOPPY DISK/PC CARD window is shown below. Data that can be saved are classified
into eight groups. The following table lists the data of the eight groups. The table also shows
different file names provided for saving different types of data.
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash

Compact Flash (SAVE) UN-USED MEMORY 14.63 MB
JOB 57 c
FILE/GENERAL DATA 0 d
BATCH USER MEMORY 0 e
PARAMETER 0 f
SYSTEM DATA 0 g
I/O DATA 0 h
BATCH CMOS 0 i
ALL CMOS AREA 0 j
Main Menu ShortCut
Data saved at an external memory unit can be reloaded into the memory of the NX100.
The numbers through in the above window correspond to the numbers through in
the following table.
• If the operator selects “BATCH USER MEMORY,” all data belonging to groups and
are saved as one file.
• When “BATCH USER MEMORY,” “BATCH CMOS,” or “ALL CMOS AREA” is

selected, jobs are also saved, but the indication of “TO SAVE TO FD” in the JOB
HEADER window of the saved jobs does not become “DONE.” This becomes “DONE”
only when “JOB” is selected to save the data.
8-4
File Name Save Load

Data that can be Saved
(Saved Data) EDIT MAN EDIT MAN
ALL CMOS AREA ALCMSxx.HEX X X
BATCH CMOS CMOSxx.HEX X
BATCH USER MEMORY JOBxx.HEX
JOB Single job JOBNAME.JBI
Related job (Job+Condition) JOBNAME.JBR
FILE/ Tool data TOOL.CND
GENERAL Weaving data WEAV.CND
DATA
User coordinate data UFRAME.CND
Variable data VAR.DAT
Arc start condition data ARCSRT.CND
Arc end condition data ARCEND.CND
Welding condition auxiliary ARCSUP.DAT
data
Power Source condition ARCSUP.DAT
assist data
Power Source characteristic WELDER.DAT
data
Power Source characteristic WELDUDEF.DAT
difinition data
Shock detection level data SHOCKLVL.CND
Motor gun pressure power SPRESS.CND
data
Motor gun dry spot SPRESSCL.CND
pressure data
Spot gun characteristic data SGUN.DAT
Spot gun condition auxiliary SGUNSUP.DAT
data
Spot welding Power Source SWELDER.DAT
characteristic data
Spot I/O allocation data SPOTIO.DAT
Spot welding condition data SPOTWELD.DAT
Short/Full open position data STROKE.DAT
Paint color condition data PAINTSPE.DAT
Painting condition data PAINTCND.DAT
Paint filling amount data PLUGVOL.DAT
EVB gun condition data EVBGUN.DAT
EVB turbine condition data EVBTRBIN.DAT
EVB painting condition data EVBPAINT.DAT
EDIT : Edit Mode, MAN: Management Mode

: Can be done, X : Cannot be done
8-5
File Name Save Load

Data that can be Saved
(Saved Data) EDIT MAN EDIT MAN
PARAMETER BATCH ALL.PRM X
PARAME- Robot matching parameter RC.PRM X
TER System definition parameter SD.PRM X
Coordinate home position RO.PRM
X
parameter
System matching parameter SC.PRM X
ClO parameter CIO.PRM X
Function definition parameter FD.PRM X
Application parameter AP.PRM X
Transmission(general) RS.PRM
X
parameter
Sensor parameter SE.PRM X
Servo parameter SV.PRM X
Servomotor parameter SVM.PRM X
Operation control parameter AMC.PRM X
Servo power block SVP.PRM
X
parameter
Motion function parameter MF.PRM X
SERVOPACK parameter SVS.PRM X
Converter parameter SVC.PRM X
I/O DATA Concurrent I/O program CIOPRG.LST X
I/O name data IONAME.DAT X
Pseudo input signals PSEUDOIN.DAT X
SYSTEM User word registration UWORD.DAT X
DATA SV monitor signals SVMON.DAT X
Variable name VARNAME.DAT X
Second home position HOME2.DAT X
Alarm history data ALMHIST.DAT X X
Home position calibrating ABSO.DAT
X
data
System information SYSTEM.SYS X X
Work home position data OPEORG.DAT X X
I/O message history data IOMSGHST.DAT X X
Function key allocation data KEYALLOC.DAT X X
Painting system setting data PAINTSYS.DAT X X
Painting device condition data PAINTDEV.DAT X X
CCV paint color data CCVPAINT.DAT X X
EDIT : Edit Mode, MAN: Management Mode

: Can be done, X : Cannot be done
8-6
Saving Data
To download data from the memory of the NX100 to the external memory device, perform the
following procedure.
Saving a Job
1 Select {FD/PC CARD} under
the main menu.
2 Select {SAVE}. The following window appears.

JOB 57
FILE/GENERAL DATA 0
BATCH USER MEMORY 0
PARAMETER 0
SYSTEM DATA 0
I/O DATA 0
BATCH CMOS 0
ALL CMOS AREA 0
3 Select {JOB}. The JOB LIST window appears.


AA35 AA36 AA37
AA4 AA5 AA6
AA7 AA8 AA9
N N1 TEST
TEST2 TEST3 TEST3A
TEST3A-! TEST3A-' TEST3A-(
TEST3A-) TEST3A-- TEST3A-1
TEST3A-2 TEST3A-3 TEST3A-4
TEST3A-8 TEST3A-9 TEST3A-A
TEST3A-B TEST3A-C TEST3A-D
4 Select a job to be saved. The selected job is marked with “ .”


AA35 AA36 AA37
AA4 AA5 AA6
AA7 AA8 AA9
N N1 TEST
TEST2 TEST3 TEST3A
Main Menu ShortCut
Save?
YES NO
6 Select “YES.” Saving the job starts.
To cancel saving, select “STOP.”

Once saving is completed or cancelled, the JOB LIST window
appears.
8-7
Saving a Condition File or General Data


the main menu.

JOB 57
FILE/GENERAL DATA 0
BATCH USER MEMORY 0
PARAMETER 0
SYSTEM DATA 0
I/O DATA 0
BATCH CMOS 0
ALL CMOS AREA 0
3 Select {FILE/GENERAL The selection window appears.

DATA}.

{ TOOL DATA TOOL .CND
{ WEAVING DATA WEAV .CND
{ USER COORDINATE DATA UFRAME .CND
{ VARIABLE DATA VAR .DAT
{ ARC START COND DATA ARCSRT .CND
{ ARC END COND DATA ARCEND .CND
{ ARC AUXILIARY COND DATA ARCSUP .DAT
{ POWER SOURCE COND DATA WELDER .DAT
{ USER DEF PWR SRC COND DATA WELDUDEF.DAT
{ SHOCK DETECTION LEVEL SHOCKLVL .CND
4 Select condition files or gen- The selected files are maked with “ .”
eral data to be saved.

8-8
Save?
YES NO
6 Select “YES.” Saving the data starts.


STOP

Once saving is completed or cancelled, the selection window for
condition files or general data appears.
8-9
Saving a Parameter

the main menu.


JOB 57
FILE/GENERAL DATA 0
BATCH USER MEMORY 0
PARAMETER 0
SYSTEM DATA 0
I/O DATA 0
BATCH CMOS 0
ALL CMOS AREA 0
3 Select {PARAMETER}. The selection window for parameters appears.

{ BATCH PARAMETER ALL .PRN
{ ROBOT MATCH PRMTR RC .PRN
{ SYS DEF PRMTR SD .PRN
{ COORD ORG PRMTR RO .PRN
{ SYS MATCH PRMTR SC .PRN
{ CIO PRMTR CIO .PRN
{ FCTN DEF PRMTR FD .PRN
{ APPLI PRMTR AP .PRN
{ TRANSMISSION (USER) RS .PRN
{ SENSOR PRMTR SE .PRN
{ SERVO PRMTR SV .PRN
4 Select parameters to be The selected parameters are marked with “ .”

saved.

8-10
Save?
YES NO
6 Select “YES.” Saving the file starts.


STOP

parameters appears.
8-11
Saving I/O Data


the main menu.


JOB 57
FILE/GENERAL DATA 0
BATCH USER MEMORY 0
PARAMETER 0
SYSTEM DATA 0
I/O DATA 0
BATCH CMOS 0
ALL CMOS AREA 0
3 Select {I/O DATA}. The selection window for I/O data appears.

{ C.IO PRGM CIOPRG .LIST
{ IO NAME DATA IONAME .DAT
{ SIMULATED IN DATA PSEUDOIN.DAT
4 Select I/O data to be saved. The selected I/O data are marked with “ .”

Save?
YES NO

STOP

I/O data appears.
8-12
Saving System Data


the main menu.


JOB 57
FILE/GENERAL DATA 0
BATCH USER MEMORY 0
PARAMETER 0
SYSTEM DATA 0
I/O DATA 0
BATCH CMOS 0
ALL CMOS AREA 0
3 Select {SYSTEM DATA}. The selection window for system data appears.

{ USER WORD UWORD .DAT
{ SV MONITOR SIGNAL SVMON .DAT
{ SECOND HOME POSITION HOME2 .DAT
{ ALARM HISTORY DATA ALMHIST .DAT
{ HOME POS CALIB DATA ABSO .DAT
{ SYSTEM INFORMATION SYSTEM .SYS
{ OPERATION ORG POS DATA OPEORG .DAT
{ I/O MESSAGE HISTORY DATA IOMSGHST .DAT
{ KEY ALLOCATION DATA KEYALLOC .DAT
4 Select system data to be The selected system data are marked with “ .“
saved.

8-13
Save?
YES NO


STOP

system data appears.
8-14
Saving All User’s Programs


the main menu.


JOB 57
FILE/GENERAL DATA 0
BATCH USER MEMORY 0
PARAMETER 0
SYSTEM DATA 0
I/O DATA 0
BATCH CMOS 0
ALL CMOS AREA 0
3 Select {BATCH USER MEM-

ORY}.
4 Select “EXECUTE.” The confirmation dialog box appears.
Save?
YES NO
5 Select “YES.” Saving all user’s programs starts.

TRANSMITTED FILE JOB1E .HEX
REST 480200 BYTES
STOP
Main Menu ShortCut

Once saving is completed or cancelled, the job selection window
appears.
8-15
Saving All CMOS Data


the main menu.


JOB 57
FILE/GENERAL DATA 0
BATCH USER MEMORY 0
PARAMETER 0
SYSTEM DATA 0
I/O DATA 0
BATCH CMOS 0
ALL CMOS AREA 0
3 Select {BATCH CMOS}.
Save?
YES NO
5 Select “YES.” Saving all CMOS data starts.

REST 480200 BYTES
STOP
Main Menu ShortCut

appears.
8-16
Saving All Data in CMOS Area


the main menu.


JOB 57
FILE/GENERAL DATA 0
BATCH USER MEMORY 0
PARAMETER 0
SYSTEM DATA 0
I/O DATA 0
BATCH CMOS 0
ALL CMOS AREA 0
3 Select {ALL CMOS AREA}.
Save?
YES NO
5 Select “YES.” Saving all data in CMOS area starts.


TRANSMITTED FILE ALCMSIE .HEX
REST 480200 BYTES
STOP
Main Menu ShortCut

appears.
8-17
Loading Data
To upload data from the external memory device to the memory of the NX100, follow the pro-
cedure in the following.
Loading a Job

the main menu.
2 Select {LOAD}. The following window appears.


Compact Flash (LOAD) UN-USED MEMORY 14.63 MB
JOB 57
FILE/GENERAL DATA 0
BATCH USER MEMORY 0
PARAMETER 0
SYSTEM DATA 0
I/O DATA 0
BATCH CMOS 0
ALL CMOS AREA 0
3 Select {JOB}. The job selection window appears.


AA35 AA36 AA37
AA4 AA5 AA6
AA7 AA8 AA9
N N1 TEST
TEST2 TEST3 TEST3A
4 Select a job to be loaded. The selected jobs are maked with “ .”


AA35 AA36 AA37
AA4 AA5 AA6
AA7 AA8 AA9
N N1 TEST
TEST2 TEST3 TEST3A
8-18
Load?
YES NO
6 Select “YES.” Loading the job starts.

AA35 AA36 AA37
AA4 AA5 AA6
AA7 AA8 AA9
N N1 TEST
TEST2 TEST3 TEST3A
STOP
To cancel loading, select “STOP.”

Once loading is completed or cancelled, the job selection window
appears.
8-19
Loading a Condition File or Generel Data


the main menu.


JOB 57
FILE/GENERAL DATA 0
BATCH USER MEMORY 0
PARAMETER 0
SYSTEM DATA 0
I/O DATA 0
BATCH CMOS 0
ALL CMOS AREA 0
3 Select {FILE/GENERAL The selection window for condition file or general data appears.
DATA}.

4 Select a condition file or gen- The selected files are maked with “ .”
eral data to be loaded.

8-20
Load?
YES NO
6 Select “YES.” Loading the file starts.

STOP

Once loading is completed or cancelled, the selection window for
condition file or general data appears.
8-21
Loading a Parameter

the main menu.


JOB 57
FILE/GENERAL DATA 0
BATCH USER MEMORY 0
PARAMETER 0
SYSTEM DATA 0
I/O DATA 0
BATCH CMOS 0
ALL CMOS AREA 0
3 Select {PARAMETER}. The selection window for parameters appears.


4 Select parameters to be The selected parameters are maked with “ .”

loaded.

8-22
Load?
YES NO

STOP

parameters appears.
8-23
Loading I/O Data


the main menu.


JOB 57
FILE/GENERAL DATA 0
BATCH USER MEMORY 0
PARAMETER 0
SYSTEM DATA 0
I/O DATA 0
BATCH CMOS 0
ALL CMOS AREA 0
3 Select {I/O DATA}. The selection window for I/O data appears.

4 Select I/O data to be loaded. The selected I/O data are maked with “ .”

Load?
YES NO
8-24


STOP

I/O data appears.
8-25
Loading System Data


the main menu.


JOB 57
FILE/GENERAL DATA 0
BATCH USER MEMORY 0
PARAMETER 0
SYSTEM DATA 0
I/O DATA 0
BATCH CMOS 0
ALL CMOS AREA 0
3 Select {SYSTEM DATA}. The selection window for system data appears.

4 Select system data to be The selected system data are maked with “ .”
loaded.

8-26
Load?
YES NO


STOP

system data appears.
8-27
Loading All User’s Programs


the main menu.

JOB 57
FILE/GENERAL DATA 0
BATCH USER MEMORY 0
PARAMETER 0
SYSTEM DATA 0
I/O DATA 0
BATCH CMOS 0
ALL CMOS AREA 0
3 Select {BATCH USER MEM-

ORY}.
Load?
YES NO
5 Select “YES.” Loading all user’s programs starts.

REST 480200 BYTES
STOP
Main Menu ShortCut

appears.
8-28
Loading All CMOS Data


the main menu.


JOB 57
FILE/GENERAL DATA 0
BATCH USER MEMORY 0
PARAMETER 0
SYSTEM DATA 0
I/O DATA 0
BATCH CMOS 0
ALL CMOS AREA 0
3 Select {BATCH CMOS}.
Load?
YES NO
5 Select “YES.” Loading all CMOS data starts.


REST 480200 BYTES
STOP
Main Menu ShortCut

appears.
8-29
Loading All Data in CMOS Area


the main menu.


JOB 57
FILE/GENERAL DATA 0
BATCH USER MEMORY 0
PARAMETER 0
SYSTEM DATA 0
I/O DATA 0
BATCH CMOS 0
ALL CMOS AREA 0
3 Select {ALL CMOS AREA}.
Load?
YES NO
5 Select “YES.” Loading all system data starts.

TRANSMITTED FILE ALCMSIE. HEX
REST 480200 BYTES
STOP
Main Menu ShortCut

appears.
8-30
Verifying Data
Follow the procedure below to verify data in the memory of the NX100 with data saved in the
external memory device.
NOTE This function cannot be executed with “BATCH USER MEMORY,“ “BATCH CMOS,” or
“ALL CMOS AREA” specified.
Verifying a Job

the main menu.
2 Select {VERIFY}. The following window appears.


Compact Flash (VERIF UN-USED MEMORY 14.63 MB
JOB 57
FILE/GENERAL DATA 0
BATCH USER MEMORY 0
PARAMETER 0
SYSTEM DATA 0
I/O DATA 0
BATCH CMOS 0
ALL CMOS AREA 0

AA35 AA36 AA37
AA4 AA5 AA6
AA7 AA8 AA9
N N1 TEST
TEST2 TEST3 TEST3A
8-31
4 Select a job to be verified. The selected jobs are marked with “ .“


AA35 AA36 AA37
AA4 AA5 AA6
AA7 AA8 AA9
N N1 TEST
TEST2 TEST3 TEST3A
Verify?
YES NO
6 Select “YES.” Verifying the job starts.


AA35 AA36 AA37
AA4 AA5 AA6
AA7 AA8 AA9
N N1 TEST
TEST2 TEST3 TEST3A
STOP
To cancel verifying, select “STOP.”

Once verifying is completed or cancelled, the job selection win-
dow appears.
8-32
Verifying a File

the main menu.
2 Select {VERIFY}. The following window appears.

JOB 57
FILE/GENERAL DATA 0
BATCH USER MEMORY 0
PARAMETER 0
SYSTEM DATA 0
I/O DATA 0
BATCH CMOS 0
ALL CMOS AREA 0
3 Select the group of the file to

be verified.
4 Select a file to be verified. The selected files are marked with “ .“

Verify?
YES NO
6 Select “YES.” Verifying the data starts.


STOP
To cancel verifying, select “STOP.”

Once verifying is completed or cancelled, the job selection win-
dow appears.
8-33
Deleting Data
Follow the procedure below to delete a file or files on an external memory device.
Deleting a Job

the main menu.
2 Select {DELETE}. The following window appears.


Compact Flash (DELET UN-USED MEMORY 14.63 MB
JOB 57
FILE/GENERAL DATA 0
BATCH USER MEMORY 0
PARAMETER 0
SYSTEM DATA 0
I/O DATA 0
BATCH CMOS 0
ALL CMOS AREA 0


AA35 AA36 AA37
AA4 AA5 AA6
AA7 AA8 AA9
N N1 TEST
TEST2 TEST3 TEST3A
4 Select a job to be deleted. The selected jobs are marked with “ .“


AA35 AA36 AA37
AA4 AA5 AA6
AA7 AA8 AA9
N N1 TEST
TEST2 TEST3 TEST3A
Delete?
YES NO
8-34
6 Select “YES.” Deleting the data starts.


AA35 AA36 AA37
AA4 AA5 AA6
AA7 AA8 AA9
N N1 TEST
TEST2 TEST3 TEST3A
STOP
To cancel deleting, select “STOP.”

Once deleting is completed or cancelled, the job selection window
appears.
8-35
Deleting a File

the main menu.
2 Select {DELETE}. The following window appears.


JOB 57
FILE/GENERAL DATA 0
BATCH USER MEMORY 0
PARAMETER 0
SYSTEM DATA 0
I/O DATA 0
BATCH CMOS 0
ALL CMOS AREA 0
3 Select the group of the file to

DATA EDIT UTILITY
be deleted. DISPLAY

4 Select a file to be deleted. The selected files are marked with “ .“


Delete?
YES NO
8-36
6 Select “YES.” Deleting the data starts.


STOP
To cancel deleting, select “STOP.”

Once deleting is completed or cancelled, the DELETE (JOB) win-
dow appears.
8-37
Job Selection Mode

The method of selecting a job and various data files when loading, saving, verifying, and
deleting are described in the following:
• Individual Selection
Jobs and data files are selected individually one at a time.
• Batch Selection
Jobs and data files are selected all at one time.
Using Individual Selection

1 In either the external memory

JOB LIST window or the file DATA EDIT DISPLAY UTILITY
selection window, move the FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash

cursor to a job or a file to be AA35 AA36 AA37
selected. AA4 AA5 AA6
AA7 AA8 AA9
N N1 TEST
TEST2 TEST3 TEST3A
Main Menu ShortCut
2 Press [SELECT]. The selected jobs are marked with “ .“


AA35 AA36 AA37
AA4 AA5 AA6
AA7 AA8 AA9
N N1 TEST
TEST2 TEST3 TEST3A
8-38
Using Batch Selection

1 In either the external memory The pull-down menu appears.

JOB LIST window or the file
selection window, select FOLDER EDIT DISPLAY UTILITY
{EDIT} under the menu. SELECTCARD

FLOPPY DISK/PC
Compact Flash
ALL
(LOAD) UN-USED MEMORY 14.63 MB
CANCEL SELECT
2 Select {SELECT ALL}. All jobs are selected.


AA35 AA36 AA37
AA4 AA5 AA6
AA7 AA8 AA9
N N1 TEST
TEST2 TEST3 TEST3A
To cancel the selected items, select {EDIT} and then {CANCEL

SELECT}.
8-39
9.1 Parameter Configuration
9 Parameter
9.1 Parameter Configuration
The parameters of NX100 can be classified into the following seven:
Motion Speed Setting Parameter

Determines the manipulator motion speed for jog operation at teaching, test operation, or
playback operation.
Mode Operation Setting Parameter

Makes the setting for various operations in the teach mode or remote mode.
Parameter according to Interference Area

Limits the P-point maximum envelope of the manipulator or sets the interference area for axis
interference or cubic interference.
Parameter according to Status I/O

Sets the parity check or I/O setting for user input/output signals.
Parameter according to Coordinated or Synchronized Operation

Makes the settings for coordinated or synchronized operations between manipulators or
between manipulators and stations.
Parameter for Other Functions or Applications

Makes the settings for other functions or applications.
Hardware Control Parameter

Makes the hardware settings for fan alarm or relay operation, etc.
S1CxG Parameters
SUPPLE-
MENT
The initial setting of S1CxG parameters depends on the manipulator model.
For a system in which two manipulators are controlled, the following two types of parame-
ters are used: S1C1G type and S1C2G type.
9-1
9.2 Motion Speed Setting Parameters
These parameters set the manipulator motion speed for jog operation at teaching, test opera-
tion, or playback operation.
S1CxG000: IN-GUARD SAFE OPERATION MAX. SPEED

Units: 0.01%
The upper speed limit is set for in-guard safe operation. While the in-guard safe operation
command signal is being input, the TCP speed is limited to the TCPmax speed.
S1CxG001: DRY-RUN SPEED

Units: 0.01%
This is a dry-run operation speed setting value used when checking the path. Take safety into
consideration when setting changes are unnecessary.
Normal playback operation speed

I n- guard safe
oper a tion speed
limit
Operation speed under in-guard
safe operation
Teach-speed
Dry-run speed
Operation speed
when dry-run is
specified.
S1CxG002 to S1CxG009: JOINT SPEED FOR REGISTRATION

Units: 0.01%
The value set in these parameters is registered as the joint speed for each speed level when
teaching the position data with the programming pendant. The percentage corresponding to
the set value at each level is registered as 100% of the value set in the playback speed limit.
Values greater than those set as speed limit values cannot be set.
S1CxG010 to S1CxG017: LINEAR SPEED FOR REGISTRATION

Units: 0.1mm/s
The value set in these parameters is registered as the linear speed for each speed level when
teaching the position data with the programming pendant. Values greater than those set as
playback speed limit values cannot be set.
9-2
S1CxG018 to S1CxG025: POSITION ANGLE SPEED

Units: 0.1°/s
The value set in these parameters is registered as the position angle speed for each speed
level when teaching the position data with the programming pendant. Values greater than
those set as playback speed limit cannot be set.
S1CxG026 to S1CxG029: JOG OPERATION ABSOLUTE VALUE

SPEED
Units: 0.1mm/s
These are setting values of jog operation speed set by the programming pendant. Values
greater than those set as jog operation speed limit value cannot be set.
Low level : Jog operation speed when “LOW” manual speed is specified.
Medium level : Jog operation speed when “MEDIUM” manual speed is specified.
High level : Jog operation speed when “HIGH” manual speed is specified.
High-speed-level : Jog operation speed when [HIGH SPEED] is pressed.
S1CxG030 to S1CxG032: INCHING MOVE AMOUNT

These parameters specify the amount per move at inching operation by the programming
pendant. The referenced parameter differs according to the operation mode at inching opera-
tion.
Joint Operation : 1 to 10 pulses in units of 1 pulse
Cartesian/cylindrical,user,tool : 0.01 to 2.55mm in units of 0.01mm
Motion about TCP : 0.1 to 1.0° in units of 0.1°
S1CxG033 to S1CxG040: POSITIONING ZONE

This parameter value will be referenced when positioning is specified with the “MOVE” instruc-
tion : MOVJ (joint movement) or MOVL (linear movement).
<Example> MOVL V=100.0 PL=1

Positioning level
Positioning specification
The value set in this parameter specifies the range to enter in relation to the teaching point for
that step positioning. After entering the specified positioning zone, the manipulator starts
moving to the next step. The system is also set up so circular movement is carried out in the
moving section when moving to the next path; speed changeover is smooth.
Since operation will be turning inward during playback, as shown in the following diagram, use
setting values taking safety aspects into consideration.
9-3
P1
P1
l1
l2
l l3
P1 l4
l8
P1
NOTE This process becomes effective when change in direction of steps is between 250° and
155°.
Position Level
SUPPLE-
MENT
Position levels are divided into nine stages of 0 to 8 with the “MOV” instruction.
e.g. MOVL V=500 PL=1 (PL:Position Level)
The functions at each level are as follows:
0 : Complete positioning to the target point
1 to 8 : Inward turning operation
Following are explanations of the respective processing details and their relations with the
parameter.
• Level 0
Determines positioning completion when the amount of deviation (number of pulses) to
the target point of each axis comes within the position set zone specified by the parame-
ter.
After the positioning completes, the instruction system starts instruction to the next target
point.
• Level 1 to 8
Recognizes virtual positioning before the target point. The distance of the virtual target
position from the target point is specified at the positioning level.
Distance data corresponding to each level are set in the parameter. Determination of the
virtual target position is carried out in the instruction system.
Set zone: The zone of each positioning level set in the parameter. (µm)
S1CxG044: LOW-SPEED START

Units: 0.01%
This parameter specifies max. speed at low speed start. Specify the starting method for “initial
operation speed of manipulator” (S2C169).
9-4
S1CxG045 to S1CxG048: JOG OPERATION LINK SPEED

Units: 0.01%
These parameters prescribe the link speed at jog operation by the programming pendant.
Specify the percentage (%) for the jog operation speed limit, the joint max. speed.
S1CxG045: Jog operation link speed at level “LOW”

S1CxG046: Jog operation link speed at level “MEDIUM”
S1CxG047: Jog operation link speed at level “HIGH”
S1CxG048: Jog operation link speed at level “HIGH SPEED”
S1CxG056: WORK HOME POSITION RETURN SPEED

Units: 0.01%
This parameter specifies the speed for returning to work home position against the maximum
speed.
S1CxG057: SEARCH MAX. SPEED

Units: 0.1mm/s
This paramter specifies the max. speed for searching.
S2C153: POSTURE CONTROL AT CARTESIAN OPERATION OF

JOG
This parameter specifies whether or not posture control is performed at cartesian operation of
“JOG” by the programming pendant. Use posture control unless a special manipulator model
is used.
0: With posture control
1: Without posture control
S2C154: OPERATION IN USER COORDINATE SYSTEM (WHEN

EXTERNAL REFERENCE POINT CONTROL FUNCTION USED)
This parameter specifies the TCP or reference point of motion about TCP when the external
reference point control function is used and the user coordinate system is selected by the pro-
gramming pendant.
0: When manipulator TCP is selected
Manipulator TCP
9-5
1: When external reference point is selected

External
reference
point
S2C238: CONTROLLED GROUP JOB TEACHING POSITION

CHANGE
This parameter is used to change only the job teaching position of controlled group axis.
0: Not changed
1: Changed
S2C324, S2C325: OPERATION AFTER RESET FROM PATH

DEVIATION
These parameters specify the method of restarting the manipulator that has deviated from the
normal path such as an emergency stop or jog operation.
0: Move to the indicated step (initial setting).
1: After moving back to the deviated position, move to the indicated step.
2: Move back to the deviated position and stop.
S2C324
Parameter Setting
Movement When Restarting
Value
Move to next step.

Emergency stop
Movement
Move to next step.
when restarting
After moving back to the deviated position, move to the indicated

step.
Emergency stop (Servo OFF)

1
Move back the the deviated
position and then move to
the indicated step.
9-6
S2C324
Parameter Setting
Value
Emergency stop
2 Move back to the deviated

position and stop.
When restarting, move to
the indicated step.
S2C325
Parameter Setting
Value
Move to the next step.
Movement
JOG Move to next step.
when restarting
After moving back to the deviated position, move to the indicated

step.
1
Move back to the deviated
position and then move to
the indicated step.
JOG
Move back to the deviated

2 position and stop. When
restarting, move to the
indicated step.
JOG
Moving speed to the deviated position is the same as the speed at low-speed starting. It is
NOTE linear movement. After resetting from deviation, the speed becomes the same as taught
speed.
9-7
S2C326: DEVIATED POSITION

This parameter specifies whether deviated position is to be robot current (reference) position
or feedback position.
0: Return to the feedback position.
1: Return to the current value (reference) position.
When emergency stop is applied during high-speed motion, the deviated position differs from
the robot current value (reference) position and feedback position as shown in the following.
Current value
Feedback position (reference) position
Emergency stop
S2C515: EMERGENCY STOP CURSOR ADVANCE CONTROL

FUNCTION
This parameter specifies whether to use the cursor advance control function or not.
0: Not use
1: Use
S2C516: EMERGENCY STOP CURSOR ADVANCE CONTROL

FUNCTION CONT PROCESS COMPLETION POSITION
Units: %
When the manipulator stops during moving inner corner by CONT process, this parameter
specifies which position of the inner corner should be considered as the end of step.
Step 4
100%
B When 50% is set, moves to Step 3 if the manipulator stops

in A section, and to Step 4 if the manipulator stops in B
50%
section.
A
Step 3
0%
9-8
S2C517: EMERGENCY STOP ADVANCE CONTROL

FUNCTION WORK START INSTRUCTION STEP MOTION
COMPLETION DELAY TIME
Units: ms
In order to recognize securely the completion of motion to the step of work start instruction
(such as ARCON instruction), this parameter specifies the delay time for motion completion of
the work start instruction step only.
S2C560: BASE AXIS OPERATION KEY ALLOCATION SETTING

Parameter Setting and Jog Operation Key Allocation
Coordinates/Parameter S2C560= “0” S2C560= “1”
Joint Axis number order Specified
Cylindrical Axis number order Specified
Cartesian Specified Specified
Tool Specified Specified
User Specified Specified
Axis number order: X: First axis, Y: Second axis, Z: Third axis

Specified: X: X-direction(RECT-X), Y: Y-direction(RECT-Y), Z: Z-direction(RECT-Z)
S3C806 to S3C808: POSITION CORRECTING FUNCTION DUR-

ING PLAYBACK
These parameters specify the necessary data for position correcting function (PAM) during
playback operation.
S3C806 Specifies the limit of position correcting range (Units: µm)
S3C807 Specifies the limit of speed correcting range (Units: 0.01%)
S3C808 Specifies the correcting coordinates
0 : Base
1 : Robot
2 : Tool
3 : User 1
to
26:User 24
9-9
9.3 Mode Operation Setting Parameters
These parameters set various operations in the teach mode or remote mode.
S2C147: SECURITY MODE WHEN CONTROL POWER SUPPLY

IS TURNED ON
The operation level when the control power supply is turned ON is set.
0: Operation Mode
1: Editing Mode
2: Management Mode
S2C148: SELECTION OF CARTESIAN/CYLINDRICAL

This parameter specifies whether the cartesian mode or cylindrial mode is affected when car-
tesian/cylindrical mode is selected by operation (coordinate) mode selection at axis operation
of programming pendant. This specification can be done on the TEACHING CONDITION
window.
0: Cylindrical mode
1: Cartesian mode
S2C149: COORDINATE SWITCHING PROHIBITED

This parameter prohibits switching coordinates during JOG operation by the programming
pendant.
0: Switching permitted for tool coordinates and user coordinates
1: Switching prohibited for tool coordinates
2: Switching prohibited for user coordinates
3: Switching prohibited for tool coordinates and user coordinates
9-10
S2C150: EXECUTION UNITS AT “FORWARD” OPERATION

This parameter specifies the execution units at step mode of “FORWARD” operation by the
programming pendant.
Parameter Setting
Operation Units
Value
MOVL Stops at every instruction

DOUT
0 TIMER
DOUT
MOVL
MOVL Stops at move instruction

DOUT
1 TIMER
DOUT
MOVL
S2C151: INSTRUCTION (EXCEPT FOR MOVE) EXECUTION AT

“FORWARD” OPERATION
This parameter specifies the method of instruction (except for move) execution at “FOR-
WARD” operation by the programming pendant.
0: Executed by pressing [FWD] + [INTERLOCK]
1: Executed by pressing [FWD] only
2: Instruction not executed
S2C155: CHANGING STEP ONLY

This parameter specifies whether to permit only step changes in an editing-prohibited job.
When permitted, only position data can be changed but additional data such as speed cannot
be changed. This specification can be done on the TEACHING CONDITION window.
0: Permitted
1: Prohibited
S2C156: MANUAL SPEED STORING FOR EACH COORDINATE

This parameter specifies whether to assign different manual speeds for the joint coordinates
and other coordinates. If “NOT STORED” is selected, manual speed is not affected by chang-
ing the coordinates. If “STORED” is selected, manual speeds can be selected separately for
the joint coordinates and other coordinates.
0: Not stored
1: Stored
9-11
S2C158: ADDITIONAL STEP POSITION

This parameter designates either “before next step” or “after the cursor position (between
instructions)” as additional step position. This specification can be done on the TEACHING
CONDITION window.
<Example>
Line Instruction
10 MOVL V=100
11 TIMER T=1.00
12 DOUT OT# (1) ON
13 MOVL V=50
Cursor position
S2C158-0 (Before the Next Step)
Line Instruction
10 MOVL V=100
11 TIMER T=1.00
12 DOUT OT#(1) ON
13 MOVL V=100
14 MOVL V=50
Added step
S2C158-1 (Between Instructions)
Line Instruction
10 MOVL V=100
11 TIMER T=1.00
12 MOVL V=100
13 DOUT OT# (1) ON
14 MOVL V=50
Added step
S2C159: MASTER JOB CHANGING OPERATION

This parameter specifies whether to permit or prohibit master job changing operation. If
“PROHIBIT” is specified, the master job cannot be changed (or registered) easily. The speci-
fication can be done on the OPERATING CONDITION window.
0: Permitted
1: Prohibited
9-12
S2C160: CHECK AND MACHINE-LOCK KEY OPERATION IN

PLAY MODE
This parameter specifies whether to permit or prohibit in play mode to change the operation
that changes the operation condition. Even if an error occurs because of the operation with
the keys, the manipulator does not stop. The specification can be done on the OPERATING
CONDITION window.
0: Permitted
1: Prohibited
S2C161: RESERVED WORK JOB CHANGING OPERATION

This parameter specifies whether to permit reserved work job changing operation.
The designation can be done on the OPERATING CONDITION window.
0: Permitted
1: Prohibited
S2C162: MASTER OR SUBMASTER CALL OPERATION IN PLAY

MODE
This parameter specifies whether the master or submaster call operation in play mode is per-
mitted or not. When the independent control function is valid, the master job for sub-task is
specified at the same time. The specification can be done on the OPERATING CONDITION
window.
0: Permitted
1: Prohibited
S2C163: LANGUAGE LEVEL

This parameter specifies the level of the robot language (INFORM III). The levels simplify the
instruction registering operation. With NX100, all robot instructions can be executed regard-
less of specification of instruction sets. The specification can be done on the TEACHING
CONDITION window.
0: Contracted Level
Only frequently used robot instructions are selected to reduce the number of instructions to
be registered. Robot instructions displayed on the instruction dialog box are also reduced
so that specification is simplified.
1: Stardard Level
2: Expanded Level
All the robot instructions are available in standard and expanded levels. The two levels are
distinguished by the number of additional information items (tags) that can be used with
robot instructions. At the expanded level, the flowing functions are available.
• Local Variables and Array Variables
• Use of Variables for Tags (Example: MOVJ VJ=I000)
The above functions are not available at the standard level, however, which reduces
the number of data required to register instructions, thereby simplifying the operation.
9-13
S2C166: INSTRUCTION INPUT LEARNING FUNCTION

This parameter specifies wheter to set a line of instructions that has been input on the input
buffer line when pressing the first soft key for each instruction. If “PROVIDED” is selected, the
instructions are set.
0: Without learning function
1: With learning function
S2C167: ADDRESS SETTING WHEN CONTROL POWER IS

TURNED ON
This parameter specifies the processing of the job name ,step No. , and line No. that are set
when the control power supply is turned ON.
0: Reproduces the address when power supply is turned ON.
1: Lead address (Line”0”) of the master job.
S2C168: JOB LIST DISPLAY METHOD AT JOB SELECTION

These parameters specify the displaying method on the JOB LIST window at job selection.
0: Order of Names
1: Order of Date
2: Order of Registration
S2C169: INITIAL OPERATION OF MANIPULATOR

This parameter specifies the operation speed level of the first section when starting. Specify
the operation speed with the low-speed start (S1CxG044). When starting at low-speed, the
manipulator stops after reaching the indicated step regardless of the cycle setting. Once the
manipulator is paused during the low-speed operation, it moves at teaching speed when
restarted.
0: Specified on the SPECIAL PLAY window. Operates at low speed only when low
speed start is set. Operates at taught speed when not instructed.
1: Starts at low speed after editing regardless of soft key instructions.
9-14
S2C170: PLAYBACK EXECUTION AT CYCLE MODE “1- STEP”
Parameter Setting
Operation Units
Value
MOVL Stops at every instruction.

DOUT
0 TIMER
DOUT
MOVL
MOVL Stops at move instruction.

DOUT
1 TIMER
DOUT
MOVL
NOTE When operating “FORWARD” by the programming pendant, the units for exection are set
in another parameter (S2C150).
S2C171: EXTERNAL START

This parameter specifies whether a start instruction from external input is accepted or not.
The specification can be done on the OPERATING CONDITION window.
0: Permitted
1: Prohibited
S2C172: PROGRAMMING PENDANT START

This parameter specifies whether a start instruction from the programming pendant is
accepted or not.
0: Permitted
1: Prohibited
S2C173: SPEED DATA INPUT FORM

This parameter specifies the units for speed data input and display.
mm/s : in units of 0.1 mm/s
cm/min : in units of 1cm/min
inch/min : in units of 1 inch/min
mm/min : in units of 1 mm/min
The specification can be done on the OPERATING CONDITION window.
0: mm/s
1: cm/min
2: inch/min
3: mm/min
9-15
S2C174: RESERVED START

This parameter specifies whether a reserved start instruction from the programming pendant
is accepted or not. The specification can be done on the OPERATING CONDITION window.
0: Permitted
1: Prohibited
S2C176: JOB SELECTION AT REMOTE FUNCTION (PLAY

MODE)
This parameter specifies whether a job selection in play mode at remote function is prohibited
or not.
0: Permitted
1: Prohibited
S2C177: EXTERNAL MODE SWITCH

This parameter specifies whether mode switching from the outside is accepted or not. The
specification can be done on the OPERATING CONDITION window.
0: Permitted
1: Prohibited
S2C178: MODE SWITCHING FROM PROGRAMMING PENDANT

This parameter specifies whether mode switching from the programming pendant is accepted
or not. The specification can be done on the OPERATING CONDITION window.
0: Permitted
1: Prohibited
S2C179: EXTERNAL CYCLE SWITCHING

This parameter specifies whether cycle switching from the outside is accepted or not. The
specification can be done on the OPERATING CONDITION window.
0: Permitted
1: Prohibited
S2C180: PROGRAMMING PENDANT CYCLE SWITCHING

This parameter specifies whether cycle switching from the programming pendant is accepted
or not. The specification can be done on the OPERATING CONDITION window.
0: Permitted
1: Prohibited
9-16
S2C181: SERVO ON FROM EXTERNAL DEVICE PROHIBITION

This parameter specifies whether a servo ON instruction is accepted or not. More than one
instruction can be specified. For example, to permit the servo ON instruction from an external
input only, set “6.” In this case, servo ON instruction from the programming pendant is not
accepted.The specification can be done on the OPERATING CONDITION window.
d7 d0
External input prohibited : 1

Programming pendant : 2 (VALID)
S2C182: PROGRAMMING PENDANT OPERATION WHEN “IO” IS

SELECTED FOR REMOTE MODE
This parameter specifies whether each operation of the following is valid when “IO” is selected
for remote function selection. IO and command are available for remote function selection:
“IO” is set prior to shipping. “Command” is valid when transmission function (optional) is spec-
ified.
d7 d0
Programming pendant servo ON valid/invalid : 1 (VALID)
Mode switching valid/invalid : 4 (VALID)

Master call valid/invalid : 8 (VALID)
Cycle switching valid/invalid : 16 (VALID)
Start valid/invalid : 32 (VALID)
S2C186: STEP REGISTRATION AT TOOL NO. CHANGE

The registration of the step when the tool number is changed allows the setting to be made as
prohibited.
If this parameter is set to “1” (prohibited), the following operations are prohibited.
0: Permitted
1: Prohibited
• Modification of a step
When the tool number of the teaching step differs from the currently-selected tool number,
the step cannot be modified.
• Deletion of a step
Even if the teaching step position coincides with the current position, the step cannot be
deleted when the tool number of the teaching step differs from the currently-selected tool
number.
• Addition of a step
When the tool number of the teaching step indicated by the cursor differs from the cur-
rently-selected tool number, the step cannot be added.
9-17
S2C211: REMOTE FIRST CYCLE MODE

This parameter sets the cycle that changes from the local mode to the remote mode.
The setting can be made on the OPERATING CONDITION window.
0: Step
1: 1 cycle
2: Continuous
3: Setting retained
S2C212: LOCAL FIRST CYCLE MODE

This parameter sets the cycle that changes from the remote mode to the local mode.
0: Step
1: 1 cycle
2: Continuous
3: Setting retained
S2C230: POWER ON FIRST CYCLE MODE

This parameter sets the first cycle mode for when the power is turned ON.
0: Step
1: 1 cycle
2: Continuous
3: Setting retained
S2C231: TEACH MODE FIRST CYCLE MODE

This parameter sets the cycle that changes from the play mode to the teach mode.
0: Step
1: 1 cycle
2: Continuous
3: Setting retained
S2C232: PLAY MODE FIRST CYCLE MODE

This parameter sets the cycle that changes from the teach mode to the play mode.
0: Step
1: 1 cycle
2: Continuous
3: Setting retained
9-18
S2C234: START CONDITION AFTER ABSOLUTE DATA ALLOW-

ABLE RANGE ERROR OCCURS
This parameter specifies the activating method after the absolute data allowable range error
occurs.
0: Position check operation required
1: Low-speed start up
S2C317 to S2C321: TIME RESET

These parameters specify whether resetting operation of the specified times is permitted or
not.
S2C317 : CONTROL POWER ON TIME
S2C318 : SERVO POWER ON TIME
S2C319 : PLAYBACK TIME
S2C320 : WORK TIME
S2C321 : WEAVING TIME
0: Prohibit Resetting
1: Permit Resetting
“PERMIT” is set as the initial value for the work time and motion time.
S2C333: TOOL NO. SWITCHING

This parameter specifies whether tool number switching is permitted or not. If “PERMIT” is
selected, 24 types of tools from number 0 to 23 can be switched. If “NOT PERMIT” is
selected, only number “0” can be used.
0: Prohibited
1: Permitted
S2C335: POSITION TEACHING BUZZER

This parameter specifies whether the buzzer sound at position teaching is used or not.
0: With buzzer
1: Without buzzer
9-19
9.4 Parameters according to Interference Area
S2C336: JOB LINKING DESIGNATION (When Twin Synchronous

Function Used)
This parameter specifies whether the manipulator at the synchronizing side is to be linked
when the manipulator and the station at the synchronized side are performing FWD/BWD or
test run, by using the twin synchronous function.
0: Not operating
1: Linking
0 : Does not operate the synchronizing side 1 : Links the synchronizing side while teaching
while teaching the synchronized side. the synchronized side.
Synchronizing side Synchronizing side
These parameters limit the P-point maximum envelope of the manipulator or set the interfer-
ence area for axis interference or cubic interference.
S1CxG200 to S1CxG215: PULSE SOFT LIMIT

Soft limit is set independently for each axis by pulse value setting. Set current value (pulse
value) of the axis at the soft limit set up position.
Operation area
Soft limit
Limit switch
Mechanical
operation limit
9-20
S2C001: CUBE SOFT LIMIT CHECK

This parameter specifies whether to check the cube soft limit. More than one soft limit can be
specified.
0 : No check
1 : With check
d7 d0
Cube 1 soft limit (base coordinates value of robot 1 TCP)

If “WITH CHECK” is selected, set up the following parameters.

S3C000 to S3C023: Cube Soft Limit
Soft Limit
SUPPLE-
MENT
Soft limit is a software-type function to limit the range of movement of the manipulator.
If the TCP reaches the soft limit during operation, the manipulator automatically stops and
no longer moves in that same direction. An alarm occurs if this soft limit is exceeded dur-
ing playback. This soft limit is classified into two types.
• Cube Soft Limit

Soft limit is set with the absolute value on the base coordinates.
x
Y
• Pulse Soft Limit (Independent Axis Soft Limit)
Refer to " S1CxG200 to S1CxG215: PULSE SOFT LIMIT. "
S2C002: S-AXIS INTERFERENCE CHECK

This parameter specifies whether to check for interference with each manipulator. If “WITH
CHECK” is selected, set up the following parameters.
S3C024 to S3C031: S-axis Interference Area
9-21
S2C003 to S2C050: CUBE/AXIS INTERFERENCE CHECK

1. Designation of checking
These parameters specify the cube/axis interference to be used by bit.
0 : Cube Interference/Axis Interference Not Used

1 : Robot 1 2 : Robot 2 3 : Robot 3 4: Robot 4
5 : Base Axis 1 6 : Base Axis 2 7 : Base Axis 3 8: Base Axis 4
9 : Station Axis 1 10 : Station Axis 2 11 : Station Axis 3 12: Station Axis 4
13 : Station Axis 5 14: Station Axis 6 15: Station Axis 7 16: Station Axis 8
17 : Station Axis 9 18: Station Axis 10 19: Station Axis 11 20: Station Axis 12
2. Checking method
Designates whether checking is performed by command or feedback.
Designation of checking (data setting)

0: Not used
1: Robot 1, , 20: Station axis 12
Checking method (bit setting)

0: Command, 1: Feedback
Checking method
SUPPLE-
MENT
The cheking method differs according to ON/OFF status of servo power supply.
Checking Method Designation Servo Power Supply ON Servo Power Supply OFF
Command Command Feedback
Feedback Feedback Feedback
During the servo float function operation, checking is performed by feedback regardless of
the checking method designation.
9-22
Interference Area
SUPPLE-
MENT
It is possible to output whether the TCP during operation is inside or outside as a status
signal, and to set the area to control the position by parameters S2C003 to S2C114.
When the manipulator attempts to enter this area, the corresponding input signal (e.g. an
“entrance prohibit signal”) is detected. The manipulator stops immediately if there is an
input signal and goes into waiting status until this signal is cleared. This signal is pro-
cessed in the I/O section. Three methods of interference area settings are prepared for
manipulators and stations. For a system with one manipulator, use robot 1.
• S-axis Interference Area

Position is controlled by the pulse value of the S-axis.
(+) s ide (-) si de
In left area In right area
• Cubic Interference Area

Up to 32 cubic areas can be set. The edges of the cubes are set parallel to the robot
coordinates or the user coordinates.
Z Cube Setting Method
Base coordinates
(robot coordinates, S2C003-S2C034
user coordinates) Use cube No
intrf. check?
S2C051-S2C114 Yes
Decide the using
method.
S3C032-S3C543
X Y
Thirty two cubic areas can be set, Set the area.
each cube is set parallel to the set coordinates.
Completed
• Axis Interference Area

Up to 32 areas can be set. Each operation area maximum and minimum value are set for
the robot, base axis, and station axis plus and minus side.
Max value 0 Min value
positive side (+) negative side (-)
ON
OF F
9-23
S2C051 to S2C114: CUBE USING METHOD

These parameters specify the coordinates for defining the cube. If the user coordinates are
selected, also specify the user coordinate system numbers. Set cubic area referring to the
cubic interference areas shown below.
Coordinate specification
0 : Pulse(axis interference)
1 : Base coordinates
2 : Robot coordinates
3 : User coordinates
Coordinate No. : Specify the user coordinate number when selecting “3: User Coordinates.”
Units: 1µm
Precaution When Setting the Interference Area

SUPPLE-
MENT
It will be necessary to consider the following when setting the cubic interference and S-axis
intereference areas. The manipulator is processed to decelerate to stop from the point
where it enters in the area. Therefore, set the areas in consideration of the amount of the
manipulator movement in the deceleration section shown in the figure below.
Interference area
Deceleration
Stop
Speed
Movement
Speed reduction section
The move amount in the speed reduction section is dependent on the moving speed of the
manipulator at that time:
V = 1500mm/s approx. 300mm (Max.)

V = 1000mm/s approx. 160mm
V = 30mm/s approx. 3 to 4 mm
V = 20mm/s approx. 2mm
9-24
Interference Prevention in Interference Area

SUPPLE-
MENT
Processing to prevent interference is executed in the I/O processing section. The relation
between the NX100 I/O signal and manipulator operation is shown below.
Start
Is the TCP within Yes

the cube?
No
Is the "CUBE Yes
ENTRANCE PROHIBIT"
signal ON?
No
Outputs "WAIT" signal.
"WAIT" reset
Manipulator stops.
"OPERATING IN CUBE"
signal output
Has it left the check

cube? No
Yes
In wait status with the entrance prohibit signal, the manipulator just barely enters the area
for speed reduction processing and then stops.
9-25
SUPPLE-
MENT
NX100
Operating inside
CUBE1
Output in cube during
Operating inside operation.
CUBE2
Output during waiting by
Interference waiting
entrance prohibit signal.
Inside CUBE1
entrance prohibit These signals are checked
when entering the cube.
Inside CUBE2
entrance prohibit
Manipulator A Manipulator B
Operating inside Inside CUBE1

CUBE1 entrance prohibit
Operating inside Inside CUBE2

CUBE2 entrance prohibit
Inside CUBE1 Operating inside

entrance prohibit CUBE1
Inside CUBE2 Operating inside

entrance prohibit CUBE2
Interference waiting Interference waiting
Alarm signal
Connection Example Where Two Manipulators are Operated in the Same Area
S2C188 to S2C193: ROBOT INTERFERENCE CHECK

This parameter specifies whether to check interference between robots 1, 2, 3, and 4. Inter-
ference check is executed in the spherical range having the TCP in the center. If “provided” is
selected, also select the following parameters.
ROBOT INTERFERENCE CHECK (units: µm)

S3C801 : ROBOT1 SPHERE RADIUS
S3C802 : ROBOT 2 SPHERE RADIUS
S3C000 to S3C023: CUBE SOFT LIMIT

These parameters specify auxiliary functions of S2C001 parameter. For details, see the
explanation of the S2C001 parameter.
9-26
9.5 Parameters according to Status I/O
S3C024 to S3C031: S-AXIS INTERFERENCE AREA

These parameters specify auxiliary functions of S2C002 parameter. For details, see the
explanation of the S2C002 parameter.
S3C032 to S3C543: CUBIC INTERFERENCE AREA

These parameters specify auxiliary functions of S2C003 to S2C034 parameters. For details,
see the explanation of the S2C003 to S2C050 parameters.
S3C801 to S3C804: ROBOT INTERFERENCE AREA

These parameters specify auxiliary functions of S2C188 to S2C193 parameters. For details,
see the explanation of the S2C188 to S2C193 parameters.
S3C805: A SIDE LENGTH OF WORK-HOME-POSITION CUBE

Units: 1µm
This parameter specifies a side length of the cube for the work home position.
These parameters set the parity check or I/O setting for user input/output signals.
S2C187: USER OUTPUT RELAY WHEN CONTROL POWER IS

ON
This parameter specifies the state of the user output relays when the control power is turned
ON. Since the power OFF state, including peripheral devices, cannot be completely repro-
duced, take note when restarting.
0: Reset to the power OFF state
1: Initialized (all user relays OFF)
9-27
S4C000 to S4C007: PARITY OF USER INPUT GROUPS

These parameters specify whether to execute priority checks with parameters when instruc-
tions covering the input group (1G#) are executed. The instructions covering the input groups
are as shown below.
• IF Sentence (JUMP, CALL, RET, PAUSE)
• Pattern Jump, Pattern Job Call
• DIN
• WAIT
d15 d0 d15 d0
S4C000 S4C001
IG#01 IG#17
IG#02 IG#18
IG#03 IG#19
IG#04 IG#20
IG#05 IG#21
IG#06 IG#22
IG#07 IG#23
IG#08 IG#24
IG#09 IG#25
IG#10 IG#26
IG#11 IG#27
IG#12 IG#28
IG#13 IG#29
IG#14 IG#30
IG#15 IG#31
IG#16 IG#32
d15 d0
S4C002
IG#33
IG#34
IG#35
IG#36
IG#37
IG#38
IG#39
IG#40
IG#41
IG#42
IG#43
IG#44
IG#45
IG#46
IG#47
IG#48
Parity bits are set as the highest level bits of each input group and are written in even parity. If
an error is detected during parity check, an alarm occurs and the manipulator stops. Remains
unchanged if no parity check is specified.
9-28
S4C008 to S4C015: PARITY OF USER OUPUT GROUPS

These parameters specify whether the output group instruction is executed with parity check
(even parity).
d15 d0 d15 d0
S4C008 S4C009
OG#01 OG#17
OG#02 OG#18
OG#03 OG#19
OG#04 OG#20
OG#05 OG#21
OG#06 OG#22
OG#07 OG#23
OG#08 OG#24
OG#09 OG#25
OG#10 OG#26
OG#11 OG#27
OG#12 OG#28
OG#13 OG#29
OG#14 OG#30
OG#15 OG#31
OG#16 OG#32
PARITY CHECK AT BIT-ON (1) PARITY CHECK AT BIT-ON (1)
d15 d0
S4C010
OG#33
OG#34
OG#35
OG#36
OG#37
OG#38
OG#39
OG#40
OG#41
OG#42
OG#43
OG#44
OG#45
OG#46
OG#47
OG#48
PARITY CHECK AT BIT-ON (1)
Parity bits are set as the highest level bits of each output group. For example, if OG#01 is
specified with parity and DOUT OG# (1) 2 is executed, the result will be 00000010 if 2 is
binary converted. Since there will be only one bit (odd) ON at this time, the parity bit (highest
level bit) will be set to ON and 10000010 (130) will be output to OG# (1).
As in the case of a variable such as DOUT OG# (1) B003 parity bits are added to the contents
of the variable data. However, if the contents of the variable exceed 127, as in the case of
DOUT OG# (1) 128, an alarm will occur. Remains unchanged if no parity check is specified.
9-29
S4C016 to S4C023: DATA OF USER INPUT GROUPS

These parameters specify whether to handle the input group data as binary data or as BCD
data when an instruction for the input group (1G#) is executed. The instructions covering the
input groups are as shown below.
• IF Sentence (JUMP, CALL, RET, PAUSE)
• Pattern Jump, Pattern Job Call
• DIN
• WAIT
d15 d0 d15 d0
S4C016 S4C017
IG#01 IG#17
IG#02 IG#18
IG#03 IG#19
IG#04 IG#20
IG#05 IG#21
IG#06 IG#22
IG#07 IG#23
IG#08 IG#24
IG#09 IG#25
IG#10 IG#26
IG#11 IG#27
IG#12 IG#28
IG#13 IG#29
IG#14 IG#30
IG#15 IG#31
IG#16 IG#32
BCD DATA SPECIFICATION AT BIT-ON (1) BCD DATA SPECIFICATION AT BIT-ON (1)
d15 d0
S4C018
IG#33
IG#34
IG#35
IG#36
IG#37
IG#38
IG#39
IG#40
IG#41
IG#42
IG#43
IG#44
IG#45
IG#46
IG#47
IG#48
BCD DATA SPECIFICATION AT BIT-ON (1)
9-30
S4C024 to S4C031: DATA OF USER OUTPUT GROUPS

These parameters specify whether the output group instruction is executed with binary data or
BCD data.
d15 d0 d15 d0
S4C024 S4C025
OG#01 OG#17
OG#02 OG#18
OG#03 OG#19
OG#04 OG#20
OG#05 OG#21
OG#06 OG#22
OG#07 OG#23
OG#08 OG#24
OG#09 OG#25
OG#10 OG#26
OG#11 OG#27
OG#12 OG#28
OG#13 OG#29
OG#14 OG#30
OG#15 OG#31
OG#16 OG#32
BCD DATA SPECIFICATION AT BIT-ON (1) BCD DATA SPECIFICATION AT BIT-ON (1)
d15 d0
S4C026
OG#33
OG#34
OG#35
OG#36
OG#37
OG#38
OG#39
OG#40
OG#41
OG#42
OG#43
OG#44
OG#45
OG#46
OG#47
OG#48
BCD DATA SPECIFICATION AT BIT-ON (1)
Differences Between Binary Data and BCD Data

SUPPLE-
MENT
For the input group and output group, the result will depend on whether the binary or BCD
formula is used.
<Example> When the input function is [10101010]
DATA EDIT DISPLAY

State Binary BCD
Case Case
USER INPUT
GROUP IG#01 0:10 00:16 1 20 = 1 1 20 = 1 1
IN#0001 #10010 z 0 21 = 2 0 21 = 2 Total 0
IN#0002 #10011 { 5
IN#0003 #10012 z 1 22 = 4 4 22 = 4 is in 4
IN#0004 #10013 { 0 23 = 8 0 23 = 8 ones. 0
IN#0005 #10014 z
IN#0006 #10015 { 1 24 = 16 16 20 = 1 1
IN#0007 #10016 z 0 25 = 32 0 21 = 2 Total 0
IN#0008 #10017 { 5
1 26 = 64 64 22 = 4 is in 4
tens.
0 27 = 128 0 23 = 8 0
85 55
Binary data value BCD data value
!
However, in the case of BCD data, because the upper bound value is 99, it is not possible
to use any value which exceeds nine in the one or ten digit place.
9-31
9.6 Parameters according to Coordinated or Synchronized Operation
S4C032 to S4C039: USER OUTPUT GROUP TO BE INITIALIZED

AT SWITCHING MODE
Set the user output group with bit to be initialized at switching mode. Use these parameters
when using user output signals as work instructions for peripheral devices.
d15 d0 d15 d0
S4C032 S4C033
OG#01 OG#17
OG#02 OG#18
OG#03 OG#19
OG#04 OG#20
OG#05 OG#21
OG#06 OG#22
OG#07 OG#23
OG#08 OG#24
OG#09 OG#25
OG#10 OG#26
OG#11 OG#27
OG#12 OG#28
OG#13 OG#29
OG#14 OG#30
OG#15 OG#31
OG#16 OG#32
INITIAL VALUE SPECIFICATION AT BIT-ON (1) INITIAL VALUE SPECIFICATION AT BIT-ON (1)
d15 d0
S4C034
OG#33
OG#34
OG#35
OG#36
OG#37
OG#38
OG#39
OG#40
OG#41
OG#42
OG#43
OG#44
OG#45
OG#46
OG#47
OG#48
INITIAL VALUE SPECIFICATION AT BIT-ON (1)
S4C126: USER OUTPUT NO. WHEN MANIPULATOR DROP

ALLOWABLE RANGE ERROR OCCURS
This parameter specifies the user output number to output the manipulator drop allowable
range error alarm occurrence externally. When this function is not used, set “0.”
9.6 Parameters according to Coordinated or Synchro-

nized Operation
These parameters make the settings for coordinated or synchronized operations between
manipulators or between manipulators and stations.
9-32
S2C164: +MOV or +SMOV INSTRUCTION SPEED INPUT

This parameter specifies whether the speed inputting for move instructions of the master robot
in a coordinated job is permitted or not.
<Example> 0: Not Provided 1: Provided
SMOVL V=100 SMOV L V=100
+MOVL ← Master side +MOV L V=100 ← Master side
Speed specification Speed specification

not provided provided
S2C165: +MOV INSTRUCTION INTERPOLATION INPUT

This parameter specifies which interpolation is permitted for move instructions for the master
robot in a coordinated job. More than one instruction can be specified.
d7 d0
+ MOVJ : 1(VALID)
+ MOVL: 2(VALID)
+ MOVC : 4(VALID)
+ MOVS: 8(VALID)
S2C183: OPERATION METHOD AT FWD/BWD OPERATION OR

TEST RUN BY INDEPENDENT CONTROL
This paramaeter specifies the operation method at FWD/BWD operation or test run by inde-
pendent control.
0: The job of the task that is currently displayed operates.
1: Jobs of all the tasks operate.
Sub task 1
Master : Operating
task
Sub task 2
Sub task 1 Sub task 1

Master Master
task task
Sub task 2 Sub task 2
Sub task 1
Master
task
Sub task 2
0: One of the task jobs that are currently 1: All task jobs operate.
displayed operates.
9-33
S2C184: JOB AT CALLING MASTER OF SUBTASK 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 BY

INDEPENDENT CONTROL
This parameter specifies the job which is called up when the master of the subtask is called up
by independent control.
0: Master job
1: Root job
Master Job: Job registered in the master control window

Root Job: Job activated by PSTART instruction
S2C194: STATION AXIS CURRENT VALUE DISPLAY FUNCTION

This parameter specifies whether the function to display the current value of the station axis in
the following units is valid/invalid.
• Rotary axis : Angle (deg)
• Servo track : Distance (mm)
0: Invalid
1: Valid
S2C195 to S2C206: STATION AXIS DISPLAYED UNIT

This parameter specifies the station axis displayed unit (bit specification).
0: Display angle (deg)
1: Display in distance (mm)
Setting Method
Set a numerical value (decimal) where the bit of the axis to be displayed in the units of dis-
tance becomes 1.
d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 d1 d0
Decimal
(32) (16) (8) (4) (2) (1)
Station 1st axis
Station 2nd axis
Station 3rd axis

Station 4th axis
Station 5th axis
Station 6th axis
<Example> When 1st and 3rd axes of station 1 are displayed in the units of distance:
d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 d1 d0
0 0 0 1 0 1 Set 1 to axis displayed in
(4) (1) distance.
4 + 1 = 5
Therefore, set parameter S2C195 of station 1 to 5.
9-34
S2C322: POSTURE CONTROL OF SYNCHRONIZED MANIPULA-

TOR (When Twin Synchronous Function Used)
This parameter specifies the posture control method for syncronized manipulator performing
compensation during playback by using the twin synchronous function.
0: Change posture according to station movement
1: Fixed in relation to the ground
0 : Change posture according to staion movement

1 : Fixed in relation to the ground
S2C323: POSTURE CONTROL OF MANIPULATOR IN MULTI-JOB

(When Twin Synchronous Function Used)
This parameter specifies the posture control method for manipulator executing compensation
at the linking side when job linking is performed during FWD/BWD operation by the twin syn-
chronous function.
0: Change posture according to station movement
1: Fixed in relation to the ground
S2C549: OPERATION OF JOB WITHOUT CONTROL GROUP

SPECIFICATION
When the servo power supply is individually turned OFF where jobs in multiple number of
tasks are operated using the independent control function, the job execution of the control
group whose servo power supply is turned OFF is interrupted. The jobs of other control
groups continue their execution.
For the jobs without control group specification such as master job, the conditions for execu-
tion can be set by the parameter.
0: Execution possible only when servo power supply to all the axes have been turned
ON.
1: Execution possible when servo power supply to any axis is turned ON.
9-35
S2C550: EXECUTION OF “BWD” OPERATION

This parameter prohibits step-back operation of a job without a step.
d7 d0
"BWD" operation for a job without a group axis. 0 : Enabled 1 : Disabled

"BWD" operation for concurrent job. 0 : Enabled 1 : Disabled
S3C809: MAXIMUM DEVIATION ANGLE OF CURRENT STATION

POSITION (When Twin Synchronous Function Used)
Used when the twin synchronous function is used. This parameter specifies the maximum
deviation between the teaching position and the current station position.
0 : No deviation check
Other than 0: Deviation angle (units : 0.1°)
Manipulator at Conpensation
synchronizing side
Sub-task1 Sub-task2
R1 R2
Position set when
teaching synchronizing side
Deviation made
at playback
Station S1
Station
In the above figure on the left, the follower R2 executes the job of subtask 2 in synchronization
with the motion of the station axis which is moved by the R1 job. In this procedure, the job of
subtask 2 controls only the R2 robot axis.
If the teaching position of the station in the subtask 2 differs from the station current position
(controlled by the subtask 1 job), the difference is automatically offset so that R2 keeps the
taught position in relation to the station.
Difference between the taught and the station current positions is always monitored. If the dif-
ference exceeds a set value of the parameter, the message “PULSE LIMIT (TWIN COORDI-
NATED)” appears.
9-36
9.7 Parameters for Other Functions or Applications
9.7 Parameters for Other Functions or Applications
These parameters make the settings for other functions or applications.
S1CxG049 to S1CxG051: YAG LASER SMALL CIRCLE CUTTING

These parameters prescribe cutting operation at small circle cutting by YAG laser.
S1CxG049 : Set the minimum diameter of a figure in the units of µm that can
(Minimum diameter) be processed by small-circle cutting machine.
S1CxG050 : Set the maximum diameter of a figure in the units of µm that can
(Maximum diameter) be processed by small-circle cutting machine.
S1CxG051 : Set the maximum cutting speed at operation by CUT instruction
(Maximum speed) in the units of 0.1mm/s.

DIRECTION LIMIT VALUE
These parameters set the cutting direction limits at small circle cutting by YAG laser.
S1CxG052 : Set the limit value in the positive direction of cutting angle DIR
(+ direction) set by CUT instruction, in the units of 0.01°.
S1CxG053 : Set the limit value in the negative direction of cutting angle DIR
(- direction) set by CUT instruction, in the units of 0.01°.

OVERLAP VALUE
These parameters set the overlapped value at small curcle cutting by YAG laser.
S1CxG054 : Set the operation radius at inner rotation in the units of 1 µm after
(Operation radius) overlapping by CUT instruction.
S1CxG055 : Set the rotation angle at inner rotation in the units of 0.1° after
(Rotation angle) overlapping by CUT instruction.
S1CxG063, S1CxG064: PATTERN CUTTING DIMENSION

These parameters set the minimum diameter (S1CxG063) and the maximum diameter
(S1CxG064) for the pattern cutting in units of µm.
S1CxG065: MIRROR SHIFT SIGN INVERSION

This parameter sets which axis to be shifted (mirror-shift: invert the sign).
1st axis (0: Not invert, 1: Invert)
6th axis
9-37
9.8 Hardware Control Parameters
S2C332: RELATIVE JOB OPERATION METHOD

This parameter specifies how to operate a relative job. A method to convert a relative job into
a standard job (pulse), and a conversion method to calculate the aimed position (pulse posi-
tion) when a relative job is operated can be specified.
0: Previous step with priority (B-axis moving distance mimimized.)

1: Form with priority
2 Previous step with priority (R-axis moving distance minimized.)
S3C819 to S3C898: ANALOG OUTPUT FILTER CONSTANT

(When analog output corresponding to speed function is used)
By setting a constant to filter, a filter processing can be performed for the output analog signal.
S3C899: CUT WIDTH CORRECTION VALUE (When form cutting

function is used)
This parameter specifies the path correction value for pattern cutting operation. A value 1/2 of
the cut width is set in units of µm.
These parameters make the hardware settings for fan alarm or relay operation, etc.
S2C646: COOLING FAN ALARM DETECTION

This parametr specifies a detection for cooling fan 1 to 3 with alarm sensor, connected to
power ON unit.
0: No detection
1: Detected with message display
2: Detected with message and alarm display
S4C181 to S4C212: SETTING OF OPERATING RELAY NO.

Up to 32 output signals can be turned ON/OFF with the programming pendant. The object
relay No. is set in these parameters. Although it is possible to set optionable values for output
Nos. 1 to 1024 in the parameters, the following must be taken into consideration.
• Avoid setting duplicate numbers.
• The signal turned ON or OFF with the programming pendant is operated again or remains
unchanged until the instruction is executed.
9-38
S4C213 to S4C244: OPERATING METHOD OF RELAYS

These parameters specify the operating method of output singals by the programming pen-
dant. The operating method can be specified for each output signal.
Paramater Setting
Operation of Output Signal
Value
+ON
ON
0
-OFF OFF
+ON ON/OFF with the key

ON while the key
1 is pressed ON
OFF if the key is
not pressed OFF
S2C647 to S2C649: COOLING FAN ALARM 1 OPERATION

These parameters specify the operation of cooling fan 1 to 3 with alarm sensor, connected to
power ON unit.
Each bit specifies the power ON unit to which the detecting sensor is connected.
d7 d0
S2C647,S2C650,S2C653
SERVOPACK#1 - Power ON unit 1
d7 d0
S2C648,S2C651,S2C654

d7 d0
S2C649,S2C652,S2C655

9-39
9.9 TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS
RS000: COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL

The protocol of the serial port of the NCP01 circuit board is specified.
0: No protocol
2: Basic protocol
3: FC1 protocol
9.9.1 Basic Protocol

Specify when using Yaskawa data transmission functions.
RS030: NUMBER OF DATA BITS

This parameter specifies the number of data bits.
RS031: NUMBER OF STOP BITS

This parameter specifies the number of stop bits.
RS032: PARITY
This parameter specifies the parity bits.
RS033: TRANSMISSION SPEED

This parameter specifies the transmission speed in units of bauds.
RS034: RESPONSE WAITING TIMER (TIMER A)

Units: 0.1 seconds
This timer monitors the sequence. It specifies the response waiting time for invalid or missing
responses.
RS035: TEXT TERMINATION MONITORING TIMER (TIMER B)

This timer monitors text reception. Specify the monitoring time to wait for text termination
character.
RS036: NUMBER OF ENQ RE-TRANSMISSION RETRIES

This parameter specifies the number of re-transmission attempts of the control characters for
invalid or missing responses.
RS037: NUMBER OF DATA RE-TRANSMISSION RETRIES

This parameter specifies the number of re-transmission attempts of text for block check error
(NAK reception).
9-40
RS038: BLOCK CHECK METHOD

This parameter specifies the checking method for text transmission errors. Set “0” for this pro-
tocol.
9.9.2 FC1 Protocol

The following protocols naturally correspond to the external memory unit, YASNAC FC1 or
FC2.
RS050: NUMBER OF DATA BITS

This parameter specifies the number of data bits.
RS051: NUMBER OF STOP BITS

This parameter specifies the number of stop bits.
RS052: PARITY
This parameter specifies the parity bits.
RS053: TRANSMISSION SPEED

This parameter specifies the transmission speed in units of bauds.
RS054: RESPONSE WAITING TIMER (TIMER A)

Units: 0.1 seconds
This timer monitors the sequence. It specifies the response waiting time for invalid or missing
responses.
RS055: TEXT TERMINATION MONITORING TIMER (TIMER B)

This timer monitors text reception. Specify the monitoring time to wait for text termination
character.
RS056: NUMBER OF ENQ RE-TRANSMISSION RETRIES

This parameter specifies the number of re-transmission attempts of the control characters for
invalid or missing responses.
RS057: NUMBER OF DATA RE-TRANSMISSION RETRIES

This parameter specifies the number of re-transmission attempts of text for block check error
(NAK reception).
9-41
9.10 Application Parameters
RS058: FC2 FORMAT SPECIFICATION

Specify the format type of the floppy disk used with external memory (YASNAC FC2).
NOTE 720 kilobytes are unconditionally specified for YASNAC FC2 (2DD floppy disk exclusive
use).
RS059: EXTERNAL MEMORY FILE OVERWRITE

SPECIFICATION
Specify whether to accept the file overwrite of the external memory (YASNAC FC2 or FC1).
9.10.1 Arc Welding

AxP000: APPLICATION
This parameter specifies the application. Set “0” for arc welding.
AxP003: WELDING ASSIGNMENT OF WELDING START

CONDITION FILE
This parameter specifies the beginning condition number in the welding start condition file to
be assigned to Power Source 2. Condition files of a lower number are automatically assigned
to Power Source 1. For a system with one Power Source, set “49” (maximum value).
Condition file
Power
Source 1
Power
Source 2
AxP004: WELDING ASSIGNMENT OF WELDING END

CONDITION FILES
This parameter specifies the beginning condition number in the welding END condition file to
be assigned to Power Source 2. Condition files of a lower number are automatically assigned
to Power Source 1. For a system with one Power Source, set “13” (maximum value).
Power
Source 1
Power
Source 2
9-42
AxP005: WELDING SPEED PRIORITY

This parameter specifies whether the welding speed is specified by the “ARCON” instruction,
by the welding start condition file, or by the additional times of the “MOV” instruction.
AxP009: WORK CONTINUING

This parameter specifies whether to output an “ARCON” instruction to restart after the manip-
ulator stopped while the “ARCON” instruction is being output.
AxP010: WELDING INSTRUCTION OUTPUT

This parameter specifies the beginning number (0 to 12) of the analog output channel to the
Power Source. “0” indicates that no Power Source exists.
AxP011, AxP012: MANUAL WIRE OPERATION SPEED

These parameters specify the manual wire operation speed as a percentage of the maximum
instruction value. Instruction polarity is determined by the current instruction in the Power
Source characteristic file. The setting range is from 0 to 100.
AxP013, AxP014: WELDING CONTROL TIME

These parameters specify the welding control time in units of minutes. The setting range is
from 0 to 999.
AxP015 to AxP017: NUMBER OF WELDING CONTROL

These parameters specify the number of welding controls. The setting range is from 0 to 99.
AxP026 to AxP029: TOOL ON/OFF USER OUTPUT NO. (Jigless

system)
These parameters specify the user output number for the tool open/close operation by specific
keys.
9.10.2 Handling Application

AxP002, AxP004: f1 KEY FUNCTION
These parameters set the output signal to assign for f1 key.
0: Not specified
1 to 4: Specific outputs for HAND-1 to HAND4-1
5: User output (No. is specified by AxP004).
AxP003, AxP005: f2 KEY FUNCTION

These parameters set the output signal to assign for f2 key.
0: Not specified
1 to 4: Specific outputs for HAND-2 to HAND4-2
5: User output (No. is specified by AxP005)
9-43
9.10.3 Spot Welding

AxP003: MAXIMUM NUMBERS OF CONNECTED POWER
SOURCES
The initial value is set to 4. The value is automatically set at start-up. No modification is
needed.
AxP004: GUN FULL OPEN STROKE ON/OFF SIGNAL

This parameter specifies which stroke switching signal is output ON or OFF to make the gun
fully-opened for each gun.
Bit specification (1 for 01) for 8 guns. The initial setting is “0.”
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
| | | | | | | |
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Gun number
AxP005: STROKE CHANGE ANSWER TIME LIMIT

When using the X2 gear mechanical stopper gun and switching gun stroke, this parameter
sets the time from the stroke-switching-sequence start until the pressure instruction end.
Setting range : 0.0 to 9.9 sec.
The initial setting is “0,” with which the switching signal is output for the “stopper-type stroke
switching time” set in the file, and then the gun pressure instruction is turned OFF.
AxP006: PARITY SPECIFICATION FOR WELDING CONDITIONS

When adding the parity signal to the welding condition signal with the Power Source con-
nected to each welding gun, this parameter specifies odd or even parity.
Bit specification for 4 Power Sources. (0 : odd number, 1 : even number) The initial setting is
“0.”
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
| | | |
4 3 2 1 Power Source number
AxP007: ANTICIPATE TIME

When executing the GUNCL or SPOT instruction with NWAIT specified in the previous move
instruction but the time is not specified by ATT in the GUNCL or SPOT instruction, this param-
eter specifies the anticipate condition (time). The initial setting is “0,” with which the each
instruction is executed as soon as the taught position of the previous move instruction is
reached, as normal operation.
AxP015: WELDING ERROR RESET OUTPUT TIME

This parameter sets the output time of the welding error reset signal to the Power Source
when the alarm reset signal is input.
If the setting is "0," the welding error reset signal is not output to the Power Source even if the
alarm reset signal is input.
9-44
AxP016, AxP017: ELECTRODE WEAR AMOUNT ALARM VALUE

These parameters set the electrode wear amount alarm values (AxP016: movable side,
AxP017: fixed side) at the wear detection.
9.10.4 General-purpose Application

AxP009: WORK CONTINUE PROHIBIT
This parameter specifies whether to output TOOLON instruction or not at restarting when the
work is stopped for some reasons during the output of TOOLON instruction.
9-45
10.1 Home Position Calibration
10 System Setup
WARNING
• Before operating the manipulator, check that the SERVO ON lamp goes
out when the emergency stop buttons on the right of the front door of
the NX100 and the programming pendant are pressed.
Injury or damage to machinery may result if the manipulator cannot be stopped in case of
an emergency.
• Observe the following precautions when performing teaching operations

within the P-point maximum envelope of the manipulator :

• Prior to performing the following operations, be sure that no one is in

the P-point maximum envelope of the manipulator, and be sure that you
are in a safe place when:
- Turning ON the NX100 power.

- Moving the manipulator with the programming pendant.
Injury may result from contact with the manipulator if persons enter the P-point maximum
envelope of the manipulator.
• Always press the emergency stop button immediately if there are prob-
lems.
Emergency stop buttons are located on the right of the front door of the
NX100 and the programming pendant.
10-1
CAUTION
• Perform the following inspection procedures prior to teaching the
manipulator. If problems are found, correct them immediately, and be
sure that all other necessary tasks have been performed.
- Check for problems in manipulator movement.

- Check for damage to the insulation and sheathing of external wires.
• Always return the programming pendant to its hook on the NX100 cabi-
net after use.
If the programming pendant is inadvertently left on the manipulator, a fixture, or on the

floor, the manipulator or a tool could collide with it during manipulator movement, possibly
causing injury or equipment damage.
10.1.1 Home Position Calibration
Teaching and playback are not possible before home position calibration is complete.
NOTE In a system with two or more manipulators, the home position of all the manipulators must
be calibrated before starting teaching or playback.
Home position calibration is an operation in which the home position and absolute encoder
position coincide. Although this operation is performed prior to shipment at the factory, the fol-
lowing cases require this operation to be performed again.
• Change in the combination of the manipulator and NX100

• Replacement of the motor or absolute encoder
• Clearing stored memory (by replacement of NCP01 circuit board, weak battery, etc.)
• Home position deviation caused by hitting the manipulator against a workpiece, etc.
To calibrate the home position, use the axis keys to calibrate the home position mark on each
axis so that the manipulator can take its posture for the home position. There are two opera-
tions for home position calibration:
• All the axes can be moved at the same time: Recalibrate the home position by moving all
the axes together if changing the combina-
tion of manipulator and circuit board.
• Axes can be moved individually: Recalibrate the home position for the individual axes that
were affected by the replacement, if replacing the motor
or absolute encoder.
If the absolute data of its posture for the home position is already known, set the absolute data
again after completing home position registration.
10-2
Home Position
SUPPLE
-MENT
The home position is the pulse value "0" for each axis and its posture. The relative values
between the home position and the control reference position are set to parameters. The
relative values are specified as an angle in units of 1/1000° and vary for different manipula-
tor types. See "10.1.3 Home Position of the Robot."
10.1.2 Calibrating Operation

Registering All Axes at One Time

main menu.
2 Select {HOME POSITION}. The HOME POSITIONING window appears.
HOME POSITIONING
SELECT ABSOLUTE DATA
R1:S
L
U
R
B
T
Main Menu ShortCut
3 Select {DISPLAY} under the The pull down menu appears.

menu.
ROBOT1
HOME POSITIONING
SELECT STATION1
ABSOLUTE DATA
R1:S
L
4 Select the desired control

group.
5 Select {EDIT} under the The pull down menu appears.
menu. EDIT UTILITY
DATA DISPLAY
SELECT ALL AXIS

HOME POSITIONING
6 Select {SELECT ALL The confirmation dialog box appears.

AXES}.
Create home position?
Yes No
7 Select “YES.” Shown position data of all axes are registered as home position.
When “NO” is selected, the registration will be canceled.
10-3
Registering Individual Axes


main menu.
3 Select {DISPLAY} under the The pull down menu appears.
menu.
group.
HOME POSITIONING
R1:S
L
U
R
B
T
Main Menu ShortCut
5 Select the axis to be regis- The confirmation dialog box appears.

tered.
Create home position?
Yes No
6 Select “YES.” Shown position data of axis are registered as home position.
When “NO” is selected, the registration will be canceled.
10-4
Changing the Absolute Data

To change the absolute data of the axis when home position calibration is completed, perform
the following:

main menu.
3 Select {DISPLAY}. The pull down menu appears.
group.
5 Select the absolute data to be The number input buffer line appears.
registered.
HOME POSITIONING
R1:S 193
L { 2965
U { 2698
R { -66398
B { 692
T { 968
Main Menu ShortCut
6 Enter the absolute data using

the Numeric keys.
Press [ENTER]. Absolute data are changed.
10-5
Clearing Absolute Data


main menu.
3 Select {DISPLAY}. The pull down menu appears.
group.
5 Select {DATA} under the
menu.
6 Select {CLEAR ALL DATA}. The all absolute data are cleared.
HOME POSITIONING
R1:S
L {
U {
R {
B {
T {
Main Menu ShortCut
10-6
10.1.3 Home Position of the Robot

In case of UP6, the home position are as follows.
U-axis angle against horizontal

line on the ground(-0°) B-axis center line angle against
U-axis center line(-90°)
L-axis angle against vertical

line to the ground(-0°)
NOTE Other manipulator models have different positions. Always refer to "MANIPULATOR
INSTRUCTIONS" for the correct manipulator model.
10-7
10.2 Second Home Position (Check Point)
WARNING
• Be aware of safety hazards when performing the position confirma-
tion of the second home position (check point).
Abnormality of the PG system may be a cause for alarm. The manipulator may
operate in an unexpected manner, and there is a risk of damage to equipment or
injury to personnel.
• Before operating the manipulator, check that the SERVO ON lamp

goes out when the emergency stop buttons on the front door of
NX100 and the programming pendant are pressed.
Injury or damage to machinery may result if the manipulator cannot be stopped in

case of an emergency.
• Observe the following precautions when performing teaching oper-

ations within the P-point maximum envelope of the manipulator :

• Prior to performing the following operations, be sure that no one is

in the P-point maximum envelope of the manipulator, and be sure
that you are in a safe place when:
- Turning ON the NX100 power

- Moving the manipulator with the programming pendant
- Running the system in the check mode
- Performing automatic operations
Injury may result from contact with the manipulator if persons enter the P-point max-
imum envelope of the manipulator.
• Always press the emergency stop button immediately if there are

problems.
Emergency stop buttons are attached on the right of the front door of the NX100
and the programming pendant.
10-8
CAUTION
• Perform the following inspection procedures prior to teaching the
manipulator. If problems are found, correct them immediately, and
be sure that all other necessary tasks have been performed.
- Check for problems in manipulator movement.

- Check for damage to the insulation and sheathing of external
wires.
- Always return the programming pendant to its hook on the NX100
cabinet after use.
If the programming pendant is inadvertently left on the manipulator, a fixture, or on

the floor, the manipulator or a tool could collide with it during manipulator move-
ment, possibly causing injury or equipment damage.
10-9
10.2.1 Purpose of Position Check Operation

If the absolute number of rotation detected at power supply ON does not match the data
stored in the absolute encoder the last time the power supply was turned off, an alarm is
issued when the controller power is turned ON.
There are two possible causes of this alarm:
• Error in the PG system

• The manipulator was moved after the power supply was turned OFF.
If there is an error with the PG system, the manipulator may stall when playback is started. If
the absolute data allowable range error alarm has occurred, playback and test runs will not
function and the position must be checked.
After absolute data allowable range alarm occurs
Reset alarm
Turn ON servo power
Procedure After Alarm Occurs
Position confirmation
operation
Compare second home NG

position (check point)
pulses with current
position pulses Alarm occurs again
OK
Correct defective axis
• Replace PG system
• Home position calibration
∗ Position checking point
Playback possible
Position Check
After the absolute data allowable range alarm occurs, move to the second home position
using the axis keys and check the position. To prevent the position from changing, playback,
test runs, and FWD operation will not function.
10-10
Pulse Difference Check

The pulse number at the second home position is compared with that at the current posi-
tion. If the difference is within the allowable range, playback is enabled. If not, the error
alarm occurs again.
• The allowable range pulse is the number of pulses per rotation of the motor (PPR data).
• The initial value of the second home position is the home position (where all axes are at
pulse 0). The second home position can be changed. For details, refer to "10.2 Second
Home Position (Check Point)."
Alarm Occurence
If the error alarm occurs again, there may be an error in the PG system. Check the system.
After adjusting the erroneous axis, calibrate the home position of the axis, then check the
position again.
• Home position calibration of all the axes at the same time enables playback operations
NOTE without having to check the position.
• Sometimes in a system with a manipulator that has no brake, it is possible to enable

playback without position checking after the absolute data allowable range error alarm
occurs. However, as a rule, always check the position.
Under the above special conditions, the manipulator moves as follows:
After starting, the manipulator moves at low speed (1/10 of the maximum speed) to the
step indicated by the cursor. If it is stopped and restarted during this motion, the low
speed setting is retained until the step at cursor is reached. Regardless of cycle setting,
the manipulator stops after the cursor step is reached. Starting the manipulator again
then moves it at the programmed speed and cycle of the job.
10-11
10.2.2 Setting the Second Home Position (Check Point)

Apart from the normal home position of the manipulator, the second home position can be set
up as a check point for absolute data. Use the following steps to set the specified point.
If two or more manipulators or stations are controlled by one controller, the second home posi-
tion must be set for each manipulator or station.

main menu.
2 Select {SECOND HOME The SECOND HOME POSITION window appears.
POS}. The message “Available to move to any modify second home
position” is shown.
SECOND HOME POSITION

HOME POSITION CURRENT DIFFERENCE
R1:S 0 0 0
L 0 0 0
U 0 0 0
R 0 0 0
B 0 0 0
T 0 0 0
Main Menu ShortCut
3 GO BACK The group axes by which the second home position is set is
Press the page key . selected when there are two or more group axes.
PAGE
4 Press the axis keys. Move the manipulator to the new second home position.
5 Press [MODIFY] and The second home position is chaged.
[ENTER].
10-12
10.2.3 Procedure After an Alarm
WARNING
• Be aware of safety hazards when performing the position confirma-
tion of the specified point.
Abnormality of the PG system may be cause for alarm. The manipulator may oper-
ate in an unexpected manner, and there is a risk of damage to equipment or injury
to personnel.
If the absolute data allowable range alarm occurs, perform the followings
• Reset the alarm
• Turn Servo power ON
and confirm the second home position. After the confirmation, if the PG system is found to be
the cause of the alarm, perform the necessary operation, such as replacing the PG, etc.
The robot current position data when turning main power supply OFF and ON can be con-
firmed in “Power ON/OFF Position Window.”
SUPPLE
Refer to NX100 MAINTENANCE MANUAL " 7.7 Position Data When Power is
-MENT Turned ON/OFF " for details on the “Power ON/OFF Position Window.”

main menu.
2 Select {SECOND HOME The SECOND HOME POSITION window appears.
POS}.
3 GO BACK The group axes by which the second home position is set is
Press the page key . selected when there are two or more group axes.
PAGE
4 Press [FWD]. TCP moves to the second home position. The robot moving
speed is set as selected manual operation speed.
menu.
6 Select {CONFIRM The message “Home position checked” appears.
POSITION}. Pulse data of the second home position and current pulse data
are compared. If the compared error is in allowed range, playback
operation can be done.
If the error is beyond the allowed range, the alarm occurs again.
10-13
10.3 Setting the Controller Clock
10.3 Setting the Controller Clock
The clock inside of the NX100 controller can be set.

main menu.
2 Select {DATE/TIME}. The DATE/CLOCK SET window appears.
DATE/CLOCK SET
DATE 2003 . 06 . 30
CLOCK 12:00
Main Menu ShortCut
3 Select “DATE” or “CLOCK.” The input buffer line appears.

4 Input the new date or time. For instance, to make the date June 30, 2003, input [2003.6.30].
To set the time at exactly twelve o’clock, enter [12.00].
5 Press [ENTER]. Date and time are changed.
DATE/CLOCK SET
DATE 2003 . 06 . 30
CLOCK 12:00
10-14
10.4 Setting Play Speed
10.4 Setting Play Speed

main menu.
2 Select {SET SPEED}. The SPEED SET window appears.
SPEED SET
JOINT R1:1 0.78 %
2 1.56 %
3 3.12 %
4 6.25 %
5 12.50 %
6 25.50 %
7 50.00 %
8 100.00 %
Main Menu ShortCut
3 GO BACK When two or more manipulators and stations exist in the system,
Press the page key . GO BACK
PAGE
the control group is changed by the page key .
PAGE
4 Select “JOINT” or “LNR/CIR.” The type of speed alternately changes from “JOINT” to “LNR/
CIR”.
SPEED SET
LNR/CIR R1:1 12.0 mm/sec
2 25.0 mm/sec
3 50.0 mm/sec
4 100.0 mm/sec
5 200.0 mm/sec
6 400.0 mm/sec
7 800.0 mm/sec
8 1600.0 mm/sec
5 Select desired speed value. The input buffer line appears.

6 Input the speed value.
7 Press [ENTER]. The speed value is changed.
SPEED SET
JOINT R1:1 0.78 %
2 1.56 %
3 3.12 %
4 6.25 %
5 12.50 %
6 25.50 %
7 50.00 %
10-15
10.5 All Limits Releasing
CAUTION
• To operate the manipulator with all limits released, pay extra attention
to the operating environment around you.
When all limits are released, the manipulator or equipment may be damaged.
The following limits can be released by the operation explained in the following.
Limit Type Contents
Mechanical Limit Limit for checking manipulator’s range of motion
L-U Interference Limit for checking L- and U-axes interference area
Software Limit Every axis soft limit for checking manipulator’s

range of motion
Cube Interference Limit for checking cube interference area set by

user
NOTE If the security mode is not at managememt mode, all limits releasing is not allowed. Refer
to "8 Security System" of the NX100 INSTRUCTIONS for details about security modes.
10-16

main menu.
2 Select {LIMIT RELEASE}. The LIMIT RELEASE window appears.
LIMIT RELEASE
SOFT LIMIT RELEASE INVALID
ALL LIMITS RELEASE INVALID
Main Menu ShortCut
3 Select “ALL LIMITS “VALID” and “INVALID” are shown alternately every time
RELEASE.” [SELECT] is pressed.
When ALL LIMITS RELEASE is changed to “VALID,” the mes-
sage “All limits have been released” appears. When the setting
changes to “INVALID,” the message “All limits release has been
canceled” appears for three seconds.
LIMIT RELEASE
10-17
10.6 Overrun / Tool Shock Sensor Releasing
CAUTION
• To operate the manipulator with overrun released or with tool shock sen-
sor released, pay extra attention to the operating environment around
you.
If the manipulator stops by overrun detection or tool shock sensor detection, release the over-
run or tool shock sensor by the following procedure and reset the alarm and move the manip-
ulator using the axis keys.

main menu.
2 Select {OVERRUN & S-SEN- The OVERRUN & TOOL SHOCK SENSOR window appears.
SOR}. The stopping condition when the tool shock sensor is detected
can be selected “EMERGENCY STOP” or “HOLD” at the “TOOL
SHOCK SENSOR STOP COMMAND”. “E-STOP” and “HOLD”
are displayed alternately every time [SELECT] is pressed.
OVERRUN&SHOCK SENSOR
SHOCK SENSOR STOP COMMAND: E-STOP
OCCUR GRP OVERRUN S-SENSOR
ROBOT1
RELEASE ALM RST

Main Menu ShortCut
10-18
3 Select “RELEASE.” “ " is shown at the control group which detects overrun or tool
shock sensor. If “RELEASE” is selected, overrun or tool shock
sensor is released and “CANCEL” is shown.
OVERRUN&SHOCK SENSOR
SHOCK SENSOR STOP COMMAND: E-STOP
OCCUR GRP OVERRUN S-SENSOR
ROBOT1
RELEASE ALM RST

Main Menu ShortCut
4 Select “ALM RST.” Alarm is reset and manipulator can be moved using the axis keys.
• After overrun or tool shock sensor releasing, the manipulator can be moved using the axis
NOTE keys with low speed or inching motion only.
• After overrun or tool shock sensor releasing, if “CANCEL” is selected or the window is
changed to the other one, overrun or tool shock sensor releasing is canceled.
• The axis operation can be performed only in the joint.
10-19
10.7 Interference Area
10.7.1 Interference Area

The interference area is a function that prevents interference between multiple manipulators
or the manipulator and peripheral device. The area can be set up to 32 area. There are two
types of interference areas, as follows:
• Cubic Interference Area
• Axis Interference Area
The NX100 judges whether the TCP of the manipulator is inside or outside this area, and out-
puts this status as a signal.
If the TCP of the manipulator is inside the area, the interference 1 inside signal or interference
2 inside signal are turned on and the manipulator automatically decelerates to a stop. The
manipulator stands by until these signals are turned off, whereupon it automatically restarts.
10.7.2 Cubic Interference Area

Cubic Interference Area
This area is a rectangular parallelepiped which is parallel to the base coordinate, robot coordi-
nate, or user coordinate. The NX100 judges whether the current position of the manipulator’s
TCP is inside or outside this area, and outputs this status as a signal. The cubic interference
areas can be set, parallel to the base coordinate or user coordinate.
Cubic
interference
area
Cubic
interference Cubic
User Coordinates area interference
Z-axis area
X-axis
Y-axis Y-axis
X-axis
10-20
Cube Setting Method

There are three ways to set cubic interference areas, as described in the following:
Number Input of Cube Coordinates

Enter the maximum and minimum values for the cube coodinates.
Z-axis
Maximum
value
Cubic
interference X-axis
area axis
Minimum
value
Y-axis
Teaching Corner
Move the manipulator at the maximum and minimum value positions of the cube corner using
the axis keys.
Z-axis
Maximum
value
X-axis
Minimum
value
Y-axis
Number Input of the Side of Cube and Teaching Center

After entering the lengths of the three faces of the cube (axial length) using the Numeric keys,
move the manipulator to the center point of the cube using the axis keys.
Z-axis
Y X
Z X-axis
Center
point
Y-axis
10-21
Setting Operation

main menu.
2 Select {INTERFERENCE}. The INTERFERENCE AREA window appears.
INTERFERENCE AREA
INTERFERENCE SIG: 1 / 32
METHOD AXIS INTERFERENCE
CONTROL GROUP
CHECK MEASURE COMMAND POSITION
DIRECT PAGE
Main Menu ShortCut
3 Select the desired cube num- GO BACK
ber. Select the desired cube number using the page key or by
PAGE
number input.
The method for number input is as follows: Move cursor to
“INTERFERENCE SIG” and press [ENTER] to display the num-
ber input line. Input desired signal number and press [ENTER].
4 Select “METHOD.” ”AXIS INTERFERENCE” and “CUBIC INTERFERENCE” are dis-
played alternately every time [SELECT] is pressed. If “CUBIC
INTERFERENCE” is selected, the window is changed.
INTERFERENCE AREA
METHOD CUBIC INTERFERENCE
CONTROL GROUP
CHECK MEASURE COMMAND
5 Select “CONTROL GROUP.” The selection dialog box appears. Select desired control group.
INTERFERENCE AREA
CONTROL GROUP R1: ROBOT1
CHECK MEASURE R2: ROBOT2
REF COORDINATE BASE
TEACHING METHOD MAX/MIN
MAX MIN
DIRECT PAGE
Main Menu ShortCut
10-22
6 Select “REF COORDINATES.” The selection dialog box appears. Select desired coordinate.
If the user coordinates are selected, the number input line
appears. Input the user coordinate number and press [ENTER].
INTERFERENCE AREA
CONTROL GROUP R1
REF COORDINATE BASE
TEACHING METHOD ROBOT
<MAX> USER
X 0.000 0.000
Y 0.000 0.000
Z 0.000 0.000
DIRECT PAGE
Main Menu ShortCut
7 Select “CHECK MEASURE.” Each time [SELECT] is pressed, “COMMAND POSITION” and
“FEEDBACK POSITION” are shown alternately.
INTERFERENCE AREA
METHOD CUBE INTERFERENCE
CONTROL GROUP R1
REF COORDINATE BASE
<MAX> <MIN>
X 0.000 0.000
Y 0.000 0.000
Z 0.000 0.000
DIRECT PAGE
Main Menu ShortCut
To stop the manipulator movement using the interference signal (use the cube interference
NOTE signal for mutual interference between robots), set CHECK MEASURE to “COMMAND
POSITION”.
When set to the “FEEDBACK POSITION”, the manipulator decelerates to a stop after
entering the interference area.
When informing an external unit of the actual manipulator position, use the “FEEDBACK
POSITION” setting so the timing of the output signal is more accurate.
10-23
Number Input of Cube Coordinates

1 Select “METHOD.” Each time [SELECT] is pressed, “MAX/MIN” and “CENTER POS”
alternate.
Select “MAX/MIN”.
INTERFERENCE AREA
CONTROL GROUP R1
REF COORDINATE BASE
<MAX> <MIN>
X 0.000 0.000
Y 0.000 0.000
Z 0.000 0.000
DIRECT PAGE
Main Menu ShortCut
2 Input number for “MAX” and The cubic interference area is set.
“MIN” data and press
[ENTER]. DATA EDIT DISPLAY UTILITY
INTERFERENCE AREA
CONTROL GROUP R1
REF COORDINATE BASE
<MAX> <MIN>
X 100.000 0.000
Y 50.000 0.000
Z 0.000 0.000
DIRECT PAGE
Main Menu ShortCut
10-24
Teaching Corner
alternate.
Select “MAX/MIN”.
2 Press [MODIFY]. The message “Teach max./min. position” appears.
INTERFERENCE AREA
CONTROL METHOD R1
REF COORDINATE BASE
<MAX> <MIN>
X 0.000 0.000
Y 0.000 0.000
Z 0.000 0.000
DIRECT PAGE
Main Menu ShortCut Teach max./min. position
3 Move the cursor to “<MAX>” Move cursor to “<MAX>” for changing maximum value and move
or “<MIN>.” cursor to “<MIN>” for changing minimum value. The cursor
moves to only either “<MIN>” or “<MAX>” at this time. The cursor
moves freely when this operation is canceled by pressing [CAN-
CEL].
4 Move the manipulator using Move the manipulator to the maximum or minimum position of the
the axis keys. cube using the axis keys.
5 Press [ENTER]. The cubic interference area is registered.
INTERFERENCE AREA
CONTROL GROUP R1
REF COORDINATE BASE
<MAX> <MIN>
X 100.000 0.000
Y 50.000 0.000
Z 0.000 0.000
DIRECT PAGE
Main Menu ShortCut
10-25
Number Input of the Side of Cube and Teaching Center

alternate.
Select “CENTER POS”
INTERFERENCE AREA
CONTROL GROUP R1
REF COORDINATE BASE
TEACHING METHOD CENTER POS
<MAX> <MIN> <LENGTH>
X 0.000 0.000 0.000
Y 0.000 0.000 0.000
Z 0.000 0.000 0.000
DIRECT PAGE
Main Menu ShortCut
2 Input data for length of the The length is set.

cube and press [ENTER].
INTERFERENCE AREA
CONTROL GROUP R1
REF COORDINATE BASE
X 0.000 0.000 0.000
Y 0.000 0.000 50.000
Z 0.000 0.000 0.000
DIRECT PAGE
Main Menu ShortCut
3 Press [MODIFY]. The message “Move to center point and teach” appears.
The cursor moves to only either “<MIN>” or “<MAX>” at this time.
The cursor moves freely when this operation is canceled by
pressing [CANCEL].
INTERFERENCE AREA
CONTROL GROUP R1
REF COORDINATE BASE
X 0.000 0.000 0.000
Y 0.000 0.000 50.000
Z 0.000 0.000 0.000
DIRECT PAGE
Main Menu ShortCut Move to center point and teach
4 Move the manipulator using Move the manipulator to the center point of the cube using the
the axis keys. axis keys.
5 Press [ENTER]. The current position is registered as the center point of the cube.
10-26
10.7.3 Axis Interference Area

Axis Interference Area
The axis interference area is a function that judges the current position of the each axis and
outputs a signal. Once the maximum and minimum values have been set at the plus and
minus sides of the axis to define the working range, a signal indicating whether the current
position of the axis is inside or outside this range is output. (ON: inside, OFF: outside)
Max value Min value

+ side - side
ON
OFF
Axis Interference Signal for Station Axis
Setting Operation
Number Input of Axis Data

main menu.
2 Select {INTERFERENCE}. The INTERFERENCE AREA window appears.
INTERFERENCE AREA
CONTROL GROUP
<MAX> <MIN>
DIRECT PAGE
3 Select the desired interference Select the desired interference signal number using the page
signal number. GO BACK
key or by number input.

PAGE
The method for number input is as follows: Move cursor to

“INTERFERENCE SIG” and press [SELECT] to display the num-
ber input line. Input desired signal number and press [ENTER].
4 Select “METHOD.” ”AXIS INTERFERENCE” and “CUBIC INTERFERENCE” are
shown alternately every time [SELECT] is pressed. Select “AXIS
INTERFERENCE.”
10-27
5 Select “CONTROL GROUP.” The selection dialog box appears. Select desired control group.
INTERFERENCE AREA
CONTROL GROUP R1: ROBOT1
CHECK MEASURE R2: ROBOT2
<MAX> <MIN>
DIRECT PAGE
6 Select “CHECK MEASURE.” Each time [SELECT] is pressed, “COMMAND POSITION” and
“FEEDBACK POSITION” alternate.
INTERFERENCE AREA
CONTROL GROUP R1
CHECK MEASURE FEEDBACK POSITION
<MAX> <MIN>
S 0 0
L 0 0
U 0 0
R 0 0
B 0 0
T 0 0
DIRECT PAGE
7 Input data for desired axis and The axis interference area is set.
press [ENTER].
INTERFERENCE AREA
CONTROL GROUP R1
<MAX> <MIN>
S 300 0
L 0 0
U 0 0
R 0 0
B 0 0
T 0 0
DIRECT PAGE
10-28
Setting Axis Data by Moving Manipulator Using the Axis Key


main menu.
2 Select {INTERFERENCE}.
3 Select the desired interference
signal number.
4 Select “METHOD.”
5 Select “CONTROL GROUP.” Operate in the same way as shown in Explanation 2 to 5 in ”Num-
ber Input of Axis Data”.
6 Press [MODIFY]. Move cursor to “<MAX>” for changing maximum value and move
cursor to “<MIN>” for changing minimum value. The cursor
moves to only either “<MIN>” or “<MAX>” at this time. The cursor
moves freely when this operation is canceled by pressing [CAN-
CEL].
INTERFERENCE AREA
CONTROL GROUP R1
<MAX> <MIN>
S 0 0
L 0 0
U 0 0
R 0 0
B 0 0
T 0 0
DIRECT PAGE
7 Move the manipulator using Move the manipulator to the desired position using the axis keys.
the axis keys.
8 Press [ENTER]. The axis interference area is registered.
INTERFERENCE AREA
CONTROL GROUP R1
<MAX> <MIN>
S 510 0
L 1004 0
U 213 0
R 10 0
B 3501 0
T 260 0
DIRECT PAGE
10-29
10.7.4 Clearing Interference Area Data
1 Select interference signal for Select the desired interference signal number for clearing using
clearing. GO BACK
the page key or by number input.

PAGE
The method for number input is as follows: Move cursor to the

signal number and press [SELECT] to display the number input
line. Input desired signal number and press [ENTER].
menu.
3 Select {CLEAR DATA}. The confirmation dialog box appears.
Initialize?
Yes No
4 Select “YES.” All the data of the interference signal number are cleared.
INTERFERENCE AREA
CONTROL GROUP R1
<MAX> <MIN>
DIRECT PAGE
10-30
10.8 Work Home Position
10.8.1 What is the Work Home Position?

The Work Home Position is a reference point for manipulator operations. It prevents interfer-
ence with peripheral device by ensuring that the manipulator is always within a set range as a
precondition for operations such as starting the line. The manipulator can be moved to the set
work home position by operation from the programming pendant, or by signal input from an
external device. When the manipulator is in the vicinity of the work home position, the work
home position signal turns ON.
10.8.2 Setting Work Home Position

Work Home Position Window

main menu.
2 Select {WORK HOME POSI- The WORK HOME POSITION window appears.
TION}.
WORK HOME POSITION

INTERFERENCE SIG: HOME POS CUR POS
R1:S 0 0
L 0 0
U 0 0
R 0 0
B 0 0
T 0 0
Main Menu ShortCut
3 GO BACK When two or more manipulators exist in the system, the control
Press the page key . GO BACK
PAGE
group is changed using the page key .
PAGE
10-31
Registering/Changing the Work Home Position

1 Press the axis keys in the work Move the manipulator to the new work home position.
home position display.
2 Press [MODIFY] and New work home position is set.
[ENTER].
When the work home position is changed, the cubic interference area is automatically set
NOTE as cube 32 to 29 in the base coordinate system.
• The cube 32 is for ROBOT1
The work home position cube is a cube like the one shown in the figure below; the length of
its sides is determined by a parameter setting made by the user (units: µm). By changing
this parameter setting, the size of the cube can be changed.
S3C805 : The work home position cube length of its sides( µm)
P
a
a
a
Specify whether “COMMAND POSITION” or “FEEDBACK POSITION” is to be set to the
work home position cube signal’s CHECK MEASURE in the interference area settings.
“COMMAND POSITION” is the default setting.
Returning to the Work Home Position

In the teach mode
1 Press [FWD] in the work home The manipulator moves to the new work home position. During
position display. movement, the message “Manipulator is moving to work home
position” is shown. The moving speed is the selected manual
speed.
In the play mode

When the work home position return signal is input (detected at leading edge), the TCP of the
manipulator is moved to the work home position using the same operation as
the teach mode. However, the speed for this is set in the parameters.
10-32
10.9 Tool Data Setting
Output of the Work Home Position Signal

This signal is output any time the current position of the TCP of the manipulator is checked
and found to be within the work home position cube.
10.9.1 Registering Tool Files

Number of Tool Files
There are 24 tool files numbered 0 to 23. Each file is called as a tool file.
TOOL FILE 0
TOOL FILE 23
Registering Coordinate Data

When the number input operation is used for registering the tool file, input the TCP of the tool
on the flange coordinates.
XF
YF
Tool
TCP
ZF
10-33

main menu.
2 Select {TOOL}. The TOOL window appears. When the tool extension function is
valid, the list is shown. When the tool extension function is
invalid, the TOOL COORDINATE window is shown.
Tool File Extension Function

SUPPLE
-MENT
Normally, one robot uses one kind of tool file. The
tool file extension function can change many tool files
to be used by one robot. Use the following parame-
ter to set this function.
S2C333: TOOL NO. SWITCHING (1: enabled, 0: dis-
abled)
For more details, refer to "9 Parameter.”
TOOL
NO. NAME
00 TORCH MT-3501
01 TORCH MTY-3501
02 TORCH MT-3502
03
04
05
06
07
Main Menu ShortCut
TOOL
TOOL NO. 00
NAME: dhhh
X 1.556 mm Rx 0.00 deg.
Y 0.000 mm Ry 0.00 deg.
Z 5.000 mm Rz 0.00 deg.
W 0.000 kg
Xg 9999.000 mm Ix 0.000 kg.m2

Yg 0.000 mm Iy 0.000 kg.m2
Zg 0.000 mm Iz 0.000 kg.m2
Main Menu ShortCut
10-34
3 Select the desired tool num- When the TOOL window is shown, move the cursor and press
ber. [SELECT]. The coordinate window of the selected tool appears. If
GO BACK
the coordinate window appears, press the page key to

PAGE
select the desired tool.

To switch the TOOL window and the coordinate window, press
{DISPLAY} {LIST} or {DISPLAY} {COORDINATE DATA}.
TOOL LIST
TOOL NO. 00
NAME: dhhh
4 Select the desired coordinate The number input line appears.

axis to modify.
5 Input the tool data.
6 Press [ENTER]. The tool data is registered.
TOOL
TOOL NO. 00
NAME TORCH MT-3501
X 0.000 mm Rx 0.00 deg.
Y 0.000 mm Ry 0.00 deg.
Z 260.000 mm Rz 0.00 deg.
W 0.000 kg
Xg 0.000 mm
Main Menu ShortCut
<SettingExample>
260 mm 260 mm 260 mm
TCP TCP TCP

ZF 145 mm
ZF
Tool A Tool B Tool C
Case of Tool A, B Case of Tool C
X 0.000 mm Rx 0.00 deg. X 0.000 mm Rx 0.00 deg.

Y 0.000 mm Ry 0.00 deg. Y 145.000 mm Ry 0.00 deg.
Z 260.000 mm Rz 0.00 deg. Z 260.000 mm Rz 0.00 deg.
10-35
Registering Tool Angle

The tool pose data is angle data which shows the relation between the flange coordinates
and the tool coordinates. The angle when the flange coordinates are rotated to meet to the
tool coordinates becomes an input value. Clockwise toward the arrow is the positive direction.
Register in the order of Rz Ry Rx.
The following, register Rz=180, Ry=90, Rx=0
Flange XF
coordinates
YF
ZF XT
Tool
coordinates YT
ZT

main menu.
2 Select {TOOL}.
3 Select the desired tool num- In the same way shown in Explanation 2, 3 in " Registering
ber. Coordinate Data," the desired TOOL COORDINATE window
appears.
4 Select the desired coordinate First, select Rz.
axis to modify.
5 Input the tool pose data. Input rotation angle around ZF of the flange coordinates.
XF
YF
ZF YF
X F Rz = 180
X 0.000 mm Rx 0.00 deg.

Y 0.000 mm Ry 0.00 deg.
Z 0.000 mm Rz 180.00 deg.
10-36
6 Press [ENTER]. The rotation angle of Rz is registered.

In the same way, register the angle of Ry,Rx.
Ry must be the input rotation angle around Y’F flange coordi-
nates.
X F
ZF
Y F (Y F )
Z F
Ry = 90
X 0.000 mm Rx 0.00 deg.

Y 0.000 mm Ry 90.00 deg.
Z 0.000 mm Rz 180.00 deg.
Rx must be the input rotation angle around X’F of flange coordi-

nates.
X F
YF
Z F Rx = 0
X 0.000 mm Rx 0.00 deg.

Y 0.000 mm Ry 90.00 deg.
Z 0.000 mm Rz 180.00 deg.
NOTE If tool data is registered in the tool file by tool calibration, the old data will be deleted.
Setting the Tool Load Information

The tool load information includes weight, a center of gravity position, and moment of inertia at
the center of gravity of the tool installed at the flange.
SUPPLE
For more details on the tool load information, refer to " 10.11.3 Tool Load Information Set-
-MENT ting.”
10-37
10.9.2 Tool Calibration

Tool Calibration
To ensure that the manipulator can perform motion type operations such as linear and circular
motion type correctly, accurate dimensional information on tools such as torches, tools, and
guns must be registered and the position of the TCP must be defined. Tool calibration is a
function that enables this dimensional information to be registered easily and accurately.
When this function is used, the TCP is automatically calculated and registered in the tool file.
What is registered in tool calibration is the coordinates of the TCP in the flange coordinates.
XF
Flange <Flange coordinates>
coordinates XF: Vertically upward direction when the current
position on the T-axis of the manipulator is "0"
YF: Y-axis complementing XF and ZF
ZF ZF: Direction perpendicular to the flange face
XT
YT
YF
Tool
coordinates ZT
Teaching
In order to perform tool calibration, five different angle (TC1 to 5) must be taught with the TCP
as the reference point. The tool dimensions are automatically calculated on the basis of these
five points.
TC2
TC1 TC3
TC4
TCP
TC5
Each angle must be arbitrary. Accuracy may decrease when pose setting is rotated in a con-
stant direction.
There are 24 tool files numbered 0 to 23. In a basic system with one manipulator and one
SUPPLE
-MENT
tool, the tool file for tool No.0 is used. If there is more than one tool, for example when
using a multihand, use the tool numbers in the order 0, 1, 2, .... etc.
SUPPLE
Tool pose data is not registered in tool calibration. For details on how to register pose data,
-MENT refer to " Registering Tool Angle" of "10.9.1 Registering Tool Files."
10-38

main menu.
2 Select {TOOL}.
3 Select the desired tool num- In the same way shown in Explanation 2, 3 in " Registering
ber. Coordinate Data" of "10.9.1 Registering Tool Files," the desired
coordinate window appears.
TOOL
TOOL NO. 00
NAME: dhhh
X 1.556 mm Rx 0.00 deg.
Y 0.000 mm Ry 0.00 deg.
Z 5.000 mm Rz 0.00 deg.
W 0.000 kg
Xg 9999.000 mm Ix 0.000 kg.m2

Yg 0.000 mm Iy 0.000 kg.m2
Zg 0.000 mm Iz 0.000 kg.m2
Main Menu ShortCut

menu.
5 Select {CALIBRATION}. The TOOL CALIBRATION window appears.
TOOL CALIBRATION
TOOL NO. 00
POSITION: TC1
:S <STATUS>
L TC1
U TC2
R TC3
B TC4
T TC5
COMPLETE CANCEL
Main Menu ShortCut
10-39
6 Select the robot. Select the robot to calibrate. (When the robot has already been
selected or there is only one of robot, this operation should not be
performed.) Select “**” in the TOOL CALIBRATION window and
select the robot in the shown selection dialog box.
TOOL CALIBRATION
TOOL NO. 00
POSITION: TC1
:S <STATUS>
L TC1
U R1: ROBOT1 TC2
R R2: ROBOT2 TC3
B TC4
T TC5
COMPLETE CANCEL
Main Menu ShortCut
7 Select “POSITION.” The selection dialog box appears. Select the teaching point for
calibration.
TOOL CALIBRATION
TOOL NO. 00
POSITION: TC1
:S <STATUS>
L TC1
TC1
U TC2
TC2
R TC3
TC3
B TC4 TC4
T TC5 TC5
COMPLETE CANCEL
Main Menu ShortCut
8 Move the manipulator using

the axis key.
10-40
9 Press [MODIFY] and Taught position is registered.

[ENTER]. Repeat 7 to 9 operation to teach TC1 to TC5.
indicates that teaching is completed and indicates that it is
not completed.
TOOL CALIBRATION
TOOL NO. 00
POSITION: TC4
:S 0 <STATUS>
L 10 TC1
U 1000 TC2
R 53 TC3
B 200 TC4
T 8 TC5
COMPLETE CANCEL
Main Menu ShortCut
To check the taught positions, call up the required window among

TC1 to TC5 and press [FWD]. The manipulator moves to the set
position.
If there is a difference between the current position of the manipu-
lator and the shown position data, “TC ” next to “POSITION” in
the window flashes.
10 Select “COMPLETE.” Calibration data is registered in the tool file. Once calibration is
completed, the coordinate window appears.
TOOL CALIBRATION
TOOL NO. 00
X 0.000 mm Rx 0.00 deg.

Y 0.000 mm Ry 0.00 deg.
Z 300.000 mm Rz 0.00 deg.
W 0.000 kg
Xg 0.000 mm
Main Menu ShortCut
10-41
Clearing Calibration Data

Before the calibration of a new tool, clear the robot information and calibration data.
1 Select {DATA} under the main

menu.
Clear data?
Yes No
3 Select “YES.” All data is cleared.

TOOL CALIBRATION
TOOL NO. 00
POSITION: TC1
:S <STATUS>
L TC1
U TC2
R TC3
B TC4
T TC5
COMPLETE CANCEL
Main Menu ShortCut
Only tool coordinate data are calculated using tool calibraton. If tool angle data is required,
NOTE input the data number in the coordinate window.
Refer to " Registering Tool Angle" of "10.9.1 Registering Tool Files" for the operation.
10-42
Checking the TCP

After registering the tool file, check if the TCP is correctly registered by performing a TCP fixed
operation like the one shown below, in any coordinate system other than the joint.
Tool center
point
1 Press [COORD].
Select any coordinate system except “ JOINT” by pressing
[COORD].
TOOL
TOOL NO. 00
NAME TORCH MT-3501
X 0.000 mm Rx 0.00 deg.
Y 0.000 mm Ry 0.00 deg.
Z 30.000 mm Rz 0.00 deg.
2 Select desired tool number. Show the coordinate window of the desired tool by pressing the
GO BACK
page key or selecting it in the TOOL window.

PAGE
3 Move the R, B, or T axes using By pressing the axis keys for the R, B, and T axes, change the
the axis key. manipulator pose without changing the TCP position.
If this operation shows a large TCP error, adjust the tool data.
TCP
SUPPLE For details on TCP fixed operation, see "2.8.1 Motion about TCP."
-MENT
10-43
10.9.3 Automatic Measurement of the Tool Load and the

Center of Gravity
What is the Automatic Measurement of the Tool Load and the Cen-
ter of Gravity?
With this function, the user can register the load of tool and the position of the tools center of
gravity.
The tool load and the position of it’s center of gravity are measured and registered in a tool
file.
NOTE This function can be used where the manipulator is installed level on the ground.
For the conditions required for manipulator installation, refer to "10.11 ARM Control."
Measurement of the Tool Load and the Center of Gravity

To measure the tool load and the center of gravity, move the manipulator to its home position
(horizontal to the U-, B- and R-axes) and operate the U-, B- and T-axes.
U-axis
U+
R-axis
B-axis
B+ T-axis
T+
L-axis U- B- T- Home Position
(Horizontal to the U-,
B- and R-axes)
S-axis
Zero-degree Installation on the Ground
NOTE To measure the tool load or the center of gravity, remove the cables or wires connected to
the tool. Otherwise, the measurements may not be correct.
10-44

main menu.
2 Select {TOOL}. The TOOL window appears. The TOOL window is called up only
when the file extension function is valid. If the file extension func-
tion is invalid, the coordinate window appears.
Tool File Extension Function

SUPPLE
-MENT
Use the following parameter to set the Tool File
Extension Function.
S2C261: TOOL NO. SWITCHING
“0”: Tool switching prohibited.
“1”: Can change 24 kinds of tools number-
ing from 0 to 23.
TOOL
NO. NAME
00 TORCH MT-3501
01 TORCH MTY-3501
02 TORCH MT-3502
03
04
05
06
07
Main Menu ShortCut
TOOL
TOOL NO. 00
NAME: dhhh
X 1.556 mm Rx 0.00 deg.
Y 0.000 mm Ry 0.00 deg.
Z 5.000 mm Rz 0.00 deg.
W 0.000 kg
Xg 9999.000 mm Ix 0.000 kg.m2

Yg 0.000 mm Iy 0.000 kg.m2
Zg 0.000 mm Iz 0.000 kg.m2
Main Menu ShortCut
3 Select the desired tool num- Move the cursor to the desired number in the TOOL window and
ber. press [SELECT]. The coordinate window of the selected number
appears. In the coordinate window, change the desired number
GO BACK
by pressing the page key . To alternate between the TOOL

PAGE
and the coordinate window, select {DISPLAY} and {LIST}, or

{DISPLAY} and {COORDINATE VALUE} under the menu.
LIST
TOOL
TOOL NO. 00
NAME: dhhh
X 1 556 mm Rx 0 00 deg.
10-45

menu.
5 Select {W.GRAV.POS MEA- The window for the automatic measurement of the tool load and
SURE}. the center of gravity appears.
W.GRAV.POS MEASURE
TOOL NO. 00
R1:W . kg <STATUS>
HOME
Xg . mm U
Yg . mm B
Zg . mm T (1)
T (2)
REGISTER CANCEL
Main Menu ShortCut
6 GO BACK GO BACK
Press the page key . In a system with several manipulators, use the page key
PAGE PAGE
to change the group to be controlled.

7 Press [FWD]. Press [FWD] once, and the manipulator moves to the home posi-
tion (horizontal to the U-, B- and R-axes).
10-46
8 Press [FWD] again. Press [FWD] again, and measurement starts. Keep the button
pressed until measurement is completed. The manipulator
moves in the order listed below. Once measurement is com-
pleted, “ “ changes to “ “.
Measurement of the U-axis: U-axis home position + 4.5

degrees -4.5 degrees
Measurement of the B-axis: B-axis home position + 4.5
First measurement of the T-axis: T-axis home position + 4.5
Second measurement of the T-axis: T-axis home position +60
degrees + 4.5 degrees -4.5 degrees
• The speed during measurement automatically

NOTE changes to “Medium”.
• During measurement, “HOME” or “U” blinks on the
screen.
• During measurement, the [FWD] button has to be
kept pressed. If the button is released during mea-
surement or if it is released before “ “ changes
into “ “, measurement is aborted and the following
message appears.
“Stopped measurement”
Measurement starts again from the first home posi-
tion.
When all measurements are completed or when all the “ “ marks

have changed into “ “, the measurements appears on the
screen.
W.GRAV.POS MEASURE
TOOL 00
R1:W 4.513 kg <STATUS>

HOME
Xg 10.112 mm U
Yg 10.435 mm B
Zg 55.123 mm T (1)
T (2)
REGISTER CANCEL
Main Menu ShortCut
9 Select “REGISTER.” The measurements are registered in the tool file, and the coordi-
nate window are shown. Select “CANCEL” to call up the TOOL
window without registering the measurements in the tool file.
10-47
10.10 User Coordinates Setting
10.10User Coordinates Setting
10.10.1 User Coordinates

Definition of User Coordinates
User coordinates are defined by three points that have been taught to the manipulator through
axis operations. These three defining points are ORG, XX, and XY, as shown in the diagram
below. These three points of positional data are registered in a user coordinate file.
XX
XY
ORG
ORG is the home position, and XX is a point on the X-axis. XY is a point on the Y-axis side of
the user coordinates that has been taught, and the directions of Y- and Z-axes are determined
by point XY.
NOTE It is important that the two points ORG and XX be taught accurately.
User Coordinates File

Up to 24 kinds of user coordinates can be registered. Each coordinate has a user coordinate
No. and is called a user coordinate file.
User coordinate file 1

10-48
10.10.2 User Coordinates Setting

Selecting User Coordinates File

main menu.
2 Select {USER COORDI- The USER COORDINATE window appears.
NATE}.
USER COORDINATE
NO. SET NAME

01 WORK1
02 WORK2
03
04
05
06
07
08
Main Menu ShortCut
indicates that the user coordinates is completed to set and

indicates that it is not completed.
To check the position of the user coodinates select {DISPLAY}
{COORDINATE DATA}. The following window appears.
USER COORDINATE
NO. SET NAME

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
Main Menu ShortCut
3 Select desired user coodinate Select the desired user coordinate number for setting in the
number. USER COORDINATE window. The following window appears.
USER COORDINATE
TOOL NO. 03
SET POS.: ORG
:S <STATUS>
L : ORG
U : XX
R : XY
B
T
REGISTER CANCEL
Main Menu ShortCut
10-49
Teaching User Coordinates

1 Select the robot. Select the robot for teaching user coordinates. (When the robot
has already been selected or there is only one robot, this opera-
tion should not be performed.) Select “**” in the following window
and select the robot in the shown selection dialog box. The robot
is registered.
USER COORDINATE
TOOL NO. 03
SET POS.: ORG
:S <STATUS>
L : ORG
U : XX
R R1: ROBOT1
: XY
R2: ROBOT2
B
T
REGISTER CANCEL
Main Menu ShortCut
2 Select “SET POS.” The selection dialog box appears. Select the teaching point.
USER COORDINATE
TOOL NO. 03
SET POS.: ORG
:S <STATUS>
ORG
L : ORG XX
U : XX XY
R : XY
B
T
REGISTER CANCEL
Main Menu ShortCut
3 Move the manipulator using

the axis key.
10-50
4 Press [MODIFY] and Taught position is registered.

[ENTER]. Repeat 2 to 4 operation to teach ORG, XX and XY.
indicates that teaching is completed and indicates that it is
not completed.
USER COORDINATE
USER COORDINATE NO. 03
SET POS.: XY
:S 0 <STATUS>
L 10 : ORG
U 100 : XX
R 53 : XY
B 200
T 8
REGISTER CANCEL
Main Menu ShortCut
To check the taught positions, call up the required window among

ORG to XY and press [FWD]. The manipulator moves to the set
position.
If there is a difference between the current position of the manipu-
lator and the shown position data, “ORG”, “XX”,or “XY” flashes.
5 Select “COMPLETE.” User coordinates are registered in the file. Once the user coordi-
nate setting is completed, the following window appears.
TOOL
NO. SET NAME

01 WORK1
02 WORK2
03
04 WORK3
05
06
07
08
Main Menu ShortCut
10-51
Clearing User Coordinates

1 Select {DATA} under the main

menu.
Clear data?
Yes No
3 Select “YES.” All data is cleared.

USER COORDINATE
TOOL NO. 03
SET POS.: ORG
:S <STATUS>
L : ORG
U : XX
R : XY
B
T
REGISTER CANCEL
Main Menu ShortCut
10-52
10.11 ARM Control
10.11ARM Control
10.11.1 ARM Control

In NX100, the operation performance of the robot which satisfies various demands on the
production site such as the improvement of the path accuracy and the cycle time shortening is
achieved by adopting the ARM(Advanced Robot Motion) control which Yaskawa originally
developed.
The moment of inertia and the gravity moment etc. of each axis are calculated in the ARM
control, and NX100 controls robot motion according to it. It is necessary to set the Robot
setup condition and the tool load information to request these accurately.
The robot setup condition is robot installation angle relative to ground and the weight and a
center of gravity position of the load installed at each part of robot, etc.
The tool load information is weight, a center of gravity position, and moment of inertia at the
center of gravity, of the tool installed at the flange.
It is necessary to set these information correctly to do a better operation control by the ARM
control.
10.11.2 ARM CONTROL Window

In ARM CONTROL window, the robot setup condition etc. are set.
CAUTION
• Set the robot setup condition exactly.
Set the robot setup condition very noting of mistake the unit, the value or the positive and
negative of number.
An appropriate operation control cannot be done, decrease the speed reducer longevity,
or occur the alarm when these are not correctly set.
• Confirm the operation path of robot of each job when you change set-
ting.
Set the robot setup condition when you basically set up the robot.
Confirm the operation path of robot of each job afterwards when you change the setting
unavoidably.
Injury or damage to machinery may result by collision between tool and positioner
because the operation path might be changed slightly when the setting about the ARM
control is changed.
10-53
10.11 ARM Control
Robot Setup Condition

It is necessary to set the following robot setup condition to execute the ARM control appropri-
ately.
• Robot installation angle
• S-head payload
• U-arm payload
Robot installation angle

The angle of the manipulator installed relative to ground is set in ANGLE REL. TO GROUND
to calculate the gravity moment which loads to each axis of the manipulator.
The robot installation angle sets how much X axis of the robot coordinates has inclined with
the earth around Y axis of the robot coordinates. The direction of + in the U axis operation
from the home position posture of the manipulator becomes direction of + of the robot installa-
tion angle. Therefore, the robot installation angle for a vertical downward wall mount specifi-
cation becomes -90 degrees.
Robot
installation +
Angle
<Example>
0 degrees -90 degrees +90 degrees 180 degrees
Because the gravity moment which loads to each axis can't be calculated correctly when this
value is not correctly set, it can not be possible to control the manipulator appropriately. Set
the value correctly. Especially, note the direction “+” or “-”.
Only rotation angle around Y axis of the robot coordinates can be set in the robot installa-
NOTE tion angle.
Contact YASKAWA representative when robots is installed to incline Y axis of the robot
coordinates relative to ground.
10-54
10.11 ARM Control
S-head payload
Set the weight and the center of gravity position roughly when the equipment such as trans-
former is installed at the S-head.
It is not necessary to set these value when there is no installed load at the S-head.
WEIGHT (Unit:kg)
The weight of the installed load is set.
Set a little large value though it does not care by a rough value. (Rase to a unit in each 0.5 to
1kg)
X (From S-Axis), Y (From S-Axis) (unit: mm)
The center of gravity position of the installed load is set by the distance in the direction of X
and the direction of Y from S axis center here. It does not care by a rough value.
The direction of X and Y applies to the robot coordinates. The value is set by a negative num-
ber when the position is in “-” direction.
-X
S axis center
-Y +Y
(X position, Y position)
+X
Load at S-head (Top View)
U-arm payload
Set the weight and the center of gravity position roughly when the equipment such as the wire
supplying motors is installed on U arm.
A standard value is set when shipping from the factory.
Set the weight in “0” if there is no installing equipment on U arm.
WEIGHT (Unit:kg)
The weight of the installing load is set here.
Set a little large value though it does not care by a rough value. (Rase to a unit in each 0.5 to
1kg)
X (From U-Axis), HEIGHT (From U-Axis) (unit: mm)
The center of gravity position of the installing load is set here. It does not care by a rough
value.
X (From U-Axis) is horizontal distance from U axis rotation center to the center of gravity posi-
tion of the load. Set negative number when there is mass side in the back from U axis rotation
center.
HEIGHT (From U-Axis) is height of the vertical direction from U axis rotation center to the cen-
ter of gravity position of the load.
10-55
10.11 ARM Control
X (From U-Axis)
(-) (+)
U axis
rotation
center Center of Gravity
Position
EIGHT
From U-Axis)
Load on U arm : Center of gravity position (Side View )
10-56
10.11 ARM Control
Setting
NOTE The ARM CONTROL window is shown only when the security mode is set as management
mode.

main menu.
2 Select {ARM CONTROL}. The ARM CONTROL window appears.
ARM CONTROL
CONTROL GROUP: ROBOT1
<ROBOT SETUP CONDITION>
ANGLE REL. TO GROUND 0 deg.
S-HEAD PAYLOAD
WEIGHT 0.000 kg
X (FROM S-AXIS) 0 mm
Y (FROM S-AXIS) 0 mm
U-ARM PAYLOAD
WEIGHT 9.000 kg
X (FROM U-AXIS) 12 mm
HEIGHT (FROM U-AXIS) 198 mm
Main Menu ShortCut
3 GO BACK Select the desired control group when there are two or more
Press the page key . group axes.
PAGE
4 Select the desired item.

5 Input the value and press
[ENTER].
10-57
10.11 ARM Control
10.11.3 Tool Load Information Setting
CAUTION
• Set the tool load information correctly.
The speed reducer longevity might decrease or the alarm might occur when the tool load
information is not set correctly.
• Confirm the operation path of robot of each job which uses the tool file
after the tool load information is changed.
Set the tool load information basically before teaching the job after the tool is installed.
Confirm the operation path of each job which uses the tool file when the tool load informa-
tion is changed after teaching, unavoidably.
Injury or damage to machinery may result by collision between tool and positioner
because the operation path might be changed slightly when the tool load information is
changed.
Tool Load Information

Tool load information includes weight, a center of gravity position, and moment of inertia at
the center of gravity of the tool installed at the flange. These are registered in the tool file.
XF' Moment of inertia around the Center of Gravity

Ix, Iy, Iz
XF
Ix
YF'
Iy
YF
ZF' Iz
Weight:W
* Flange Coodinates
XF: It is a direction right above when T axis
ZF is 0 pulse position and the flange surface
of the manipulator turned to the front.
Center of Gravity Position YF: Y axis led by XF,ZF
( Xg, Yg, Zg ) ZF: Perpendicular direction from flange surface
How to Calculate Tool Load Information

Weight : W (Unit:kg)
The total weight of the installing tool is set.
Set a little large value though it does not care by a rough value. Rase to a unit in each 0.5 to
1kg for small or middle robot and rase to a unit in each 1 to 5kg for large robot.
10-58
10.11 ARM Control
Center of gravity position : xg, yg, zg (Unit : mm)

The center of gravity position of the installed tool is set as the position in the flange coordi-
nates.
It does not care by setting a rough value because it is usually difficult to get a strict center of
gravity position. Presume and set a center of gravity position roughly from outline of the tool.
Set the value when the center of gravity position of the installed tool is clear from specifica-
tions etc.
moment of inertia at the center of gravity: lx, ly, lz (Unit : kg m2)

It is an moment of inertia of the tool at the center of gravity position.
The value is calculated around the each axis of the coordinates which is in parallel to the
flange coordinates and which home position is the center of gravity position of the tool.
Set a little large value though it does not care by a rough value.
This setting is used to calculate the moment of inertia which loads to each axis of the manipu-
lator. However, the moment of inertia at the center of gravity need not usually set because
this data is small enough to the moment of inertia calculated from weight and the center of
gravity position.
Only when the moment of inertia of the tool is large (The size of the tool is, as a standard, in
case of about twice or more the distance from the flange to the center of gravity position), this
setting is needed.
The size of the tool is not too big. The size of the tool is big enough.
Setting the moment of inertia at center Setting the moment of inertia at center
of gravity is not necessary. of gravity is necessary.
Rough value of the moment of inertia at the center of gravity can be calculated by followings
methods.
- Method to approximate the entire tool in hexahedron or cylinder.
- Method to calculate from each weight and center of gravity position of plural mass.
Refer to the following setting examples for details.
10-59
10.11 ARM Control
<Example1>
In the example of sealing gun of the figure below, it is assumed that there is center of gravity
in the position where inclined to head from the center a little , and sets the center of gravity
position on the flange coordinates.
There is no problem even if the moment of inertia at the center of gravity is not set because
the size of the gun is not too large.
<Setting>
•W : 7.000 kg
• Xg : 100.000 mm
• Yg : 0.000 mm
• Zg : 70.000 mm
YF
• Ix : 0.000 kg m2
• Iy : 0.000 kg m2
• Iz : 0.000 kg m2
Center of Gravity Position

= (100, 0, 70)
XF
70
Total Weight 100

Approx. 6.3 [kg]
7.00 [kg]
ZF
• The own moment of inertia calculation for hexahedron and cylinder

SUPPLE
-MENT The own moment of inertia of hexahedron and cylinder can be calculated by the next
expression when the center of gravity is at the center.
Refer to the expression when the calculation of the moment of inertia at the center of grav-
ity.
Z Z
Ly
r
Lx
Iz Iz
Iy Lz
Ix Y H Y
Ix Iy
X
X Weight:W Weight: W
Ly2 + Lz2 3 r 2 + H2
Ix = *W Ix = Iy = *W
12 12
r2
Lx2 + Lz2 Iz = *W
Iy = *W 2
12
Lx2 + Ly2 * Unit of Weight : [kg]

Iz = *W * Unit of Length : [m]
12
* Unit of Ix, Iy, Iz : [kg.m2]
10-60
10.11 ARM Control
<Example 2>
It is necessary to set the moment of inertia at the center of gravity when the entire size of the
tool and workpiece is large enough compareing with the distance from the flange to the center
of gravity position.
Calculate the moment of inertia at the center of gravity roughly from the expression (Refer to
the above-mentioned supplement: "The own moment of inertia calculation for hexahedron and
cylinder"), by approximating the entire tool in the shape of the hexahedron or the cylinder.
If the weight of held workpiece is greatly different like in the handling usage etc, it is more
effective to set tool load information on each workpiece and to switch the tool on each step
according to the held workpiece. Set the tool load information in the state to hold the heaviest
workpiece when the tool is not switched.
0 YF
50
Weight of tool :
Approx. 55kg
ZF
250
XF
Weight of Workpiece :
Approx. 40kg
400
1000
Weight : W = 55 + 40 = 95
= approx. 100[kg]
Center of gravity : Position at flange right under 250mm almost
(Xg, Yg, Zg) = (0,0,250)
Moment of inertia at the center of gravity :
The hexahedron of 0.500 x 0.400 x 1.000[m] which encloses the entire
tool + workpiece is assumed.
By the expression to calculate the own moment of inertia of hexahedron,
Ix = ( Ly2 + Lz2 / 12) * W
= ( (0.4002 + 1.0002) / 12 ) * 100 = 9.667 = approx. 10.000
Iy = ( Lx2 + Lz2 / 12) * W = ( (0.5002 + 0.4002) / 12 ) * 100 = 3.417 = approx. 3.500
Iz = ( Lx2 + Ly2 / 12) * W = ( (0.5002 + 1.0002) / 12 ) * 100 = 10.417 = approx. 10.500
<Setting>
•W : 100.000 kg
• Xg : 0.000 mm
• Yg : 0.000 mm
• Zg : 250.000 mm
• Ix : 10.000 kg.m2
• Iy : 3.500 kg.m2
• Iz : 10.500 kg.m2
10-61
10.11 ARM Control
• How to calculate "Center of gravity position" and "moment of inertia at center of gravity"
SUPPLE
-MENT for plural mass
The center of gravity position and the moment of inertia at the center of gravity of the entire
tool can be calculated by the weight and the center of gravity position of each mass when
the tool can be thought that the tool consists of two or more big mass like the twin gun sys-
tem etc.
1. Divide the tool into some parts as the weight and the center of gravity posi-
tion can be roughly presumed. It is not necessary to divide in detail. The
tool is approximated in construction of rough parts.
2. Calculate the weight and the center of gravity position of the each parts on
flange coordinates. It does not care by a rough value. Calculate the own
moments of inertia of the big parts. (If parts are small, it is not necessary to
calculate the own moments of inertia. Refer to above-mentioned supple-
ment : "The own moment of inertia calculation for hexahedron and cylinder"
for how to calculate the own moment of inertia.)
wi : Weight of the i-th parts [kg]
(xi, yi, zi) : Center of gravity position of the i-th parts (On flange coor-
dinates)[mm]
Icxi, Icyi, Iczi : Own moments of inertia of the i-th parts [kg*m2]
3. The center of gravity position of the entire tool is calculated by the next
expression.
xg = {w1 * x1 + w2 * x2 + .... + wi * xi} / (w1 + w2 + .... + wi)
yg = {w1 * y1 + w2 * y2 + .... + wi * yi} / (w1 + w2 + .... + wi)
zg = {w1 * z1 + w2 * z2 + .... + wi * zi} / (w1 + w2 + .... + wi)
4. The moment of inertia at the center of gravity position of the entire tool is
calculated by the next expression.
Ix = { w1 * ((y1 - yg)2 + (z1 - zg)2) * 10-6 + Icx1}
+ { w2 * ((y2 - yg)2 + (z2 - zg)2) * 10-6 + Icx2}
.....................
+ { wi * ((yi - yg)2 + (zi - zg)2) * 10-6 + Icxi}
Iy = { w1 * ((x1 - xg)2 + (z1 - zg)2) * 10-6 + Icy1}

+ { w2 * ((x2 - xg)2 + (z2 - zg)2) * 10-6 + Icy2}
.....................
+ { wi * ((xi - xg)2 + (zi - zg)2) * 10-6 + Icyi}
Iz = { w1 * ((x1 - xg)2 + (y1 - yg)2) * 10-6 + Icz1}
+ { w2 * ((x2 - xg)2 + (y2 - yg)2) * 10-6 + Icz2}
.....................
+ { wi * ((xi - xg)2 + (yi - yg)2) * 10-6 + Iczi}
10-62
10.11 ARM Control
<Example 3>
When there is two or more big mass like the twin gun system like the figure below,
1. Set the center of gravity position when the center of gravity position of the entire tool is
roughly understood, and set the moment of inertia at the center of gravity calculated
by approximating the entire tool in the shape of hexahedron or cylinder. (It is enough in
this setting usually)
2. Or, when weight in each mass and the center of gravity position are understood, the
center of gravity position and the moment of inertia at the center of gravity of the entire
tool can be calculated. (Refer to above-mentioned supplement: "How to calculate
"Center of gravity position" and "moment of inertia at the center of gravity" for plural
mass")
How by the method of 2 to calculate the value is shown here.
(Top View)
Center of Flange
YF
YF
100
50 150
40
X F
Gun 1
70
XF Gun 2
(Gun 1) (Gun 2)
Gun 1
Weight: w1 = 3 kg Weight: w2 = 6 kg
ZF Center of Gravity: Center of Gravity:
x1 = 100 mm x2 = 100 mm
y1 = 50 mm y2 = -150 mm
Gun 2 z1 = 40 mm z2 = 70 mm
Weight : W = w1 + w2
= 3 + 6 = 9 = approx. 10[kg]
Center of gravity Xg = (w1 * x1 + w2 * x2) / (w1 + w2)
= (3 * 100 + 6 * 100) / (3+6) = 100.0 [mm]
Yg = (3 * 50 + 6 * (-150)) / (3+6) = -83.333 [mm]
Zg = (3 * 40 + 6 * 70) / (3+6) = 60.0 [mm]
The moment of inertia at the center of gravity position :
Ix = { w1 * ((y1 - Yg)2 + (z1 - Zg)2) * 10-6 + Icx1}
+ { w2 * ((y2 - Yg)2 + (z2 - Zg)2) * 10-6 + Icx2}
= 3 * ((50 - (-83))2 + (40 - 60)2) * 10-6
+ 6 * (((-150) - (-83))2 + (70 - 60)2) * 10-6
= 0.082 = approx. 0.100
Iy = 3 * ((100 - 100)2 + (40 - 60)2) * 10-6
+ 6 * ((100 - 100)2 + (70 - 60)2) * 10-6
= 0.002 = approx. 0.010
Iz = 3 * ((100 - 100)2 + (50 - (-83))2) * 10-6
+ 6 * ((100 - 100)2 + ((-150) - (-83))2) * 10-6
= 0.080 = approx. 0.100
10-63
10.11 ARM Control
* Here, the own moment of inertia (Icxi,Icyi,Iczi) of the gun is disregarded, because each gun
are smaller enough than the entire tool.
<Setting>
•W : 10.000 kg
• Xg : 100.000 mm
• Yg : -83.333 mm
• Zg : 60.000 mm
• Ix : 0.100 kg.m2
• Iy : 0.010 kg.m2
• Iz : 0.100 kg.m2
10-64
10.11 ARM Control
Tool load Information registering

Tool load Information is registered in the tool file.

main menu.
2 Select {TOOL}. The TOOL window appears. Only when the file expansion func-
tion is valid, the TOOL window appears. When the file expansion
function is invalid, the coordinate window appears.
TOOL
TOOL NO. : 00
NO. NAME
00 TORCH MT-3501
01 TORCH MTY-3501
02
03
04
05
06
07
Main Menu ShortCut
TOOL
TOOL NO. 00
NAME: dhhh
X 1.556 mm Rx 0.00 deg.
Y 0.000 mm Ry 0.00 deg.
Z 5.000 mm Rz 0.00 deg.
W 0.000 kg
Xg 9999.000 mm Ix 0.000 kg.m2

Yg 0.000 mm Iy 0.000 kg.m2
Zg 0.000 mm Iz 0.000 kg.m2
Main Menu ShortCut
3 Select the desired tool num- Move the cursor to the number of the desired tool, and press
ber. [SELECT] in the TOOL window. The coordinate window of the
selected number appears. Select the desired number with page
GO BACK
key in the coordinate window.

PAGE
Select { DISPLAY } { LIST } or { DISPLAY } {COORDINATE

DATA } under the menu in order to switch between the TOOL win-
dow and the coordinate window.
LIST
TOOL
TOOL NO. 00
NAME: dhhh
X d
10-65
10.11 ARM Control
4 Select the desired item to reg- The window can be scrolled by the cursor. The menu enters the
ister and input the value. state of a numeric input if the cursor is on the desired item to reg-
ister and the [SELECT] is pressed.
TOOL
TOOL NO. 00
Weight R1:W 0.000 kg
Xg 0.000 mm
Center of Yg 0.000 mm
Gravity Position
Zg 0.000 mm
0.000
Moment of Inertia Ix 0.000 kg.m2

at Center of Gravity Iy 0.000 kg.m2
Main Menu ShortCut
5 Press [ENTER]. The input value is registered. The servo power is automatically
turned off when editing the value during the servo power turned
on, and the message "Servo off by changing data " is shown for
three seconds.
• When the data setting is not done

NOTE It is considered that data is not set correctly in tool load information in the following cases.
• When the weight (W) is "0".
• When the center of gravity position (Xg, Yg, Zg) are all “0”.
In these cases, the manipulator is controlled by using the standard parameter value (Differ
in each robot model) which were set when shipping.
Standard Value.....Weight : W = Payload
Center of gravity position :
(Xg, Yg, Zg) = (0, 0, Allowed value of B axis for payload)
In this case, when an actual tool load is not too heavy, the manipulator can’t be performed
enough.
Moreover, when the tool which an actual tool center of gravity position greatly offsets in X
direction or Y direction is installed the generated moment by the tool cannot be compen-
sated.
• Switch of the tool file

In case that two or more tool files are used, Information on an effective tool file is referred
for tool load information used by the ARM control at that time in according to switch tool
file.
Set the same value of tool load information in each tool file when the tool file is switched to
change only TCP (when neither the weight nor the center of gravity position of the entire
tool installed in the flange is changed).
Moreover, set tool load information to the corresponding tool file respectively when total
weight and the center of gravity position etc. of the tool is changed (when the system which
exchange the tool by automatic tool changer).
10-66
10.12 Shock Detection Function
10.12Shock Detection Function
10.12.1 Shock Detection Function

The shock detection function is a function to decrease damage because of the collision by
instantaneously detecting the shock and stopping the manipulator without any external sensor
when the tool or the manipulator collide with peripheral device.
When the shock is detected either in teach mode and in play mode, the manipulator is
stopped instantaneously.
WARNING
• This function cannot do away with the damage to peripheral device
completely. Moreover, this function does not guarantee safety to the
person. Prepare the safety measures such as the safeguarding etc.
Refer to the NX100 INSTRUCTIONS for the safety measures in detail.
Injury or damage to machinery may result by contact with the manipulator.
10.12.2 Shock Detection Function Setting

The shock detection function is set not to mis-detect the shock even if operating by the ratings
load with the maximum speed when shipping from the factory. If tool load information is set
correctly, the detection sensitivity can be improved. Moreover, it is possible to set the lower
sensitivity of detection only for a specific section where the contact work etc. The sensitivity of
detection is set by setting the detection level.
Shock Detection Level Setting

The shock detection level is set in the shock detection level set file.
The shock detection level set file are nine condition files as following figure.
Condition number 1 to 7 are used when the detection level is changed in a specific section in
play mode.
Condition number 8 is a file used as standard in play mode. This function is operated by the
detection level set in this file when playback operation.
Condition number 9 is a file for teach mode. The shock is detected by the detection level set in
this file when the manipulator is operated in teach mode.
The detection level is changed by the SHCKSET instruction. After this instruction is exe-
cuted, the shock will be detected by the detection level of the specified file when the condition
number is specified at SHCKSET instruction. The detection level is returned to standard level
when the SHCKRST instruction is executed.
10-67
Files for specific section

in play mode
(condition number 1 to 7)
Standard file
for play mode
(condition
number 1 to 8)
Shock Detection
Level File
Condition number 1 File for teach mode

(condition number 9)
Condition number 7
Condition number 8
Condition number 9
SUPPLE
The detection level of condition number 8 which is a standard file in play mode is adopted
-MENT in play mode excluding the range between SHCKSET and SHCKRST in the job.
Method of Shock Detection Level File Setting


main menu.
2 Select {SHOCK SENS The SHOCK DETECTION LVL window appears.
LEVEL}. DATA EDIT DISPLAY UTILITY
SHOCK DETECTION LVL
c DETECTION MODE PLAY

d COND. NO. 8 (STANDARD)
FUNC. MAX. DISTURBANCE DETECTION LVL
R1 VALID 80 100
R2 VALID 80 100
S1 VALID 80 100
S2 VALID 80 100
S3 VALID 80 100
e g
f
Main Menu ShortCut
Detection Mode
The shock detection mode is indicated.
Condition Number (1 to 9)
1 to 7 : For changing detection level in play mode
8 : For standard detection level in play mode
9 : For detection level in teach mode
Do either of the following operations to display the desired condi-

tion number. When the desired condition number is input with a
Numeric key and the [ENTER] is pressed after the cursor is
moved on the condition number and [SELECT] is pressed, the file
of the selected condition number is shown.
GO BACK
When page key is pressed, the condition number file is

PAGE
changed.
10-68
2 (cont’d) Function Select

VALID/INVALID of the shock detection function is specified here.
The shock detection function is specified by each manipulator or
each station axes which has this function.
The cursor is moved to the robot or the station axis which is
desired to change the function "VALID" or "INVALID" and
[SELECT] is pressed. "VALID" and "INVALID" is changed alter-
nately whenever [SELECT] is pressed. The changing of "VALID"
or "INVALID" is effective for all the condition number files.
Max. Disturbance Force

The maximum disturbance force to the manipulator when the
manipulator is moved in paly back operation or axis operation is
shown here.
Refer to this value when the detection level in is input.
The maximum disturbance force can be cleared by setting in
menu {DATA} {CLEAR MAX VALUE }.
Detection Lebel (Level range : 1 to 500)

The shock detection level is specified here. Bigger value than the
maximum disturbance force should be set.
The value (The detection level:100) not mis-detected the shock
even if robot is operated at the maximum speed is set when ship-
ping from the factory.
To change "Detection level", move the cursor to the robot or the
station axis which is desired to change to appear the numeric
input status and press [SELECT] moreover input the value by a
Numeric key and press [ENTER]. Set the level to small value to
raise the detection sensitivity or set the level to large value to
lower sensitivity.
3 Select the desired condition
number.
4 Select the desired item and
set it.
Set the level 20% or more greatly than the maximum disturbance force for the mis-detec-
NOTE tion prevention when the manipulator works.
An instaneously stopping the manipulator by the mis-detection may become a factor to
damage the speed reducer or the tool.
<Example>
When the maximum disturbance force is 80, set the detection level 96 or more.
NOTE "Detection level” can be changed only when the security mode is set as managememt
mode.
10-69
Tool load Information Setting

To be the more accurate shock detection, the tool load information is set in the tool file.
SUPPLE
Refer to " 10.11.3 Tool Load Information Setting " for details concerning the tool load infor-
-MENT mation setting.
Method of the Tool load Information Setting


main menu.
2 Select {TOOL}. The TOOL window appears. Only when the file expansion func-
tion is valid, the TOOL window appears. When the file expansion
function is invalid, the coordinate window appears.
TOOL
NO. NAME
00 TORCH MT-3501
01 TORCH MTY-3501
02 TORCH MT-3502
03
04
05
06
07
Main Menu ShortCut
TOOL
TOOL NO. 00
NAME: dhhh
X 1.556 mm Rx 0.00 deg.
Y 0.000 mm Ry 0.00 deg.
Z 5.000 mm Rz 0.00 deg.
W 0.000 kg
Xg 9999.000 mm Ix 0.000 kg.m2

Yg 0.000 mm Iy 0.000 kg.m2
Zg 0.000 mm Iz 0.000 kg.m2
Main Menu ShortCut
10-70
3 Select the desired tool num- Move the cursor to the number of the desired tool and press
ber. [ENTER] in the TOOL window. The coordinate window of the
selected number is shown. Select the desired number with page
GO BACK
key in the coordinate window.

PAGE
Select { DISPLAY } { LIST } or { DISPLAY } {COORDINATE

DATA } under the menu in order to switch between the TOOL and
the coordinate window. The coordinate window is scrolled by the
cursor.
TOOL
TOOL NO. 00
c R1:W 0.000 kg
Xg 0.000 mm
d Yg 0.000 mm
Zg 0.000 mm
0.000
e Ix 0.000 kg.m2
Iy 0.000 kg.m2
Main Menu ShortCut
Weight
This is total weight of the installed tool.
Input weight by a Numeric key and press [ENTER] after the
numeric input status is appeared by moving the cursole and
pressing [SELECT].
Center of Gravity Position

This is center of gravity position of the installed tool. The value
are specified by the coordinates value on each axis of the flange
coordinates. Input the center of gravity position by a Numeric key
and press [ENTER] after the numeric input status is appeared by
moving the cursole and pressing [SELECT].
Moment of inertia at the Center of Gravity

This is Moment of inertia of the tool at the Center of Gravity in .
The value are specified around each axis of the coordinates
which is in parallel to the flange coordinates and which home
position is the center of gravity position.
Input the moment of inertia by a Numeric key and press [ENTER]
after the numeric input status is appeared by moving the cursole
and pressing [SELECT].
4 Select the desired item and
set it.
10-71
Instruction of Shock Detection Function

SHCKSET instruction
The SHCKSET instruction changes the shock detection level to the value set in the shock
detection level file during play back operation.
The additional items of the SHCKSET instruction are as follows.
SHCKSET R1 SSL#(1)
Robot / Station Setting

The robot or the station axis which is desired to change the shock detection level is speci-
fied. If nothing is specified, the shock detection level of the control group of the job to which
this instruction is registered is changed.
However, if the job is coordinated job, the shock detection level of the slave axis group is
changed.
Shock Detection Level File (1 to 7)

The shock detection level file number is specified here. The shock detection level value
when playback operation is set in the file. The shock detection level is changed by the con-
dition of the file set here.
SHCKRST instruction
The shock detection level changed by the SHCKSET instruction is reset and returned to the
detection level of the standard (value set in condition number 8) by the SHCKRST instruction.
The additional item of the SHCKRST instruction is as follows.
SHCKRST R1
Robot / Station Setting

The robot or the station axis which is desired to reset the shock detection level is specified
here. If nothing is specified, the shock detection level of the control group of the job to
which this instruction is registered is changed.
However, if the job is coordinated job, the shock detection level of the slave axis group is
changed.
10-72
Instruction Registration
The instruction is registered when the cursor is in the address area in the JOB CONTENT win-
dow in teach mode.

menu.
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: WORK A STEP NO.: 0000
CONTROL GROUP TOOL: 00
0000 NOP
0001 SET B000 0
0002 SET M001 1
0003 MOVJ VJ=80.00
Address 0004 MOVJ VJ=80.00
Instruction
Area 0005 DOUT OGH#(13) B0 02
0007 MOVL V=880.0
0008 MOVL V=880.0
0009 MOVL V=880.0
0010 DOUT OGH#(14) B0 03
0011 DOUT OT#(5) ON
0012 DOUT OT#(6) ON
=> MOVJ VJ=80.00
Main Menu ShortCut
2 Select {JOB}.
3 Move the cursole in the
address area.
SHCKSET
1 Move the cursole to the line

just before the location where
SHCKSET instruction is
desired to register.
2 Press [INFORM LIST]. The inform list dialog box appears.
ARITH
SHIFT
SHCKSET OTHER
SHCKRST SAME
PRIOR
3 Select SHCKSET instruction. The SHCKSET instruction appears in the input buffer line.
=> SHCKSET SSL#(1)
10-73
4 Change the value of additianal < When registering as it is >

item and numerical data. Operate 5 procedure when the instruction the input buffer line as
it is should be registered.
< When adding or changing the additional item >

• When the shock detection level file is changed, move the cursor
to the shock detection level file number, and increase or
decrese the file number by pressing about [SHIFT] and the cur-
sor key simultaneously.
=> SHCKSET SSL#(1)
When the value is input with the Numeric key, press [SELECT] to
display the input buffer line.
Shock_sens_file no. =
SHCKSET SSL#( )
And press [ENTER] to change the number in the input buffer line.
• When robot/station specification is added, move the cursor to

the instruction in the input buffer line and press [SELECT] to
show the DETAIL window.
DETAIL
SHCKSET
ROBOT/STATION : UNUSED
S-DETECT. FILE : SSL#( ) 1
=> SHCKSET SSL#(1)
Main Menu ShortCut
Move the cursor to "UNUSED" of "ROBOT/STATION", and press

[SELECT]. The selection dialog box appears. Move the cursor to
added robot or station and press [SELECT].
DETAIL
SHCKSET
S-DETECT. FILE : R1:ROBOT1
SSL#( ) 1
R2:ROBOT2
USED
=> SHCKSET SSL#(1)
Main Menu ShortCut
When the addition of robot/station ends, press [ENTER]. The

DETAIL window shuts and the JOB CONTENT window appears.
5 Press [INSERT] and [ENTER]. The instruction shown in the input buffer line is registered.
10-74
SHCKRST
1 Move the cursole to the line

just before the location where
SHCKRST instruction is
desired to register.
2 Press [INFORM LIST]. The inform list dialog box appears.
ARITH
SHIFT
SHCKSET OTHER
SHCKRST SAME
PRIOR
3 Select SHCKRST instruction. The SHCKRST instruction appears in the input buffer line.
=> SHCKRST
4 Change the value of additianal < When registering as it is >

item. Operate 5 procedure when the instruction the input buffer line as
it is should be registered.
< When adding or changing the additional item >

When robot/station specification is added, move the cursor to the
instruction in the input buffer line and press [SELECT] to show the
DETAIL window.
DETAIL
SHCKRST
=> SHCKRST
Main Menu ShortCut
Move the cursor to "UNUSED" of "ROBOT/STATION", and press

[SELECT]. The selection dialog box appears. Move the cursor to
added robot or station and press [SELECT].
10-75
4 (cont’d)
DETAIL
SHCKRST
R1:ROBOT1
R2:ROBOT2
UNUSED
=> SHCKRST
Main Menu ShortCut
When the addition of the robot/the station ends, press [ENTER].

The DETAIL window shuts and the JOB CONTENT window
appears.
5 Press [INSERT] and [ENTER]. The instruction shown in the input buffer line is registered.
10-76
Reset Shock detected

When the tool and the manipulator are collided with peripheral device and it is detected by the
shock detection function, the manipulator is stopped in the instantaneously with alarm output.
At this time, the shock detection alarm is shown.
ALARM
ALARM 4315 [ S L U R B T ]
COLLISION DETECT
OCCUR TIMES : 1
RESET
Main Menu ShortCut
The shock detection alarm in teach mode and play mode can be reset by the following opera-
tion.
1 Press [SELECT]. The alarm is reset when "RESET" is selected on the alarm dis-
play, and the shock detection status is released.
2 Operation after resetting the In teach mode, the JOG operation of the manipulator becomes
detection status. possible again after resetting. In play mode, confirm the damage
after moving the manipulator to the safety position once with
teach mode though the playback operation is possible after
resetting.
When manipulator was stopped instantaneously while having contact with the object and
NOTE the detection alarm is tried to reset on the alarm window, the situation in which the alarm
cannot be reset might be occured because the collision might be detected again after
resetting.
In this case, set the collision detection function "INVALID" with the shock detection level
file or enlarge the detection level in teach mode and move the manipulator to safety posi-
tion.
10-77
10.13 Instruction Level Setting
10.13Instruction Level Setting
10.13.1 Setting Contents

Instruction Set
There are three instruction sets that can be used when registering the instructions for the
robot programming language (INFORM III) : the subset instruction set, the standard instruc-
tion set, and the expanded instruction set.
Subset Instruction Set

The instructions displayed in the instruction list are limited to just those that are most fre-
quently used, reducing the number of instructions that can be registered. Since few instruc-
tions are shown, selection and input are simple.
Standard Instruction Set / Expanded Instruction Set

All the INFORM III instructions can be used. The number of additional items to be used in
each instruction differ in the standard instruction set and expansion instruction set.
In the standard instruction set, the following functions cannot be used. However, operation
becomes easier because the number of data items decreases when registering an instruction.
• Use of local variables and arrangement variable

• Use of variables for additional items (Example: MOVJ VJ = I000)
When instructions are executed, for example during playback, all the instructions can be exe-
cuted regardless of the instruction set used.
Expanded instruction set
Standard instruction set
Subset instruction set
Frequency used
All instructions
instructions
Use of local variables and arrangement variables

Use of variables for additional items
Job calls with arguments
Instruction set
10-78
Learning Function
When an instruction is entered from the instruction list, the additional items that were entered
last time are also shown. This function can simplify instruction input.
To register the same additional items as those in the former operation, register them without
changing.
An instructions are regis-

Register an 0003 WAIT IN#(1)=ON
instruction 0004 END
tered
The next time an attempt is

The instruction and => WAIT IN#(1)=ON made to register the same
the additional items !
that were entered instruction as in , the
Main Menu ShortCut
last time are shown. same additional items as
were registered last time
are also shown in the input
buffer line.
10-79
10.13.2 Setting Instruction Set Level Operation


main menu.
2 Select {TEACHIG COND}. The TEACHING CONDITION window appears.
TEACHING CONDITION
MOVE INSTRUCTION SET LINE
Main Menu ShortCut
3 Select “LANGUAGE LEVEL.” The selection dialog box appears.

TEACHING CONDITION
MOVE INSTRUCTION SET SUBSET
STEP ONLY CHANGING
STANDARD
EXPANDED
Main Menu ShortCut
4 Select desired language level. Language level is set.

TEACHING CONDITION
LANGUAGE LEVEL STANDARD
MOVE INSTRUCTION SET LINE
Main Menu ShortCut
10-80
10.14 Numeric Key Customize Function
10.14Numeric Key Customize Function
10.14.1 What is the Numeric Key Customize Function?

With this function, the user can set the function of an application that has been allocated to the
Numeric key of the programming pendant to the other function.
Since any frequently used operation can be allocated to a Numeric keys on the programming
pendant, decreasing the number of key operations reduces the teaching time.
NOTE The Numeric Key Customize Function is only valid when the security mode is set to the
managememt mode.
10.14.2 Allocatable Functions

There are two allocation methods as follows:
• Key Allocation (EACH)
• Key Allocation (SIM)
Key Allocation (EACH)

With key allocation (EACH), the manipulator operates according to the allocated function
when the Numeric key is pressed. The following shows the functions that can be allocated.
Function Description
Manufacturer Allocated by Yaskawa. Allocating another function invalidates the func-

allocation tion allocated by the manufacturer.
Instruction allocation Allocates any instructions assigned by the user.
Job call allocation Allocates job call instructions (CALL instructions). The jobs to be called
are only those registered in the reserved job names. (Specify it by the
registration No.)
Display allocation Allocates any displays assigned by the user.
10-81
Key Allocation (SIM)

With key allocation (SIM), the manipulator operates according to the allocated function when
the [INTERLOCK] and the Numeric key are pressed at the same time. The following shows
the functions that can be allocated.
Function Description
Alternate output Turns ON/OFF the specified user output signal when [INTERLOCK] and
allocation the allocated Numeric key are pressed at the same time.
Momentary output Turns ON the specified user output signal user when [INTERLOCK] and
allocation the allocated user key are pressed at the same time.
Pulse output Turns ON the specified user output signal only for the specified period
allocation when [INTERLOCK] and the allocated Numeric key are pressed at the
same time.
Group output Sends the specified output to the specified general group output signals
allocation (4-bit/8- when [INTERLOCK] and the allocated Numeric key are pressed at the
bit) same time.
Analog output Sends the specified voltage to the specified output port when [INTER-
allocation LOCK] and the allocated Numeric key are pressed at the same time.
Analog incremental Sends the voltage increased by the specified value to the specified out-
output allocation put port when [INTERLOCK] and the allocated Numeric key are pressed
at the same time.
SUPPLE In a system for multiple applications, a Numeric key can be allocated for each application.
-MENT
10-82
10.14.3 Allocating an Operation

Allocation Window

main menu.
2 Select {KEY ALLOCATION}. The KEY ALLOCATION (EACH) window appears.
KEY ALLOCATION (EACH)
APPLI. NO.: 1
KEY FUNCTION ALLOCATION CONTENT
- MAKER
. MAKER
0 MAKER
1 MAKER
2 MAKER
3 MAKER
4 MAKER
5 MAKER
6 MAKER
7 MAKER
8 MAKER
9 MAKER
Main Menu ShortCut
3 Select {DISPLAY}. The pull-down menu appears. To call up the KEY ALLOCATION
(SIM) window, select {ALLOCATE SIM. KEY}.
ALLOCATE EACH KEY

KEY ALLOCATION EACH
ALLOCATE SIM.KEY
APPLI. NO.: 1
- MAKER
. MAKER
0 MAKER
1 MAKER
2 MAKER
3 MAKER
4 MAKER
5 MAKER
6 MAKER
7 MAKER
8 MAKER
9 MAKER
Main Menu ShortCut
4 Select {ALLOCATE SIM. The KEY ALLOCATION (SIM) window appears.

KEY}. GO BACK
In a system multiple applications, press the page key to

PAGE
change the window to the allocation window for each application.

APPLI. NO.: 1
- MAKER
. MAKER
0 MAKER
1 MAKER
2 MAKER
3 MAKER
4 MAKER
5 MAKER
6 MAKER
7 MAKER
8 MAKER
9 MAKER
Main Menu ShortCut
10-83
Instruction Allocation
Use this function in the KEY ALLOCATION (EACH) window.
1 Move the cursor to “FUNC- The selection dialog box appears.

TION” of the key to be allo-
cated and press [SELECT].
APPLI. NO.: 1
- MAKER
. MAKER
MAKER
0 MAKER
INSTRUCTION
1 MAKER
2 JOB CALL
MAKER
3 DISPLAY
MAKER
4 MAKER
5 MAKER
6 MAKER
7 MAKER
8 MAKER
9 MAKER
Main Menu ShortCut
2 Select “INSTRUCTION.” The instruction is shown in the “ALLOCATION CONTENT.”

APPLI. NO.: 1
- INSTRUCTION DOUT
. MAKER
0 MAKER
1 MAKER
2 MAKER
3 MAKER
4 MAKER
5 MAKER
6 MAKER
7 MAKER
8 MAKER
9 MAKER
Main Menu ShortCut
To change the instruction, move the cursor to the instruction and

press [SELECT]. Then the instruction group list dialog box
appears. Select the group containing the instruction to be
changed.

IN/OUT
APPLI. NO: 1 CONTROL
- INSTRUCTION DOUT DEVICE
. MAKER
0 MAKER MOTION
1 MAKER
2 MAKER ARITH
3 MAKER
4 MAKER SHIFT
5 MAKER
6 MAKER OTHER
7 MAKER
8 MAKER SAME
9 MAKER
PRIOR
Main Menu ShortCut
When the instruction list dialog box is shown, select the instruc-
tion to be changed.
10-84
2 (cont’d)
APPLI. NO.: 1
- INSTRUCTION WAIT
. MAKER
0 MAKER
1 MAKER
2 MAKER
3 MAKER
4 MAKER
5 MAKER
6 MAKER
7 MAKER
8 MAKER
9 MAKER
Main Menu ShortCut
10-85
Job Call Allocation

Use this function in the KEY ALLOCATION (EACH) window.
1 Move the cursor to the “FUNC- The selection dialog box appears.
2 Select “JOB CALL.” The reserved job registration No. is shown in the “ALLOCATION
CONTENT” (reserved job registration No.: 1 to 10).
APPLI. NO.: 1
- INSTRUCTION DOUT
. JOB CALL 1
0 MAKER
1 MAKER
2 MAKER
3 MAKER
4 MAKER
5 MAKER
6 MAKER
7 MAKER
8 MAKER
9 MAKER
Main Menu ShortCut
To change the reserved job registration No., move the cursor to

the No. and press [SELECT]. Numeric values can now be
entered. Input the number to be changed, and press [ENTER].
10-86
Window Allocation
Use this function is used in the KEY ALLOCATION (EACH) window.
2 Select “DISPLAY.”
3 Move the cursor to “ALLOCA- The character input status is entered.
TION CONTENT” and press
[SELECT].
4 Input the name of the The reserved name input to the “ALLOCATION CONTENT” is
reserved window and press shown.
[ENTER]. DATA EDIT DISPLAY UTILITY
APPLI. NO.: 1
- INSTRUCTION DOUT
. JOB CALL 1
0 DISPLAY WORK POSITION DISP
1 MAKER
2 MAKER
3 MAKER
4 MAKER
5 MAKER
6 MAKER
7 MAKER
8 MAKER
9 MAKER
Main Menu ShortCut
5 Open the window for alloca-

tion.
6 Press [INTERLOCK] and the A message “Reserved window registered” appears, and the win-
allocated key at the same dow is registered.
time.
10-87
Alternate Output Allocation

Use this function is used in the KEY ALLOCATION (SIM) window.
cated and press [SELECT]. DATA EDIT DISPLAY UTILITY
KEY ALLOCATION (SIM)
APPLI. NO.: 1
- MAKER
. MAKER
MAKER
0 MAKER
ALTERNATE OUTPUT
1 MAKER
MOMENTARY OUTPUT
2 MAKER
3 PULSE OUTPUT
MAKER
4 4 BIT OUTPUT
MAKER
5 MAKER
8 BIT OUTPUT
6 MAKER
ANALOG OUTPUT
7 MAKER
8 ANALOG
MAKER
INC OUTPUT
9 WINDOW
MAKER
Main Menu ShortCut
2 Select “ALTERNATE OUT- The output No. is shown in the “ALLOCATION CONTENT.”
PUT.”
APPLI. NO.: 1
- ALTERNATE NO.: 1
. MAKER
0 MAKER
1 MAKER
2 MAKER
3 MAKER
4 MAKER
5 MAKER
6 MAKER
7 MAKER
8 MAKER
9 MAKER
Main Menu ShortCut
To change the output No., move the cursor to the No. and press
[SELECT]. Numeric values can now be entered. Input the num-
ber to be changed, and press [ENTER].
10-88
Momentary Output Allocation

Use this function in the KEY ALLOCATION (SIM) window.
2 Select “MOMENTARY OUT- The output No. is shown in the “ALLOCATION CONTENT.”
PUT.”
APPLI. NO.: 1
- ALTERNATE NO.: 1
. MOMENTARY NO.: 1
0 MAKER
1 MAKER
2 MAKER
3 MAKER
4 MAKER
5 MAKER
6 MAKER
7 MAKER
8 MAKER
9 MAKER
Main Menu ShortCut
To change the output No., move the cursor to the No. and press
[SELECT]. Numeric values can now be entered. Input the num-
ber to be changed, and press [ENTER].
Pulse Output Allocation

2 Select “PULSE OUTPUT.” The output No. and output time are shown in the “ALLOCATION
CONTENT.”
APPLI. NO.: 1
- ALTERNATE NO.: 1
. MOMENTARY NO.: 1
0 PULSE NO.: 1 TIME: 0.01 SEC
1 MAKER
2 MAKER
3 MAKER
4 MAKER
5 MAKER
6 MAKER
7 MAKER
8 MAKER
9 MAKER
Main Menu ShortCut
To change the output No. or output time, move the cursor to the
No. or time and press [SELECT]. Numeric values can now be
entered. Input the number or time to be changed, and press
[ENTER].
10-89
Group (4-bit/8-bit) Output Allocation

2 Select “4 BIT OUTPUT” or “8 The output No. and output value are shown in the “ALLOCATION
BIT OUTPUT.” CONTENT.”
APPLI. NO.: 1
- ALTERNATE NO.: 1
. MOMENTARY NO.: 1
1 4BIT OUTPUT NO.: 1 OUT: 0
2 MAKER
3 MAKER
4 MAKER
5 MAKER
6 MAKER
7 MAKER
8 MAKER
9 MAKER
Main Menu ShortCut
To change the output No. or output value, move the cursor to the
No. or value and press [SELECT]. Numeric values can now be
entered. Input the number or value to be changed, and press
[ENTER].
10-90
Analog Output Allocation

2 Select “ANALOG OUTPUT.” The output port number and the output voltage value are shown
in the “ALLOCATION CONTENT.”
APPLI. NO.: 1
- ALTERNATE NO.: 1
. MOMENTARY NO.: 1
2 ANALOG OUT NO.: 1 OUT: 0.00
3 MAKER
4 MAKER
5 MAKER
6 MAKER
7 MAKER
8 MAKER
9 MAKER
Main Menu ShortCut
To change the output port No. or output voltage value, move the
cursor to the No. or voltage value and press [SELECT]. Numeric
values can now be entered. Input the number or voltage value to
be changed, and press [ENTER].
10-91
Analog Incremental Output Allocation

2 Select “ANALOG INC OUT- The output port No. and incremental value are shown in the
PUT.” “ALLOCATION CONTENT.”
APPLI. NO.: 1
- ALTERNATE NO.: 1
. MOMENTARY NO.: 1
2 ANALOG OUT NO.: 1 OUT: 0.00
3 ANALOG INC NO.: 1 INC: 1.00
4 MAKER
5 MAKER
6 MAKER
7 MAKER
8 MAKER
9 MAKER
Main Menu ShortCut
To change the output port No. or incremental value, move the cur-
sor to the No. or incremental value and press [SELECT].
Numeric values can now be entered. Input the number or incre-
mental value to be changed, and press [ENTER].
10-92
10.14.4 Allocation of I/O Control Instructions

In key allocation (SIM), output control instructions can be allocated to the Numeric keys that
have been allocated one of the following I/O controls with key allocation (EACH).
Function Output Control Instruction To Be Allocated
Alternate output allocation DOUT OT# (No.) ON
Momentary output allocation
Pulse output allocation PULSE OT# (No.) T = output time
Group output allocation (4-bit) DOUT OGH (No.) output value
Group output allocation (8-bit) DOUT OG# (No.) output value
Analog output allocation AOUT AO# (No.) output voltage value
TION” of the key that has been
allocated with I/O control with
key allocation (SIM) and press
[SELECT]. APPLI. NO.: 1
- INSTRUCTION DOUT
. JOB CALL 1
1 MAKER
2 MAKER
MAKER
3 MAKER
INSTRUCTION
4 MAKER
5 JOB CALL
MAKER
6 DISPLAY
MAKER
7 MAKER
8 MAKER
9 MAKER
Main Menu ShortCut
10-93
2 Select “OUTPUT CONTROL The instruction corresponding to the I/O control allocated by key
INST.” allocation (SIM) is shown in the “ALLOCATION CONTENT.”
KEY APPLICATION (EACH)
APPLI. NO.: 1
- INSTRUCTION DOUT
. JOB CALL 1
1 INSTRUCTION DOUT OG#(1) 0
2 MAKER
3 MAKER
4 MAKER
5 MAKER
6 MAKER
7 MAKER
8 MAKER
9 MAKER
Main Menu ShortCut
The allocated instruction changes automatically when “ALLOCA-

TION CONTENT” is changed by key allocation (SIM).
Even if the I/O control allocation is changed to the default setting
allocated by the manufacturer with key allocation (SIM), the set-
tings for key allocation (EACH) remain the same.
10-94
10.14.5 Execution of Allocation

Executing the Instruction/Output Control Allocation
1 Press the key allocated for The allocated instruction appears in the input buffer line.
instruction allocation or output
=> WAIT IN#(1)=ON
control allocation.
2 Press [INSERT] and [ENTER]. The instruction displayed in the input buffer line is registered.
Executing the Job Call Allocation

1 Press the key allocated for the The CALL instruction appears in the input buffer line.
job call allocation.
=> CALL JOB:ARCON
2 Press [INSERT] and [ENTER]. The CALL instruction shown in the input buffer line is registered.
Executing the Window Allocation

1 Press the key allocated for the The allocated window appears.
window allocation.
Executing the I/O Control Allocation

Alternate output allocation, momentary output allocation, pulse output allocation, group output
allocation (4-bit/8-bit), analog output allocation, analog incremental output allocation are exe-
cuted by the following operation.
1 Press [INTERLOCK] and the Allocated functions are executed.

key allocated for I/O control
allocation at the same time.
10-95
10.15 Changing the Output Status
10.15Changing the Output Status
The status of external output signals can be changed from the programming pendant by using
either of the following two methods.
• On the user output status window

• On the RELAY ON window
The method that uses the RELAY ON window, which is described here, simplifies the opera-
tion for changing the status of signals that are used frequently.
A maximum of 16 output signals can be shown on the RELAY ON window and they must
NOTE be set in advance with parameter settings S2C285 to S2C300. If not having set, the sub
menu in the RELAY ON window is not displayed.
1 Select {IN/OUT} under the

main menu.
2 Select {RELAY ON}. The RELAY ON window appears.
RELAY ON
OUTPUT NO. STATUS ALLOCATION CONTENT

OUT#010 HAND 1 ON/OFF
OUT#008
OUT#014
OUT#009
Main Menu ShortCut
3 Select the desired signal for Select the status ( or ) of the desired signal to change.
changing.
10-96
10.15 Changing the Output Status
4 Press [INTERLOCK] The status is changed. ( : status ON, : status OFF)

+[SELECT].
RELAY ON
OUTPUT NO. STATUS ALLOCATION CONTENT

OUT#010 HAND 1 ON/OFF
OUT#008
OUT#014
OUT#009
Main Menu ShortCut
It is also possible to turn the relevant external output signal on only for the duration that
SUPPLE
-MENT
[INTERLOCK]+[SELECT] are pressed. This selection is made in advance by setting the
parameter to “1.”
10-97
10.16 Temporary Release of Soft Limits
10.16Temporary Release of Soft Limits
The switches that are set to detect the motion range of the manipulator are called limit
switches. The operating range is monitored by the software in order to stop motion before
these limit switches are reached. These software limits are called "soft limits." The operating
range of the manipulator is controlled by the following two soft limits.
• Maximum motion range for each axis

• Cubic operation area set parallel to the robot coordinate system
These soft limits are continually monitored by the system. When it is detected that the manip-
ulator (TCP) has reached a soft limit, the manipulator automatically stops.
When the manipulator is stopped at a soft limit, temporarily release the soft limit by following
the procedure below, then move the manipulator away from that which exceeded the soft limit.

main menu.
2 Select {LIMIT RELEASE}. The LIMIT RELEASE window appears.
LIMIT RELEASE

Main Menu ShortCut
3 Select “SOFT LIMIT Each time [SELECT] is pressed, “VALID” and “INVALID” alter-
RELEASE.” nate. When “SOFT LIMIT RELEASE” is set to “VALID,” the mes-
sage “Soft limits have been released” appears.
LIMIT RELEASE
SOFT LIMIT RELEASE VALID

Main Menu ShortCut Softlimits have been released
When “SOFT LIMIT RELEASE” is set to “INVALID,” the message

“Soft limits have not been released" appears for three seconds.
10-98
10.17 Changing the Parameter Setting
NOTE The teaching data cannot be entered while releasing software limit.
10.17Changing the Parameter Setting
The parameter settings can be changed only by the operator who has the correct user ID
number for the management mode.
1 Select {PARAMETER} under

the main menu.
2 Select the parameter type. The PARAMETER window appears. Select the desired parame-
ter.
PARAMETER
S2C000 1 0000_0000
S2C001 2 0000_0000
S2C002 4 0000_0000 Binary Data
S2C003 8 0000_0000
S2C004 16 0000_0000
S2C005 2 0000_0000
S2C006 64 0000_0000
Decimal Data
S2C007 89 0000_0000
S2C008 0 0000_0000
S2C009 0 0000_0000
S2C010 0 0000_0000
S2C011 0 0000_0000
Main Menu ShortCut
3 Move the cursor to the param- When the desired parameter number is not in the present window,
eter number whose setting is move the cursor to a parameter number and press [SELECT].
to be changed. Enter the desired parameter number with the Numeric keys and
press [ENTER]. The cursor moves to the selected parameter
number.
PARAMETER
S2C000 1 0000_0000
S2C001 2 0000_0000
S2C002 4 0000_0000 Binary Data
S2C003 8 0000_0000
S2C004 16 0000_0000
S2C005 2 0000_0000
S2C006 64 0000_0000
S2C007 89 0000_0000
Decimal Data
S2C008 0 0000_0000
S2C009 0 0000_0000
S2C010 0 0000_0000
S2C011 0 0000_0000
Main Menu ShortCut
10-99
10.17 Changing the Parameter Setting
Set the parameters in the following manner.
1 Select a parameter setting. Move the cursor to the parameter number data (decimal or
binary) in the PARAMETER window, and press [SELECT].
- To enter a decimal setting, select the decimal figure.
- To enter a binary setting, select the binary figure.
PARAMETER
S2C055 64 0100_0000
S2C056 65 0100_0001
S2C057 66 0100_0010
S2C058 0 0000_0000
S2C059 0 0000_0000
S2C060 0 0000_0000
S2C061 0 0000_0000
S2C062 0 0000_0000
S2C063 0 0000_0000
S2C064 0 0000_0000
S2C065 0 0000_0000
S2C066 0 0000_0000
Main Menu ShortCut
2 Enter the value. If a decimal figure is selected, enter a decimal value with the
Numeric keys.
S2C058 0010_0000
If a binary figure is selected, move the cursor to the binary figure

data in the input buffer line, and press [SELECT]. Each time
[SELECT] is pressed, “0” and “1” alternate in the window. “0” or
“1” can also be entered with the Numeric keys.
S2C058 32
3 Press [ENTER]. The new setting appears in the position where the cursor is
located.
PARAMETER
S2C055 128 0100_0000
S2C056 256 0100_0001
S2C057 512 0100_0010
S2C058 32 0010_0000
S2C059 0 0000_0000
S2C060 0 0000_0000
S2C061 0 0000_0000
S2C062 0 0000_0000
S2C063 0 0000_0000
S2C064 0 0000_0000
S2C065 0 0000_0000
S2C066 0 0000_0000
Main Menu ShortCut
10-100
10.18 File Initialize
10.18File Initialize
10.18.1 Initialize Job File

1 Turn the power supply ON

again while pressing [MAIN
MENU] simultaneously.
2 Change the security mode to
managememt mode.
3 Select {FILE} under the main
menu.
4 Select {INITIALIZE}. The INITIALIZE window appears.
INITIALIZE
Item marked by
JOB can not be selected.
FILE/GENERAL DATA
PARAMETER
I/O DATA
SYSTEM DATA
Main Menu ShortCut Maintenance Mode
5 Select {JOB}. The confirmation dialog box appears.
Initialize?
YES NO
6 Select “YES.” Job data is initialized.
10-101
10.18.2 Initialize Data File


managememt mode.
menu.
4 Select {INITIALIZE}.
5 Select {FILE/GENERAL The INITIALIZE window appears.
DATA}.
INITIALIZE
TOOL DATA TOOL .CND

WEAVING DATA WEAV .CND
USER COORDINATE DATA UFRAME .CND
VARIABLE DATA VAR .DAT
ARC START COND DATA ARCSRT .CND
ARC END COND DATA ARCEND .CND
ARC AUXILIARY COND DATA ARCSUP .DAT
WELDER CONDITION DATA WELDER .DAT
6 Select data file for initializing. The selected data file /General data is marked with “ “.
INITIALIZE
File/Data marked by
TOOL DATA TOOL .CND can not be selected.
WEAVING DATA WEAV .CND
USER COORDINATE DATA UFRAME .CND
VARIABLE DATA VAR .DAT
ARC START COND DATA ARCSRT .CND
ARC END COND DATA ARCEND .CND
ARC AUXILIARY COND DATA ARCSUP .DAT
WELDER CONDITION DATA WELDER .DAT
7 Press[ENTER]. The confirmation dialog box appears.
Initialize?
YES NO
8 Select “YES.” Selected data file /General data is initialized.
10-102
10.18.3 Initialize Parameter File


management mode.
menu.
5 Select {PARAMETER}. The parameter selection window appears.
INITIALIZE
ROBOT MATCH PRMTR RC .PRM

SYS DEF PRMTR SD .PRM
COORD ORG PRMTR RO .PRM
SYS MATCH PRMTR SC .PRM
CIO PRMTR CIO .PRM
FCTN DEF PRMTR FD .PRM
APPLI PRMTR AP .PRM
TRANSMISSION (UNIV) RS .PRM
6 Select parameter for initializ- The selected parameter is marked with “ “.

ing.
INITIALIZE
Parameter marked by
ROBOT MATCH PRMTR RC .PRM can not be selected.
SYS DEF PRMTR SD .PRM
COORD ORG PRMTR RO .PRM
SYS MATCH PRMTR SC .PRM
CIO PRMTR CIO .PRM
FCTN DEF PRMTR FD .PRM
APPLI PRMTR AP .PRM
TRANSMISSION (UNIV) RS .PRM
Initialize?
YES NO
8 Select “YES.” Selected parameter is initialized.
10-103
10.18.4 Initializing I/O Data


management mode.
menu.
5 Select {I/O DATA}. The I/O data selection window appears.
INITIALIZE
CIO PRGM CIOPRG .LST

IO NAME DATA IONAME .DAT
SIMULATED IN DATA PSEUDOIN .DAT
6 Select data for initializing. The selected data is marked with “ “.
INITIALIZE
Parameters marked by
CIO PRGM CIOPRG .LST can not be selected.
IO NAME DATA IONAME .DAT
SIMULATED DATA PSEUDOIN .DAT
Initialize?
YES NO
8 Select “YES.” The selected data is initialized.
10-104
10.18.5 Initializing System Data


management mode.
menu.
5 Select {SYSTEM DATA}. The system data selection window appears.
INITIALIZE
USER WORD UWORD .DAT

SV MONITOR SIGNAL SVMON .DAT
VARIABLE NAME VERNAME .DAT
SECOND HOME POSITION HOME2 .DAT
HOME POS CALIB DATA ABSO .DAT
WORK HOME POSITION DATA OPEORG .DAT
6 Select the parameter to be ini- The selected data is marked with “ “.

tialized.
INITIALIZE
Parameter marked by
USER WORD UWORD .DAT can not be selected.
SV MONITOR SIGNAL SVMON .DAT
VARIABLE NAME VERNAME .DAT
SECOND HOME POSITION HOME2 .DAT
HOME POS CALIB DATA ABSO .DAT
WORK HOME POSITION DATA OPEORG .DAT
Initialize?
YES NO
8 Select “YES.” The selected data is initialized.
10-105
11.1 Function Keys
11 Arc Welding Application
11.1 Function Keys
Each function used for arc welding is allocated on the Numeric keys of the programming pen-
dant.
INTER 8 9
LOCK
ARCON FEED
5 6
GAS
ARCOFF RETRACT
1 2 3
TIMER CUR/VOL
0 . -
REFP CUR/VOL
Registers a timer instruction “TIMER” in a job.

1
TIMER
Registers a reference point “REFP” in a job, or modifies the registered ref-

erence point.
0
REFP [REFP] + [FWD]
Moves the manipulator to the registered reference point.
Registers a welding start instruction “ARCON.”

8
ARCON
Registers a welding end instruction “ARCOF.”
[INTERLOCK] + [GAS ARCOFF]

(These keys are for future use and disabled in the current version.)
5 Used for the gas flow control.
GAS
ARCOFF Pressing [INTERLOCK] + [GAS ARCOFF] once opens the gas valve for 20
seconds, and then the valve automatically closes.
Pressing [INTERLOCK] + [GAS ARCOFF] again within the 20 seconds,
the gas valve can be manually closed.
11-1
11.2 General Descriptions of Instructions and Functions
Used for wire inching. Press [FEED] to feed the wire, and press
[RETRACT] to retract the wire.
9
While these keys are pressed, the wire feed motor operates.
FEED
When the following are pressed simultaneously, wire inching is performed
in the high speed mode.
6 [HIGH SPEED] + [FEED]
RETRACT [HIGH SPEED] + [RETRACT]
Modifies the welding current/voltage while welding during the play mode.
Press [3/CUR/VOL] to increase the current/voltage value, and press
3 [−/CUR/VOL] to decrease the current/voltage value.
CUR/VOL
(Refer to " 11.6 Changing Welding Conditions During Playback. " in this
manual.)
-
CUR/VOL
Wire retraction, high-speed inching, or high-speed retraction cannot be performed depend-

SUPPLE-
MENT ing on the Power Source.
11.2.1 Welding Teaching Operation

The following figure is an example of workpiece welding. This section outlines the manipula-
tor arc welding procedure and the reference job (robot program).
Step1 Step 6
Step 2
Step 3 Step 5 :Teaching point (Step)
Welding line Step 4
11-2
Operating procedure is as follows:
Creating a Job
(Teaching a Welding Line)
Perform the manipulator welding teaching operation (Refer to the refer-
ence job.) For information regarding the teaching procedure, refer to " 4
Teaching " in this manual.
Setting Welding Conditions

(Registering Work Instruction)
Set the welding conditions (current value, voltage value, welding speed)
for the object workpiece.
Check Operation
(Operation in the Check Mode)
Confirm the manipulator operation in the check mode (welding is not per-
formed).
Fine Control of Welding Condition

Execute welding, and perform the fine control of the welding condition
from the bead externals.
Production (Automatic Drive)

The teaching operation is completed. Actual production using the manip-
ulator is performed.
11-3
Reference Job
NOP
MOVJ VJ=10.00
MOVJ VJ=80.00
MOVL V=800 Moves to the taught position (welding start point) using lin-
ear interpolation. Speed units: cm/min.
ARCON AC=200 AVP=100 Turns ON the arc start signal to the Power Source. Speci-
fies welding current: 200A, welding voltage: 100%.
MOVL V=50 Moves to the taught position (welding end point) using lin-
ear interpolation. Speed units: cm/min.
ARCOF Turns OFF the arc start signal to the Power Source.
MOVL V=800
MOVJ VJ=50.00
END
11.2.2 Functions Used During Teaching

To decrease teaching procedure time, useful functions are provided.
Torch Wire inching function

Gas check function
Step 1 Step 6
Step 2
Step5
Step 3
Step 4
11.2.3 Functions Used During Automatic Drive

To increase productivity, convenient functions are provided.
Torch
Step1 Step6
Step2
Arc retry function Automatic wire anti-
sticking function
Step5
Step3
Arc restart function Step4

Wire anti-sticking function
11-4
11.3 Function Outlines
11.2.4 Other Functions

The following arc welding usage functions are also available.
• Welding Condition Slope Up/ Down Function
• Changing Welding Conditions During Playback
• Arc Welding Operation Maintenance Function
• Welding Condition File Function
• Enhanced Welding Condition File Function
• Weaving Function
• Power Source Characteristic File Function
11.3.1 Wire Inching Function

Wire Inching
The term wire inching refers to gradually feeding or retracting the welding wire
9 through the torch. [FEED] and [RETRACT] are used to perform wire inching. The
wire inching simply feeds or retracts the wire, it has nothing to do with the job prode-
FEED
dure being taught. The wire inching is performed only in the teach mode when the
arc does not occur.
6
RETRACT
Wire Feeding
The wire is fed only while [FEED] is pressed.
Wire Retracting
The wire is retracted only while [RETRACT] is pressed.
When [FEED] or [RETARACT] is pressed simultaneously with [HIGH SPEED], the wire inch-
ing is performed in the high speed mode.
[HIGH SPEED] + [FEED]
[HIGH SPEED] + [RETRACT]
Wire retraction, high-speed inching, or high-speed retraction cannot be performed depend-

SUPPLE-
MENT ing on the Power Source.
11-5
11.3.2 Gas Flow Control Function

The Gas Flow Control function is used to adjust the flow amount of shielding gas by opening
or closing the solenoid valve. The solenoid valve can be opened or closed by pressing
[INTERLOCK] + [GAS ARCOFF].
This function simply opens or closes the solenoid valve for shielding gas. Therefore, the oper-
ation does not cause any changes in the job contents.
The Gas Flow Control function is enabled in the teach mode only.
Opening the Shielding Gas Valve

Press [INTERLOCK] + [GAS ARCOFF] once to open the valve for 20 seconds. The valve is
automatically closed after the 20 seconds.
Closing the Shielding Gas Valve Manually

Press [INTERLOCK] + [GAS ARCOFF] again within the 20 seconds to manually close the
valve.
11-6
11.3.3 Arc Retry Function

An attachment to the welding start position of a non-conductive material, such as rust, soot,
and oil, may cause an arc start failure during arc start. An arc start failure stops the manipula-
tor and interrupts work. The arc retry function prevents such inconvenience.
When an arc start failure occurs ( ) and this arc retry function is performed, the ARCON pro-
cess is repeated ( ) according to the retry condition defined in the Arc Auxiliary Condition
File. The manipulator repeats the ARCON procedure as it slightly shifts its position near the
arc starting point. After that, the manipulator returns to the starting point when an arc starts
and continues working ( ).
Arc Start Failure
The Retry Procedure

Returns toward the previous step and performs
a retract inching, then retruns to the teaching
starting point and repeats the ARCON proce-
dure.
Successful Arc Start

After a successful arc start, the manipulator con-
tinues to weld.
Retry Function Example
11-7
11.3.4 Arc Restart Function

When the manipulator stops because of an arc failure, a simple start would leave a break in
the welding line. This is prevented by using the arc restart function.
When the arc restart function is executed, the manipulator is restarted using the method spec-
ifed in the Arc Auxiliary Condition File*1. There are three methods to restart the manipulator
after an arc failure:
• With the arc OFF the controller outputs an error signal
and the message “RESTARTING FOR ARC,” but
continues manipulator’s movement. After exiting the
arc section, the controller outputs the message “END
OF ARC RESTARTING,” and continues the operation.
• With the arc ON trial, the manipulator automatically

returns for the specified overlap length*2, and then
continues welding.
• The manipulator stops and waits for a manual inter-

vention (operator removing the cause of stoppage)
( ). After intervention, the operator should return the
d manipulator to the original stop positon( ). And then
e c press [START] again. The manipulator returns for the
specified overlap length*2 ( ) and continues the
work.
*1 The arc auxiliary condition file defines the following: current, voltage and speed at
restart; method of restart after a gas shortage or wire shortage.
Overlap length
*2 The overlap length (the length of the section where welding is repeated after a restart)
can be set as desired (0 to 99.9mm).
NOTE A cursor operation resets the “restarting” status. Therefore, the arc restart function cannot
be executed after the cursor operation.
11-8
11.3.5 Anti-Stick Function

The wire may stick to the workpiece after welding is completed ( ). As an anti-stick process,
the Power Source temporarily increases the voltage at the end of welding( ). After the anti-
stick process, a wire stick check is performed( ). If the anti-stick process failed and a wire
stick is detected, the manipulator enters a hold status or performs the automatic sticking
release process, depending on the anti-stick condition specified.
Time required for the anti-stick process differs depending on the Power Sources. The anti-
stick process times for different Power Sources is registered in the Power Source characteris-
tic file. The wire check is performed after the anti-stick process time has elapsed.
Wire stick
SUPPLE-
MENT
“Wire stick” refers to the contact of the wire to the workpiece as observed after the arc-
OFF.
Welding ends. (Wire Stick Occur-

Wire stick to workpiece rence)
Anti-stick Process
Voltage increased temporarily
as anti-stick process
Wire Stick Check

Wire stick check is performed after elaps-
ing of the anti-stick process time defined
in the Power Source characteristic file.
Anti-Stick Function
11-9
11.3.6 Automatic Wire-stick Release Function

The automatic wire-stick release function can be used if wire stick is detected in spite of the
anti-stick process. When this function is used, the manipulator does not immediately output
the wire sticking signal upon detecting a wire stick, but automatically attempts to release the
sticking by applying a certain voltage. Only when the stick release process has failed for a
specified number of times, the manipulator stops and outputs the wire stick signal.
This function is specified in the arc end condition file or the ARCOF instruction’s additional
items. When it is used, the voltage and number of attempts are set in the arc auxiliary condi-
tion file.
Automatic Wire-stick Release

Even if a single attempt has failed, the process is repeated
up to the specified maximum repetition count.
Manipulator Stopped by Wire Stick

If a wire stick occurs at the end of welding, the manipulator immediately stops in the hold sta-
tus. While the manipulator remains in the hold status, the [HOLD] lamp lights and the external
system output signal “Wire Sticking” is output.
NX100
ON
Sticking
Wire stick occurs External output signal is turned ON.
11-10
11.3.7 Slope Up/Down Function

The slope up/down function is used during welding to gradually change the welding condition.
This function is extremely effective in conducting heat for such operations on workpieces such
as the one shown below. During the welding of a workpiece as shown below, especially dur-
ing the period before the end of welding, the tearing and dropping of metal can occur quite
frequently due to heat conduction. However, even in this example, if the welding condition is
gradually decreased before the end of welding, tearing and dropping of metal can be pre-
vented.
Welding start point (P1) and welding

end point (Pn) must be the same.
Reference Job
NOP
MOVL V=500 Moves to welding start point P1.

ARCON AC=210 AVP=100 Arc starts.
MOVC V=80
MOVC V=80
MOVC V=80
MOVC V=80 Moves to taught point Pn-1.
ARCCTE AC=180 AVP=100 DIS=20.0 Gradually decreases the current from the point 20mm
short of the welding end point.
MOVC V=80 Moves to welding end point Pn.
ARCOF AC=160 AVP=80 T=0.30 Arc ends.
END
Welding condition
gradually decreases.
Current Main condition (Slope Up/Down Func.)
210
End condition
180
160 20mm Manipulator
stop (0.3s)
P1 P2 Pn-1 Pn
11-11
11.4 Registering Arc Welding Instructions
11.3.8 Enhanced Welding Condition File Function

The enhanced welding condition file function improves the method of setting the welding con-
dition file. This function can be used as follows:
• Changing the welding start condition to the main condition can be performed during
manipulator operation using the enhanced arc start condition file.
• The crater processing can be set to two stages using the enhanced arc end condition file.
• Analog output to the Power Source increases by 2 channels. Therefore, Power Sources
with polarity ratio control can be used.
Enhanced Welding Condition File

NOTE
Parameter setting is necessary to use the enhanced welding condition file.
(Refer to “11.5.2 Selecting Welding Condition Files.”)
Select either the standard welding condition file or the enhanced welding condition file as
for the welding condition file.
11.4.1 ARCON
This is the instruction to turn ON the arc start signal to the Power Source to start welding.
The function key [ARCON] can be used for registration.
8 Function key to register the welding start instruction (ARCON)

ARCON
To register the ARCON instruction using [INFORM LIST], select “DEVICE” from the
SUPPLE-
MENT instruction group list.
Registering the ARCON Instruction

1 Press [ARCON].
2 Press [ENTER].
11-12
Setting Welding Start Conditions

The ARCON instruction can be registered in any of the following four ways:
• With additional items to specify conditions

ARCON AC=200 AVP=100 T=0.50 V=60 RETRY
• With an arc start condition file
ARCON ASF# (1)
In this case, the welding condition is set using the arc start condition file. (Refer to " 11.5
Welding Condition Files. ")
• Without additional items
ARCON
In this case, the welding condition must be set using the welding condition set instruction
(ARCSET) before the ARCON instruction is executed. (Refer to “11.4.3 ARCSET.”)
With Additional Items to Specify Conditions

1 Select the ARCON instruction The ARCON instruction appears in the input buffer line.
in the instruction area.
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: WORK A STEP NO: 0003
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0002 MOVL V=800
0003 END
ARCON
2 Press [SELECT]. The DETAIL EDIT window appears. Select “UNUSED.”

DETAIL EDIT
ARCON
SET METHOD : UNUSED
ARCON
11-13
3 Select “UNUSED.” The selection dialog box appears.

DETAIL EDIT
ARCON
SET METHOD : ASF#()
AC=
UNUSED
4 Select “AC=.” When the welding conditions have been set in the ARCON
instruction with an arc start condition file, the DETAIL EDIT win-
dow appears.
DETAIL EDIT
ARCON
SET METHOD : ASF#() 1
5 Select “ASF#( ).” The selection dialog box appears.

DETAIL EDIT
ARCON
SET METHOD : ASF#()
AC=
UNUSED
6 Select “AC=.”
7 Input the welding condition. Set each welding condition.

DETAIL EDIT
ARCON
WELDING CURR : AC= 180
WELDING VOLT : AVP= 100
TIMER : T= 0.30
SPEED : V= 80
RETRY : RETRY
MODE : REPLAY
ARCON AC=180 AVP=100 V=80 RETRY REPLAY
DETAIL EDIT
ARCON
TIMER : T= 0.30
8 Press [ENTER]. The set contents are displayed in the input buffer line.
11-14
9 Press [ENTER]. The set contents are registered in the job.

JOB CONTENT
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0002 MOVL V=800
0003 ARCON AC=200 AVP=100 V=80 RETRY REPLAY
0004 MOVL V=50
0005 MOVL V=50
0006 MOVL V=50
0007 ARCOF
0008 MOVL V=800
0009 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0010 END
Press [CANCEL] to return to the JOB CONTENT window when

the set contents are not to be registered.
JOB CONTENT
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0002 MOVL V=800
0003 ARCON
0004 MOVL V=50
0005 MOVL V=50
0006 MOVL V=50
0007 ARCOF
0008 MOVL V=800
0009 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0010 END
ARCON
11-15
With an Arc Start Condition File

in the instruction area. EDIT
JOB DISPLAY UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0002 MOVL V=800
0003 END
ARCON
2 Press [SELECT]. The DETAIL EDIT window appears.

DETAIL EDIT
ARCON
SET METHOD : UNUSED
ARCON

DETAIL EDIT
ARCON
SET METHOD : ASF#()
AC=
UNUSED
4 Select “ASF#( ).” When the welding conditions have been set in the ARCON
instruction additional items, the DETAIL EDIT window appears.
DETAIL EDIT
ARCON
TIMER : T= 0.30
SPEED : V= 80
RETRY : RETRY
MODE : REPLAY
11-16
5 Select “AC=.” The selection dialog box appears.

DETAIL EDIT
ARCON
ASF#()
WELDING VOLT : AVP=
AC= 100
TIMER : T= 0.30
UNUSED
SPEED : V= 80
RETRY : RETRY
6 Select “ASF#( ).”
7 Set the file number. Specify the file number (1 to 64). Move the cursor to the file num-
ber and press [SELECT].
DETAIL EDIT
ARCON
Type the file number using the Numeric keys and press [ENTER].
DETAIL EDIT
ARCON
ARCON ASF# (10)

JOB CONTENT
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0002 MOVL V=800
0003 ARCON ASF# (10)
0004 MOVL V=50
0005 MOVL V=50
0006 MOVL V=50
0007 ARCOF
0008 MOVL V=800
0009 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0010 END
ARCON ASF# (10)

JOB CONTENT
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0002 MOVL V=800
0003 ARCON
0004 MOVL V=50
0005 MOVL V=50
0006 MOVL V=50
0007 ARCOF
0008 MOVL V=800
0009 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0010 END
ARCON
11-17
Without Additional Items
When an additional item is not provided for the ARCON instruction, set the welding condi-
NOTE tions in advance with the welding condition setting instruction (ARCSET) before executing
the ARCON instruction. (Refer to “11.4.3 ARCSET.”)
JOB CONTENT
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0002 MOVL V=800
0003 ARCON ASF#(10) T=0.30 RETRY REPLAY
0004 MOVL V=50
0005 MOVL V=50
0006 MOVL V=50
0007 ARCOF
0008 MOVL V=800
0009 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0010 END
ARCON ASF#(10) T=0.30 RETRY REPLAY

DETAIL EDIT
ARCON
DETAIL EDIT
ARCON
TIMER : T= 0.30
V 80
3 Select “ASF#( )” or “AC=.” The selection dialog box appears.

ASF#()
AC=
UNUSED
4 Select “UNUSED.”
ARCON
11-18

JOB CONTENT
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0002 MOVL V=800
0003 ARCON
0004 MOVL V=50
0005 MOVL V=50
0006 MOVL V=50
0007 ARCOF
0008 MOVL V=800
0009 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0010 END
ARCON

11-19
11.4.2 ARCOF
This is the instruction to turn OFF arc start signal to the Power Source to end welding.
The function key [ARCOF] can be used for registration.
5 Function key to register the arc end instruction (ARCOF)

GAS
ARCOFF
SUPPLE-
To register the ARCOF instruction using [INFORM LIST], select “DEVICE” from the instruc-
MENT tion group list.
Registering the ARCOF Instruction

1 Press [ARCOF].
DETAIL EDIT
ARCOF
SET METHOD : UNUSED
ARCOF
2 Press [ENTER].
JOB CONTENT
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0002 MOVL V=800
0003 ARCON
0004 MOVL V=50
0005 MOVL V=50
0006 MOVL V=50
0007 ARCOF
0008 MOVL V=800
0009 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0010 END
ARCOF
11-20
Setting Welding End Conditions

The ARCOF instruction can be registered in any of the following four ways:
• With additional items to specify conditions

ARCOF AC=160 AVP=70 T=0.50 ANTSTK
• With an arc end condition file
ARCOF AEF#(1)
In this case, the welding condition is set using the arc end condition file. (Refer to “11.5
Welding Condition Files.”)
• Without additional items
ARCOF
When the crater process is performed by changing the welding condition when welding is
completed, before the ARCOF instruction is executed, the welding condition needs to be
set using the welding condition setting instruction. (Refer to “11.4.3 ARCSET”).
With Additional Items to Specify Conditions

1 Select the ARCOF instruction The ARCOF instruction appears in the input buffer line.
JOB CONTENT
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0002 MOVL V=800
0003 ARCON
0004 MOVL V=50
0005 MOVL V=50
0006 MOVL V=50
0007 END
ARCOF

DETAIL EDIT
ARCOF
SET METHOD : UNUSED
ARCOF
11-21

DETAIL EDIT
ARCOF
SET METHOD : AEF#()
AC=
UNUSED
4 Select “AC=.” When the welding conditions have been set in the ARCOF
instruction with arc end condition file, the DETAIL EDIT window
appears.
DETAIL EDIT
ARCOF
SET METHOD : AEF#() 1
5 Select “AEF#( ).” The selection dialog box appears.

DETAIL EDIT
ARCOF
SET METHOD : AEF#()
AC=
UNUSED
6 Select “AC=.”
7 Input the welding condition. Set each welding condition.

DETAIL EDIT
ARCOF
TIMER : T= 0.30
ANTI-STICKING : ANTSTK
DETAIL EDIT
ARCOF
TIMER : T= 0.30
ANTSTK
11-22
9 Press [ENTER]. The set contents are regisitered in the job.

JOB CONTENT
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0002 MOVL V=800
0003 ARCON
0004 MOVL V=50
0005 MOVL V=50
0006 MOVL V=50
0007 ARCOF AC=200 AVP=100 T=0.30 ANTSTK
0008 MOVL V=800
0009 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0010 END

JOB CONTENT
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0002 MOVL V=800
0003 ARCON
0004 MOVL V=50
0005 MOVL V=50
0006 MOVL V=50
0007 ARCOF
0008 MOVL V=800
0009 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0010 END
ARCOF
11-23
With an Arc End Condition File

JOB CONTENT
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0002 MOVL V=800
0003 ARCON
0004 MOVL V=50
0005 MOVL V=50
0006 MOVL V=50
0007 END
ARCOF

DETAIL EDIT
ARCOF
SET METHOD : UNUSED
ARCOF

DETAIL EDIT
ARCOF
SET METHOD : AEF#()
AC=
UNUSED
11-24
4 Select “AEF#( ).” When the welding conditions have been set in the ARCOF
instruction additional items, the DETAIL EDIT window appears.
DETAIL EDIT
ARCOF
TIMER : T= 0.30
5 Select “AC=.” The selection dialog box appears.

DETAIL EDIT
ARCOF
AEF#()
WELDING VOLT : AVP=
AC= 100
TIMER : T= 0.30
UNUSED
6 Select “AEF#( ).”
7 Set the file number. Specify the file number (1 to 12). Move the cursor to the file num-
ber and press [SELECT].
DETAIL EDIT
ARCOF
Type the file number using the Numeric keys and press [ENTER].
DETAIL EDIT
ARCOF
ARCOF AEF# (10)
11-25
9 Press [ENTER]. The set contents are regisitered in the job.

JOB CONTENT
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0002 MOVL V=800
0003 ARCON
0004 MOVL V=50
0005 MOVL V=50
0006 MOVL V=50
0007 ARCOF AEF# (10)
0008 MOVL V=800
0009 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0010 END
ARCOF AEF# (10)

JOB CONTENT
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0002 MOVL V=800
0003 ARCON
0004 MOVL V=50
0005 MOVL V=50
0006 MOVL V=50
0007 ARCOF
0008 MOVL V=800
0009 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0010 END
ARCOF
11-26
Without Additional Items

JOB CONTENT
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0002 MOVL V=800
0003 ARCON
0004 MOVL V=50
0005 MOVL V=50
0006 MOVL V=50
0008 MOVL V=800
0009 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0010 END

DETAIL EDIT
ARCOF
JOB CONTENT
DETAIL EDIT
ARCOF A
TIMER : T= 0.30
ANTSTK
3 Select “AEF#( )” or “AC=.” The selection dialog box appears.

AEF#()
AC=
UNUSED
4 Select “UNUSED.”
5 Press [SELECT]. The set contents are displayed in the input buffer line.
ARCOF
11-27

JOB CONTENT
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0002 MOVL V=800
0003 ARCON
0004 MOVL V=50
0005 MOVL V=50
0006 MOVL V=50
0007 END
ARCOF

JOB CONTENT
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0002 MOVL V=800
0003 ARCON
0004 MOVL V=50
0005 MOVL V=50
0006 MOVL V=50
0008 MOVL V=800
0009 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0010 END
11-28
11.4.3 ARCSET
This is the instruction to set the welding conditions (current, voltage, etc.) individually.
Registering the ARCSET Instruction


address area.
IN/OUT
ARCON ARCCTE
CONTROL
ARCOF
DEVICE
VWELD
MOTION
AWELD
ARCSET
ARITH
WVON SHIFT
WVOF OTHER
ARCCTS SAME
PRIOR
3 Select “DEVICE.”
4 Select the ARCSET instruc- The ARCSET instruction appears in the input buffer line.
tion.
JOB CONTENT1
IN/OUT
ARCCTE
ARCON
ARCOF
0000 NOP DEVICE
0001 MOVJ VJ=80.00 VWELD
0002 MOVL V=800 MOTION
AWELD
0003 ARCON ARITH
0004 MOVL V=50 ARCSET
0005 END WVON SHIFT
WVOF OTHER
ARCCTS SAME
PRIOR
ARCSET AC=200 AVP=100
DETAIL EDIT
ARCSET
SPEED : UNUSED
ANALOG OUTPUT3 : UNUSED
ARCCTS AC=200 AVP=100
11-29
6 Set the welding condition. Move the cursor to the item to be set, and press [SELECT]. Type
the welding conditions using the Numeric keys, and press
[ENTER].
DETAIL EDIT
ARCSET
SPEED : UNUSED
To add the additional items, select “UNUSED.” The selection dia-

log box appears.
DETAIL EDIT
ARCSET
WELDING CURR : AC=
AC=134
UNUSED
SPEED : UNUSED
ANALOG OUTPUT4
To release, line up the cursor with the additional items and press
[SELECT] to select “UNUSED.”
JOB CONTENT
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0002 MOVL V=800
0003 ARCON
0004 MOVL V=50
0005 END
11-30

JOB CONTENT
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0002 MOVL V=800
0003 ARCON
0004 MOVL V=50
0005 ARCCTS AC=134 AVP=100
0006 END

JOB CONTENT
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0002 MOVL V=800
0003 ARCON
0004 MOVL V=50
0005 END
11-31
11.4.4 ARCCTS
The ARCCTS instruction is used with a move instruction to gradually change the welding cur-
rent and voltage during welding. A gradual change in the current or voltage is specified by an
aimed value and the length of the slope up/down section. The length of the slope up/down
section is set from the move start point. If no length is specified, the entire section of the move
instruction is used.
<Example>
The current and voltage are gradually changed as the manipulator moves toward the move
end point specified by the move instruction. The aimed current and voltage values are 150A
and 16.0V respectively. The slope up/down section length is 100mm from the move start
point.
ARCCTS AC=150 AV=16.0 DIS=100.0
Aimed welding Aimed welding Slope up/down section length

current value voltage value (distance from move start
point)
MOVL V=80
Gradually Decreasing Current or Voltage
Value immedi ately before executi on

of move instructi on
ARCCTS aimed val ue
ARCCTS executed
DIS =xxx
Move di stance specified
by move i nstructi on
Welding c ontinues
Gradually Increasing Current or Voltage
ARCCTS ai med val ue
Value im m ediately before

ex ec ution of m ov e ins tructi on
ARCCTS executed
DIS=xxx
Move distance specified
by move instructi on
Welding c ontinues
11-32
Registering the ARCCTS Instruction


address area.
IN/OUT
ARCON ARCCTE
CONTROL
ARCOF
DEVICE
VWELD
MOTION
AWELD
ARCSET ARITH
WVON SHIFT
WVOF OTHER
ARCCTS SAME
PRIOR
4 Select the ARCCTS instruc- The ARCCTS instruction appears in the input buffer line.
tion.
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: WORK A IN/OUT
STEP NO: 0003
ARCON ARCCTE
ARCOF
0000 NOP DEVICE
0002 MOVL V=800 AWELD
MOTION
0003 ARCON ARITH
0005 END WVON SHIFT
WVOF OTHER
ARCCTS SAME
PRIOR
DETAIL EDIT
ARCCTS
SPEED : UNUSED
11-33
6 Set the welding condition. Move the cursor to the item to be set and press [SELECT]. Type
the welding conditions using the Numeric keys and press
[ENTER].
DEITAL EDIT
ARCCTS
SPEED : UNUSED

log box appears.
DETAIL EDIT
ARCCTS
WELDING CURR : AC=
AC=134
UNUSED
SPEED : UNUSED
JOB CONTENT
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0002 MOVL V=800
0003 ARCON
0004 MOVL V=50
0005 END
11-34

JOB CONTENT
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0002 MOVL V=800
0003 ARCON
0004 MOVL V=50
0005 ARCCTS AC=134 AVP=100
0006 END

JOB CONTENT
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0002 MOVL V=800
0003 ARCON
0004 MOVL V=50
0005 END
11-35
11.4.5 ARCCTE
The ARCCTE instruction is used with a move instruction to gradually change the welding cur-
rent and voltage during welding. A gradual change in the current or voltage is specified by an
aimed value and the length of the slope up/down section. The length of the slope up/down
section is measured from the move end point. If no length is specified, the entire section of
the move instruction is used.
<Example>
The current and voltage are gradually changed as the manipulator moves toward the move
end point specified by the move instruction. The aimed current and voltage values are 150A
and 16.0V respectively. The slope up/down section length is 100mm from the move end
point.
ARCCTE AC=150 AV=16.0 DIS=100.0
Aimed welding Aimed welding Slope up/down section length

current value current value (distance from move end
point)
MOVL V=80
Gradually Decreasing Current or Voltage
Value immediately before execution of move instruction
ARCCTE aimed val ue
ARCCTE executed
DIS=xxx
M ove di stance specified
by move instructi on
Welding c ontinues
Gradually Increasing Current or Voltage
ARCCTE ai med val ue
Value immediately before

execution of move instruction
ARCCTE executed
DIS=xxx
Move di stance specified
by move i nstructi on
Welding c ontinues
11-36
Registering the ARCCTE Instruction


address area.

IN/OUT
ARCON ARCCTE
CONTROL
ARCOF
DEVICE
VWELD
MOTION
AWELD
ARITH
ARCSET
WVON SHIFT
WVOF OTHER
ARCCTS SAME
PRIOR
4 Select the ARCCTE instruc- The ARCCTE instruction appears in the input buffer line.
tion.
JOB CONTENT
IN/OUT
ARCON ARCCTE
ARCOF
0000 NOP DEVICE
AWELD
0003 ARCON ARITH
0005 END WVON SHIFT
WVOF OTHER
ARCCTS SAME
PRIOR
ARCCTE AC=200 AVP=100
DEITAL EDIT
ARCCTE
WELDING CURR AC= 200
SPEED : UNUSED
11-37
6 Set the welding condition. Move the cursor to the item to be set and press [SELECT]. Type
the welding conditions using the Numeric keys and press
[ENTER].
DEITAL EDIT
ARCCTE
SPEED : UNUSED

log box appears.
DETAIL EDIT
ARCCTE
WELDING CURR : AC=
AC=134
UNUSED
SPEED : UNUSED
JOB CONTENT
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0002 MOVL V=800
0003 ARCON
0004 MOVL V=50
0005 END
11-38

JOB CONTENT
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0002 MOVL V=800
0003 ARCON
0004 MOVL V=50
0005 ARCCTE AC=134 AVP=100
0006 END

JOB CONTENT
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0002 MOVL V=800
0003 ARCON
0004 MOVL V=50
0005 END
• The ARCCTS or ARCCTE instruction is valid for only one step.

NOTE • If the move section specified by the move instruction is shorter than the distance speci-
fied by additional item (DIS=XXX), the change is performed equally in the entire section
of the move instruction.
• If the ARCCTS or ARCCTE instruction specifies the distance as zero (DIS=0.0), the
change is performed equally in the entire section of the move instruction.
• A pair of ARCCTS and ARCCTE instructions can be used on one move instruction. In
that case, the ARCCTS instruction is executed first, and the ARCCTE instruction is exe-
cuted in the remaining part of the move section. If the remaining part of the move section
is 0mm, the ARCCTE instruction is not executed.
11-39
11.5 Welding Condition Files
11.5.1 Welding Condition Files

A welding condition file stores welding conditions. Welding instructions can be easily pro-
grammed using these files. There are the following three types of welding condition files.
• Arc start condition file (max. 48 files)

This file stores arc start conditions. Up to 48 arc start condition files can be registered.
• Arc end condition file (max. 12 files)
This file stores arc end conditions. Up to 12 arc end condition files can be registered.
• Arc auxiliary condition file (max. 4 files for each Power Source)
This file stores other conditions (Retry Func., Restart Func. and Wire Anti-stick Func.) for
each Power Source (up to 4 Power Sources can be connected).
The arc start condition file is set using the ARCON instruction and the arc end condition file is
set using the ARCOF instruction. Various function defined in the arc auxiliary condition file are
referred to by ARCON/ARCOF instructions or in arc start/end condition files. Also, the arc
auxiliary files are shown in three separate displays.
Welding condition files
Arc start condition file Arc end condition file Arc auxiliary condition file
Condition No.1 Condition No.1 Arc retry function setting
Arc restart function setting

Condition No.48 Condition No.12
Automatic wire anti-stick
function setting
11-40
11.5.2 Selecting Welding Condition Files

There are two types of the welding start/end condition file: standard type and enhanced type.
To change the type of a welding condition file, perform the setting following the procedures
below.
When the type of the file changes, the welding start/end condition file is initialized.
NOTE To load a welding condition file that has been saved on an external memory device, files
that are different type than those being used cannot be loaded. Load files of the same
type.
SUPPLE-
Change the setting of the welding condition files in the management mode.
MENT In the operation mode or editing mode, the setting status can be only referred to.
1 While pressing [MAIN MENU],

turn ON the power.

the management mode.
3 Select {SYSTEM} from the

main menu. SECURITY
SYSTEM
DOUT SETUP
MOVE
END
FILE VERSION
TOOL SECURITY
B001
4 Select {SETUP}. The SETUP window appears.

SETUP
LANGUAGE
CONTROL GROUP
APPLICATION
IO MODULE
OPTION BOARD
CMOS MEMORY
DATE/TIME
OPTION FUNCTION
11-41
5 Select “OPTION FUNCTION.” The OPTION FUNCTION window appears.

OPTION FUNCTION
ARC WELDING STANDARD
6 Select “ARC WELDING.” The selection dialog box appears.

OPTION FUNCTION

ENHANCED
7 Select either “STANDARD” or The confirmation dialog box appears. Selecting “YES” changes
“ENHANCED.” the file type and initializes the related files (welding start/end con-
dition files).
OPTION FUNCTION
Modify?
YES NO
Selecting “NO” does not change the file type or initialize the
related files.
8 Select “YES.”
9 Turn ON the power supply

again.
11-42
11.5.3 Arc Start Condition File
ARC START CONDITION

COND NO.: 1/48
c
d COMM.: 1
e CURRENT : 100 A
f VOLTAGE : 100 %
g ROBOT PAUSE TIME : 0.03 sec
h SPEED : 80 cm/min
i RETRY : OFF
j MODE : REPLAY
DIRECT PAGE
COND NO.(1 to 48)

Displays a condition file number between 1 and 48.
COMM.
Displays a comment of 32 characters or less.
CURRENT (1 to 999A)
Welding current output value.
VOLTAGE (0 to 50.0V, 50 to 150%)
Welding voltage output value.
ROBOT PAUSE TIME (0 to 10.00 seconds)
The period at the beginning of welding when the manipulator is stopped.
SPEED (1 to 600 cm/min)
Set manipulator speed during welding.
However, if a move instruction specifies a particular speed in a welding section, it is given
priority. For details, refer to “11.5.9 Welding Speed Specifications.”
RETRY
Specifies whether the arc retry function is used or not.
MODE
Select arc retry function mode (REPLAY).
11-43
11.5.4 Arc End Condition File
ARC END CONDITION

COND NO.: 1/12
c
d COMM. weld1
e CURRENT : 120 A
f VOLTAGE : 80 %
g ROBOT PAUSE TIME : 0.01 sec
h ANTI-STICK : OFF
i MONITORING : 0.2 sec
COND NO. (1 to 12)

Displays a condition number between 1 and 12.
COMM.
CURRENT (1 to 999A)
Welding current output value at the end of welding.
VOLTAGE (0 to 50.0V, 50 to 150%)
Welding voltage output value at the end of welding.
The period during arc end when the manipulator is stopped.
ANTI-STICK
Specifies whether the automatic wire anti-stick function is used or not.
MONITORING(0 to 9.9 seconds)
Wire stick monitoring time at the end of welding.
11-44
11.5.5 Arc Auxiliary Condition File

An arc auxiliary condition file has the following three parts:
• Arc Retry Function Setting

• Arc Restart Function Setting
• Automatic Wire Anti-stick Function Setting
Arc Retry Function Setting
ARC AUXILIARY COND

COND NO.: 1
<RETRY FUNCTION SET>
c NO. : 1 times
d RETRACT TIME : 1.50 sec
e REPLAY DISTANCE : 10.0 mm
f SPEED : 30 cm/min
g CURRENT : 100 A
h VOLTAGE : 100 %
NO. (0 to 9 times)
Maximum repetition count for the arc retry process.
RETRACT TIME (0 to 2.50 seconds)
Wire retracting time in the arc retry process.
REPLAY DISTANCE (0 to 99.9 mm)
Manipulator moving distance for an arc retry process at the replay mode.
Speed of the manipulator when it returns to the welding start point at arc retry.
CURRENT (1 to 999A)
Welding current output when the manipulator returns to the welding start point at arc retry.
VOLTAGE (0 to 50.0V, 50 to 150%)
Welding voltage output when the manipulator returns to the welding start point at arc retry.
11-45
Arc Restart Function Setting
ARC AUXILIARY COND

COND NO.: 1
<RESTART FUNCTION SET>
c NO. : 1 times
d LAP DISTANCE : 10.0 mm
e SPEED : 30 cm/min
f CURRENT : 100 A
g VOLTAGE : 100 %
h RESTART MODE
1.ARC FAILURE : NO RESTART
2.GAS FAILURE : NO RESTART
NO. (0 to 9 times)
Maximum repetition count for the arc restart process regarding the same welding section.
LAP DISTANCE (0 to 99.9mm)
Overlapped welding distance in a restart process.
Speed of the manipulator as it moves backward in an arc restart process.
CURRENT (1 to 999A)
Welding current output when the manipulator moves backward in an arc restart process.
VOLTAGE (0 to 50.0V, 50 to 150%)
Welding voltage output when the manipulator moves backward in an arc restart process.
RESTART MODE
1. ARC FAILURE
NO RESTART : Arc restart function is not used. The manipulator stops with the arc
failure alarm.
ARCOF CONTINUE : With the arc OFF, the controller outputs the “Restarting for Arc”
message and the manipulator keeps moving. After moving through the arc section, the
controller outputs the “End of Arc Restarting” message and resumes a normal welding
operation. The message is reset when OUT #1021 is turned ON and OFF.
AUTO RESTART : The manipulator automatically restarts.
SEMI-AUTO RESTART : The manipulator stops and waits for manual intervention.
The manipulator restarts as the operator presses [START] again. The restart status is
reset when OUT #1022 is turned ON and OFF.
2. GAS FAILURE
NO RESTART : Arc restart function is not used. The manipulator moves with the gas
shortage alarm.
ALARM AT ARC END : The manipulator continues the welding operation until it
reaches the welding end point, where it stops with an alarm.
3. WIRE FAILURE
NO RESTART: Arc restart function is not used. The manipulator moves with the wire
shortage alarm.
ALARM AT ARC END : The manipulator continues the welding operation until it
11-46
reaches the welding end point, where it stops with an alarm.

Automatic Wire Anti-stick Function Setting
ARC AUXILIARY COND

COND NO.; 1
<WIRE ANTI-STICKING FUNCTION SET>
c NO. : 1 times
d CURRENT : 110 A
e VOLTAGE : 120 %
f CLOCK : 0.30 sec
NO. (0 to 9 times)
Maximum repetition count for the wire-sticking release process.
CURRENT (1 to 999A)
The welding current output in the wire-sticking release process.
VOLTAGE (0 to 50.0V, 50 to 150%)
The welding voltage output in the wire-sticking release process.
CLOCK (0 to 2.00 seconds)
Sticking release process duration.
11-47
11.5.6 Enhanced Arc Start Condition File
ARC START CONDITION

COND NO.: 1/48
c
d COMMENT: AL. Tig Welding
<STARTING CONDITION>
e CURRENT : 200 A
f VOLTAGE : 100 %
g ANALOG OUTPUT 3 CMD : 0.00 V
h ANALOG OUTPUT 4 CMD : 0.00 V
i ROBOT PAUSE TIME : 0.00 sec
j ROBOT MOVE DISTANCE : 5.0 mm
<MAIN CONDITION>
CURRENT : 200 A
COND.NO. (1 to 48)
COMMENT
CURRENT (1 to 999A)
Welding current output value. Different values can be specified for “START CONDITION”
and “MAIN CONDITION.”
VOLTAGE (0 to 50.0V, 50 to 150%)
Welding voltage output value. Different values can be specified for “START CONDITION”
and “MAIN CONDITION.”
ANALOG OUTPUT 3 CMD (-14.0 to 14.0V)
The reference value to the Power Source through the analog output 3. Different values can
be specified for “START CONDITION” and “MAIN CONDITION.”
The reference value to the Power Source through the analog output 4. Different values can
be specified for “START CONDITION” and “MAIN CONDITION.”
The duration which the manipulator pauses at the beginning of wleding while retaining the
specified “START CONDITION.”
ROBOT MOVE DISTANCE (0 to 25.5mm)
The distance which the manipulator moves at the beginning of welding while retaining the
specified “START CONDITION.”
Set manipulator speed during welding.
However, if a move instruction specifies a particular speed in the welding section, it is given
priority. For details, refer to “11.5.9 Welding Speed Specifications.”
RETRY
Specifies whether the arc retry function is used or not.
11 MODE
Select arc retry function mode (REPLAY).
11-48
The timing chart at execution of the Enhanced arc start condition file is shown below.
ARCON executed
Arc start
confirmation signal
Manipulator move section

Start condition
Main condition
Current, voltage and analog

output specifications
Waiting for arc start Manipulator move distance

confirmation signal Manipulator pause time
11.5.7 Enhanced Arc End Condition File
ARC END CONDITION

COND NO.: 1/12
c
d COMM.: AL Tig Welding
e <CRATER CONDITION 1>
f CURRENT : 200 A
g VOLTAGE : 100 %
h ANALOG OUTPUT 3 CMD : 0.00 V
i ANALOG OUTPUT 4 CMD : 0.00 V
j ROBOT PAUSE TIME : 0.00 sec
<CRATER CONDITION 2>
CURRENT : 200 A
VOLTAGE : 100 %
ANALOG OUTPUT 3 CMD : 0.00 V
ANALOG OUTPUT 4 CMD : 0.00 V
ROBOT PAUSE TIME : 0.00 sec
k ANTI-STICK : OFF
l MONITORING : 0.2 sec
COND.NO.(1 to 12)
COMM.
CRATER CONDITION 1, CRATER CONDITION 2
Crater condition referred to at the end of welding. “CRATER CONDITION 1” is executed
before “CRATER CONDITION 2.”
CURRENT (1 to 999A)
Welding current output value at the end of welding.
11-49
VOLTAGE (0 to 50.0V, 50 to 150%)

Welding voltage output value at the end of welding.
The reference value to the Power Source through the analog output 3.
The reference value to the Power Source through the analog output 4.
ROBOT PAUSE TIME(0 to 10.00 seconds)
The duration at the end of welding when the specified “CRATER CONDITION” is retained.
ANTI-STICK
Specifies whether the automatic wire anti-stick function is used or not.
MONITORING(0 to 9.9 seconds)
Specifies wire stick monitoring time at the end of welding.
The timing chart at execution of the Enhanced arc end condition file is shown below.
ARCOF executed
Arc start
confirmation signal
Manipulator move section
Current, voltage and analog Crater

output specifications condition 1 Crater
condition 2
Manipulator pause time of Wire stick release time

crater condition 1 Manipulator pause time of
crater condition 2
11-50
11.5.8 Editing Welding Condition File

Displaying the Welding Condition File
1 Select {ARC WELDING} under

the main menu. JOB PARAMETER
DOUT
MOVE
END
ARC WELDING SETUP
VARIABLE
B001
IN/OUT
In Out
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFO
JOB PARAMETER
DOUT
MOVE
END
ARC START COND.

ARC WELDING
ARC END COND.

VARIABLE
B001
ARC AUX COND.
IN/OUT
In Out POWER SOURCE

COND.
ROBOT
ARC WELD DIAG.
SYSTEM INFO
WEAVING
2 Select {ARC START COND},

{ARC END COND}, or {ARC JOB EDIT DISPLAY UTILITY
AUX COND}. JOB

DOUT
PARAMETER
MOVE
END
ARC START COND.

ARC WELDING
ARC END COND.

VARIABLE
B001
ARC AUX COND.
IN/OUT
In Out POWER SOURCE

COND.
ROBOT
ARC WELD DIAG.
SYSTEM INFO
WEAVING
If {ARC START COND} is selected, a setting window appears.

ARC START CONDITION

COND NO.: 1/64
COMMENT :
CURRENT : 200 A
VOLTAGE : 100 %
ROBOT PAUSE TIME : 0.00 sec
11-51
3 Display the desired file num- <For Arc Start Condition Files and Arc End Condition Files>
ber. The following two methods are available.
GO BACK
• Using the page key PAGE
GO BACK
Pressing the page key PAGE

calls the next file number.
GO BACK
Pressing [SHIFT]+ the page key PAGE

calls the previous file
number.
• Using the Numeric keys
Press [DIRECT PAGE]. Type the desired file number using the
Numeric keys and press [ENTER].
<For Arc Auxiliary Condition Files>

GO BACK
Pressing the page key PAGE

calls the next file number. The file
number is called in the order of “1” → “2” → “3” → “1.”
GO BACK
Pressing [SHIFT] + the page key PAGE

calls the previous file
number. The file number is called in the order of “3” → “2” → “1”
→ “3.”
11-52
Editing the Arc Start Condition File

Editing COMMENT
1 Select “COMM.”
2 Input characters.
Editing RETRY
1 Select “RETRY.” Each time [SELECT] is pressed, the indication alternates

between “ON” and “OFF.”
Editing MODE
1 Select “MODE.” Each time [SELECT] is pressed, the indication alternates

between “REPLAY” and “SHIFT.”
Editing Other Items
1 Select an item to be edited.
2 Input the number using the

Numeric keys.
11-53
Editing the Arc End Condition File

Editing COMMENT
1 Select “COMM.”
2 Input characters.
Editing ANTI-STICK
1 Select “ANTI-STICK.” Each time [SELECT] is pressed, the indication alternates

between “ON” and “OFF.”
Editing Other Items
1 Select an item to be edited.
2 Input the number using the

Numeric keys.
11.5.9 Welding Speed Specifications

The welding speed is determined by one of the following:
• Welding speed specified by play speed of the move instruction
• Welding speed specified by the ARCON instruction or arc start condition file
When the move instruction does not specify a speed

Welding is performed at the ARCON instruction or arc start condition file speed.
When the move instruction and ARCON instruction specify different speeds
Priority is given to one according to the parameter values described below. To switch the pri-
orities, change the parameter setting.
Parameter Contents Initial Value
AxP005 Move instruction speed is priority : 0 0

ARCON instruction speed is priority : 1
11-54
11.6 Changing Welding Conditions During Playback
NOTE Changing the welding conditions during playback is enabled only when the command con-
dition is analog type.
11.6.1 Function Keys

While the ARC COND ADJUSTMENT window is displayed in the play mode, the welding cur-
rent and voltage can be changed using the function keys. The arc welding performance dur-
ing playback changes with the welding current and voltage. The changed data of the current
and voltage values can be reflected in the associated instructions or welding condition files.
3 When [ CUR/VOL ] is pressed, the welding current and voltage increase.

CUR/VOL When [ CUR/VOL ] is pressed, the welding current and voltage decrease.
Each time the key is pressed, the current changes in increments of 1A, and the
- voltage changes in increments of 1% or 0.1V.
CUR/VOL
11-55
11.6.2 Changing Welding Conditions

1 Select {UTILITY} on the JOB

CONTENT window in the play
mode.
2 Select {WELD COND. The ARC COND ADJUSTMENT window appears.

ADJUST.}. The last instruction that sets the welding current or voltage is dis-
played.
The instruction includes the following:
• ARCON
• ARCSET
ARC COND ADJUSTMENT
CURR(A) : 200 INST : ARCON

VOLT(%) : 100 INST : ARCON
DATA : No change data
3 Line up the cursor with the cur-

rent or voltage condition to be
modified.
4 Adjust the value using [ CUR/ • The current and voltage can be independently changed.
VOL ] or [ CUR/VOL]. • Units of Increase/Decrease: If the key is pressed once, the cur-
rent value increases/decreases in units of ± 1A, and the voltage
value increases/decreases in units of ± 0.1V or in percentages
of ± 1%.
ARC COND ADJUSTMENT

ARC COND ADJUSTMENT

11-56
5 Line up the cursor with “No Each time [SELECT] is pressed, the setting alternates between
change data” and press “No change data” and “Change data.”
[SELECT]. • To rewrite the modified condition file or additional item data, set
“Change data.”
The data are rewritten when the execution of the instruction
which includes the changed condition data ends.
• If “No change data” is set before execution ends, the data is not
rewritten.
ARC COND ADJUSTMENT

DATA : No change data
SELECT
ARC COND ADJUSTMENT

DATA : Change data
Even if control jumps from one job to another job,

NOTE rewriting of the arc condition for the former job is per-
formed.
11.6.3 Notes on Modification of Welding Conditions

When Condition Data cannot be Modified
In the following cases, the window returns to the previous window of the ARC COND
ADJUSTMENT window. Even if the function keys are pressed, current and voltage cannot be
modified.
• The mode is switched (to the teach mode, for example).

• An emergency stop is ON.
11-57
The maximum current and voltage values are determined according to the voltage and cur-
NOTE rent characteristics of the Power Source.
< Example >
When using a Power Source with the current characteristics as shown in the following
table:
When the data points are interpolated on the graph, it can be observed that the maximum
reference value (14.0V) is reached when the welding current specified by the ARCON
instruction is 395 A. This becomes the maximum value.
Measured value Command Measurement

(A)
Value Value
400 (V) (A)
1.80 110
300
4.40 165
6.40 220
200 8.30 265
10.50 315
0 0
100
0 0
0 0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 (V)
Reference
Max value
Welding Current Output Characteristics
ARCON Instruction
The ARCON instruction without an additional item is not subject to arc condition rewriting.
ARCON ASF#(1) : Current and voltage values can be rewritten.

ARCON AC=220 AVP=100: Current and voltage values can be rewritten.
ARCON : Conditions cannot be rewritten.
ARCOF Instruction
The conditions of the ARCOF instruction cannot be rewritten.
11-58
ARCCTS and ARCCTE Instructions

The arc condition adjustment operation is invalid while the slope up/down instruction ARCCTS
or ARCCTE is executed.
Even if “Change data” is set on the ARC COND ADJUSTMENT window, rewriting cannnot be
done after the ARCCTS or ARCCTE instruction.
:
ARCON ASF#(1)
No Rewriting ARCCTE AC=150 AVP=120
MOVL
ARCSET AC=200
MOVL
:
SUPPLE-
Refer to " 11.3.7 Slope Up/Down Function, " " 11.4.4 ARCCTS, " and " 11.4.5 ARCCTE "
MENT for details regarding the ARCCTS and ARCCTE instructions.
11-59
11.7 Arc Welding Management and Maintenance
11.7.1 ARC WELD DIAGNOSIS Window

An optimum arc welding requires timely contact-tip replacement and nozzle cleaning. It is
also recommended that the user check how often such functions as arc retry, arc restart, and
automatic anti-stick have been used and adjust the operating environment and work condi-
tions accordingly.
The usage of the above-mentioned functions can be controlled or confirmed on the ARC
WELD DIAGNOSIS window. For example, contact-tip replacement is initially set at 180 min-
utes. When the welding time reaches 180 minutes, an external output signal (system output)
is output. The operator can then replace the tip or adjust as necessary.
ARC WELD DIAGNOSIS

NO.: 1/1
WORK CONTINUE : CONT In this example, an external output
c signal (system output) is output
<ACCUM.> <SETTING>
TIP REPLACE : 72 min 180 min when the accumlated welding time
d NOZZLE CLEAN : 12 min 30 min reaches 180 minutes.
RETRY : 5 times 10 times
e RESTART (ARC) : 2 times 10 times
ANTI-STICK : 0 times 10 times
WORK CONTINUE
When the manipulator is restarted after it stops in the middle of a work section, the manipu-
lator either performs welding over the remaining part of the section or moves without per-
forming welding.
TIP REPLACE, NOZZLE CLEAN (0 to 999 minutes)

In the “SETTING” fields, specify the optimum timings for contact-tip replacement and nozzle
cleaning. The initial values are 180 minutes for contact-tip replacement; 30 minutes for noz-
zle cleaning. The “ACCUM.” fields display an accumulated service duration.
RETRY, RESTART (ARC), ANTI-STICK

In each of the “SETTING” fields, specify a reference value for the number of times each
function is used. As an initial setting, 10 is specified for each function. Each of the
“ACCUM.” fields displays the accumulated count, showing how many times the function has
been used.
ARC RETRY, ARC RESTART, and ANTI-STICK counts:

SUPPLE-
MENT
These counts are different from the maximum repetition counts specified in the arc auxil-
iary condition file. These counts show how many times these functions have actually been
used.
11-60
11.7.2 Editing the ARC WELD DIAGNOSIS Window

PARAMETER
the main menu.
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
ARC WELDING SETUP
VARIABLE
B001
IN/OUT
In Out
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFO
2 Select {ARC WELD DIAG.}.

JOB EDIT DIPSLAY UTILITY
JOB PARAMETER
DOUT
MOVE
END
ARC START COND.

ARC WELDING
ARC END COND.

VARIABLE
B001
ARC AUX COND.
IN/OUT
In Out POWER SOURCE

COND.
ROBOT
ARC WELD DIAG.
SYSTEM INFO
WEAVING
3 Line up the cursor with each <Setting the Work Continue Specification>
set item and press [SELECT] When [SELECT] is pressed, the setting alternates between
to edit it. “CONT” and “STOP.”
ARC WELD DIAGNOSIS

NO.: 1/1
WORK CONTINUE : CONT
<ACCUM.> <SETTING>
TIP REPLACE : 72 min 180 min
NOZZLE CLEAN : 12 min 30 min
5 10
2 10
0 SELECT 10
ARC WELD DIAGNOSIS

NO.: 1/1
WORK CONTINUE : STOP
<ACCUM.> <SETTING>
RESTART (ARC) : 2 times 10 times
11-61
11.8 Displaying Welding Alarm History
3 (cont’d) <Setting the Control Value>

Move the cursor the setting value to be changed and press
[SELECT].
Input the desired value using the Numeric keys and press
[ENTER].
ARC WELD DIAGNOSIS

NO.: 1/1
WORK CONTINUE : CONT
<ACCUM.> <SETTING>
RESTART (ARC) : 2 times 10 times
The accumulated value can be cleared by either of the following:

SUPPLE-
MENT • ARC WELD DIAGNOSIS window
• External input signal (system input signal)
The historical records of welding-related alarms can be viewed on the user alarm (system
section) window. To view the detailed information about alarm occurence, use the alarm
detailed window.
Alarm History Windows

There are 5 types of alarm history windows :“MAJOR ALARM,” “MINOR ALARM,” “USER
ALARM(SYSTEM),” “USER ALARM(USER),” and “OFF-LINE ALARM.” In each window, the
alarm code, occurrence date, time, and detailed information are displayed.
11-62
1 Select {SYSTEM INFO} under The sub-menu for the system information appears.
the main menu.
JOB FD/PC CARD

DOUT
MOVE
END CF
VERSION
VARIABLE
B001
MONITORING TIME
IN/OUT
In Out
ALARM HISTORY
ROBOT
IO MSG HISTORY
SYSTEM INFO
SECURITY
2 Select {ALARM HISTORY}. The alarm history window appears. (The MAJOR ALARM window
is used for this example.)
MAJOR ALARM
CODE DATE CLOCK
01 1030 1998/05/12 12:00
02 0060 1998/06/15 15:25
03
04
05
06
07
08
Memory error (Parameter file)

[5]
JOB: TEST0001 Line: 0010 STEP: 010
3 GO BACK GO BACK
Using the page key PAGE

to Each time the page key PAGE
is pressed, the window alternates
change the window. between “MAJOR ALARM,” “MINOR ALARM,” “USER
ALARM (SYSTEM),” “USER ALARM (USER),” and “OFF-LINE
ALARM.”
USER ALARM (USER)

CODE DATE CLOCK
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
11-63
11.9 Notes on Arc Welding
11.9 Notes on Arc Welding
Notes on Restarting
If the manipulator stops during welding, the arc is automatically turned OFF. When restarted,
the arc is automatically turned ON, and the manipulator starts welding towards the step where
the cursor is located on the screen. The welding current and voltage when arc is turned ON
again are the same as those before stopping.
P1 P2
Arc ON Manipulator stops. Arc OFF
Welding Welding
Arc OFF as manipulator stops.

Arc ON as manipulator restarts.
• If the manipulator is moved from the stopped position using the axis keys, return the
NOTE manipulator to the stopped position before restarting for safe operation.
• It is possible to move the manipulator to the stopped position automatically at restarting
and start welding again by the parameter setting (S2C323, S2C324).
S2C323: Restart Operation after E-Stop (Set 2.)

S2C324: Restart Operation after Jog Operation (Set 2.)
• [FWD] or [BWD] can be used for moving to the stopped position.

• Refer to “NX100 Concurrent IO • Parameter” for details of the parameter setting.
Arc OFF as
manipulator stops.
P1 P2
Arc ON Arc OFF
Manipulator
Welding Stops
Ax
is
mo
ve
me
DANGER!
nt
Arc ON as manipulator restarts.
11-64
11.10 Weaving Condition File
11.10Weaving Condition File
11.10.1 Weaving Basic Coordinate System

Weaving is performed based on the following coordinate system. This coordinate system is
automatically generated when weaving is executed.
Wall direction
Direction of travel
Horizontal direction
Weaving Basic Coordinate System
Wall Direction: Z-direction of the robot axis

Horizontal Direction: The direction to the approach point from the wall
Direction of Travel: The direction in which the manipulator moves from the weaving start point
to the end point
The approach point is a point indicated by a step immediately before the step where weav-
SUPPLE-
MENT ing starts.
Z-axis
Wall direction
Approach point
Horizontal
direction
Depending on the mounting status and shape of the workpiece, a definition of the above
NOTE coordinate system may not be sufficient to generate a weaving pattern. In that case, regis-
ter the reference point REFP 1 or REFP 2. For details, refer to “ Cases that Require the
Registration of Reference Points” in “11.10.3 Editing the Weaving Condition Files.”
11-65
11.10.2 WEAVING CONDITION Window
WEAVING CONDITION
c COND NO. 1/16
d MODE : SINGLE
e SMOOTH : ON
f SPEED TYPE : MOVING TIME
g FREQUENCY : 3.5 Hz
h <PATTERN>
AMPLITUDE : 2.000 mm
VERTICAL : 10.000 mm
HORIZONTAL : 10.000 mm
ANGLE : 45.00 deg.
TRAVEL ANGLE : 5.00 deg.
i <TIMER MODE>
POINT1 : WEAV STOP
POINT2 : WEAV STOP
POINT3 : WEAV STOP
POINT4 : WEAV STOP
j <MOTION TIME>
SECTION1 : 0.1 sec
SECTION2 : 0.1 sec
SECTION3 : 0.1 sec
SECTION4 : 0.1 sec
k <STOP TIMER>
POINT1 : 0.0 sec
POINT2 : 0.0 sec
POINT3 : 0.0 sec
POINT4 : 0.0 sec
l <HOVER WEAVING COND.>
SET : OFF
TIMER : 0.0 sec
INPUT SIGNAL : IN#000
DIRECT PAGE
COND NO. (1 to 16)

Displays a weaving condition file number between 1 and 16. Up to 16 weaving condition
files can be stored.
MODE, SMOOTH
There are three weaving modes: single oscillation, triangle oscillation, and L-type oscilla-
tion. Each mode can be specified with or without smoothing.
0 With smoothing
1 Without smoothing
0 : Single 1 : Triangle 2 : L-type
oscillation oscillation oscillation
Weaving Modes Smoothing
SPEED TYPE (FREQUENCY, MOTION TIME)

Specifies how the oscillation speed is defined.
There are two methods to set the oscillation speed: setting by frequency and setting by
weaving time in weaving sections.
11-66
FREQUENCY
Specifies the weaving frequency if “SPEED TYPE” is set to “FREQUENCY.” Note that the
maximum frequency is determined by the amplitude as illustrated in the graph below. Spec-
ify a frequency within the allowable range.
A m plitude 60
(m m )
50
40
30
20
10
0 1 2 3 4 5
Frequency(Hz)
M ax im um Frequenci es for Di fferent Ampl i tudes
PATTERN
• AMPLITUDE
Specifies the amplitude size at weaving when “MODE” is set to “SINGLE.”
Single-amplitude
• VERTICAL, HORIZONTAL
If “MODE” is set to “TRIANGLE” or “L-TYPE,” the data for the triangle must be set to
define the weaving pattern.
Wall direction
Vertical/horizontal distance: 1.0 to 25.0mm
Vertical
distance
Horizontal
distance
MODE: TRIANGLE, L-TYPE
11-67
• ANGLE
Specifies the oscillation angle.
Wall direction
Angle : 0.1 to 180.0°

Horizontal
Angle direction
MODE: SINGLE
Wall direction
Angle: 0.1 to 180.0°

Angle
Vertical
distance
Horizontal
distance MODE: TRIANGLE, L-TYPE
• TRAVEL ANGLE
Specifies the direction of travel for oscillation.
Direction of travel
A
Travel angle
+
0∞
Travel angle
-
View A
11-68
TIMER (MODE)
As shown below, a single weaving cycle is divided into three or four sections. A timer mode
can be specified for each section.
Wall direction Wall direction Wall direction
d d
f e
e e d
c
f c c
Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal
direction direction direction
Single Triangle L-type
oscillation oscillation oscillation
Set one of the following timer modes:

WEAV STOP : Weaving stops but manipulator moves.
ROBOT STOP : Manipulator stops.
WEAV STOP: Weaving stops but manipulator moves.
ROBOT STOP: Manipulator pauses.
MOTION TIME
If “SPEED TYPE” is set to “MOTION TIME,” the weaving time specified here determines the
moving speed in each of the weaving sections.
STOP TIMER
Specifies the timer to determine weaving stop or manipulator stop for each section.
HOVER WEAVING COND. (option)
• SET (ON/OFF)
Specifies whether hover weaving is used or not.
• TIMER
Finishes hover weaving when this timer specified here expires.
• INPUT SIGNAL
Finishes hover weaving when the set input signal is input.
In hover weaving, the start and end points are the same, and therefore the weaving vector
NOTE cannot be determined. For this reason, the user needs to register a reference point (REFP
3) to define the direction of travel.
11-69
Wall direction
REFP 3
Direction of Travel
Weaving start point

Weaving end point Horizontal direction
Hover W eaving
Wall Direction: Robot axis Z+ direction

Horizontal Direction: Direction from the wall to approach point
Direction of Travel: Direction from weaving start point to REFP3
In hover weaving, the start and end points are the same, and therefore there are following
NOTE limitations.
• Arc retry function and arc restart function is not available.
11.10.3 Editing the Weaving Condition Files

Displaying a Weaving File

the main menu.
JOB PARAMETER
DOUT
MOVE
END
ARC START COND.

ARC WELDING
ARC END COND.

VARIABLE
B001
ARC AUX COND.
IN/OUT
In Out POWER SOURCE

COND.
ROBOT
ARC WELD DIAG.
SYSTEM INFO
WEAVING
11-70
2 Select {WEAVING}.
WEAVING CONDITION
COND NO. 1/16
MODE : SINGLE
SMOOTH : ON
SPEED TYPE : FREQUENCY
FREQUENCY : 3.5 Hz
<PATTERN>
ANGLE : 45.00 deg.
<TIMER MODE>
POINT1 : WEAV STOP
POINT2 : WEAV STOP
POINT3 : WEAV STOP
DIRECT PAGE
3 Display the desired file num- GO BACK
The desired file can be called up by using the page key .

ber. PAGE
GO BACK
Press the page key PAGE

to call the next file.
GO BACK
Press [SHIFT]+ page key PAGE

to call the previous file.
Editing the Condition Data

1 Select the item to be edited.

WEAVING CONDITION
COND NO. 1/16
MODE : SINGLE
SMOOTH : ON
FREQUENCY : 3.5 Hz
<PATTERN>
ANGLE : 45.00 deg.
<TIMER MODE>
2 Input the value using the

DATA
Numeric keys. EDIT DISPLAY UTILITY
WEAVING CONDITION
COND NO. 1/16
MODE : SINGLE
SMOOTH : ON
FREQUENCY : 5.0 Hz
<PATTERN>
ANGLE : 45.00 deg.
<TIMER MODE>
11-71
Cases that Require the Registration of Reference Points

The registration of the reference point REFP1 or REFP2 is not usually required. They are
required only with a special workpiece condition, etc.
The REFP1, that defines the wall direction, is a point on the wall surface or its expansion
plane. The REFP2, which defines the horizontal direction, is a point at the right or left side of
the wall.
REFP1 REFP2
On the wall surface or At the right or left side of the wall
its expansion plane
Wall
Wall
REFP2
REFP1
Wall direction Wall direction
REFP2
REFP1
Direction Direction
of travel of travel
Horizontal
direction
SUPPLE-
For information on registering REFP, refer to “ Registering Reference Point Instructions”
MENT in “4.2.3 Teaching Steps.”
< Example 1 > REFP1 is registered because the wall direction is not parallel to the Z-axis of
the robot coordinates.
Z-axis
Example
Wall direction
0003 MOVL V=120

0004 REFP 1
REFP1 0005 WVON WEV#(1)
0006 MOVL V=50
0007 WVOF
11-72
< Example 2 > REFP2 is registered because the approach point is at another side of the
wall.
Example
Wall
Approach point Approach point 0009 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0010 MOVL V=120
0011 REFP 2
REFP2
0012 WVON WEV#(1)
0013 MOVL V=50
0014 WVOF
Prohibiting Weaving
If the weaving instruction is registered during the “CHECK” operation in the play mode or
“TEST RUN” or [FWD] key operation in the teach mode, weaving is executed as well as other
move instructions. However, in some cases when weaving is not wanted becase a workpiece
collides,etc., follow the procedure below to prohibit weaving.
Method to Prohibit Weaving During a “CHECK” operation

1 Press [AREA] on the PLAY-

BACK window.
2 Select {UTILITY}.
UTILITY EDIT DISPLAY UTILITY
SETUP SPECIAL
RUN
PARALLEL SHIFT
JOB
MIRROR SHIFT
PAM
3 Select {SETUP SPECIAL The SPECIAL PLAY window appears.

RUN}.
SPECIAL PLAY
LOW SPEED START : INVALID

SPEED LIMIT : INVALID
DRY-RUN SPEED : INVALID
MACHINE LOCK : INVALID
CHECK-RUN : INVALID
WEAV PROHIBIT IN CHK-RUN : INVALID
COMPLETE
11-73
4 Select “WEAV PROHIBIT IN Each time [SELECT] is pressed, “VALID” and “INVALID” alter-
CHK-RUN.” nate.
SPECIAL PLAY
LOW SPEED START : INVALID

SPEED LIMIT : INVALID
DRY-RUN SPEED : INVALID
MACHINE LOCK : INVALID
CHECK-RUN : INVALID
WEAV PROHIBIT IN CHK-RUN : VALID
Method to Prohibit Weaving During the “TEST RUN” or FWD Operation

1 Press [AREA] on the JOB

CONTENT window in the
TEACH mode.
2 Select {UTILITY}.
UTILITY EDIT DISPLAY UTILITY
SETUP SPECIAL
RUN
PARALLEL SHIFT
JOB
MIRROR SHIFT
PAM
3 Select {SETUP SPECIAL The SPECIAL TEACH window appears.

RUN}.
SPECIAL TEACH
WEAV PROHIBIT IN TEST RUN/NEXT : INVALID
COMPLETE
4 Select “WEAV PROHIBIT IN

TEST RUN/NEXT.”
SPECIAL TEACH
WEAV PROHIBIT IN TEST RUN/NEXT : VALID
Method to Prohibit Weaving by Means of a System Input Signal

The system input signal 40047 is used.
The system input signal can prohibit weaving at any time during a play operation , regardless
of whether or not it is a check operation.
11-74
11.10.4 Registering Weaving Instructions

WVON Instruction
This is the weaving start operation.

address area.

IN/OUT
CONTROL
DEVICE
MOTION
ARITH
SHIFT
OTHER
SAME
PRIOR
IN/OUT
ARCON ARCCTE
CONTROL
ARCOF
DEVICE
VWELD
MOTION
AWELD
ARCSET
ARITH
WVON SHIFT
WVOF OTHER
ARCCTS SAME
PRIOR
4 Select the WVON instruction. The “WVON” instruction appears in the input buffer line.
JOB CONTENT
IN/OUT
ARCON ARCCTE
0000 NOP ARCOF
DEVICE
AWELD
0003 ARCON ARITH
0005 MOVL V=50 WVON SHIFT
0006 ARCOF
WVOF OTHER
0007 END
ARCCTS SAME
PRIOR
WVON WEV#(1)
11-75
5 Press [SELECT], and set the Select the file number (1 to 16). Move the cursor to the file num-
file number in the DETAIL ber and press [SELECT]. Input the file number using the Numeric
EDIT window. keys and press [ENTER].
WVON WEV#(1)
DETAIL EDIT
WVON
WEAVING FILE : WEV#() 1
SET METHOD : WEV#(1)
DIRECTION : UNUSED
WVON WEV#(1)
6 Press [ENTER]. The set contents are displayed in the input buffer line. Press
[ENTER] again to register the set contents in the job.
When the set contents are not to be registered, press [CANCEL]
to return to the JOB CONTENT window.
JOB CONTENT
IN/OUT
JOB NAME: WORK A
ARCON ARCCTE
CONTROL GROUP: R1 CONTROL
0000 NOP ARCOF
DEVICE
AWELD
0003 ARCON
ARCSET
ARITH
0004 WVON WEV#(1)
0006 MOVL V=50
WVOF OTHER
0007 ARCOF
0008 END ARCCTS SAME
PRIOR
WVON WEV#(1)
WVOF Instruction
This is the weaving end instruction.

address area.
11-76

IN/OUT
CONTROL
DEVICE
MOTION
ARITH
SHIFT
OTHER
SAME
PRIOR
IN/OUT
ARCON ARCCTE
CONTROL
ARCOF
DEVICE
VWELD
MOTION
AWELD
ARCSET
ARITH
WVON SHIFT
WVOF OTHER
ARCCTS SAME
PRIOR
4 Select the “WVOF” instruction.

JOB CONTENT
IN/OUT
JOB NAME: WORK A
ARCON ARCCTE
ARCOF
0000 NOP DEVICE
AWELD
0003 ARCON ARITH
0006 ARCOF OTHER
WVOF
0007 END
ARCCTS SAME
PRIOR
WVOF

JOB CONTENT IN/OUT

JOB NAME: WORK A ARCCTE
ARCON
ARCOF
0000 NOP DEVICE
AWELD
0003 ARCON ARITH
0004 WVON WEV#(1) ARCSET
0006 MOVL V=50 OTHER
WVOF
0007 ARCOF
0008 END ARCCTS SAME
PRIOR
WVOF
11-77
11.11 Power Source Condition File
11.11Power Source Condition File
11.11.1 About Power Source Condition File

This is the file where the Power Source characteristics: voltage characteristic, etc., is regis-
tered. This file contains the information for Power Source control.
For precise control of the welding current and voltage, the control signals sent from the con-
troller to the Power Source must be properly adjusted.
The voltage of the current control signal is called the welding current reference value; the volt-
age of the voltage control signal is called the welding voltage reference value. A reference
value is in the range between 0 and 14V (or between 0 and -14 depending on Power
Sources).
How the output of the welding current or voltage changes with the reference value depends on
the Power Source model, and this relationship between the reference value and output value
is called an output characteristics. Each Power Source condition data file contains the output
values (measured values) associated with several reference values. The figure below is an
example of the welding current output characteristic curve.
Welding current
output value Correction value = 1.2
The inclination between the last
(A) two points is extended beyond
the last point
Welding current output characteristics
230
Correction value = 0.8

200
170
140
100
: Data point
0 1 2.2 3 4 5 (V)
Welding current reference value

Welding Current Output Characteristics (Example)
11-78
Note that the data points (points of measurement) are automatically connected by straight
lines, which define the output values of any points off these data points. The inclination
between the last two data points is extended as a straight line beyond the last point until it
reaches the end of the measuring range. If the intended welding current or voltage is not out-
put due to a fluctuation in the Power Source’s power supply voltage, adjust the output by
specifying a correction value. The figure (welding current output characteristics) shows how a
correction value works.
The following are the three types of the Power Source condition files. Each file consists of two
windows.
Execution File
(4 files: for Connectable Power Source) User Registered File (4 files) Initial Value File (24 files: Maker Offer)
Power Source Characteristics Power Source Characteristics Power Source Characteristics
Power Source Characteristics Power Source Characteristics

Power Source Characteristics ・・
<Current> <Voltage> <Current> <Voltage>
<Current> <Voltage> ・
Power Source Condition Files
The execution file is used to set the condition file of the Power Source being used. The user
registered file is used by the user to save the Power Source condition files, and the data for
eight models can be registered. Yaskawa also offers initial value files which contain common
Power Source characteristics. Data for 24 models have already been registered. A Power
Source condition file can be set only by reading from either the user registered file or initial
value file to the execution file. When it is necessary to make adjustments to the data, refer to
“11.11.4 Editing the Power Source Condition Files.”
11.11.2 Specifying Welding Voltage when Synergic Power

Supply is Used
When a synergic power supply is used, the NX100 requests the user to specify the welding
voltage by a ratio against the proper output value (not by the output value as conventionally
done).
For that, the voltage characteristics associated with a certain welding current output value
must be determined by measurement, and the results should be stored in the Power Source
condition data file as representative values. The welding current output value for the mea-
surement should be a value that is assumed relatively often in actual situations. Each of the
provided Power Source condition data files already contains the representative values for the
associated Power Source model.
11-79
< Example >

An example is shown with the ARCON instruction.
If the welding current output is 250A, the welding voltage can be specified as follows:
ARCON AC=250 AVP=100
Welding 100% of proper output,

current assuming the use of
250A synergic power supply.
With the voltage characteristics with the following Figure A, the above instruction causes the
output of 7.5V control signal to the Power Source (reference value=7.5V).
If the welding current output value is changed to 220A, a minor correction to the ARCON
instruction causes the output of the control signal associated with 100% of the proper output
value at 220A. (Fig.B)
ARCON AC=220 AVP=100 100% output
Also note that a minor adjustment of the welding voltage can be instructed easily. (Fig.C)
e.g. The control signal is output 110% of the proper output value at 220A.
or
e.g. The control signal is output 94% of the proper output value at 220A.
Welding voltage Welding voltage Welding voltage

output value output value output value
(%) (%) (%)
100 110
Voltage characteristics 100 100
Voltage characteristics 94
at 250A
at 220A
0 7.5 (V) 0 7.5 (V) 0 7.5 (V)

Welding voltage reference value Welding voltage reference value Welding voltage reference value
Figure A Figure B Figure C
This setting method enables easy adjustment without calculating the voltage output.
This method can be also applied to condition data files and instructions other than ARCON.
Another advantage is that a single welding job can be used with more than one Power Source
with a synergic power supply by changing the welder condition data file.
11-80
If welding current output is significantly different from the voltage characteristics measure-
NOTE ment used, voltage output may vary. Write the welding current value used for the voltage
characteristics measurement as a comment for reference.
11.11.3 POWER SOURCE CONDITION Window

A Power Source condition data file has the following two windows:
• POWER SOURCE CONDITION Window
• POWER SOURCE CONDITION Window (for current/voltage output)
POWER SOURCE CONDITION Window
POWER SOURCE CONDITION

POWER SOURCE NO.: 1/1
c
d SETTING : DONE
e POWER SOURCE NAME : MOTOWELD-E350
f COMM. : STC CONTROL NONE
g POWER SUPPLY : A/%
h SHIELDING GAS : CO2
i WIRE DIA. : 0.1 mm
j WIRE STICKOUT : 15 mm
k WIRE ANTI-STICKING : 0.1 sec
l ARC FAILURE STOP : 1.50 sec
POWER SOURCE NO. (1 to 4)

Displays a Power Source number between 1 and 4 (for each welder).
SETTING
If this file is modified, the status automatically changes to “NONE,” indicating that the modi-
fication is not saved yet. To save the modification to the file, move the cursor to “SETTING”
and press [SELECT]. Then the status changes to “DONE.”
POWER SOURCE NAME
Displays a Power Source name of 16 characters or less.
COMMENT
POWER SUPPLY (A/V,A/%)
Specify A/V if the independent power supply is used. Then the welding voltage can be spec-
ified independently from the welding current.
Specify A/% if the synergic power supply is used. Then the welding voltage can be deter-
mined automatically according to the welding current.
SHIELDING GAS (CO2,MAG)
Specifies the shielding gas type.
WIRE DIA. (0 to 9.9mm)
Specifies the wire diameter.
11-81
WIRE STICKOUT (0 to 99mm)

Specifies the length of the welding wire protruding from the torch tip.
WIRE ANTI-STICKING (0 to 9.9 seconds)
Specifies the duration of the wire anti-stick process at the end of welding.
ARC FAILURE STOP (0 to 2.55 seconds)
Specifies the time between the detection of arc failure and the stopping of the manipulator
movement.
POWER SOURCE CONDITION Window for Current/Voltage Output

<CURRENT OUTPUT CHAR.> <WELDING VOLTAGE OUTPUT CHAR.>
c RANGE: + +
d ADJUST: 1.00 1.00
NO. REF.(V) MEASURE (A) REF.(V) MEASURE (%)
e
01 0.00 30 0.00 50 f
02 1.35 62 7.20 99
03 2.70 94 7.50 100
04 10.80 286 7.80 101
05 12.15 318 14.00 150
06 13.50 350 0.00 0
07 0.00 0 0.00 0
08 0.00 0 0.00 0
RANGE
Indicates the polarity of the reference value for the welding current and voltage. If the range
is positive(+), the reference value is in the range between 0 and 14.00V. If the range is neg-
ative(-), the reference value is in the range between 0 and -14.00V.
ADJUST (0.80 to 1.20)
A correction value to adjust the welding current/voltage output.
REF. (V) (0 to 14.00V)
Welding current/voltage reference values.
MEASURE (0 to 999A, 0 to 50.0V, or 50 to 150%)
The welding current/voltage output values measured at the reference values as given under
.
11-82
11.11.4 Editing the Power Source Condition Files
When the Power Source condition file is modified or the file is read in, the SETTING status
NOTE in the POWER SOURCE CONDITION window changes from “DONE” to “NONE.” After
editing, move the cursor to SETTING then press [SELECT] to save the modification. Then
the SETTING status changes from “NONE” to “DONE.”
Displaying a Power Source Condition File

the main menu.
2 Select {POWER SOURCE The POWER SOURCE CONDITION window appears.

CONDITION}.

SETTING : DONE
POWER SOURCE NAME : MOTOWELD-E350
COMM. : STC CONTROL NONE
POWER SUPPLY : A/%
SHIELDING GAS : CO2
WIRE DIA. : 0.1 mm
WIRE STICKOUT : 15 mm
WIRE ANTI-STICKING : 0.1 sec
ARC FAILURE STOP : 1.50 sec
RANGE: + +
ADJUST: 1.00 1.00
01 0.00 30 0.00 50
Reading a Power Source Condition File
1 Select {DATA} from the menu.

READING
WRITING
2 Select {READING}.
11-83
3 GO BACK GO BACK
Press the page key PAGE

to Each time the page key PAGE
is pressed, the window alternates
switch between the user regis- between MAKER INITIAL VALUE window and USER INITIAL
tered file list and the initial VALUE window.
value file list. On the MAKER INITIAL VALUE window, the registered initial
value file list (1 to 24) appears.
On the USER INITIAL VALUE window, the registered user regis-
tration file list (1 to 4) appears.
MAKER INITIAL VALUE

NO. NAME POWER DIA. GAS
01 MOTOWELD-E350 2 A/% 1.2 MAG
02 MOTOWELD-E350 2 A/V 1.2 MAG
03 MOTOWELD-S350 A/% 1.2 CO2
04 MOTOWELD-S350 A/% 1.2 MAG
05 MOTOWELD-S350 A/V 1.2 CO2
06 MOTOWELD-S350 A/V 1.2 MAG
08 MOTOWELD-S350 A/% 0.9 MAG
10 MOTOWELD-S350 A/V 0.9 MAG
DIRECT PAGE
Main Menu ShortCut !Tun on servo power
USER INITIAL VALUE

01 USER-1 1.2 CO2
02 USER-2 1.2 MAG
03 USER-3 1.2 CO2
04 USER-4 1.2 MAG
4 Select the Power Source con- The confirmation dialog box appears. Select “NO” to return to the
dition file number of the data to POWER SOURCE CONDITION window without the read in.
be read.
MAKER INITIAL VALUE

01 MOTOWELD-E350 A/% 1.2 CO2
02 MOTOWELD-E350 A/V 1.2 CO2
03 MOTOWELD-S350AJ2 A/% 1.2 CO2
04 MOTOWELD-S350AJ2 A/% 1.2 MAG
05 MOTOWELD-S350AJ2 1.2 CO2
06 MOTOWELD-S350AJ2 Read1.2
data?
MAG
07 01 MOTOWELD-E350
MOTOWELD-S350AJ2 0.9 CO2
08 MOTOWELD-S350AJ2 0.9 MAG
YES NO
10 MOTOWELD-S350AJ2 0.9 MAG
12 MOTOWELD-S350AJ2 A/V 1.2 CO2
13 MOTOWELD-S350AJ2 A/% 0.9 CO2
14 MOTOWELD-S350AJ2 A/V 0.9 CO2
DIRECT PAGE
5 Select “YES.”
11-84
Editing a Power Source Condition File

Editing the “WELDER NAME” or “COMMENT”
1 Select “POWER SOURCE

NAME” or “COMMENT.”
2 Input characters.
SETTING : DONE
POWER SUPPLY : A/%
SETTING : DONE
POWER SUPPLY : A/%
Editing Other Items

1 Select the item to be edited.
2 Input the number using the SETTING : DONE

Numeric keys. POWER SOURCE NAME : MOTOWELD-E350
POWER SUPPLY : A/%
SHIELDING GAS : CO2
WIRE DIA. : 0.1 mm
ANTI-STICKING : 0.1 sec
Editing a Power Source Condition File for Current/Voltage Output

Editing the “RANGE”
1 Select “RANGE.” Each time [SELECT] is pressed, the indication alternates

between “+” (positive) and “−” (negative).
RANGE: + +
ADJUST: 1.00 1.00
SELECT

RANGE: − +
ADJUST: 1.00 1.00
11-85
Editing “ADJ,” “REF,” or “MEASURE”

1 Select {ADJ}, {REF}, or {MEA-

SURE}.
2 Input the number using the When some data is modified, the SETTING status is changed to
Numeric keys. “NONE.”
01 0.00 30 0.00 50
02 1.35 62 7.20 99
03 2.70 94 7.50 100
04 10.80 286 7.80 101
After the modification, move the cursor to “SETTING” and press

[SELECT] to complete (save) the setting.
SETTING : DONE
Notes on Power Source Data Condition File Modification:

NOTE
When changing “POWER SUPPLY” in Power Source condition file, the welding condition
files (Arc Start Condition File, Arc End Condition File, and Arc Auxiliary Condition File) are
formatted.
Registering the Power Source Condition File Data

Other than the 24 types of initial value data Yaskawa has provided, there are 4 types of Power
Source condition files that the user can be registered. The data partially modified using the
initial value file can also be registered.

the main menu.
JOB PARAMETER
DOUT
MOVE
END
ARC START COND.

ARC WELDING
ARC END COND.

VARIABLE
B001
ARC AUX COND.
IN/OUT
In Out POWER SOURCE

COND.
ROBOT
ARC WELD DIAG.
SYSTEM INFO
WEAVING
11-86
2 Select {POWER SOURCE

COND.}.
READING
WRITING 1/1
SETTING : DONE
POWER SUPPLY : A/%
SHIELDING GAS : CO2
WIRE DIA. : 0.1 mm
ANTI-STICKING : 0.1 sec
RANGE: + +
ADJUST: 1.00 1.00
01 0.00 30 0.00 50
3 Select {WRITING} from The user registered file list appears.

{DATA} in the menu.
USER INITIAL VALUE

01 USER-1 A/% 1.2 CO2
02 USER-2 A/% 1.2 MAG
03 USER-3 A/V 1.2 CO2
04 USER-4 A/V 1.2 MAG
4 Select the Power Source con- The confirmation dialog box appears.
dition file number of the data to
be written. DATA EDIT DISPLAY UTILITY
USER INITIAL VALUE

01 USER-1 A/% 1.2 CO2
02 USER-2 A/% 1.2 MAG
03 USER-3 A/V 1.2 CO2
04 USER-4 A/V 1.2 MAG
Write data?
01 USER-1
YES NO
5 Select “YES” or “NO.” Select “YES” to register the Power Source condition file data.
Select “NO” to return to the POWER SOURCE CONDITION win-
dow.
11-87
11.12 Power Source Condition File Initial Value
11.12Power Source Condition File Initial Value
The initial value data for 24 Power Sources has been prepared as follows:
Welder Condition Data File
Power Wire
Power Shielding
Source Power Source Name Diameter
Supply Gas
No. (mm)
1 MOTOWELD-E350 II Synergic MAG 1.2
(or CO2) (or any)
2 MOTOWELD-E350 II Independent MAG 1.2
(or CO2) (or any)
3 MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3 (without STC) Synergic CO2 1.2
4 MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3 (without STC) Synergic MAG 1.2
5 MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3 (without STC) Independent CO2 1.2
6 MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3 (without STC) Independent MAG 1.2
7 MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3 (without STC) Synergic CO2 0.9
(or 1.0)
8 MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3 (without STC) Synergic MAG 0.9
(or 1.0)
9 MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3 (without STC) Independent CO2 0.9
(or 1.0)
10 MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3 (without STC) Independent MAG 0.9
(or 1.0)
11 MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3 (with STC) Synergic CO2 1.2
12 MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3 (with STC) Synergic MAG 1.2
13 MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3 (with STC) Independent CO2 1.2
14 MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3 (with STC) Independent MAG 1.2
15 MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3 (with STC) Synergic CO2 0.9
(or 1.0)
16 MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3 (with STC) Synergic MAG 0.9
(or 1.0)
17 MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3 (with STC) Independent CO2 0.9
(or 1.0)
18 MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3 (with STC) Independent MAG 0.9
(or 1.0)
19 NASUTOA INVERTER AUTO Synergic CO2 1.2
20 SHINKO ES 350 Synergic CO2 1.2
21 DAIHEN CPV 350 Synergic CO2 1.2
22 PANASONIC RF II 350 Synergic CO2 1.2
23 MOTOWELD-S500 (without STC) Synergic CO2 1.2
24 MOTOWELD-S500 (without STC) Synergic MAG 1.2
11-88
Contents of 24 Welder Condition Files

The following tables give the original contents of the provided Power Source condition files,
that are associated with the Power Source numbers 1 through 24:
POWER SOURCE NO.: 1 POWER SOURCE NO.: 2

POWER SOURCE NAME: POWER SOURCE NAME:
MOTOWELD-E350II MOTOWELD-E350II
COMMENT: COMBINATION GAS AND WIRE COMMENT: COMBINATION GAS AND WIRE
POWER SUPPLY: A (synergic) POWER SUPPLY: independent
SHIELDING GAS: MAG SHIELDING GAS: MAG
WIRE DIA.: 1.2mm WIRE DIA.: 1.2mm
WIRE STICKOUT: 15mm WIRE STICKOUT: 15mm
WIRE ANTI-STICKING: 0.1sec WIRE ANTI-STICKING: 0.1sec
ARC FAILURE STOP: 0.6sec ARC FAILURE STOP: 0.6sec
CURRENT VOLTAGE CURRENT VOLTAGE
RANGE: positive RANGE: positive RANGE: positive RANGE: positive

ADJ.: 1.00 ADJ.: 1.00 ADJ.: 1.00 ADJ.: 1.00
REF. (V) MEA. (A) REF. (V) MEA. (%) REF. (V) MEA. (A) REF. (V) MEA. (%)
0.00 30 0.00 50 0.00 30 0.00 12.0
1.35 62 7.20 99 1.35 62 2.25 16.0
2.70 94 7.50 100 2.70 94 4.50 20.0
10.80 286 7.80 101 10.80 286 6.75 24.0
12.15 318 14.00 150 12.15 318 9.00 28.0
13.50 350 0.00 0 13.50 350 11.25 32.0
0.00 0 0.00 0 0.00 0 13.50 36.0
0.00 0 0.00 0 0.00 0 0.00 0.0
11-89

MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3 MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3
COMMENT: STC NO-CONTROL COMMENT: STC NO-CONTROL
POWER SUPPLY: A (synergic) POWER SUPPLY: A (synergic)
SHIELDING GAS: CO2 SHIELDING GAS: MAG

ADJ.: 1.00 ADJ.: 1.00 ADJ.: 1.00 ADJ.: 1.00
REF. MEA. REF. MEA. REF. MEA. REF. MEA.

(V) (A) (V) (%) (V) (A) (V) (%)
1.00 100 3.00 85 1.00 95 3.00 85
2.00 145 5.00 95 2.00 150 5.00 95
3.50 185 7.00 100 3.50 200 7.00 100
5.00 230 9.00 105 5.00 240 9.00 105
7.00 270 10.00 110 7.00 280 10.00 110
10.00 350 0.00 0 10.00 350 0.00 0
0.00 0 0.00 0 0.00 0 0.00 0
0.00 0 0.00 0 0.00 0 0.00 0
11-90

POWER SUPPLY: independent POWER SUPPLY: independent

ADJ.: 1.00 ADJ.: 1.00 ADJ.: 1.00 ADJ.: 1.00

(V) (A) (V) (%) (V) (A) (V) (%)
1.00 100 2.00 18.0 1.00 95 1.20 16.0
2.00 145 3.10 20.0 2.00 150 2.00 18.0
3.50 185 4.90 23.0 3.50 200 3.60 21.0
5.00 230 7.00 26.5 5.00 240 6.30 26.0
7.00 270 10.70 33.0 7.00 280 10.00 32.5
10.00 350 0.00 0.0 10.00 350 0.00 0.0
0.00 0 0.00 0.0 0.00 0 0.00 0.0
0.00 0 0.00 0.0 0.00 0 0.00 0.0
11-91


ADJ: 1.00 ADJ: 1.00 ADJ: 1.00 ADJ: 1.00

(V) (A) (V) (%) (V) (A) (V) (%)
1.00 60 3.00 85 1.00 55 3.00 85
2.00 80 5.00 95 2.00 80 5.00 95
3.00 100 7.00 100 3.50 110 7.00 100
5.00 125 9.00 105 5.00 130 9.00 105
7.00 150 10.00 110 7.00 170 10.00 110
10.00 190 0.00 0 10.00 190 0.00 0
11.00 200 0.00 0 11.00 200 0.00 0
0.00 0 0.00 0 0.00 0 0.00 0
11-92


ADJ.: 1.00 ADJ.: 1.00 ADJ.: 1.00 ADJ.: 1.00

(V) (A) (V) (%) (V) (A) (V) (%)
1.00 60 2.50 19.0 1.00 55 1.90 17.5
2.00 80 3.50 21.0 2.00 80 2.10 18.0
3.00 100 4.50 23.0 3.50 110 3.20 20.0
5.00 125 5.70 25.5 5.00 130 3.90 21.5
7.00 150 0.00 0.0 7.00 170 4.80 23.0
10.00 190 0.00 0.0 10.00 190 0.00 0.0
11.00 200 0.00 0.0 11.00 200 0.00 0.0
0.00 0 0.00 0.0 0.00 0 0.00 0.0
11-93

COMMENT: STC CONTROL COMMENT: STC CONTROL

ADJ.: 1.00 ADJ.: 1.00 ADJ.: 1.00 ADJ.: 1.00

(V) (A) (V) (%) (V) (A) (V) (%)
1.00 100 3.00 85 1.00 95 3.00 85
2.00 140 5.00 95 2.00 150 5.00 95
3.50 190 7.00 100 3.50 190 7.00 100
5.00 230 9.00 105 5.00 240 9.00 105
7.00 270 10.00 110 7.00 270 10.00 110
10.00 350 0.00 0 9.00 350 0.00 0
0.00 0 0.00 0 0.00 0 0.00 0
0.00 0 0.00 0 0.00 0 0.00 0
11-94


ADJ.: 1.00 ADJ.: 1.00 ADJ.: 1.00 ADJ.: 1.00

(V) (A) (V) (%) (V) (A) (V) (%)
1.00 100 2.10 18.0 1.00 95 1.30 16.0
2.00 140 3.20 20.0 2.00 150 2.10 18.0
3.50 190 5.00 23.0 3.50 190 3.70 21.0
5.00 230 7.10 26.5 5.00 240 6.40 26.0
7.00 270 10.80 33.0 7.00 270 10.10 32.5
10.00 350 0.00 0.0 9.00 350 0.00 0.0
0.00 0 0.00 0.0 0.00 0 0.00 0.0
0.00 0 0.00 0.0 0.00 0 0.00 0.0
11-95


ADJ.: 1.00 ADJ.: 1.00 ADJ.: 1.00 ADJ.: 1.00

(V) (A) (V) (%) (V) (A) (V) (%)
1.00 60 3.00 85 1.00 60 3.00 85
2.00 80 5.00 95 2.00 75 5.00 95
3.50 105 7.00 100 3.50 110 7.00 100
5.00 125 9.00 105 5.00 130 9.00 105
7.00 145 10.00 110 7.00 160 10.00 110
10.00 180 0.00 0 10.00 190 0.00 0
11.00 200 0.00 0 11.00 200 0.00 0
0.00 0 0.00 0 0.00 0 0.00 0
11-96


ADJ.: 1.00 ADJ.: 1.00 ADJ.: 1.00 ADJ.: 1.00

(V) (A) (V) (%) (V) (A) (V) (%)
1.00 60 2.80 19.0 1.00 60 2.10 17.5
2.00 80 3.80 21.0 2.00 75 2.30 18.0
3.50 105 4.80 23.0 3.50 110 3.40 20.0
5.00 125 6.00 25.5 5.00 130 4.10 21.5
7.00 145 0.00 0.0 7.00 160 5.00 23.0
10.00 180 0.00 0.0 10.00 190 0.00 0.0
11.00 200 0.00 0.0 11.00 200 0.00 0.0
0.00 0 0.00 0.0 0.00 0 0.00 0.0
11-97

NASTOA INVERTER AUTO SHINKO ES350
COMMENT: COMMENT:
SHIELDING GAS: CO2 SHIELDING GAS: CO2

ADJ.: 1.00 ADJ.: 1.00 ADJ.: 1.00 ADJ.: 1.00

(V) (A) (V) (%) (V) (A) (V) (%)
1.80 110 2.00 88 2.80 100 4.80 88
4.40 165 6.00 100 3.90 150 7.00 100
6.40 220 10.00 112 5.80 200 9.20 112
8.30 265 0.00 0 7.60 250 0.00 0
10.50 315 0.00 0 8.90 300 0.00 0
0.00 0 0.00 0 0.00 0 0.00 0
0.00 0 0.00 0 0.00 0 0.00 0
0.00 0 0.00 0 0.00 0 0.00 0
11-98

DAIHEN CPV350 PANASONIC RF II 350
COMMENT: COMMENT:
SHIELDING GAS: CO2 SHIELDING GAS: CO2

ADJ.: 1.00 ADJ.: 1.00 ADJ.: 1.00 ADJ.: 1.00

(V) (A) (V) (%) (V) (A) (V) (%)
1.40 50 5.00 75 2.90 100 4.00 88
2.80 100 7.50 100 5.10 150 7.00 100
4.30 150 10.00 125 7.20 200 10.00 112
5.70 200 0.00 0 9.40 250 0.00 0
7.80 250 0.00 0 11.50 300 0.00 0
9.50 300 0.00 0 0.00 0 0.00 0
12.60 350 0.00 0 0.00 0 0.00 0
0.00 0 0.00 0 0.00 0 0.00 0
11-99

MOTOWELD-S500 MOTOWELD-S500

ADJ.: 1.00 ADJ.: 1.00 ADJ.: 1.00 ADJ.: 1.00

(V) (A) (V) (%) (V) (A) (V) (%)
1.40 100 3.00 85 1.70 100 3.00 85
3.10 160 7.00 100 2.80 160 7.00 100
4.00 200 11.00 115 3.70 200 11.00 115
5.90 280 0.00 0 5.00 250 0.00 0
8.00 340 0.00 0 6.40 300 0.00 0
9.00 380 0.00 0 7.50 360 0.00 0
10.00 400 0.00 0 8.00 390 0.00 0
11.00 440 0.00 0 9.00 430 0.00 0
11-100
11.13 Table of Work Instructions
11.13Table of Work Instructions
• < > indicates alpha-numerical data.

• If multiple items are shown in one additional item section, select one.
Arc Welding Instructions

Outputs arc start conditions and an arc start instruction for the
Function
Power Source.
WELD1, WELD2, WELD3, WELD4 Displayed only
when using
multiple manip-
ulators.
AC = <welding current > AC: 1 to 999A
ASF#(<arc start condition file number>) ASF#(): 1 to 48
AV = <welding voltage > AV: indepen-
AVP = <percentage against proper welding volt- dent
age> 0.1 to 50.0V
Additional AVP: synergic
Item 50 to 150%
ARCON
T = <manipulator stopping time> 0.01 to 655.35
sec
V = <manipulator moving speed> 0.1 to 1500.0
mm/sec
1 to 9000 cm/
min
RETRY Specifies use of
arc retry func-
tion.
ARCON AC=200 AVP=100 T=0.30 RETRY
ARCON AC=200 AV=22.0 T=0.30
Example
ARCON ASF#(1)
ARCON
11-101

Outputs arc end conditions and an arc end instruction for the
Function
Power Source.
when using
multiple manip-
ulators.
AC = <welding current > AC: 1 to 999A
AEF#(<arc end condition file number>) AEF#(): 1 to 12
Additional AVP = <percentage against proper welding volt- dent
Item age > 0.1 to 50.0V
ARCOF
AVP: synergic
50 to 150%
T = <manipulator stopping time> 0.01 to 655.35
sec
ANTSTK Specifies use of
wire anti-stick
function.
ARCOF AC=180 AV20.0 T=0.30
Example
ARCOF AEF#(1)
ARCOF
Function Changes the welding conditions individually.
when using
multiple manip-
ulators.
AC = <welding current > 1 to 999A
age > 0.1 to 50.0V
Additional AVP: synergic
Item 50 to 150%
ARCSET V = <manipulator moving speed> 0.1 to 1500.0
mm/sec
1 to 9000 cm/
min
AN3 = <analog output 3> -14.00 to
14.00V
14.00V
ARCSET AC=200
ARCSET AV=20.0
Example ARCSET AVP=95
ARCSET V=80
ARCSET AN3=10.00
11-102

Changes the welding conditions gradually during execution of
Function
welding.
when using
multiple manip-
ulators.
Additional age > 0.1 to 50.0V
ARCCTS AVP: synergic
Item
50 to 150%
AN 3 = <analog output 3> -14.00 to
14.00V
14.00V
DIS = <distance from the movement’s start posi- 0.00 to 6553.5
tion> mm
ARCCTS AC=200 AVP=100 DIS=100.0
Example
ARCCTS AC=200 AV=22.0 AN3=10.0 DIS=5.0
Changes the welding conditions gradually during execution of
Function
welding.
when using
multiple manip-
ulators.
Additional age > 0.1 to 50.0V
ARCCTE
Item AVP: synergic
50 to 150%
AN 3 = <analog output 3> -14.00 to
14.00V
14.00V
DIS = <distance from the movement’s end posi- 0.00 to 6553.5
tion> mm
ARCCTE AC=200 AVP=100 DIS=100.0
Example
ARCCTE AC=200 AV=22.0 AN3=10.0 DIS=5.0
Function Specifies welding current by current reference value.
when using
Additional multiple manip-
AWELD
Item ulators.
<Current reference value> -14.00 to
14.00V
Example AWELD 12
11-103
Function Specifies welding voltage by voltage reference value.

when using
VWELD ulators.
Item
<voltage reference value> -14.00 to
14.00V
Example VWELD 2.5
Function Starts weaving.

RB1, RB2, RB3, RB4 Displayed only
when using
Additional
WVON multiple manip-
Item
ulators.
WEV#(<weaving condition file number>) 1 to 16
Example WVON WEV#(1)
Function Ends weaving.

RB1, RB2, RB3, RB4 Displayed only
when using
WVOF
Item ulators.
None
Example WVOF
11-104
12.1 Move Instructions
12 Table of Basic Instructions
• <> indicates numerical or alphabetical data.

• If multiple items are shown in one section, select one of the items.
Function Moves to a taught point with joint interpolation type.
Position data, These data do

Base axis position data, not appear on
Station axis position data the screen.
VJ=<play speed> VJ:

0.01 to
100.00%
MOVJ Additional PL=<position level> PL:0 to 8

Item
NWAIT
UNTIL statement
ACC=(acceleration adjustment ratio) ACC: 20 to

100%
DEC=(deceleration adjustment ratio) DEC: 20 to

100%
Example MOVJ VJ=50.00 PL=2 NWAIT UNTIL IN#(16)=ON
12-1
Function Moves to a taught point with linear interpolation type.

V=<play speed>, V:0.1 to 1500.0

VR=<play speed of the posture>, mm/s
VE=<play speed of external axis> 1 to 9000.0
cm/min
VR:0.1 to 180.0
deg/s
VE:0.01 to
100.00%
MOVL Additional
Item PL=<position level> PL:0 to 8
CR=(corner radius) CR: 1.0 to

6553.5mm
NWAIT
UNTIL statement

100%

100%
Example MOVL V=138 PL=0 NWAIT UNTIL IN#(16)=ON
Function Moves to a taught point with circular interpolation type.

V=<play speed>, Same as

VR=<play speed of the posture>, MOVL.
VE=<play speed of external axis>
MOVC Additional
PL=<position level> PL:0 to 8
Item
NWAIT

100%

100%
Example MOVC V=138 PL=0 NWAIT
12-2
Function Moves to a taught point with spline interpolation type.


MOVS Additional
Item
NWAIT

100%

100%
Example MOVS V=120 PL=0
Moves the specified increment from the current position with linear
Function
interpolation type.
P<variable number>,
BP<variable number>,
EX<variable number>

NWAIT
BF,RF,TF,UF# (<user coordinate number>) BF:

base coordi-
IMOV nates
Additional
RF:
Item
robot coordi-
nates
TF:
tool coordinates
UF:
user coordi-
nates
UNTIL statement

100%

100%
Example IMOV P000 V=138 PL=1 RF
12-3
Function Defines a reference point (e.g. wall point for weaving).
<reference point number> wall point 1 for

weaving :1
wall point 2 for
REFP Additional weaving :2
Item
Example REFP 1
Function Sets play speed.
VJ=<joint speed>, VJ:Same as

V=<TCP speed>, MOVJ.
SPEED Additional
VR=<play speed of the posture>, V,VR,VE:
Item
VE=<play speed of external axis> Same as
MOVL.
Example SPEED VJ=50.00
12-4
12.2 I/O Instructions
Function Turns the external output signals ON and OFF.
OT# (<output number>),

OGH# (<output group number>),
OG# (<output group number>)
Number of addressed output signals:

OT#(xx)=1;OGH#(xx)=4(per group);
DOUT Additional OG#(xx)=8(per group)
Item
OGH#(xx) is not subject to parity check; only the
binary specification is allowed.
FINE With a high

degree of accu-
racy
Example DOUT OT#(12) ON
Function Outputs a pulse signal as an external output signal.

OG# (<output group number>)
PULSE Additional
T=<time (seconds)> 0.01 to
Item
655.35 s
0.30 s unless
otherwise spec-
ified
Example PULSE OT# (10) T=0.60
12-5
Function Sets input signals in variables.
B<variable number>
IN# (<input number>),

IGH# (<input group number>),
IG# (<input group number>),
OG# (<output group number>),
SIN# (<system input number>),
SOUT# (<system output number>)
DIN Additional
Item
Number of addressed input signals:
IN#(xx)=1;IGH#(xx)=4(per group);
IG#(xx)=8(per group)
Number of addressed output signals:

OT#(xx)=1;OGH#(xx)=4(per group);
OG#(xx)=8(per group)
IGH#(xx) and OGH#(xx) are not subject to parity

check; only the binary specification is allowed.
DIN B016 IN#(16)

Example
DIN B002 IG#(2)
Waits until the external input signal status matches the specified
Function
status.
IN# (<input number>),

IGH# (<input group number>),
OT# (<user output number>),
WAIT Additional SIN# (<system input number>),
Item SOUT# (<system output number>)
<status>,B<variable number>
T=<time (seconds)> 0.01 to

655.35 s
WAIT IN# (12)=ON T=10.00

Example
WAIT IN# (12)=B002
Outputs the specified voltage to the general-purpose analog output

Function
port.
AOUT AO# (<output port number>) 1 to 40

Additional
Item <output voltage(V)> -14.0 to 14.0
Example AOUT AO# (2) 12.7
12-6
Function Starts the analog output corresponding to the speed.
AO#(<output port number>) 1 to 40
BV = <basic voltage> -14.00 to 14.00
ARATION Additional V = <basic speed> 0.1 to

Item 150.0 mm/s
1 to 9000 cm/
min
OFV = <offset voltage> -14.00 to 14.00
Example ARATION AO#(1) BV=10.00 V=200.0 OFV=2.00
Function Ends the analog output corresponding to the speed.
ARATIOF Additional AO#(<output port number>) 1 to 40

Item
Example ARATIOF AO#(1)
12-7
12.3 Control Instructions
Function Jumps to the specified label or job.
* <label character string>,JOB:<job name>,

B<variable number>,
JUMP Additional I<variable number>,D<variable number>
Item
UF# (user coordinates number)
IF statement
Example JUMP JOB:TEST1 IF IN#(14)=OFF
Function Indicates a jump destination.
* Additional <jump destination> 8 characters or

(label) Item less
Example *123
Function Calls the specified job.
JOB:<job name>,IG# (<input group number>),

B<variable number>,I<variable number>,
Additional D<variable number>
CALL Item
UF# (user coordinates number)
IF statement
CALL JOB:TEST1 IF IN# (24)=ON

CALL IG#(2)
Example
(The job is called by the patterns of input signal. In this example,
Job 0 cannot be called.)
Function Returns to the call source job.
RET Additional IF statement

Item
Example RET IF IN#(12)=OFF
Function Declares the end of a job.
END Additional
Item
Example END
12-8
Function No operation.
NOP Additional
Item
Example NOP
Function Stops for the specified time.
TIMER Additional T=<time (seconds)> 0.01 to

Item 655.35 s
Example TIMER T=12.50
Evaluates the specified condition and makes a judgment accord-

Function ingly. Described after an instruction that specifies a certain action.
Format:<Item1>=,<>,<=,>=,<,><Item2>
IF <Item1>
statement Additional
Item
<Item2>
Example JUMP *12 IF IN#(12)=OFF
Monitors the specified input signal during an action and stops the
Function action when the specified signal status is observed. Described
after an instruction that specifies a certain action.
UNTIL
IN# (<input number>)
statement Additional
Item
<status>
Example MOVL V=300 UNTIL IN#(10)=ON
Function Instructs a pause.
PAUSE Additional IF statement

Item
Example PAUSE IF IN#(12)=OFF
Function Dispalys a comment.
’ Additional <comment> 32 characters

(comment) Item or less
Example ’Draws 100mm size square.
12-9
Waits for execution of the instruction on the next line.

Function Used with the NWAIT tag which is an additional item of a move
instruction.
Additional
CWAIT Item
MOVL V=100 NWAIT

DOUT OT#(1) ON
Example CWAIT
DOUT OT#(1) OFF
MOVL V=100
Initializes the prereading instruction processing.

Function
Used to adjust the access timing for variable data.
ADVINIT Additional
Item
Example ADVINIT
Stops the prereading instruction processing.

Function
Used to adjust the access timing for variable data.
ADVSTOP Additional
Item
Example ADVINIT
12-10
12.4 Shift Instructions
12.4 Shift Instructions
Function Starts a shift operation.
P<variable number>, BF:

BP<variable number>, base coordi-
EX<variable number>, nates
BF,RF,TF, RF:
UF#(<user coordinate number>) robot coordi-
SFTON Additional nates
Item TF:
tool coordi-
nates
UF:
user coordi-
nates
Example SFTON P001 UF#(1)
Function Stops a shift operation.
SFTOF Additional
Item
Example SFTOF
Obtains the shift value in the specified coordinate system from

Function Data 2 and 3, and stores the obtained element values in Data 1.
Format:MSHIFT <Data1><Coordinate><Data2><Data3>
Data1 PX<variable number>
Coordi- BF,RF,TF, BF:

nate UF# (<user coordinate number>), base coordi-
MTF nates
RF:
robot coordi-
nates
TF:
tool coordi-
MSHIFT Additional nates
Item UF:
user coordi-
nates
MTF:
tool coordi-
nates for the
master
Example MSHIFT PX000 RF PX001 PX002
12-11
12.5 Operating Instructions
Adds Data1 and Data2, and stores the result in Data1.

Function
Format:ADD<Data1><Data2>
Data1 B<variable number>, Data1 must

I<variable number>, always be a
D<variable number>, variable.
R<variable number>,
P<variable number>,
EX<variable number>
ADD Additional
Item Data2 Constant,
B<variable number>,
I<variable number>,
D<variable number>,
R<variable number>,
P<variable number>,
EX<variable number>
Example ADD I012 I013
Subtracts Data2 from Data1, and stores the result in Data1.

Function
Format:SUB<Data1><Data2>

R<variable number>,
P<variable number>,
EX<variable number>
SUB Additional
Item Data2 Constant,
B<variable number>,
I<variable number>,
D<variable number>,
R<variable number>,
P<variable number>,
EX<variable number>
Example SUB I012 I013
12-12
Multiplies Data1 by Data2, and stores the result in Data1.

Format:MUL<Data1><Data2>
Data1 can be an element in a position variable.

Function
Pxxx(0):all axis data, Pxxx(1):X-axis data,
Pxxx(2):Y-axis data, Pxxx(3):Z-axis data,
Pxxx(4):Tx-axis data, Pxxx(5):Ty-axis data,
Pxxx(6):Tz-axis data

R<variable number>,
MUL P<variable number> (<element
number>),
BP<variable number> (<element
Additional number>),
Item EX<variable number> (<element
number>)
Data2 Constant,
B<variable number>,
I<variable number>,
D<variable number>,
R<variable number>
MUL I012 I013

Example
MUL P000 (3) 2 (Multiply the Z-axis data by 2.)
Divides Data1 by Data2, and stores the result in Data1.

Format:DIV<Data1><Data2>
Data1 can be an element in a position variable.

Function
Pxxx(0):all axis data, Pxxx(1):X-axis data,
Pxxx(2):Y-axis data, Pxxx(3):Z-axis data,
Pxxx(4):Tx-axis data, Pxxx(5):Ty-axis data,
Pxxx(6):Tz-axis data

R<variable number>,
DIV P<variable number> (<element
number>),
BP<variable number> (<element
Additional number>),
Item EX<variable number> (<element
number>)
Data2 Constant,
B<variable number>,
I<variable number>,
D<variable number>,
R<variable number>
DIV I012 I013

Example
DIV P000 (3) 2 (Divide the Z-axis data by 2.)
12-13
Function Increments the value of the specified variable by 1.
INC Additional B<variable number>,I<variable number>,

Item D<variable number>
Example INC I043
Function Decrements the value of the specified variable by 1.
DEC Additional B<variable number>,I<variable number>,

Item D<variable number>
Example DEC I043
Obtains the AND of Data1 and Data2, and stores the result in
Function Data1.
Format:AND<Data1><Data2>
AND Data1 B<variable number>
Additional
Item
Data2 B<variable number>, Constant
Example AND B012 B020
Obtains the OR of Data1 and Data2, and stores the result in Data1.
Function
Format:OR<Data1><Data2>
OR Data1 B<variable number>

Additional
Item
Example OR B012 B020
Obtains the NOT of Data2, and stores the result in Data1.

Function
Format:NOT<Data1><Data2>
NOT Data1 B<variable number>

Additional
Item
Example NOT B012 B020
Obtains the exclusive OR of Data1 and Data2, and stores the result
Function in Data1.
Format:XOR<Data1><Data2>
XOR
Data1 B<variable number>
Additional
Item
Example XOR B012 B020
12-14
Sets Data2 to Data1.

Function
Format:SET<Data1><Data2>

R<variable number>,
P<variable number>,
SET Additional EX<variable number>
Item
Data2 Constant,
B<variable number>,
I<variable number>,
D<variable number>,
R<variable number>,
EXPRESS
Example SET I012 I020
Function Sets data to an element in a position variable.
Data 1 P<variable number>

(<element number>),
BP<variable number>
(<element number>),
SETE Additional EX<variable number>
Item (<element number>)
Data 2 D<variable number>,

<double-precision integer type
constant>
Example SETE P012 (3) D005
Function Extracts an element in a position variable.
D<variable number>
GETE Additional P<variable number> (<element number>),
Item BP<variable number> (<element number>),
EX<variable number> (<element number>)
Example GETE D006 P012 (4)
12-15
Function Sets a system variable to the specified variable.
B<variable number>,I<variable number>,

D<variable number>,R<variable number>,
PX<variable number>
Additional
GETS Item $B<variable number>,$I<variable number>, System vari-
$D<variable number>,$R<variable number>, able
$PX<variable number>, $ERRNO, Constant,
B<variable number>
GETS B000 $B000

Example GETS I001 $I[1]
GETS PX003 $PX001
Converts the position variable (Data2) into a position variable of the

specified coordinate system, and stores the converted variable in
Function
Data1.
Format:CNVRT<Data1><Data2><coordinate>
BF,RF,TF,UF# (<user coordinate number>),MTF BF:

base coordi-
nates
CNVRT RF:
robot coordi-
Additional nates
Item TF:
tool coordi-
nates
UF:
user coordi-
nates
MTF:tool coor-
dinates for the
master
Example CNVRT PX000 PX001 BF
12-16
Starting with the variable number in Data1, clears (sets to zero) as

Function many variables as specified by a number in Data2.
Format:CLEAR<Data1><Data2>
Data1 B<variable number>,I<variable

number>,
D<variable number>,R<variable
number>,
$B<variable number>,$I<variable
number>,
$D<variable number>,$R<variable
number>,
CLEAR Data2 <number of variables>, ALL:Clears
Additional
Item ALL,STACK variables of the
variable num-
ber in Data1
and of all the
variable num-
bers that follow.
STACK:Clears
all variables in
the job call
stack.
CLEAR B000 ALL

Example
CLEAR STACK
Obtains the sine of Data2, and stores the result in Data1.

Function
Format:SIN<Data1><Data2>
Data1 R<variable number> Data1 must

always be a
SIN Additional real type vari-
Item able.
Data2 <constant>,R<variable number>
Example SIN R000 R001 (Sets the sine of R001 to R000.)
Obtains the cosine of Data2, and stores the result in Data1.

Function
Format:COS<Data1><Data2>

always be a
COS Additional real type vari-
Item able.
Example COS R000 R001 (Sets the cosine of R001 to R000.)
12-17
Obtains the arc tangent of Data2, and stores the result in Data1.
Function
Format:ATAN<Data1><Data2>

always be a
ATAN Additional real type vari-
Item able.
Example ATAN R000 R001 (Sets the arc tangent of R001 to R000.)
Obtains the square root of Data2, and stores the result in Data1.
Function
Format:SQRT<Data1><Data2>

always be a
SQRT Additional real type vari-
Item able.
Example SQRT R000 R001 (Sets the square root of R001 to R000.)
Creates a user coordinate using the position data for the given
three points as definition points. <Data1> indicates the definition
Function point ORG position data, <Data2> the definition point XX position
data, and <Data3> the definition point XY position data.
Format: MFRAME <user coordinate> <Data1> <Data2> <Data3>
UF#(<user coordinate number>) 1 to 24

MFRAME
Data1 PX <variable number>
Additional
Item Data2 PX <variable number>
Data3 PX <variable number>
Example MFRAME UF#(1) PX000 PX001 PX002
Obtains the matrix product of Data2 and Data3, and stores the
Function result in Data1.
Format: MULMAT <Data1> <Data2> <Data3>
Data1 P <variable number>

MULMAT
Additional
Item
Example MULMAT P000 P001 P002
12-18
Obtains the inverse matrix of Data2, and stores the result in Data1.
Function
Format: INVMAT <Data1> <Data2>
INVMAT Data1 P <variable number>

Additional
Item
Example INVMAT P000 P001
Changes the contents data of a condition file into the numeric data
Function of Data1. The contents data of a condition file to be changed is
specified by the element number.
Contents WEV#(<condition file num-

SETFILE data of a ber>)(<element number>)
Additional condition
Item file
Data1 Constant, D<variable number>
Example SETFILE WEV#(1)(1) D000
Stores the contents data of a condition file in Data1. The contents

Function data of a condition file to be obtained is specified by the element
number.
Data1 D <variable number>

GETFILE
Additional Contents WEV#(<condition file num-
Item data of a ber>)(<element number>)
condition
file
Example GETFILE D000 WEV#(1)(1)
Function Stores the position data of Data2 (step number) in Data1.
GETPOS Data1 PX <variable number>

Additional
Item
Data2 STEP# (<step number>)
Example GETPOS PX000 STEP#(1)
Converts the numeric value of the character string (ASCII) of Data2

Function into the real number, and stores the result in Data1.
Format: VAL <Data1> <Data2>
Data1 B <variable number>, I <variable

VAL number>, D <variable number>, R
Additional <variable number>
Item
Data2 Character string, S <variable num-
ber>
Example VAL B000 “123”
12-19
Obtains the character code of the first letter of the character string
Function (ASCII) of Data2, and stores the result in Data1.
Format:ASC<Data1><Data2>

ASC number>, D <variable number>
Additional
Item Data2 Character string, S <variable num-
ber>
Example ASC B000 “ABC”
Obtains the character (ASCII) with the character code of Data2,

Function and stores the result in Data1.
Format:CHR$<Data1><Data2>
CHR$
Data1 S <variable number>
Additional
Item
Data2 Constant, B <variable number>
Example CHR$ S000 65
Obtains the character string (ASCII) of any length (Data 3, 4) from

the character string (ASCII) of Data2, and stores the result in
Function
Data1.
Format:MID$<Data1><Data2><Data3><Data4>

ber>
MID$
Additional Data3 Constant, B <variable number>, I
Item <variable number>, D <variable
number>
Data4 Constant, B <variable number>, I

<variable number>, D <variable
number>
Example MID$ S000 “123ABC456” 4 3
Obtains the total number of bytes of the character string (ASCII) of

Function Data2, and stores the result in Data1.
Format:LEN<Data1><Data2>

LEN number>, D <variable number>
Additional
Item
ber>
Example LEN B000 “ABCDEF”
12-20
Combines the character string (ASCII) of Data2 and Data3, and

Function stores the result in Data1.
Format:CAT$<Data1><Data2><Data3>

CAT$ Data2 Character string, S <variable num-
Additional
ber>
Item
ber>
Example CAT$ S000 “ABC” “DEF”
12-21
13.1 Error Message List
13 Error
Error warns the operator not to advance to the next operation caused by a wrong operation or
the access method when using the programming pendant or an external equipment (compu-
tor, PLC, etc.).
When an error occurs, confirm the content of the error then release the error.
To release the error, perform either of the following operations:

• Press [CANCEL] on programming pendant.
• Input alarm/error reset signal (system input).
NOTE An error is different from an alarm because it does not stop the robot even if it occurred
while the robot was operated (during playback).
Main Menu ShortCut Cannot insert/modify/delete for axis detachment
When two or more errors occur, appears in the message display area. Activate the mes-
sage display area and press [SELECT] to view the list of current errors.
5 / 9
Cannot load macro job at current security mode
HELP
Cannot insert/modify/delete for group axis detachment
CLOSE
Cannot insert/modify/delete for axis detachment
To view details of the selected error contents, select "HELP." To close the error list, select
"CLOSE." To release all the errors, press [CANCEL].
13-1
13.1.1 System and General Operation
Error No. Data Error Message Contents
Turn off servo power and perform cor- It cannot be operated while servo
10 -
rective action power supply is ON.
20 - Depress TEACH Out of specified operation mode
30 - Illegal setting for number of variables Parameter setting error
40 - Undefined robot position variables Position variable cannot be used.
Undefined points (ORG, XX, XY) Not registered user coordinates

60 -
basic 3 points (ORG, XX, XY)
Program and current tool different The tool number registered with
teaching position data does not
70 - match the the tool number
selected at the programing pen-
dant.
80 - Same position in the 3 points
100 - On overrun recovery status
110 - Turn ON servo power
120 - Set to PLAY mode
130 - No start using external signal
140 - No start using P.P.
180 - TEACH mode select signal ON
190 - Set variable number
200 - Defined group axis
210 - Undefined coordinated robots
212 Cannot register group conbination
230 - While releasing soft limit
240 - Undefined robot
270 - Undefined gun condition file
280 - Lack of number of I/O points
290 - Cannot set same No.
300 - Undefined user frame
310 - Cannot register Master JOB
320 - Cannot operate CHECK-RUN
330 - Cannot operate MACHINE LOCK
13-2
340 - Cannot operate Master JOB
350 - Cannot initialize
Position not checked Second home position was not

380 -
checked.
390 - Can specify servo off by safety relay
Time could not be measured Time could not be measured for

410 -
TRT function.
Incorrect number of taught points The number of the taught points

420 -
for tool calibration is incorrect.
430 - Register start reserved JOB
460 - Excess time for measuring
500 - Undefined robot calibration data
510 - Undefined axis
Cannot select two coorditated combina-

520 -
tion
530 - Start reservation mode
Start reserved JOB change prohibit is

550 -
set
Cannot teach position while soft limit

560 -
released
Register group axis combination [SYNCHRO] was pressed for

590 - coordinated job which was not
registered as group.
600 - Out of setting data range
610 - Cannot use the user coordinate
620 - Select JOB (robot)
650 - Incorrect measured data
660 - Wrong data type of position variable
- Defined data
680
XXX File No.
700 - Wrong CMOS memory board type
760 - Error in start condition set
770 - During robot operation
800 - The gun of designation is not connected
13-3
The group axis of designation is not con-

801 -
nection
810 - Servo power supply is limited
820 - Modification range over
930 - Undefined conveyor calibration data
940 - Forced pressure signal ON
950 - Negative correction distance
960 - I/O axis mode requesting
970 - ERRSVCPU signal error
13-4
13.1.2 Editing
1010 - EDIT LOCK mode
1020 - Enter correct value
1030 - Unauthorized ID No.
1050 - Enter correct date
1060 - Enter correct clock
1070 - Enter an ID number in 4-8 figures
1080 - Negative value can’t be set
13.1.3 Job Defined Data
2010 - Incorrect character
2020 - Name not entered
2030 - Undefined JOB name
2040 - Defined JOB name
2050 - Address not found
2070 - Set robot exactly to taught position
2080 - Press INSERT or MODIFY
Only modifying move instruction possi-

2090 -
ble
2100 - JOB cannot be edited.
2110 - Over soft limit
2120 - Cannot insert/alter/delete with servo off
2150 - Inserting is not possible from this point
2160 - Cannot modify or delete this position
Press INSERT to record same step as

2170 -
previous step
2180 - Cannot insert data
2210 - Illegal data setting
2220 - Display edit instruction
2240 - Excessive instruction equation
13-5
Unmatched number of parentheses in

2250 -
equation
2260 - Wrong group axis selection
Cannot insert any more instruction in

2270 -
JOB
* JOB memory is full
1 Lack of position file memories
2 Lack of JOB registering memories

2280 3 Lack of instruction file memories
4 Lack of memory pool
Lack of pass condition file for multi-

5
layer
2290 - Undefined master JOB
* Undefined SUB Master JOB
1 Sub-master 1
2 Sub-master 2
3 Sub-master 3
2291 4 Sub-master 4
5 Sub-master 5
6 Sub-master 6
7 Sub-master 7
8 Sub-master 8
2292 - Undefined MASTER START JOB
* Undefined SUB START JOB
1 Sub-master 1
2 Sub-master 2
3 Sub-master 3
2293 4 Sub-master 4
5 Sub-master 5
6 Sub-master 6
7 Sub-master 7
8 Sub-master 8
13-6
Cannot teach JOB without group-axis

2300 -
specification
* Same label exists

2310
XXX Line No.
2340 - Pasted data not found
2360 - Cannot create editing area
Cannot cut/copy NOP and END

2370 -
instructions
2390 - Wrong group axis selection
2400 - Cannot move in cut & paste editing
2430 - Reverse data not found
2440 - Move C-and W-axis to basic position Lazer cutting
2450 - Relative JOB not permitted
2470 - Wrong JOB type
2480 - Wrong JOB coordinates setting
2500 - Cannot convert the JOB
2510 - Cannot correct position in the JOB
2520 - Enter JOB name
2530 - Illegal step number
2540 - Enter step number
2550 - Duplicated step number
2551 - Duplicated line number
Cannot correct steps of position vari-

2560 -
ables and REFP
2570 - The step does not contain speed
2580 - The step dose not contain PL/CONT
2590 - Soft limit range over
Cannot teach position in concurrent

2600 -
JOB
2610 - Wrong JOB kind
2620 - Cannot correct play speed in the JOB
2630 - Conveyor position not reset
13-7
2640 - Incorrect JOB name
2670 - Undefined target JOB
Relative job can’t be shifted with pulse

2710 -
type
2730 - Cannot use robot macro JOB
2740 - Cannot use concurrent macro JOB
Cannot use JOB with group-axis speci-

2750 -
fication
Cannot insert/modify/delete for group

2760 -
axis detachment
Axis is separated.
2761 -
Cannot add, modify, or delete.
Cannot reverse data of SVSPOTMOV

2770 -
instruction
2780 - Arithmetic error
13-8
13.1.4 External Memory Equipment
3010 - Floppy disk drive cable not connected
Floppy disk not inserted into floppy

3020 -
disk drive
3030 - Floppy disk protection is ON
File not saved on floppy disk or Com-

3040 -
pact Flash
File saved on floppy disk or Compact

3050 -
Flash
Out of memory on floppy disk or Com-

3060 -
pact Flash
Number of files on floppy disk or Com-

3070 -
pact Flash is full
I/O error on floppy disk or Compact

3080 -
Flash
Transmission error with floppy disk or

*
Compact Flash
1 Framing error
2 Overrun error
3 Parity error
4 Data code error

3090
5 Data read error
6 Data write error
7 Data time out
8 Serial I/O error
9 Error other than described above
3110 - Syntax error
* HEX code error
1 Specification error of data decord
3120 2 Specification error of EOF record
3 Record type error
4 Total check error of record
3130 - Verify error
13-9
3140 - Wrong pseudo instruction
* Concurrent I/O record error
1 Format error
2 Ladder program is too long.
3 Exceed the range of the data

3150
4 Specification error of channel No.
5 Specification error of relay No.
6 Timer value error
7 Specification error of timer No.
3160 - Cannot load illegal system data
* Condition file data error
1 Format error
3170 2 Specified file No. is omitted.
3 Specified tool No. is omitted.
4 User file is not registered.
13-10
* Error in JOB data record
Record on the number of position

1 data (NPOS) is wrong for the for-
mat.
Record on the user coordinate No.

2
(USER) is wrong for the format.
Record on the tool No. (TOOL) is

3
wrong for the format.
Record on the position data section

4
is wrong for the format.
Record on the robot type of XYZ

5 data (RCONF) is wrong for the for-
mat.
Date (DATE) record is wrong for the

6
format.
3190
Comment (COMM) record is wrong
7
for the format.
Record on the JOB attribute data

8
(ATTR) is wrong for the format.
Control group (GROUP)record is

9
Local variable (LVARS)record is

10
JOB argument (JARGS) record is

11
Record on the teaching coordinates

12 for relative job (FRAME) is wrong
for the format.
Position data corrdinates do not

13
match relative job coordinates.
3200 - NOP or END instruction not found
3210 - Position No. storage area not found
* Syntax error in instruction data
2 Interior control error
3 Undefined instruction/tag
3220
4 Instruction/tag shortage
5 Disuse instruction/tag
6 Sub instruction
13-11
7 No instruction
8 Invalid instruction
9 Invalid tag
10 Invalid character
11 Undefined intermediate code
12 Intermediate code shortage
13 Syntax stack overflow
14 Syntax stack underflow
Array type tag incompleted

15
Tag [ARRAY]
Element type tag incompleted

16
Tag [ELEMENT]
17 Macro JOB unregistered
18 Input format error
19 Data size over
20 MIN value over

3220 21 MAX value over
22 Operation expression error
23 Job call argument setting error
Macro job call argument setting

24
error
25 Position vector setting error
26 System error
27 Soft key designate error
28 Numerical input buffer overflow
29 Real type data precision error
30 Element format error
35 BOOL TYPE data error
36 CHAR data error
BYTETYPE, BINARY / HEXADECI-

37
MAL BYTE TYPE data error
INTEGER TYPE, DECIMAL WORD

38
TYPE data error
13-12
BINARY/HEXADECIMAL WORD
39
TYPE data error
DOUBLE PRECISION INTEGER

40 TYPE, DECIMAL DWORD TYPE
data error
BINARY/HEXADECIMAL WORD
41
TYPE data error
42 REAL TYPE data error
LADDER SPECIAL TYPE data

43
3220 error
44 JCL text
45 Invalid text
46 LABEL NAME data error
47 JOB NAME data error
48 STRING data error
49 COMMENT data error
58 Invalid instruction/tag detection
3230 - Syntax not matched
3240 - Undefined application
3250 - Cannot load this file
3260 - Excess input data
3270 - Cannot verify this file
Wrong welding condition (STANDARD/

3280 -
ENHANCED)
3290 - Serial port not defined
3300 - Serial port being used
3310 - Protocol being used
3350 - Not enough memory
3360 - Invalid folder
3370 - Incorrect folder name
Cannot load macro JOB at current Load in management mode.

3450 -
security mode
13-13
* Cannot backup Compact Flash
3460 1 Insufficient Compact Flash memory.
2 Not accessible to Compact Flash.
3470 - Database not found
3480 - Database access error
3490 - Same database exists
3500 - Check Compact Flash insertion
Cannot delete folder. Check attribute

3510 -
and inside file
3520 - Same folder exists
3530 - Cannot load at current security mode
13-14
13.1.5 Concurrent I/O
* Illegal relay No.

4010
XXX Line No.
* Illegal instruction
4030
XXX Line No.
Relay/register No. duplicated in OUT/ Multiple outputs are instructed to

*
GOUT or arithmetic instruction the relay or register.
4040
XXX Line No.
* The relay is not used

4050
XXX Line No.
* Excess STR-[-NOT] instructions

4060
XXX Line No.
* Excess AND [OR] STR instructions

4070
XXX Line No.
* Syntax error in CNT instructions

4080
XXX Line No.
* Enter STR [-NOT] at head of block Need STR [-NOT]

4090
XXX Line No.
Concurrent I/O memory is full Exceeds memory capacity

4120 -
(10000 steps)
4130 - END instruction not found END instruction not found
Wrong ladder program Position and number of PART

4140 -
instruction are wrong.
Wrong use of GSTR, GOUT commands GSTR and GOUT is not used
*
together.
4150
XXX Line No.
Excess TMR/CNT or arithmetic instruc- More than 100 TMR, CNT or

4220 -
tions arithmetic instruction used
4230 - Syntax error in TMR/CNT instructions
13-15
13.1.6 Maintenance Mode
8010 - Too many axes
8020 - Too many I/O points
8030 - Too many boards (XFB01B (MASTER))
8031 - Too many boards (MSC01B)
Memory error (ControlNet output condi-

8040 -
tion)
8041 - Memory error (UNIWIRE CONNECT DAT
8050 - Robot model is not registered
8060 - Cannot get UNIWIRE connection data
13-16
Symbols arc start failure ............................................. 11-7
ARC WELD DIAGNOSIS window ................ 11-60
arc welding ......................................... 3-20, 11-1
* (label) ...................................................... 12-8 ARCCTE ....................................... 11-36, 11-103
’ (comment) ................................................ 12-9 ARCCTS ....................................... 11-32, 11-103
ARCOF ............................... 11-20, 11-40, 11-102
ARCOF CONTINUE ................................... 11-46
ARCON .............................. 11-12, 11-40, 11-101
A ARCON process repeat ................................ 11-7
ARCSET ............................. 11-13, 11-29, 11-102
AREA key .................................................... 1-5
a single weaving cycle ................................ 11-69
ARM CONTROL .......................................... 1-23
absolute data .............................................. 10-2
ARM control .............................................. 10-53
absolute data allowable range alarm occurs . 10-10
ASF# ............................................ 11-13, 11-101
absolute encoder ........................................ 10-2
ASSIST key.................................................. 1-9
AC = ................................... 11-13, 11-21, 11-101
ATAN........................................................ 12-18
active jobs .................................................. 1-20
AUTO RESTART ....................................... 11-46
ADD...................................... 12-10, 12-12, 12-19
automatic measurement of the tool load and the cen-
additional items ............................................. 4-4
ter of gravity .............................................. 10-44
ADJUST .................................................... 11-82
automatic sticking release process ................ 11-9
adjustments for welding defects.................... 3-26
automatic wire anti-stick function ................. 11-47
AEF# ............................................ 11-21, 11-102
automatic wire anti-stick function setting ...... 11-40
AJ2 ........................................................... 11-88
automatic wire-stick release function ........... 11-10
ALARM AT ARC END ................................ 11-46
AV = ....................................................... 11-101
ALARM HISTORY ....................................... 1-23
AVP = ........................................... 11-21, 11-101
alarm history data ......................................... 8-6
AWELD................................................... 11-103
alarm history window .................................. 11-62
axis interference area ................................. 10-27
ALL CMOS AREA ......................................... 8-5
axis keys ................................................ 1-2, 1-6
all limits releasing....................................... 10-16
axis operations ............................................. 2-4
allocating an operation ............................... 10-83
allocation of I/O control instructions ............. 10-93
allocation window ....................................... 10-83
alphanumeric input ...................................... 1-18
alternate output allocation ................. 10-82, 10-88 B
amplitude size at weaving ........................... 11-67
AN3 = ..................................................... 11-102 BACK SPACE key ........................................ 1-9
AN4 = ..................................................... 11-102 base axis ............................................. 1-12, 2-1
analog incremental output allocation .. 10-82, 10-92 base coordinate ......................................... 10-20
ANALOG MONITOR ................................... 1-23 base reverse paste ...................................... 4-54
ANALOG OUTPUT 3 ........................ 11-48, 11-50 basic axis ............................................... 2-6, 2-7
ANALOG OUTPUT 4 ........................ 11-48, 11-50 BATCH CMOS ............................................. 8-5
analog output allocation .................... 10-82, 10-91 batch selection ............................................ 8-38
AND.......................................................... 12-14 BATCH USER MEMORY............................... 8-5
ANTI-STICK .................................... 11-44, 11-50 B-axis .......................................................... 2-5
anti-stick process ........................................ 11-9 BWD key.............................................. 1-7, 4-19
ANTSTK........................................ 11-21, 11-102 byte type ..................................................... 4-67
AOUT ........................................................ 12-6
application parameter .................................... 8-6
approach point ................................. 11-65, 11-73
ARATIOF ................................................... 12-7
ARATION ................................................... 12-7 C
arc auxiliary condition file 11-8, 11-10, 11-40, 11-45
arc end condition data ................................... 8-5 CALL .......................................................... 12-8
arc end condition file .............. 11-10, 11-40, 11-44 CANCEL key ................................................ 1-7
arc end instruction ...................................... 11-20 cartesian coordinates ...................... 1-12, 2-2, 2-6
ARC FAILURE ........................................... 11-46 Change data ............................................. 11-57
arc failure ................................................... 11-8 change of welding current and voltage ......... 11-55
ARC FAILURE STOP ................................. 11-82 changing the output status .......................... 10-96
arc restart function ...................................... 11-8 changing the parameter setting ................... 10-99
arc restart function setting ........................... 11-40 changing welding conditions during playback 11-55
arc retry function ......................................... 11-7 character input ............................................. 1-16
arc retry function setting ............................. 11-40 character string type..................................... 4-67
arc start condition data .................................. 8-5 check mode operation .................................. 5-12
arc start condition file ............. 11-13, 11-40, 11-43 checking the TCP ...................................... 10-43
Index-1
circular interpolation ...................................... 4-7 direct open ................................................... 7-1
CLEAR ..................................................... 12-17 DIRECT OPEN key ....................................... 1-5
clearing calibration data ............................. 10-42 DIS = .................................. 11-32, 11-36, 11-103
clearing interference area data ................... 10-30 display allocation ....................................... 10-81
clearing the accumulated value ................... 11-62 displaying a power source condition file ....... 11-83
clearing user coordinates ........................... 10-52 DIV ................................................ 12-13, 12-20
ClO parameter .............................................. 8-6 DONE ...................................................... 11-83
closing the shielding gas valve...................... 11-6 double precision integer type ........................ 4-67
CNVRT .................................................... 12-16 DOUT ........................................................ 12-5
CO2 ......................................................... 11-81 DROP AMOUNT ......................................... 1-23
COMMAND POSITION ................................ 1-23 dry-run speed operations ............................. 5-11
COMMAND POSITION window .................... 4-38
comments ..................................................... 4-4
compact flash................................................ 8-1
concurrent I/O program .................................. 8-6
contact of wire and workpiece ....................... 11-9
E
contact-tip replacement .............................. 11-60
Continuous (operation cycle) ........................ 1-13 E350 II ..................................................... 11-88
continuous circular arcs ................................. 4-7 edit jobs ..................................................... 1-20
continuous spline curves ................................ 4-8 edit lock on individual job units ..................... 6-12
control groups ............................................... 4-3 edit mode ........................................... 1-13, 1-21
control instructions ...................................... 4-41 editing comments ........................................ 6-11
Converter parameter...................................... 8-6 editing condition files ................................... 4-66
COORD key.................................................. 1-5 editing interpolation type .............................. 4-65
coordinate home position parameter ............... 8-6 editing play speed ....................................... 4-61
coordinate system ................................. 1-12, 2-3 emergency stop .......................................... 5-14
copy ................................................... 4-54, 4-57 emergency stop button ............................ 1-4, 4-1
copying jobs.................................................. 6-2 Enable switch ......................................... 1-2, 1-4
COS ......................................................... 12-17 END ........................................................... 12-8
CRATER CONDITION 1 ............................ 11-49 END OF ARC RESTARTING ....................... 11-8
CRATER CONDITION 2 ............................ 11-49 enhanced arc end condition ....................... 11-49
crater processing ............................. 11-12, 11-21 enhanced arc start condition file ................. 11-48
CREATE NEW JOB ..................................... 1-22 enhanced type (welding start/end condition file) 11-
cube ......................................................... 10-21 41
cube interference ...................................... 10-16 enhanced welding condition file function ...... 11-12
cube number ............................................. 10-22 ENTER key ............................................ 1-2, 1-7
cubic interference area .............................. 10-20 error message list........................................ 13-1
CURRENT POSITION ................................. 1-23 EX.AXIS key ................................................. 1-6
cursor ........................................................... 4-4 executing the I/O control allocation ............. 10-95
cursor key .............................................. 1-2, 1-4 executing the instruction/output control allocation ...
cut ..................................................... 4-54, 4-57 10-95
Cycle (operation cycle) ................................ 1-13 executing the job call allocation .................. 10-95
cycle time ..................................................... 5-5 executing the window allocation.................. 10-95
cylindrical coordinates..................... 1-12, 2-2, 2-7 execution file ............................................ 11-79
execution of allocation ............................... 10-95
expanded instruction set ............................ 10-78
external memory devices ............................... 8-1
D
DATE/TIME ................................................ 1-24

F
DEC ............................................... 12-14, 12-21
definition of user coordinates ...................... 10-48
DELETE ............................................... 1-23, 8-3 FD/PC CARD.............................................. 1-23
DELETE key ................................................. 1-7 file initialize .............................................. 10-101
deleting a file .............................................. 8-36 file management ........................................... 8-3
deleting a job ........................................ 6-6, 8-34 FILE/ GENERAL DATA.................................. 8-5
deleting additional items ............................... 4-52 flip/no flip .................................................... 4-81
deleting instructions ..................................... 4-45 FORMAT ...................................................... 8-3
detection lebel (level range FREQUENCY ........................................... 11-66
1 to 500) 10-69 function definition parameter .......................... 8-6
detection mode ......................................... 10-68 function keys ................................................ 1-2
DEVICE................................................ 1-23, 8-3 function keys for arc welding ........................ 11-1
DIN ............................................................ 12-6 FWD key .............................................. 1-7, 4-19
Index-2
G INSERT key ................................................. 1-7
inserting additional items .............................. 4-51
inserting instructions .................................... 4-42
GAS FAILURE ........................................... 11-46 insertion slot for compact flash ....................... 1-2
gas flow control ................................... 11-1, 11-6 instruction allocation ......................... 10-81, 10-84
gas shortage .............................................. 11-8 instruction group .......................................... 4-40
general-purpose application ......................... 3-40 instruction level .......................................... 10-78
general-purpose display area ................. 1-2, 1-10 instruction list dialog box............................. 11-29
GETE ....................................................... 12-15 instruction of shock detection function .......... 10-72
GETS ....................................................... 12-16 instruction search......................................... 4-91
gradually changing the welding condition ..... 11-11 instruction set ............................................ 10-78
gradually changing the welding current and voltage integer type ................................................. 4-67
11-32, 11-36 INTERFERENCE ......................................... 1-23
group (4-bit/8-bit) output allocation............... 10-90 interference area ....................................... 10-20
group operation axis .................................... 1-12 INTERLOCK key........................................... 1-8
group output allocation (4-bit/8-bit) ............... 10-82 interpolation type .................................. 4-5, 4-11
GRP COMBINATION .................................. 1-24 INVMAT .................................................... 12-19
guidance display ......................................... 1-16
J
H
JOB ..................................................... 1-22, 8-5
handling ..................................................... 3-29 job call ...................................................... 10-86
high speed ................................................. 1-13 job call allocation ....................................... 10-81
HIGH SPEED key ................................... 1-5, 2-4 JOB CAPACITY ........................................... 1-22
hold at the station........................................ 5-31 JOB CAPACITY window ............................... 4-39
hold by external input signal (system input) ... 5-30 JOB CONTENT window ............................... 4-37
hold by HOLD key ....................................... 5-30 JOB HEADER window.................................. 4-35
HOLD key .................................................... 1-8 job stack ..................................................... 5-32
hold operation ............................................. 5-13 joint coordinates ............................. 1-12, 2-2, 2-5
HOME POSITION ....................................... 1-23 joint interpolation .......................................... 4-5
home position ............................................. 10-3 JUMP ......................................................... 12-8
home position calibrating data ........................ 8-6
home position calibration ............................. 10-1
home position of the robot............................ 10-7
HOVER WEAVING .................................... 11-69
how to calculate tool load information ........... 10-58 K
human interface display area ............... 1-10, 1-14
KEY ALLOCATION ...................................... 1-24
key allocation (EACH) ................................ 10-81
key allocation (SIM).................................... 10-81
I keypads ...................................................... 1-16
I/O DATA ..................................................... 8-6

I/O instructions............................................ 4-41
I/O MSG HISTORY ..................................... 1-23 L
I/O name data ............................................... 8-6
IF............................................................... 12-9 label search ................................................. 4-90
IMOV ......................................................... 12-3 LAP DISTANCE ......................................... 11-46
IN/OUT ...................................................... 1-22 L-axis........................................................... 2-5
INC ................................................. 12-14, 12-20 learning function ........................................ 10-79
inching ....................................................... 1-13 LIMIT RELEASE .......................................... 1-23
independent power supply .......................... 11-81 limit switch ................................................ 10-98
individual selection ...................................... 8-38 limited speed operations ............................... 5-10
INFORM LIST key ......................................... 1-7 line number .................................................. 4-4
initial value file ........................................... 11-79 line search .................................................. 4-89
initialize data file ...................................... 10-102 linear interpolation ........................................ 4-6
initialize job file ........................................ 10-101 LOAD .................................................. 1-23, 8-3
initialize parameter file .............................. 10-103 loading a condition file or generel data ........... 8-20
initializing I/O data .................................... 10-104 loading a job ................................................ 8-18
initializing system data .............................. 10-105 loading a parameter ..................................... 8-22
Index-3
loading all CMOS data ................................. 8-29 MOVJ ........................................................ 12-1
loading all data in CMOS area ...................... 8-30 MOVL ........................................................ 12-2
loading all user’s programs ........................... 8-28 MOVS ........................................................ 12-3
loading I/O data ........................................... 8-24 MSHIFT ................................................... 12-11
loading system data ..................................... 8-26 MUL ........................... 12-10, 12-13, 12-19, 12-20
local variables ............................................. 4-85 MULMAT .................................................. 12-18
low speed ................................................... 1-13 Multi key ....................................................... 1-9
low speed operation .................................... 5-10
L-type oscillation ....................................... 11-66
L-U interference ........................................ 10-16
N
NEW JOB CREATE window ........................... 3-2

M No change data ........................................ 11-57
NO RESTART .......................................... 11-46
machine lock operation ................................ 5-11 NONE ...................................................... 11-83
MAG ........................................................ 11-81 NOP .......................................................... 12-9
MAIN CONDITION .................................... 11-48 NOT ......................................................... 12-14
main menu area .................................. 1-10, 1-12 nozzle cleaning ......................................... 11-60
MAIN MENU key .................................... 1-4, 1-9 number of tool files .................................... 10-33
major alarms ............................................... 5-17 numeric key customize function .................. 10-81
major axes .................................................... 2-5 Numeric keys .......................................... 1-2, 1-8
management mode.............................. 1-13, 1-21
manipulator coordinate systems...................... 2-1
MANIPULATOR TYPE ................................. 1-23
manipulator type.......................................... 4-81
O
manual speed .............................. 1-13, 2-3, 4-22
MANUAL SPEED keys ........................... 1-2, 1-5
manufacturer allocation .............................. 10-81 OPE ORIGIN POS ...................................... 1-23
MASTER JOB ............................................. 1-22 opening the shielding gas valve .................... 11-6
master job .................................................... 5-2 OPERATE COND ............................... 1-24, 5-23
max. disturbance force ............................... 10-69 operating environment ............................... 11-60
MEASURE................................................ 11-82 operating instructions .................................. 4-41
measurement of the tool load and the center of grav- operation control parameter ........................... 8-6
ity ............................................................ 10-44 operation cycle...................................... 1-13, 5-7
mechanical limit ........................................ 10-16 operation mode ................................... 1-13, 1-21
medium speed ............................................ 1-13 OR ........................................................... 12-14
menu area ................................... 1-2, 1-10, 1-14 ORG ........................................................ 10-48
method of shock detection level file setting .. 10-68 oscillation angle ........................................ 11-68
method of the tool load information setting ... 10-70 OUT #1021 ............................................... 11-46
MFRAME.................................................. 12-18 OUT #1022 ..................................... 11-46, 11-47
minor adjustment of the welding voltage ...... 11-80 output characteristic curve ......................... 11-78
minor alarms ............................................... 5-17 output of the work home position signal ....... 10-33
mirror shift function ...................................... 7-33 overlap length ............................................. 11-8
MODE ...................................................... 11-66 override speed settings .................................. 5-5
mode switch.................................................. 1-8 overrun releasing ...................................... 10-18
modification of speed type ............................ 4-61 OVERRUN&S-SENSOR .............................. 1-23
MODIFY key ................................................. 1-7
modifying additional items ............................ 4-50
modifying additional numeric data ................. 4-49
modifying instructions .................................. 4-45 P
modifying job names ...................................... 6-8
momentary output allocation ............. 10-82, 10-89
MONITORING ................................ 11-44, 11-50 page .......................................................... 1-13
MONITORING TIME .................................... 1-23 PAGE key .............................................. 1-2, 1-5
motion about TCP ....................................... 2-14 painting application...................................... 3-50
motion function parameter .............................. 8-6 painting conditions ...................................... 3-51
motion time ................................................... 5-5 PAM function .............................................. 7-27
MOTION TYPE key ................................ 1-2, 1-6 parallel shift function ...................................... 7-3
motor gun dry spot pressure data.................... 8-5 parallel shift job conversion function .............. 7-16
motor gun pressure power data ...................... 8-5 PARAMETER ....................................... 1-24, 8-6
MOVC ........................................................ 12-2 PARAMETER BATCH ................................... 8-6
move instructions .................................. 4-9, 4-41 paste.................................................. 4-54, 4-58
Index-4
PAUSE ...................................................... 12-9 reverse paste ..................................... 4-54, 4-59
play mode .................................................. 1-19 ROBOT....................................................... 1-23
play speed............................................ 4-5, 4-12 robot axis ............................................. 1-12, 2-1
playback .............................................. 3-19, 5-1 ROBOT CALIB ............................................ 1-23
playback time ............................................... 5-5 robot coordinate ......................................... 10-20
position level .............................................. 4-12 robot installation angle ............................... 10-54
position type ............................................... 4-67 ROBOT key.................................................. 1-6
POWER ON/OFF POS ................................ 1-23 robot matching parameter .............................. 8-6
Power Source characteristic data ................... 8-5 ROBOT MOVE DISTANCE......................... 11-48
Power Source characteristic difinition data ...... 8-5 ROBOT PAUSE TIME ............ 11-43, 11-44, 11-50
Power Source condition assist data ................ 8-5 robot programming language (INFORM III)... 10-78
power source condition file .......................... 11-78 robot setup condition .................................. 10-54
POWER SOURCE NAME ........................... 11-81 robot-coordinates mirror-shift funciton ............ 7-33
POWER SUPPLY ...................................... 11-81
programming pendant ................................... 1-2
programming pendant display ...................... 1-10
PULSE ....................................................... 12-5
pulse mirror-shift function ............................. 7-33
S
pulse output allocation ...................... 10-82, 10-89
S350......................................................... 11-88
SAVE................................................... 1-23, 8-3
saving a condition file or general data ............. 8-8
saving a job .................................................. 8-7
R saving a parameter ...................................... 8-10
saving all CMOS data ................................... 8-16
RANGE ..................................................... 11-82 saving all data in CMOS area ........................ 8-17
R-axis .......................................................... 2-5 saving all user’s programs ............................ 8-15
r-axis ........................................................... 2-7 saving I/O data ............................................ 8-12
RB1 ........................................................ 11-104 saving system data ...................................... 8-13
RB2 ........................................................ 11-104 S-axis .......................................................... 2-5
RB3 ........................................................ 11-104 SECOND HOME POS .................................. 1-23
RB4 ........................................................ 11-104 second home position ................................... 8-6
real type ..................................................... 4-67 second home position (check point) ............... 10-8
REF. ......................................................... 11-82 security mode ..................................... 1-13, 1-21
reference point instructions .......................... 4-15 SELECT JOB .............................................. 1-22
REFP ......................................................... 12-4 SELECT key........................................... 1-2, 1-4
REFP1 ............................................ 11-65, 11-72 selecting a coordinate system ........................ 2-3
REFP2 ............................................ 11-65, 11-73 selecting the range ....................................... 4-56
registering a job ............................................ 4-2 selecting user coordinates file ..................... 10-49
registering tool angle .................................. 10-36 selecting welding condition files................... 11-41
registering tool load information ................... 10-65 SEMI-AUTO RESTART .............................. 11-46
registering weaving instructions ................... 11-75 sensor parameter.......................................... 8-6
registering/changing the work home position 10-32 SERVO MONITOR ...................................... 1-23
related job (job+condition) .............................. 8-5 SERVO ON READY key .......................... 1-9, 3-1
relations of output value and reference value 11-78 servo parameter ........................................... 8-6
relative modification .................................... 4-61 servo power block parameter ......................... 8-6
remote mode .............................................. 1-19 servomotor parameter ................................... 8-6
REPLAY DISTANCE .................................. 11-45 SERVOPACK parameter ............................... 8-6
RES. START(CNCT) ........................... 1-24, 5-24 SET .......................................................... 12-15
RES. START(JOB) ...................................... 1-22 SET SPEED ................................................ 1-24
RES. STATUS .................................... 1-22, 5-28 SET WORD................................................. 1-24
RESERVE JOB NAME ................................ 1-24 SETE ........................................................ 12-15
reserved start ............................................. 5-22 setting contents ......................................... 10-78
RESET RESERVATION .............................. 5-29 setting play speed ...................................... 10-15
reset shock detected .................................. 10-77 setting shock detection function................... 10-67
restart ........................................................ 5-13 setting the controller clock .......................... 10-14
Restart Operation after E-Stop .................... 11-64 setting the second home position (check point) 10-
Restart Operation after Jog Operation .......... 11-64 12
RESTARTING FOR ARC ............................. 11-8 setting the tool load information 10-37, 10-58, 10-70
RET ........................................................... 12-8 setting user coordinates ............................. 10-48
RETRACT TIME ........................................ 11-45 setting work home position ......................... 10-31
RETRY ............................... 11-13, 11-43, 11-101 SETUP ....................................................... 1-24
retry function mode .................................... 11-43 SFTOF...................................................... 12-11
returning to the work home position ............. 10-32 SFTON ..................................................... 12-11
Index-5
SHCKRST instruction ................................ 10-72 teach lock ..................................................... 4-1
SHCKSET instruction ...................... 10-67, 10-72 teach mode ................................................ 1-19
S-head payload ......................................... 10-55 teaching ................................................. 3-1, 4-1
SHIELDING GAS ...................................... 11-81 TEACHING COND ...................................... 1-24
shielding gas flow rate ................................. 3-24 teaching user coordinates .......................... 10-50
shift instructions .................................... 4-41, 7-7 tearing and dropping of metal ..................... 11-11
SHIFT key .................................................... 1-8 temporary release of soft limits ................... 10-98
shift value ..................................................... 7-5 test operations .................................... 4-23, 4-60
shock detection function ............................. 10-67 TEST START key.......................................... 1-6
shock detection level data .............................. 8-5 theta(q)-axis ................................................. 2-7
short/full open position data ............................ 8-5 TIMER ....................................................... 12-9
SHORTCUT key............................................ 1-9 timer instruction .......................................... 4-16
SIN .......................................................... 12-17 TOOL ......................................................... 1-23
single circular arc .......................................... 4-7 tool calibration .......................................... 10-38
single job ...................................................... 8-5 tool coordinates ............................. 1-12, 2-2, 2-8
single oscillation ........................................ 11-66 tool data ....................................................... 8-5
single spline curve ......................................... 4-8 tool data setting ........................................ 10-33
SMOOTH ................................................. 11-66 tool file ..................................................... 10-33
software limit ................................... 10-16, 10-98 tool file extension function .......................... 10-45
solenoid signal controls ................................ 3-30 tool load information .................................. 10-58
special playback operations............................ 5-9 tool number ........................................ 2-10, 4-11
SPEED ....................................................... 12-4 tool shock sensor releasing ........................ 10-18
speed limitation drive ................................... 3-39 tool tip ........................................................ 2-14
speed override ............................................ 5-18 torch tip .................................................... 11-82
speed setting ............................................ 11-54 transmission(general) parameter .................... 8-6
spline interpolation ........................................ 4-8 triangle oscillation...................................... 11-66
spot gun characteristic data ............................ 8-5 TRT ........................................................... 4-63
spot welding................................................ 3-45
spot welding gun condition ........................... 3-46
spot welding Power Source characteristic data . 8-5
SQRT ....................................................... 12-18
U
standard instruction set .............................. 10-78
standard type (welding start/end condition file) . 11-
41 U-arm payload .......................................... 10-55
START CONDITION .................................. 11-48 U-axis .......................................................... 2-5
START key ............................................ 1-8, 4-1 undo .......................................................... 4-32
start No. ....................................................... 5-5 undo operation after modifying additional items .. 4-
state under execution .................................. 1-13 53
station axis ........................................... 1-12, 2-1 undo operation after modifying instructions .... 4-47
status display area .............................. 1-10, 1-12 UNTIL ........................................................ 12-9
Step (operation cycle) .................................. 1-13 USER COORDINATE .................................. 1-23
step search ................................................. 4-89 user coordinate ............................... 10-20, 10-48
stop............................................................ 5-13 user coordinate data ...................................... 8-5
stop by alarm .............................................. 5-16 user coordinate number ............................... 2-13
SUB ........................... 12-10, 12-12, 12-19, 12-20 user coordinates ........................... 1-12, 2-2, 2-11
subset instruction set ................................. 10-78 user coordinates file .................................. 10-48
SV monitor signals ........................................ 8-6 USER ID .................................................... 1-24
switch of the tool file .................................. 10-66 user registered file ..................................... 11-79
symbol input ............................................... 1-18 user variables ............................................. 4-67
synergic power supply ..................... 11-79, 11-81 user word registration .................................... 8-6
SYSTEM DATA ............................................. 8-6 user-coordinates mirror-shift function ............ 7-33
system definition parameter............................ 8-6
SYSTEM INFO............................................ 1-23
system information ........................................ 8-6
system matching parameter ........................... 8-6 V
V =.......................................................... 11-101
VARIABLE.................................................. 1-22
T variable data ................................................. 8-5
variable name ............................................... 8-6
T = ......................................................... 11-101 VERIFY ................................................ 1-23, 8-3
tag search .................................................. 4-92 verifying a file.............................................. 8-33
T-axis ........................................................... 2-5 verifying a job ............................................. 8-31
Index-6
verifying data .............................................. 8-31 X
VERSION ................................................... 1-23
viewing description for an instruction ............. 4-48
VWELD ................................................... 11-104 X-axis .......................................................... 2-6
XOR ......................................................... 12-14
XX ............................................................ 10-48
XY ............................................................ 10-48
WAIT ......................................................... 12-6 Y

wall ........................................................... 11-73
wall direction ............................................. 11-72
WEAV STOP ............................................. 11-69 Y-axis .......................................................... 2-6
weaving .................................................... 11-65
weaving basic coordinate system ................ 11-65
weaving condition files ................................ 11-70
weaving data ................................................ 8-5 Z
weaving file ............................................... 11-70
weaving frequency ..................................... 11-67
Z-axis .................................................... 2-6, 2-7
weaving pattern ......................................... 11-67
weaving prohibit .......................................... 5-12
weaving stop ............................................. 11-69
WELD1 ........................... 11-101, 11-102, 11-104
WELD2 ........................... 11-101, 11-102, 11-104
WELD3 ........................... 11-101, 11-102, 11-104
WELD4 ........................... 11-101, 11-102, 11-104
welding alarm history .................................. 11-62
welding condition ....................................... 11-29
welding condition file change....................... 11-41
welding condition files................................. 11-40
welding condition set instruction .................. 11-13
welding conditions setting ............................ 3-24
welding current ...................... 11-43, 11-44, 11-45
welding current output characteristics .......... 11-78
welding current/voltage output values .......... 11-82
welding current/voltage reference values ...... 11-82
welding speed ................................. 11-43, 11-54
welding start condition to the main condition . 11-12
welding start instruction .............................. 11-12
welding voltage ...................... 11-43, 11-44, 11-45
window allocation ....................................... 10-87
WIRE ANTI-STICKING ............................... 11-82
WIRE DIA.................................................. 11-81
WIRE FAILURE ......................................... 11-46
wire feeding ................................................ 11-5
wire inching ........................................ 11-2, 11-5
wire retracting ..................................... 11-2, 11-5
wire shortage .............................................. 11-8
wire shortage alarm .................................... 11-46
wire sticking signal ..................................... 11-10
WIRE STICKOUT ...................................... 11-82
wire-stick state ........................................... 11-10
work home position .................................... 10-31
work home position cube length of its sides .. 10-32
work instructions ......................................... 4-41
wrist axis ......................................... 2-5, 2-6, 2-7
WVOF........................................... 11-76, 11-104
WVON .......................................... 11-75, 11-104
Index-7
Index-8
NX100
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
FOR ARC WELDING
HEAD OFFICE
2-1 Kurosaki-Shiroishi, Yahatanishi-ku, Kitakyusyu-shi, 806-0004, Japan
Phone 81-93-645-7745 Fax 81-93-645-7746
MOTOMAN INC. HEADQUARTERS
805 Liberty Lane West Carrollton, OH 45449, U.S.A.
Phone 1-937-847-6200 Fax 1-937-847-6277
YASKAWA MOTOMAN CANADA LTD.
2280 Argentia Road, Mississauga, Ontario, L5N 6H8, Canada
Phone 1-905-813-5900 Fax 1-905-813-5911
YASKAWA ELECTRIC AMERICA, INC.
2121 Norman Drive South Waukegan, IL 60085, U.S.A.
Phone 1-847-887-7000 Fax 1-847-887-7370
YASKAWA ELECTRIC EUROPE GmbH
Am Kronberger Hang 2, 65824 Schwalbach,Germany
Phone 49-6196-569-300 Fax 49-6196-888-301
MOTOMAN ROBOTICS EUROPE AB
Box 504 S38525 Torsas, Sweden
Phone 46-486-48800 Fax 46-486-41410
MOTOMAN ROBOTEC GmbH
Kammerfeldstr.1,D-85391 Allershausen, Germany
Phone 49-8166-90100 Fax 49-8166-90103
YASKAWA ELECTRIC KOREA CORPORATION
KFPA Bldg #1201, 35-4 Yeoido-dong, Youngdungpo-Ku, Seoul 150-010, Korea
Phone 82-2-784-7844 Fax 82-2-784-8495
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SINGAPORE) PTE. LTD.
151 Lorong Chuan, #04-01, New Tech Park Singapore 556741, Singapore
Phone 65-6282-3003 Fax 65-6289-3003
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SINGAPORE) PTE. LTD. MALAYSIA REPRESENTATIVE OFFICE
B615, 6th Floor, East Wing, Wisma Tractors, No.7, Jalan SS 16/1, Subang Jaya, 47500 Petaling Jaya, Selangor D.E. Malaysia
Phone 60-3-5031-5311 Fax 60-3-5031-5312
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SHANGHAI) CO., LTD.
4F No Aona Road, Waigaoqiao Free Trade Zone, Pudong New Area, Shanghai 200131, China
Phone 86-21-5866-3470 Fax 86-21-5866-3869
YASKAWA ELECTRIC TAIWAN CORPORATION
9F, 16, Nanking E. RD., Sec. 3, Taipei, Taiwan
Phone 886-2-2502-5003 Fax 886-2-2505-1280
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (HK) COMPANY LIMITED
Rm. 2909-10, Hong Kong Plaza, 186-191 Connaught Road West, Hong Kong
Phone 852-2803-2385 Fax 852-2547-5773
BEIJING OFFICE
Room No. 301 Office Building Intemational Club, 21 Jianguomenwai Avenue, Beijing 100020, China
Phone 86-10-6532-1850 Fax 86-10-6532-1851
BEIJING YASKAWA BEIKE AUTOMATION ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
30 Xue Yuan Road, Haidian, Beijing P.R. China Post Code: 100083, China
Phone 86-10-6234-5003 Fax 86-10-6234-5002
SHOUGANG MOTOMAN ROBOT CO., LTD.
7,Yongchang-North Road, Beijing Economic & Technological Development Area, Beijing 100076, China
Phone 86-10-6788-0541 Fax 86-10-6788-2878
YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION
YASKAWA
Specifications are subject to change without notice MANUAL NO. RE-CSO-A031

for ongoing product modifications and improvements. C Printed in Japan October 2003 03-10

Re Cso A031.0

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Re Cso A031.0

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Re Cso A031.0

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

YASKAWA

YASKAWA MANUAL NO. RE-CSO-A031

• General items related to safety are listed in Section 1: Safety of the

• The drawings and photos in this manual are representative examples

• If your copy of the manual is damaged or lost, contact a YASKAWA rep-

• YASKAWA is not responsible for incidents arising from unauthorized

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

Always be sure to follow explicitly the items listed under this

PROHIBITED Must never be performed.

Emergency Stop Button

Injury may result from unintentional or unexpected manipulator motion.

Release of Emergency Stop

• Observe the following precautions when performing teaching operations

Improper or unintended manipulator operation may result in injury.

• Confirm that no persons are present in the P-point maximum envelope of

• Read and understand the Explanation of Warning Labels in the NX100

Definition of Terms Used Often in This Manual

Equipment Manual Designation

NX100 Controller NX100

NX100 Programming Pendant Programming Pendant

Cable between the manipulator and the controller Manipulator cable

Equipment Manual Designation

ex. page key PAGE

The cursor key is an exception, and a picture is not

Keys pressed When two keys are to be pressed simultaneously,

Displays The menu displayed in the programming pendant is

Description of the Operation Procedure

2 Manipulator Coordinate Systems

3 Simplified Teaching and Playback

8 Controlling Peripheral Devices

11 Arc Welding Application

12 Table of Basic Instructions

1.1 NX100 Overview

NX100 Front View

1.2 Programming Pendant

1.2.1 Programming Pendant Overview

Menu area JOB EDIT DISPLAY UTILITY

1.2.2 Key Description

Emergency Stop button

Axis Keys and Numeric Keys

Axis Keys Numeric Keys

Keys Pressed Simultaneously

1.2.3 Programming Pendant Keys

E.STOP Button Turns OFF the servo power.

Enable Switch Turns ON the servo power.

Moves the cursor in the direction of the arrow.

[SELECT] Selects menu items such as main menu, pull-down menu,

[MAIN MENU] Displays the main menu.

Moves the cursor between “Menu Area” and "General Pur-

Displays the next page.

Displays the content related to the current line.

Select the operation coordinate system when the manipula-

Sets the speed for manual operation.

Changes the speed of axis operation when the axis button

Selects the interpolation type for playback operation.

Interpolation type can be changed in any mode.